Schneider Electric TSX / PMX / PCX 57 PLCs, Hardware User Guide

Add to My manuals
1062 Pages

advertisement

Schneider Electric TSX / PMX / PCX 57 PLCs, Hardware User Guide | Manualzz

VOLUME 1

TSX / PMX / PCX 57 PLCs :

Racks, processors, power supplies, etc

Setup, processors and discrete I/O

Discrete I/O : TSX DEY i /DSY i /DMY i modules

Safety modules : TSX PAY i modules

Start-up/Diagnostics/Maintenance

Standards and service conditions

Process and AS-i power supplies : TSX SUP 1 ii 1 / A0 i

A

B1

B2

B

C

D

E

VOLUME 2

Setup

Counting,

Motion Control

VOLUME 3

Setup

Communication,

Bus and Network

Interfaces

VOLUME 4

Setup

Analog,

Weighing

VOLUME 1

Index

P

___________________________________________________________________________

B/2

General safety advice for users

1 General

This manual is intended for personnel technically qualified to install, operate and maintain the products which are described herein. It contains all the necessary information for correct use of the products. However, for advanced use of our products please contact your nearest sales office for additional information.

The contents of this manual are not contractual and cannot under any circumstance extend or restrict contract warranty clauses.

2 Qualification of personnel

Only qualified personnel are authorized to install, operate or maintain the products. Any work performed by unqualified personnel or non-observance of the safety instructions in this document or attached to the equipment may risk the safety of personnel and/or cause irreparable damage to equipment. The following personnel may be regarded as being "Qualified" :

• those involved with application design. Design office personnel familiar with control system safety concepts (for example, design engineers, etc),

• those involved with equipment installation. Individuals who are familiar with the installation, connection and startup of control system equipment (for example installers or wiring technicians working during the installation phase, technicians setting up the equipment, etc),

• those involved with operation. Personnel trained to operate and manage control system equipment (for example, operators, etc),

• those performing preventive or corrective maintenance. Personnel who are trained and experienced in the adjustment and repair of control system equipment (for example, installation engineers, after sales service engineers, etc).

3 Warnings

Warnings serve to prevent specific risks encountered by personnel and/or equipment. They are indicated in the documentation and on the products by different warning symbols, according to the severity of the risk :

Danger or Caution

Indicates that not following instructions or ignoring the warning may cause serious personal injury, death and/or serious damage to equipment.

Warning or Important or

!

Indicates that not following a specific instruction may lead to minor injury and/or damage to equipment.

Note or Comment

Highlights important information relating to the product, its operation or its accompanying documentation.

___________________________________________________________________________

1

General safety advice for users

4 Conformity of use

The products described in this manual conform to the European Directives (*) to which they are subject (CE marking). However, they can only be used correctly in the context of the applications for which they are intended (described in the various documents) and when connected to approved third party products.

As a general rule, if all handling, transport and storage specifications are observed, and all instructions for installation, operation and maintenance are followed, the products will be used correctly, with no danger to personnel or equipment.

(*) EMC and LV Directives, concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage.

5 Installing and setting up equipment

It is important to observe the following rules when installing and starting up equipment. In addition, if the installation includes digital links, it is essential to follow the basic wiring rules given in the manual

"Electromagnetic Compatibility of industrial Networks and Fielbuses", reference TSX DG KBLE, or in manual TSX DR NET, part C.

• safety instructions must be followed meticulously. These instructions are in the documentation or on the equipment being installed and set up.

• the type of equipment defines the way in which it should be installed :

- a flush-mountable device (for example, an operator terminal or a cell controller) must be flushmounted,

- a device which is to be built in (for example, PLC) must be placed in a cabinet or enclosure,

- the casing of a laptop or portable device (for example, a programming terminal or a notebook) must remain closed,

• if the device is permanently connected,

- the upstream installation must conform to standard IEC 1131-2 overvoltage category 2,

- in addition, its electrical installation must include a device to isolate it from the power supply and a circuit-breaker to protect it against overcurrents and isolation faults. If this is not the case, the power socket must be grounded and be easily accessed. In all cases, the device must be connected to the protective mechanical ground PG using green/yellow wires

(NFC 15 100 - IEC 60 364-5-51) .

• low voltage circuits (even though they are low voltage) must be connected to the protective ground so that dangerous voltages can be detected.

• before a device is powered up, its nominal voltage must be checked to ensure that it has been adjusted to conform with the supply voltage.

• if the device is supplied with 24 or 48 VDC, the low voltage circuits must be protected. Only use power supplies which conform to the standards currently in force.

• check that the supply voltages remain within the tolerance ranges defined in the technical characteristics of the devices.

• all measures must be taken to ensure that any power return (immediate, warm or cold) does not lead to a dangerous state which may risk personnel or the installation.

• emergency stop devices must remain effective in all the device's operating modes, even those which are abnormal (for example, when a wire becomes disconnected). Resetting these devices must not cause uncontrolled or improper restarts.

• cables which carry signals must be located where they do not cause interference with the control system functions by capacitive, inductive or electromagnetic interference.

___________________________________________________________________________

2

General safety advice for users

• control system equipment and their control devices must be installed in such a way as to ensure that they are protected against unintentional operation.

• appropriate safety measures must be taken for the inputs and outputs, to prevent improper states in the control system device, if no signal is received.

6 Equipment operation

The operational safety and availability of a device is its ability to avoid the appearance of faults and to minimize their effects if they occur.

A system is said to be fail-safe if the appearance of faults never causes a dangerous situation.

A fault inside the control system is known as :

• passive, if it results in an open output circuit (no command is sent to the actuators).

• active, if it results in a closed output circuit (a command is sent to the actuators).

From the safety point of view, a given fault is dangerous or not depending on the type of command given during normal operation. A passive fault is dangerous if the normal command is the operation of an alarm. An active fault is dangerous if it maintains or activates an undesirable command.

It is important to note the basic difference between the behavior of an electromechanical relay and an electronic component (for example a transistor) :

• there is a high probability, approximately 90%, that the failure of a relay will cause an open circuit

(control circuit powered off).

• there is a 50% probability that the failure of a transistor will cause either an open circuit or a closed circuit.

This is why it is important to correctly estimate the types and consequences of faults when automating a system using electronic products such as PLCs, including when relay output modules are used on PLCs.

The system designer must use devices external to the PLC to protect against active faults inside the PLC, which are not indicated and are judged to be dangerous to the application. This may require solutions from various different technologies such as mechanical, electromechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices (for example, directly wiring a limit switch and emergency stop switches to the coil of a movement control contactor).

To protect against dangerous faults which may occur on output circuits or preactuators, it is sometimes beneficial to resort to general principles and use the large processing capacity of

PLCs, for example by using inputs to check the correct execution of commands requested by the program.

7 Electrical and thermal characteristics

Details of the electrical and thermal characteristics of devices are given in the associated technical documents (installation manuals, quick reference guides).

___________________________________________________________________________

3

General safety advice for users

8 Environmental conditions

In industry, the micro-environmental conditions of electronic devices can vary greatly. For this reason, programmable controllers and associated modules must conform to the following two types of installation :

• installation in an enclosure with IP54 protection for protecting devices from metallic dust amongst other things. Two guidelines are associated with this type of installation :

- direct access to electronic modules should be strictly reserved to maintenance staff (see section 2), with access keys,

- the selection of a metal enclosure must be considered, since it serves as extra shielding against the latent risk of electromagnetic interference.

• direct installation without protection for Premium PLCs and associated systems (power supply modules, etc) which themselves have IP20 protection.

This type of installation applies to areas with restricted access and low pollution levels (not exceeding 2), for example stations or control rooms which have neither machines nor any activity generating metallic dust or other metallic particles. The external walls hence serve as the PLC enclosure.

9 Preventive or corrective maintenance

Availability

The availability of a system is its ability, in terms of its combined reliability, maintainability and maintenance logistics, to be in a state to perform a required function, at a given moment and within a defined time period.

Availability is therefore specific to each application, since it is a combination of :

• the architecture of the automatic system,

• the reliability and maintainability : intrinsic characteristics of the equipment (PLCs, sensors, machine, etc),

• maintenance logistics : characteristic intrinsic to the user of the control system (software structure, fault indication, process, on-site replacement parts, training of personnel).

Troubleshooting procedure

• control system equipment should only be repaired by qualified personnel (after sales service engineer, or technician approved by Schneider Automation). Only certified replacement parts or components should be used.

• before performing any operation on equipment (for example opening an enclosure), always cut the power supply off (disconnect the power plug or open the power isolation switch).

• before performing any "mechanical" operation on equipment on site, cut the power supply off and mechanically lock any moving parts.

• before removing a module, a memory cartridge, a PCMCIA card, etc, check in the manual whether this should be done with the power off or if it is possible with the device powered up.

Follow the instructions given in the manual carefully.

• on positive logic outputs or negative logic inputs, take all necessary precautions to prevent a disconnected wire coming into contact with the mechanical ground (risk of undesirable control action).

Replacement and recycling of used batteries

• if these are replaced, use batteries of the same type and dispose of defective batteries in the same way as toxic waste.

Do not throw lithium or mercury batteries into a fire, open or recharge them, or attempt to solder them.

___________________________________________________________________________

4

TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs

Racks, processors, power supplies, etc

Contents

Part A

Section

1 General presentation

1.1

Main component parts

1.1-1 Racks

1.1-2 Rack power supplies

1.1-3 Processors

1.1-4 Bus X remote rackmaster module

1.1-5 In-rack discrete I/O

1.1-6 Analog I/O

1.1-7 Counting

1.1-8 Axis control

1.1-9 Stepper motor control

1.1-10 Communication

1.1-11 Bus interfaces

1.1-12 Weighing

1.1-13 Process and AS-i power supplies

1.1-14 Fan modules

1.1-15 Emergency stop monitoring modules

1.2

The various types of station

1.2-1 PLC stations with processor integrated on

TSX RKY ii rack

1.2-2 PLC stations with processor integrated in a PC

2 TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks

2.1

Presentation

2.1-1 General

2.1-2 Physical description

2.2

Installation /Mounting

Page

1/1

1/1

1/10

1/10

1/11

1/14

1/15

1/15

1/16

1/17

1/1

1/2

1/2

1/7

1/7

1/8

1/9

1/18

1/18

1/21

2/1

2/1

2/1

2/2

2/3

A

___________________________________________________________________________

A/1

A

TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs

Racks, processors, power supplies, etc

Contents

Part A

Section Page

2.3

Functions 2/4

2.3-1 Composition of a PLC station with TSX/PMX 57 processors, which can be integrated on TSX RKY ii racks 2/4

2.3-2 Composition of a PLC station with PCX 57 processors, which can be integrated in a PC

2.3-3 Addressing racks in a PLC station

2/6

2/8

2.3-4 Module addresses 2/10

2.3-5 Installing power supplies, processors and other modules 2/11

2.4

Accessories

2.4-1 Bus X extension cables

2.4-2 TSX TLYEX line terminator

2.4-3 TSX RKA 02 protective cover for an empty slot

2.4-4 Marking

2.5

Compatibility with the existing installed base

2/13

2/13

2/15

2/17

2/17

2/19

3 TSX 57/PMX57/PCX 57 processors 3/1

3.1

General presentation 3/1

3.2

TSX / PMX 57 processors, which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks

3.2-1 Catalog

3.2-2 Physical description

3.2-3 Installation/mounting

3.2-4 Display

3/2

3/2

3/5

3/6

3/8

3.3

PCX 57 processors, which can be integrated in a PC

3.3-1 Presentation

3.3-2 Catalog

3.3-3 Physical description

3.3-4 Mounting / installation

3.3-5 Display

3/9

3/9

3/10

3/11

3/12

3/14

___________________________________________________________________________

A/2

TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs

Racks, processors, power supplies, etc

Contents

Part A

Section

3.4

Auxiliary functions common to all processors

3.4-1 Terminal port

3.4-2 Slot for PCMCIA communication card

3.4-3 Memories

3.4-4 Processor RESET pushbutton

3.4-5 Realtime clock

3.5

Characteristics 3/25

3.5-1 General characteristics 3/25

3.5-2 Electrical characteristics 3/29

3.5-3 Definition and number of application-specific channels 3/31

3.5-4 I/O profile 3/32

Page

3/16

3/16

3/17

3/18

3/22

3/23

4 TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4/1

4.1

Presentation

4.1-1 General

4.1-2 Physical description

4.2

Catalog

4/1

4/1

4/2

4/3

4.3

Auxiliary functions 4/5

4.4

Installation / insertion

4.4-1 Installation

4.4-2 Insertion / connections

4.5

Characteristics

4.5-1 Characteristics of AC power supplies

4.5-2 Characteristics of DC power supplies

4.5-3 Characteristics of the alarm relay contact

4.6 Power consumption table for selecting a power supply module 4/13

4/8

4/8

4/8

4/9

4/9

4/10

4/12

4.7

Definition of protection devices at the head of the line 4/20

___________________________________________________________________________

A/3

A

A

TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs

Racks, processors, power supplies, etc

Contents

Part A

Section

5 Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200

5.1

Presentation

5.1-1 General

5.1-2 Physical description of the module

5.2

Topology of a PLC station with remote rackmaster modules

5.2-1 TSX/PMX 57 station

5.2-2 Station PCX 57

5.3

Installing the module

5.3-1 Master module

5.3-2 Slave module

5.4

Configuring the module

5.5

Maximum distances according to the type of module

5.6

Connections

5.6-1 Connection accessories

5.6-2 Connection principle

5.7

Module consumption

5.8

Diagnostics

5.8-1 Using indicator lamps

5.9

Managing an installation equipped with a Bus X remote rackmaster module

Page

5/1

5/9

5/12

5/12

5/13

5/13

5/14

5/14

5/1

5/1

5/2

5/3

5/3

5/4

5/5

5/5

5/7

5/8

5/15

___________________________________________________________________________

A/4

TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs

Racks, processors, power supplies, etc

Contents

Part A

Section

6 Mounting

Page

6/1

6.1

Rack installation rules

6.1-1 Positioning the racks

6.2

Rack dimensions

6/1

6/1

6/2

6.3

Mounting/fixing racks 6/3

6.3-1 Mounting on a 35 mm wide DIN rail 6/3

6.3-2 Mounting on panel or Telequick pre-slotted mounting plate 6/4

6.4

Mounting modules and terminal blocks

6.4-1 Inserting a module in a rack

6.4-2 Fitting a screw terminal block on a module

6/5

6/5

6/6

6.5

Mounting a PCX 57 processor in a PC 6/7

6.5-1 The various components

6.5-2 Dimensions

6.5-3 Installation precautions

6.5-4 Preliminary operations before installation in the PC

6/7

6/9

6/9

6/10

6.5-5 Installing the processor card in the PC 6/14

6.5-6 Integrating a PCX 57 processor inside a Bus X segment 6/15

6.6

Fitting/removing the RAM memory backup battery

6.6-1 With a TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor

6.6-2 With a PCX 57 processor

6.6-3 Frequency of changing the battery

6.7

Inserting/removing the PCMCIA memory extension card

6.7-1 On a TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor

6.7-2 On a PCX 57 processor

6.8

Changing the battery on a RAM type PCMCIA memory card

6/18

6/18

6/19

6/20

6/21

6/21

6/22

6/23

___________________________________________________________________________

A/5

A

A

TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs

Racks, processors, power supplies, etc

Contents

Part A

Section

6.9

Precautions to be taken when replacing a processor

6.10 Screw tightening torques

Page

6/24

6/24

7 Connections 7/1

7.1

Ground connections

7.1-1 Grounding the racks

7.1-2 Grounding the modules

7/1

7/1

7/1

7.2

Connection of power supplies 7/2

7.2-1 Rules for connection

7.2-2 Connecting AC power supply modules

7/2

7/4

7.2-3 Connecting DC power supply modules via a floating

24 VDC or 48 VDC supply 7/6

7.2-4 Connecting DC power supply modules via an AC supply 7/7

7.2-5 Sensor and preactuator power supply interlocking 7/11

8 Functions/Performance

8.1

Addressing discrete I/O channels

8.2

Single task application structure

8.2-1 Cyclic execution

8.2-2 Periodic execution

8.3

Multitask application structure

8.3-1 Control tasks

8.3-2 Event-triggered tasks

8/1

8/1

8/3

8/3

8/5

8/7

8/8

8/9

___________________________________________________________________________

A/6

TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs

Racks, processors, power supplies, etc

Contents

Part A

Section

8.4

User memory structure

8.4-1 Application memory

8.5

Performance

8.5-1 MAST task scan time

8.5-2 FAST task scan time

8.5-3 Response time on an event

8.5-4 Precision of the internal time bases

9 Operating modes 9/1

9.1

Setting the PLC to RUN/STOP 9/1

9.2

Processing on power break and power return

9.2-1 Break in the power supply on the rack supporting the

TSX/PMX 57 processor (rack 0) or on the PC supporting the PCX 57 processor

9.2-2 Break in the power supply on a rack other than rack 0

9/2

9/2

9/6

9.3

Processing on insertion/removal of a PCMCIA memory card

9.3-1 On TSX/PMX 57 PLCs

9.3-2 On PCX 57 PLCs

9.4

Processing after action on the processor RESET button

9/6

9/6

9/6

9/7

9.5

Processing after action on the power supply RESET button 9/7

9.6

Response of the PCX 57 to an action on the PC

9.7

Behavior on insertion/removal of a module when powered-up

9/8

9/9

9.8

Behavior of the I/O on downgraded operating mode 9/9

9.8-1 Safety value of discrete and analog outputs 9/9

9.8-2 Discrete and analog outputs switching to fallback mode 9/10

9.8-3 I/O faults 9/10

___________________________________________________________________________

A/7

Page

8/12

8/12

8/16

8/16

8/24

8/25

8/25

A

A

TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs

Racks, processors, power supplies, etc

Section

9.9

Alarm relay management

9.9-1 On TSX/PMX 57 PLCs

9.9-2 On PCX 57 PLCs

9.10 Loading the operating system (OS)

10 Appendix

10.1 Fan modules

10.1-1 General presentation

10.1-2 Physical presentation

10.1-3 Catalog

10.1-4 Dimensions

10.1-5 Mounting

10.1-6 Installation rules for racks with fan modules

10.1-7 Connections

10.1-8 Characteristics

Contents

Part A

Page

9/11

9/11

9/11

9/11

10/1

10/1

10/1

10/2

10/2

10/3

10/4

10/5

10/6

10/7

___________________________________________________________________________

A/8

1 General presentation

1.1

Main component parts

Premium PLCs are entirely modular. A PLC station is made up of racks, power supply modules, processor modules, discrete I/O modules, analog I/O modules, etc.

A

1.1-1 Racks

(see part A - section 2 in this manual)

Two types of rack are available :

• Standard racks with 6, 8 and 12 positions :

They can make up a PLC station limited to a

single rack.

4-position extendable rack

• Extendable racks with

4, 6, 8 and 12 positions :

They can make up a PLC station which can have up to :

- 16 racks maximum if the station is made up of racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions.

- 8 racks maximum if the station is made up of racks with 12 positions.

These racks are distributed on a bus

6-position extendable rack

8-position extendable rack

(known as Bus X) whose maximum length should not exceed 100 meters.

For applications which require a longer length, a

Bus X remote rackmaster module can be used. This enables 2 Bus X segments to be remotely located at a maximum distance of 250 meters from the rack supporting

12-position extendable rack the processor.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

A

1.1-2 Rack power supplies

(see part A - section 4 in this manual)

Each rack requires a power supply module determined according to the distributed line supply (AC or DC) and the power required at rack level (standard format module or double format module).

standard format power supply module for c or a supply double format power supply module for c or a supply

1.1-3 Processors

Each station has a processor which is selected according to :

- its type of integration : integrated in a rack or integrated in a PC

- the processing power required : number of discrete/analog I/O, etc

- the type of processing : sequential or sequential + process control

• Sequential processors, which can be integrated on TSX RKY iii racks (see part A - section 3 in this manual)

TSX P 57 102

This is used to :

TSX P 57 202

These are used to :

TSX P 57 252

• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :

- 1 standard rack or

• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :

- 1 standard rack or

- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or

- 2 x 12-position extendable racks or

- 4 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks

- 512 in-rack discrete I/O

- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks

- 1024 in-rack discrete I/O

- 80 analog I/O

- 24 analog I/O

- 8 application-specific channels

(counter, axis control, etc)

• integrate the PLC station in a single

- 24 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)

• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure.

The TSX P 57 252 processor also has an integrated network structure

FIPIO master link.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

Presentation 1

A

Sequential processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY iii racks (cont.)

TSX P 57 302 TSX P 57 352 TSX P 57 402 TSX P 57 452

These are used to :

• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :

- 1 standard rack or

- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or

- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks

- 1024 in-rack discrete I/O

- 128 analog I/O

- 32 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)

• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure

The TSX P 57 352 processor also has an integrated FIPIO master link.

These are used to :

• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :

- 1 standard rack or

- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or

- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks

- 2040 in-rack discrete I/O

- 256 analog I/O

- 64 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)

• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure

The TSX P 57 452 processor also has an integrated FIPIO master link.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

A

Process control processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY iii racks (see part A - section 3 in this manual)

TPMX P 57 102

This has the same capacity as a TSX P57 102 and performance levels which are equivalent to a TSX P57 2 i 2. It is used to :

• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :

- 1 standard rack or

- 2 x 12-position extendable racks or

- 4 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks

- 512 in-rack discrete I/O

- 24 analog I/O

- 8 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)

- etc

- manage 10 process control channels

• integrate the PLC station in a single network structure

TPMX P57 202

This has the same capacity as a TSX P57 202 and performance levels which are equivalent to a TSX P57 4 i 2. It is used to :

• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :

- 1 standard rack or

- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or

- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks

- 1024 in-rack discrete I/O

- 80 analog I/O

- 24 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)

- etc

- manage 10 process control channels

• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

Presentation 1

A

Process control processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY iii racks

TPMX P57 352 TPMX P57 452

This has the same capacity as a TSX P57 352 and performance levels which are equivalent to a TSX P57 4 i 2. It is used to :

• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :

- 1 standard rack or

- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or

- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks

- 1024 in-rack discrete I/O

- 128 analog I/O

- 32 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)

- etc

- manage 10 process control channels

• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure

It has an integrated FIPIO master link.

This has the same capacity as a TSX P57 452 and performance levels which are equivalent to a TSX P57 4 i 2. It is used to :

• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :

- 1 standard rack or

- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or

- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks

- 2040 in-rack discrete I/O

- 255 analog I/O

- 64 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)

- etc

- manage 10 process control channels

• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure

It has an integrated FIPIO master link.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/5

A

• Sequential processors, which can be integrated in a PC (see part A - section 3 in this manual)

Installed on the ISA bus of an industrial or office PC operating in a Windows 95 or

Windows NT environment, these are used to control a PLC station. In addition, the installation of a communication driver enables transparent communication between the host PC and the processor, thus overcoming the need for another programming terminal.

TPCX 57 1012

This is used to :

• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :

- 1 standard rack or

- 2 x 12-position extendable racks or

- 4 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks

- 512 in-rack discrete I/O

- 24 analog I/O

- 8 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)

• integrate the PLC station in a single network structure

TPCX 57 3512

These are used to :

• control a PLC station comprising a maximum of :

- 1 standard rack or

- 8 x 12-position extendable racks or

- 16 x 4, 6 or 8-position extendable racks

- 1024 in-rack discrete I/O

- 128 analog I/O

- 32 application-specific channels (counter, axis control, etc)

• integrate the PLC station in a multinetwork structure.

It has an integrated FIPIO master link.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/6

Presentation 1

A

1.1-4 Bus X remote rackmaster module

(see section 5 of part A)

This module enables 2 bus segments to be remotely located at a maximum distance of 250 meters from the rack supporting the processor. Each remote segment can support a number of racks, distributed on the Bus X over a maximum length of 100 meters.

1.1-5 In-rack discrete I/O

(see part B1 in this manual)

A wide range of discrete I/O modules enables users to match their particular requirements. These modules vary in :

• Modularity : 8, 16, 28, 32 or 64 channels

• Type of inputs :

- modules with DC inputs (24VDC, 48VDC)

- modules with AC inputs (24VAC, 48VAC, 110VAC, 240VAC)

• Type of outputs :

- modules with relay outputs

- modules with DC solid state outputs (24VDC / 0.1A - 0.5A - 2A, 48VDC/ 0.25A - 1A)

- modules with AC solid state outputs (24VAC / 130VAC / 1A, 48VAC / 240VAC / 2A)

• Type of connections : screw terminal block connections and HE10 type connectors, for connection to sensors and preactuators by means of the TELEFAST 2 pre-wired system

HE10 connections Screw terminal block connections

64 I / 64 Q 32 I / 32 Q 28 I/O (16I+12Q)1 6 I

32 I

8I-16I / 8Q - 16Q

___________________________________________________________________________

1/7

A

1.1-6 Analog I/O

(see the "Analog and Weighing Installation Manual - Volume 4")

The range of analog I/O modules covers the majority of requirements. These modules vary in :

• Modularity : 4, 8, 16 channels

• Performance and signal ranges on offer : voltage/current, thermocouple, multirange

(thermocouple, temperature probe, voltage/current)

• Type of connections : 25-pin SUB D type connectors, for connection to sensors by means of the TELEFAST 2 pre-wired system

25-pin SUB D connections

16 I 16 I 8 I 8 I 4 I, fast 8 Q not isolated isolated not isolated isolated isolated not isolated betw. channels betw. channels betw. channels betw. channels betw. channels betw. channels

Voltage/Current Thermocouple Voltage/Current Voltage/Current Voltage/Current Voltage/Current

0...10 V - 80 + 80 mV 0...10 V, 0...10 V 0...10 V ± 10 V

± 10 V

1...5V

± 10 V

1...5V

± 10 V

1...5V

± 10 V

1...5V

0...5V

0...20 mA

4...20 mA

0...5V

0...20 mA

4...20 mA

0...5V

0...20 mA

4...20 mA

0...5V

0...20 mA

4...20 mA

0...20 mA

4...20 mA

12 bits 16 bits 12 bits 16 bits/Voltage 16 bits/Voltage 16 bits/Voltage

14 bits/Current 14 bits/Current 14 bits/Current

Screw terminal block connections

4 I isolated between channels

Multi-range

0...10 V, ± 10 V

0...5V, 1...5V

0...20 mA, 4...20 mA

- 13 + 63 mV

0..400

0..3850

Temperature probe

Thermocouple

4 Q isolated between channels

Voltage / Current

± 10 V

0...20 mA

4...20 mA

16 bits 11 bits + sign

___________________________________________________________________________

1/8

Presentation 1

A

1.1-7 Counting

(see the "Counting and Motion Control Installation Manual - Volume 2")

Premium PLCs offer the main counting functions (downcounting, upcounting, up/ down counting) using "counter" modules.

Three modules are available :

• One module with 2 channels and one module with 4 channels for incremental encoder, with a maximum read frequency of 40 kHz

4-channel module

• One module with 2 channels for :

- incremental encoder, with a maximum read frequency of 500 kHz

- SSI serial absolute encoder, with a maximum read frequency of 2 MHz

2-channel module

2-channel module

___________________________________________________________________________

1/9

A

1.1-8 Axis control

(see the "Counting and Motion Control Installation Manual - Volume 2")

By means of "axis control" modules,

Premium PLCs can be used to manage motion control applications, controlled by servomotors where the speed reference is an analog value (± 10 V).

There are five modules :

• A 2-channel module which can be used for servo loop positioning with two independent, linear and limited axes.

• A 2-channel module which can be used for servo loop positioning with two independent, circular and infinite axes.

• A 4-channel module which can be used for servo loop positioning with four independent, linear and limited axes.

• A 4-channel module which can be used for servo loop positioning with four independent, circular axes.

• A 3-channel module which can be used for positioning on 2 or 3 synchronized axes (linear interpolation).

2-channel modules

4-channel modules

3-channel modules

1.1-9 Stepper motor control

(see the "Counting and Motion Control Installation Manual - Volume 2")

By means of "stepper motor control" modules, Premium PLCs can be used to manage motion control applications, controlled by translators where the speed reference is a frequency.

Two modules are available :

• A 1-channel module used to control one translator

• A 2-channel module used to control two translators

Single channel module

2-channel module

___________________________________________________________________________

1/10

Presentation 1

A

1.1-10 Communication

Premium PLCs can be used for various methods of communication :

• Communication on terminal port (see the "Communication, Bus and Network

Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3")

TSX and PMX processors

TSX and PMX processors have two terminal ports (TER) and (AUX), a nonisolated RS 485 serial link, and UNI-

TELWAY or character mode protocol.

These terminal ports can be used for connecting :

- a programming terminal and/or a manmachine interface terminal (UNI-

TELWAY master mode)

- the station to a UNI-TELWAY multidrop link (UNI-TELWAY master or slave mode)

- a printer or a terminal in character mode

Note : The user-defined communication protocol is the same for both ports.

PCX processor

PCX processors have a terminal port

(TER), a non-isolated RS 485 serial link, and UNI-TELWAY or character mode protocol.

As with TSX and PMX processors, they are used to connect :

- a programming terminal and/or a manmachine interface terminal (UNI-

TELWAY master mode)

- the station to a UNI-TELWAY multidrop link (UNI-TELWAY master or slave mode)

- a printer or a terminal in character mode.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/11

A

• FIPIO master communication, integrated on certain processors.

(see the "Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3")

TSX P57 i 52 / TPMX P57 i 52 and PCX P57 3512 processors integrate as standard a FIPIO master link, which enables the following types of equipment to be located remotely (15 km maximum) :

- discrete I/O modules (TBX, Momentum)

- analog I/O modules (TBX, Momentum)

- variable speed controllers (ATV16)

- operator control panels (CCX 17)

- etc.

FIPIO link on PCX processor

FIPIO link on TSX /

PMX processor

• Communication via PCMCIA cards which can be integrated into the processor

or the TSX SCY 21601 communication module (see the "Communication, Bus and

Network Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3")

The processors and the TSX SCY 21 communication module both have a slot which can take a type III extended PCMCIA format communication card :

PCX processor

TSX / PMX processor module

TSX SCY 21 communication module

PCMCIA PCMCIA PCMCIA card card card

___________________________________________________________________________

1/12

Presentation 1

A

The various types of PCMCIA type III communication cards

(see the "Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3")

- multiprotocol cards (UNI-TELWAY,

MODBUS/JBUS, character mode) (1) : non isolated RS 232 D serial link isolated RS 485 serial link current loop link non-isolated

RS 232D

- JNET single protocol cards (2) : isolated RS 485 serial link current loop link isolated

RS 485

Current loop isolated

RS 485

Current loop

- Modbus+ network card (3)

- FIPWAY network card (1)

- FIPIO Agent bus card (3)

Modbus+ FIPWAY FIPIO Agent

- Modem cards (3)

Modem

(1) can be integrated on a TSX SCY 21601 communication module and/or TSX/PMX/PCX processors.

(2) can only be integrated on a TSX SCY 21601 communication module

(3) can only be integrated on TSX/PMX/PCX processors

• Communication via application-specific module

TSX SCY 21 module (see the "Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces Installation

Manual - Volume 3")

This module, which can be integrated in all TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLC station racks, has :

- an integrated communication channel

(1), multiprotocol (UNI-TELWAY,

Modbus/Jbus, character mode), isolated RS 485 serial link

- a slot (2), which can take a type III extended PCMCIA communication

1

2

1/13

A

Communication via application-specific module (continued)

TSX ETY 110 module (see the "Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces

Installation Manual - Volume 3")

This module allows communication in an Ethernet multinetwork architecture and has a communication channel offering two types of connection :

- connection to an ETHWAY network

- connection to a TCP_IP network

1.1-11 Bus interfaces

• AS-i bus interface module : TSX SAY100 (see the "Communication, Bus and

Network Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3")

This module provides the connection to an AS-i bus on a TSX/PMX/PCX

Premium PLC station.

It is a bus master module, managing and coordinating access to the bus, which sends data to all the slaves and receives data from them.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/14

1.1-12 Weighing

(see the "Analog and Weighing Installation Manual - Volume 4")

By means of the "weighing" module, TSX

Premium PLCs can be used to manage weighing applications : batching, multiproduct batching, sorting by weight, flow control, weight totalizing, etc.

This module has a measurement input for

8 sensors maximum, 2 fast discrete outputs and a serial link for an extension display.

Presentation 1

A

1.1-13 Process and AS-i power supplies

(see part E in this manual)

• Process power supplies

A wide range of power supply units and modules enables users to match their particular requirements.

Designed to provide the 24 VDC power supply to the peripherals in an automated system, controlled by

TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLCs, they can all be mounted on a Telequick plate, AM1-PA, and some can be mounted on a central DIN rail, AM1-DP200 / DE 200.

24 VDC / 1A

24 VDC / 1A 24 VDC / 2A

24 VDC / 5A

24 VDC / 10A

___________________________________________________________________________

1/15

A

• AS-i power supplies

These are designed to provide the 30 VDC power supply to the components connected on the AS-i fieldbus.

AS-i 30 VDC / 2.4A

AS-i 30 VDC / 5A & 24 VDC

1.1-14 Fan modules

(see part A - section 9 in this manual)

Depending on the rack modularity (4, 6, 8 or 12 positions), one, two or three fan modules can be installed on top of each rack in order to help cool the various modules by forced convection.

These fan units should be used in the following cases :

Ambient temperature in the range 25°C...60°C : Forced ventilation increases the lifetime of the various TSX Premium PLC components (25% increase in MTBF).

• Ambient temperature in the range 60°C...70°C : Since the ambient temperature is limited to 60°C without ventilation, forced ventilation is used to decrease the temperature inside the modules by 10°C, bringing the internal module temperature to the equivalent of an ambient temperature of 60°C.

There are three types of fan module :

• fan module with 110 VAC power supply

• fan module with 220 VAC power supply

• fan module with 24 VDC power supply

___________________________________________________________________________

1/16

1.1-15 Emergency stop monitoring modules

(see part B2 of this manual)

Modules with an integrated safety circuit, designed for totally safe control of machine emergency stop circuits. These modules cover all safety functions up to category 4 in accordance with standard EN 954-1.

There are two modules :

• 1 module with 12 inputs and 2 outputs

• 1 module with 12 inputs and 4 outputs

Presentation 1

A

___________________________________________________________________________

1/17

A

1.2

The various types of station

1.2-1 PLC stations with processor integrated on TSX RKY ii rack

The maximum capacities of a TSX / PMX Premium PLC station are defined according to the type of rack (standard or extendable) and the type of processor

(TSX / T PMX P 57 1 ii , TSX / T PMX P 57 2 ii , TSX / T PMX P 57 3 ii , TSX /

T PMX P 57 4 ii ) selected.

• TSX 57 10 or PMX 57 10 stations : based on a TSX P57 102 or T PMX P57 102 processor

- With no Bus X remote rackmaster module

Station with standard rack :

- 1 rack with 6, 8 or

12 positions

Station with extendable racks:

- 2 racks with 12 positions or

- 4 racks with 4, 6 or

8 positions

- maximum length of

Bus X : 100 meters

- With Bus X remote rackmaster module (station example)

Bus X main segment Bus X remote segment

Remote location of Bus X

(≤

250 meters)

Bus X

(≤

100 m)

Bus X

(≤

100 m)

Processor

Station with extendable racks :

- 2 racks with 12 positions or

- 4 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions

- 2 remote locations possible

- Maximum length of a remote connection : 250 meters

- Maximum length of Bus X segments : 100 meters

• TSX 57 20 or PMX 57 20 stations : based on a TSX P 57 202/252 or T PMX P57 202 processor

• TSX 57 30 or PMX 57 30 stations : based on a TSX P 57 302/352 or T PMX P57 352 processor

• TSX 57 40 or PMX 57 40 stations : based on a TSX P 57 402/452 or T PMX P57 452 processor

___________________________________________________________________________

1/18

- With no Bus X remote rackmaster module

Station with standard rack :

- 1 rack with 6, 8 or 12 positions

Station with extendable racks:

- 8 racks with 12 positions or

- 16 racks with 4, 6 or

8 positions

- maximum length of

Bus X : 100 meters

Presentation 1

A

- With Bus X remote rackmaster module (station example)

Bus X main segment

Remote location of Bus X

(≤

250 meters)

Bus X remote segment 1

Bus X

(≤

100 m)

Bus X

(≤

100 m)

Processor

Remote location of Bus X

(≤

250 meters)

Station with extendable racks :

- 8 racks with 12 positions or

- 16 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions

- 2 remote locations possible

- Maximum length of a remote connection : 250 meters

- Maximum length of Bus X segments : 100 meters

Bus X

(≤

100 m)

Bus X remote segment 2

___________________________________________________________________________

1/19

A

Maximum configurations

Type of station TSX/PMX TSX/PMX TSX/PMX TSX/PMX

5710 57 20 5730 5740

Processors TSX/TPMX P57 v

102

No. of racks standard TSX RKY 6/8/12 1

202

1

252

1

302

1

352

1

402

1

452

1

8 8 8 8 8 8 extendable TSX RKY 12EX 2

TSX RKY 4EX

TSX RKY 6EX 4

TSX RKY 8EX

Processor In-rack discrete I/O (1) 512

16 16 16 16 16 16

1024 1024 1024 1024 2040 2040 processing Analog I/O (1) capacity

24

App-spec. channels (1) (2) 8

80 80 128 128 255 255

24 24 32 32 48 48

Network connections (3) 1

Third party fieldbus connections (4)

AS-i sensor/ actuator bus connections

FIPIO master connections

Process control channels (5)

Total length of Bus X extension cables on one segment

Maximum remote connection distance of a Bus X segment

2

10

1

1

4

10

1

1

4

1

3

2

8

100 meters maximum with

TSX CBY ii cables (ii

02

)

250 meters maximum

3

2

8

4

2

8

1 –

10 –

4

2

8

1

10

(1) On a TSX/PMX 5740 station, the number of in-rack discrete I/O, analog I/O and applicationspecific channels is not cumulative (see section 3.5-4 in this part).

(2) Application-specific channels = counter, axis control, stepper motor control, communication, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 in this part - definition and number of application-specific channels).

(3) FIPWAY, Modbus +, Ethernet TCP_IP network

(4) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP

(5) Only on TPMX P57 102/202/352/452 process control processors.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/20

Presentation 1

A

1.2-2 PLC stations with processor integrated in a PC

The maximum capacities of a TSX Premium PLC station are defined according to the type of processor (TPCX 57 1012 or TPCX 57 3512). In this type of station, where the processor is integrated in a PC, the station is made up of extendable racks.

• PCX 57 10 station : based on a TPCX P57 1012 processor

- Without Bus X remote rackmaster module

PC

TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks

TPCX 57 1012

X 1

Station with extendable racks:

- 2 racks with 12 positions or

- 4 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions

- maximum Bus X (X1 + X2) length : 100 meters

- With Bus X remote rackmaster module (station example)

Bus X remote segment 1

Bus X

(≤

100 m)

Remote location of Bus X

(≤

250 m - X1)

PC

TPCX 57 1012

Bus X

X1

Bus X

X2

Bus X main segment

Station with extendable racks :

- 2 racks with 12 positions or

- 4 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions

- 2 remote locations possible

- Maximum length of a remote connection : 250 meters - X1

- Maximum length of Bus X segments :

100 meters

___________________________________________________________________________

1/21

A

• PCX 57 30 station : based on a TPCX 57 3512 processor

- Without Bus X remote rackmaster module

PC

TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks

TPCX 57 3512

X 1

Station with extendable racks:

- 8 racks with 12 positions or

- 16 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions

- maximum Bus X (X1 + X2) length : 100 meters

- With Bus X remote rackmaster module (station example)

Bus X remote segment 1

Bus X

(≤

100 m)

Remote location of Bus X

(≤

250 m - X1)

PC

TPCX 57 3512

Bus X

(≤

100 m)

Bus X remote segment 2

Bus X

X1

Bus X

X2

Remote location of Bus X

(≤

250 m - X1)

Bus X main segment

Station with extendable racks :

- 8 racks with 12 positions or

- 16 racks with 4, 6 or 8 positions

- 2 remote locations possible

- Maximum length of a remote connection : 250 meters - X1

- Maximum length of Bus X

1/22

Presentation 1

A

Maximum configurations

Type of station

Processors TPCX P57

No. of racks extendable v

TSX RKY 12EX

TSX RKY 4EX

TSX RKY 6EX

TSX RKY 8EX

Processor In-rack discrete I/O

processing Analog I/O capacity App-spec. channels (1)

Network connections (2)

Third party fieldbus connections (3)

AS-i sensor/ actuator bus connections

FIPIO master connections

Total length of bus extension cables (X1 + X2)

Maximum remote connection distance of a Bus X segment

PCX 57 10

1012

2

4

1

512

24

8

2

PCX 5730

3512

8

16

1024

128

32

3

2

8

1

100 meters maximum with with TSX CBY ii cables (ii

02

)

250 meters minus the distance between the processor and the rack at address 0

(X1)

(1) Application-specific channels = counter, axis control, stepper motor control, communication, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 in this part - definition and number of application-specific channels).

(2) FIPWAY, Modbus +, Ethernet TCP_IP network

(3) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP

___________________________________________________________________________

1/23

A

___________________________________________________________________________

1/24

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii

Section 2

2 TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks

2.1

Presentation

2.1-1 General

TSX RKY iii racks are the basic element of Premium PLCs.

These racks provide the following functions :

• Mechanical function :

They are used for fitting all PLC station modules (power supply modules, TSX/

PMX processor, discrete/analog I/O, application-specific modules).

They can be fitted in enclosures, on the machine frame or on panels.

• Electrical function :

The racks have an integral bus, called

Bus X, which distributes :

- the power supplies required for each module in the same rack,

- the service signals and data for the whole PLC station if it comprises a number of racks.

So as to match user requirements more closely, there are two families of racks, each available in several versions (4, 6, 8 and 12 positions) :

• Standard racks : These are used to make up a PLC station limited to a single rack.

• Extendable racks : These are used to make up a PLC station containing :

- Up to 8 RKY 12 EX racks

-

Up to 16 RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks

These racks are distributed on a bus known as Bus X, whose maximum length is limited to 100 meters.

Bus continuity from one rack to another is provided by a bus extension cable.

Standard racks

TSX RKY 6

(6 positions)

TSX RKY 8

(8 positions)

TSX RKY 12

(12 positions)

Extendable racks

TSX RKY 4EX

(4 positions)

TSX RKY 6EX

(6 positions)

TSX RKY 8EX

(8 positions)

A

TSX RKY 12EX

(12 positions)

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

A

2.1-2 Physical description

• Standard racks

4 3 1

6

8

6

7

6

9

5

• Extendable racks

10 4 3

2

1

11

6

8

11

6

7

6

9

5 2

___________________________________________________________________________

2/2

9

6

9

6

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2

A

1 Metal plate acting as :

• support for the Bus X electronic card and protection for the bus against EMI and

ESD interference,

• module support,

• mechanical reinforcement for the rack.

2 Apertures for anchoring the module pins,

3 48-pin female 1/2 DIN connectors for connecting the rack to each module.

When the rack is supplied these connectors are protected by covers which should be removed before the modules are installed.

The connector located furthest to the left marked PS is always dedicated to the rack power supply module; the other connectors marked 00 to ii can take all the other types of module.

4 Tapped holes for the module fixing screw.

5 Aperture which ensures correct location when a power supply module is fitted.

Since the power supply modules have a boss on the rear panel, it is impossible to mount this module in any other position.

6 Holes large enough to take M6 screws for fitting the rack on a support.

7 Location for marking the rack address.

8 Location for marking the station network address.

9 Ground terminals for grounding the rack.

10 Micro-switches for encoding the rack address (on extendable racks only).

11 9-pin female SUB D connectors for connecting Bus X to another rack (on extendable racks only).

2.2

Installation /Mounting

The procedure for installing and mounting racks is explained in section 6 of this part.

• Installation : section 6.1

• Mounting : section 6.3

___________________________________________________________________________

2/3

A

2.3

Functions

2.3-1 Composition of a PLC station with TSX/PMX 57 processors, which can be integrated on TSX RKY ii racks

• Based on standard racks : TSX RKY 6/8/12

Standard racks are used to make up a

TSX/PMX 57 10, 57 20, 57 30 or 57 40

PLC station limited to a single rack.

• Based on extendable racks : TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX/12EX

By using extendable racks, it is possible to make up a PLC station containing a maximum of :

2

TSX/PMX 57 10 station :

- 2 TSX RKY 12EX racks or

- 4 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks

1

TSX/PMX 57 20, 57 30 or 57 40 station:

- 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks or

- 16 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks

A single station may comprise racks with 4, 6, 8 and 12 positions which are connected by Bus X extension cables

(1). Bus X should have a line terminator

(2) fitted at each end.

- Bus X extension cables

The racks are interconnected by TSX

CBY ii

0K Bus X extension cables connected to the 9-pin SUB D connector on the right and left-hand side of each extendable rack.

As the concept of inlet and outlet does not apply to 9-pin SUB D connectors, it does not matter whether the cable coming in from a rack or the cable going out to another rack is connected to the right or left connector.

1

2

___________________________________________________________________________

2/4

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2

A

- Line terminator

The two extendable racks located at either end of the daisy chain must be fitted with a TSX TLYEX line terminator (marked A/ and /B) on the unused 9-pin SUB D connector.

- Maximum cable length : The total length of all the TSX CBY ii 0K cables used in a PLC station must never exceed 100 meters

Note:

For applications which require distances of more than 100 meters between racks, a remote rackmaster module can be used. This enables 2 Bus X segments to be remotely located at a maximum distance of 250 meters from the rack supporting the processor. The maximum distance of each Bus X segment is 100 meters. (See section 5 - Bus X remote rackmaster module)

___________________________________________________________________________

2/5

A

2.3-2 Composition of a PLC station with PCX 57 processors, which can be integrated in a PC

In this case, the PLC station is made up of extendable racks :

TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX/12EX

P C

TPCX 57 3512

1

X1

1

By using extendable racks, it is possible to make up a PLC station containing a maximum of :

• PCX 57 10 station :

- 2 TSX RKY 12EX racks or

- 4 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks

• PCX 57 30 station :

- 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks or

- 16 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks

A single station may comprise racks with

4, 6, 8 and 12 positions which are connected to each other and to the processor by Bus X extension cables (1).

Bus X should have a line terminator (2) fitted at the end.

Bus X extension cables

Connections between racks and between the racks and the processor are made using TSX CBY ii 0K Bus X extension cables connected to the 9-pin

SUB D connector on the right and lefthand side of each extendable rack and at the top of the front panel of the processor.

As the concept of inlet and outlet does not apply to 9-pin SUB D connectors, it does not matter whether the cable coming in from a rack or the cable going out to another rack is connected to the right or left connector.

2

1

___________________________________________________________________________

2/6

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2

A

Line terminator

The equivalent of line terminator /A is integrated in the processor as standard, and thus the processor is located at the head of the Bus X line. The extendable rack located at the end of the daisy chain must be fitted with a TSX TLY EX line terminator

(marked /B) on the unused 9-pin SUB D connector.

Maximum cable length

The total length (X1 + X2) of all the TSX CBY ii 0K cables used in a PLC station must never exceed 100 meters.

Note 1:

For applications which require distances of more than 100 meters between racks, a remote rackmaster module can be used. This enables 2 Bus X segments to be remotely located at a maximum distance of 250 meters from the rack virtually supporting the processor. The maximum distance of each Bus X segment is 100 meters. (See section 5 - Bus X remote rackmaster module).

Note 2:

By default, the PCX 57 processor is equipped to be installed at the head of the Bus

X line. Line terminator A/ is therefore integrated in the processor in the form of a plug-in daughter board.

If an application requires the integration of the processor inside a Bus X segment, a mechanical assembly is supplied with the processor so that this can be done.

This mechanical assembly is supplied in the form of :

- a daughter board which is installed in the place of line terminator A/

- a mounting plate with a 9-pin SUB D connector for connecting a TSX CBY ii 0K

Bus X cable and a ribbon cable for connection to the daughter board.

(See section 6.5-6 for the installation of this interface).

___________________________________________________________________________

2/7

A

2.3-3 Addressing racks in a PLC station

• Station made up of a standard rack

The station is always limited to a single rack; the rack address is therefore implicit and has the value 0 (no micro-switches).

• Station made up of extendable racks

Each station rack must have an address assigned to it. This address is coded via 4 micro-switches located on the rack.

Micro-switches 1 to 3 are used for coding the rack address on Bus X (0 to 7), micro-switch 4 is used for coding two racks (4, 6 or 8 positions) on the same address. This latter function is handled by PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software, version V3.3 or later.

2

1

4

3

Rack addresses 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Position of micros w i t c h e s

4

3

2

1

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Note : At the time of supply, micro-switches 1, 2 and 3 are in the ON position (address 0).

Assigning addresses to the various racks

Address 0 : This address is always assigned to the rack which supports :

• the TSX/PMX 57 processor physically

• the PCX 57 processor virtually

This rack can be located in any position in the chain.

Addresses 1 to 7 : These can be assigned in any order to all the other extendable racks in the station.

Note : The rack address must be coded before the power supply module is mounted.

!

If two or more racks are accidentally positioned at the same address (other than address 0), the racks concerned change to fault mode as do all their modules. Having corrected the rack addressing, the racks concerned should be switched off/on.

Note : 1 This comment only concerns racks, reference TSX RKY ii EX.

2 If two or more racks are at address 0, the rack supporting the processor does not change to fault mode.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/8

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2

A

Principle of addressing 2 racks at the same address

TSX RKY 12EX

P

S

ON

TSX RKY 8EX

P

S

ON

OFF

TSX RKY 8EX

P

S

TSX RKY 6EX

1 TSX RKY 12EX rack at one address

2 TSX RKY 8EX racks at the same address

P

S

ON

OFF

TSX RKY 6EX

P

S

2 TSX RKY 6EX racks at the same address

TSX RKY 4EX

P

S

ON

TSX RKY 4EX

P

S

2 TSX RKY 4EX racks at the same address

ON

Microswitch

4

OFF

OFF

Notes :

• TSX RKY 12EX racks cannot receive a second rack at the same address.

• It is possible to mix TSX RKY 8EX/6EX/4EX racks.

• Two TSX RKY 8EX/6EX/4EX racks with the same address will not be necessarily be daisychained one after the other. The physical order of distribution is not important.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/9

A

2.3-4 Module addresses

For all standard and extendable racks, a module address is geographical and will depend on the position of the module on the rack. The address of each position is indicated below each connector; the connector marked PS is always dedicated to the rack power supply.

Module addresses according to the type of rack

• Standard racks

- TSX RKY6 : addresses 00 to 02

- TSX RKY8 : addresses 00 to 04

- TSX RKY12 : addresses 00 to 10

• Extendable racks

The address of a module depends on the position of micro-switch 4 (see table below).

- micro-switch 4 in the ON position, the modules will have addresses (00 to x) depending on the type of rack

- micro-switch 4 in the OFF position, the modules will have addresses (08 to y) depending on the type of rack. This function is only handled by PL7 Junior or PL7

Pro software, version V 3.3 or later.

Position of micro-switch 4

TSX RKY 4EX racks

TSX RKY 6EX racks

TSX RKY 8EX racks

TSX RKY 12EX racks

ON

00 to 02

00 to 04

00 to 06

00 to 10

Module addresses

OFF

08 to 10

08 to 12

08 to 14 cannot be used

Micro-switch 4

4

H

L

ON OFF

PS

PS

08

00

09

01

Module addresses

10

02

11

03

12

04

13

05

14

06

Note :

The shaded addresses can only be accessed from PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software version

3.3 or later

Example : module addresses on TSX RKY 8EX rack

2/10

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2

A

2.3-5 Installing power supplies, processors and other modules

• On a standard or extendable rack at address 0 with a TSX 57 or

PMX 57 processor, which can be integrated on the rack

The rack with address 0 must receive a power supply module and the processor module.

Since TSX Premium PLCs can have two types of power supply (standard format or double format), the position of the processor will depend on the type of power supply being used.

Using a standard format power supply module :

- The power supply module always occupies position PS.

PS 00

- The single format processor module is installed in position 00 (preferred position) or position 01 if position 00 is not available.

01 02 03 04 05 06

- The double format processor module is installed in positions 00 and 01

(preferred positions) or positions 01 and 02 if position 00 is not available.

- The other modules should be installed from position 01, 02 or 03 onwards, depending on the location of the processor .

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Using a double format power supply module :

- The power supply module always occupies positions PS and 00.

PS 00

- The single format processor module must be installed in position 01.

- The double format processor module is installed in positions 01 and 02.

- The other modules should be installed from position 02 or 03 onwards, depending on the type of processor.

PS 00

01 02 03 04 05 06

01 02 03 04 05 06

___________________________________________________________________________

2/11

A

• On an extendable rack at address 0 with a PCX 57 processor, which can be integrated in the PC

The PCX 57 processor, integrated in the PC, occupies one position virtually on the rack at address 0; this virtual position must be empty. Since TSX Premium PLCs can have two types of power supply (standard format or double format), the empty position will depend on the type of power supply being used.

Using a standard format power supply module :

- The power supply module always occupies position PS.

- Position 00, virtual slot for the processor, must be empty.

- The other modules should be installed from position 01 onwards.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Using a double format power supply module :

- The power supply module always occupies positions PS and 00.

- Position 01, virtual slot for the processor, must be empty.

- The other modules should be installed from position 02 onwards.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

• On an extendable rack at address 1 to 7 regardless of the type of processor

Each rack must have a power supply module, whether standard or double format.

Using a standard format power supply module :

- The power supply module always occupies position PS.

- The other modules should be installed from position 00 onwards.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Using a double format power supply module :

- The power supply module always occupies positions PS and 00.

- The other modules should be installed from position 01 onwards.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

___________________________________________________________________________

2/12

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2

A

2.4

Accessories

2.4-1 Bus X extension cables

• TSX CBY ii 0K cables (II

≥≥≥≥≥

02)

These fixed-length cables are used to daisy-chain TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks and carry the various Bus X signals. When used with a PCX 57 processor, they also provide the connection between the processor integrated in the PC and the first rack in the station. They are fitted with 9-pin male SUB D connectors at each end, which connect to the 9-pin female SUB

D connectors on the extendable rack or the PCX 57 processor.

Several different lengths of cable are available to meet the various application requirements (see table below).

Station with TSX or PMX processor which can be integrated on the rack

Station with PCX processor which can be integrated in a PC

PC

PCX 57

!

!

The total length of all the cables used in a PLC station is limited to

100 meters.

!

All the station elements (racks,

PC, etc) must be powered down prior to inserting or removing a

TSX CBY iii

0K cable.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/13

A

The different types of cable available

References

TSX CBY 010K (II

≥≥≥≥≥

02)

TSX CBY 030K (II

≥≥≥≥≥

02)

TSX CBY 050K (II

≥≥≥≥≥

02)

TSX CBY 120K (II

≥≥≥≥≥

02)

TSX CBY 180K (II

≥≥≥≥≥

02)

TSX CBY 280K (II

≥≥≥≥≥

02)

TSX CBY 380K (II

≥≥≥≥≥

02)

TSX CBY 500K (II

≥≥≥≥≥

02)

TSX CBY 720K (II

≥≥≥≥≥

02)

TSX CBY 1000K (II

≥≥≥≥≥

02)

Lengths

1 meter

3 meters

5 meters

12 meters

18 meters

28 meters

38 meters

50 meters

72 meters

100 meters

• TSX CBY 1000 cables (reel with 100 meters)

For Bus X lengths which are less than 100 meters but not those offered already equipped with connectors, the TSX CBY 1000 cable must be used. This cable must be equipped at each end with TSX CBY K9 connectors to be fitted by the user. The procedure for this is described in the quick reference guide included with the cable and the connectors.

The following equipment is required to make up this cable :

- 1 TSX CBY 1000 cable including 1 reel of 100 meters and two testers for checking the cable once the connections have been made

Reel

- 1 set of two TSX CBY K9 9-pin connectors including for each connector :

1 connector body,

1 set of contacts,

1 internal shielding cover,

1 external shielding cover,

1 ferrule,

1 plastic cover with 2 fixing screws,

Testers

Connectors

- 1 TSX CBY ACC10 kit including 2 crimping pliers and a tool for extracting contacts to be used in case of error,

Crimping pliers

- 1 digital ohmmeter,

- 1 wire stripper,

- 1 pair of scissors.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/14

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2

A

2.4-2 TSX TLYEX line terminator

When using extendable racks, Bus X must be fitted with a line terminator at each end

(see outline diagram in section 2.3-1).

A line terminator is made up of a 9-pin

SUB D connector and a cover containing the matching elements. It fits onto the

9-pin SUB D connectors on the extendable racks located at the end of the line.

A

B

TSX TLYEX line terminators are sold in lots of 2 and marked A/ and /B. The bus must have an A/ terminator at one end and a /B terminator at the other end in no specific

order (see diagrams below).

!

All the station racks must be powered down prior to inserting or removing a line terminator.

Positioning line terminators on a station with a TSX or PMX processor integrated on a TSX RKY ii

EX rack

- On a PLC station c o m p r i s i n g s e v e r a l

TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks

TSX RKY •• EX

TSX CBY •• 0K

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

TSX TLYEX

TSX RKY •• EX

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

TSX CBY •• 0K

O K O K N O K N O K

TSX RKY •• EX

- On a PLC station comprising one TSX

RKY ii EX extendable rack

Note :

When using a single extendable rack, a line terminator must be fitted on each 9-pin SUB D connector on the rack.

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

2/15

A

• Positioning line terminators on a station with a PCX 57 processor integrated in a PC

P C

PCX 57

A

B

A

B

OK NOK

The equivalent of line terminator /A is integrated in the processor as standard, and thus the processor is located at the head of the Bus X line. The extendable rack located at the end of the daisy chain must be fitted with a TSX TLY EX line terminator

(marked /B) on the unused 9-pin SUB D connector.

Special case

If no element is connected on Bus X, a TSX TLYEX line terminator, /B, must be installed on the Bus X connector on the PCX 57 processor.

TSX TLYEX

A

B

A

B

OK NOK

___________________________________________________________________________

2/16

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2

A

2.4-3 TSX RKA 02 protective cover for an empty slot

If there are any unoccupied positions on a rack, it is advisable to fit a TSX RKA 02 cover in this position, which is designed for this purpose.

This cover fits on the rack in the same way as a shallow version of a module.

TSX RKA 02 covers are sold in lots of 5.

2.4-4 Marking

• Marking module positions on the rack

When the module is in place on the rack, it hides the position marker which is screen-printed on the rack. So that a module position can still be identified quickly, each rack comes with a sheet of self-adhesive labels which can be used to mark the position of each module.

These self-adhesive labels can be stuck on top of the module when it is in place on the rack.

Label position

Sheet of labels

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14

Example : processor module marking

___________________________________________________________________________

2/17

A

• Marking racks

Each rack is supplied with a pack of clip-on markers on a strip. These can be used to mark each rack with :

- the address of the rack in the station

- the network address of the station, if this is connected to a communication network.

Each rack therefore has two locations to take these markers.

Station network address

Rack address in the station

___________________________________________________________________________

2/18

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii EX extendable racks 2

A

2.5

Compatibility with the existing installed base

Existing configuration with

2 TSX TLY

(ii 01) line terminators

TSX CBY ii

0K

(ii 01) cables

Old references New references

TSX RKY ii

E TSX RKY ii

E TSX RKY ii

E TSX RKY ii

EX

TSX CBY ii

0K (ii 01) TSX CBY ii

0K (ii 01) TSX CBY ii

0K (ii 02) TSX CBY ii

0K (ii 02)

TSX TLY (ii 01) TSX TLY A+B (ii 03) or TSX CBY 1000 or TSX CBY 1000

TSX TLY A+B (ii 03) TSX TLYEX A/+/B

Yes No No No

Yes Yes No No

Yes Yes No TSX TLY A+B line terminators

(ii 03)

TSX racks

TSX RKY ii

E

Yes

Yes

TSX cable(s)

CBY ii

0K (ii 02) or CBY 1000

TSX racks

RKY ii

EX

Yes

Yes

TSX TLYEX line terminators

A/+/B

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Note :

On a PLC station, the TSX TLY line terminator coupling must be the same version.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/19

A

___________________________________________________________________________

2/20

3 TSX 57/PMX57/PCX 57 processors

3.1

General presentation

A wide range of processors is available, increasing in capacity and performance levels to best meet the differing needs of users :

• TSX 57 sequential processors, which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks :

- TSX P57 102 processor,

- TSX P57 202, TSX P57 252 processors,

- TSX P57 302, TSX P57 352 processors,

- TSX P57 402, TSX P57 452 processors,

• PMX 57 process control processors, which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks :

- TPMX P57 102 processor :

- TPMX P57 202 processor : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 102 processor and performance levels which are equivalent to TSX P57 2 i 2 processors. It can also be used to manage 10 process control channels.

processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 57 202 processor and performance levels which are equivalent to TSX P57 4 i 2 processors. It can also be used to manage 10 process control channels.

- TPMX P57 352 processor :

- TPMX P57 452 processor : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 57 352 processor and performance levels which are equivalent to TSX P57 4 i 2 processors. It can also be used to manage 10 process control channels.

processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 57 452 processor and performance levels which are equivalent to TSX P57 4 i 2 processors. It can also be used to manage 10 process control channels.

• PCX 57 sequential processors, which can be integrated in a PC :

- TPCX 57 1012 processors : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 102 processor.

- TPCX 57 3512 processors : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 352 processor.

TSX 57 / PMX 57 and PCX 57 processors manage an entire PLC station comprising discrete I/O modules, analog I/O modules and application-specific modules (counter, axis control, stepper motor control, communication) which can be distributed over one or more racks connected on Bus X.

The application is designed using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software under Windows, which offers :

• Four programming languages : Grafcet, Ladder, Structured Text and List languages,

• A multitask software structure : master task, fast task, event processing,

• Modification of currently running programs,

• etc

___________________________________________________________________________

3/1

A

A

3.2

TSX / PMX 57 processors, which can be integrated in

TSX RKY ii racks

3.2-1 Catalog

Type of processor TSX processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks

Station characteristics (1)

TSX RKY..EX racks 2

TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 4

Module slots (2) 21 [27]

8

16

87 [111]

I/O profile (3) F i x e d

No. of in-rack discrete I/O (4) 512

No. of analog I/O channels 24

No. of app-specific chans (5) 8

1024

80

24

1 (FIPWAY, ETHWAY/TCP_IP, Modbus +) Network connection

FIPIO master connection

1 (6) Third party fieldbus connection

AS-i sensor/actuator bus connection

Memory characteristics

Internal memory

Memory extension

2

32 K16

64 K16

4

48 K16

128 K16

References TSX P 57 102 TSX P 57 202

1 (integrated)

64 K16

TSX P 57 252

(1) Maximum characteristics for the station managed by the processor

(2) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, [27] or [111] slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.

(3) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative

(4) In-rack discrete I/O. Discrete I/O on FIPIO bus, third party fieldbus, AS-i sensor/actuator bus are to be counted additionally.

(5) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : definition and number of application-specific channels)

3/2

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

Catalog (continued)

Type of processor TSX processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks

Station characteristics (1)

TSX RKY..EX racks 8

TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 16

Module slots (2) 87

I/O profile (3)

No. of discrete I/O (4)

No. of analog channels

No. of app.-spec. chans (5)

FIPIO master connection

Network connection

Fixed

1024

128

32

[111]

1 (integrated)

3 (FIPWAY,ETHWAY/TCP_IP

Modbus +)

Third party fieldbus connection

AS-i sensor/actuator bus connection

Memory characteristics

Internal memory

Memory extension

2 (6)

8

64 K16

256 K16

80 K16

Flexible

2040 maximum

255 maximum

48 maximum

1 (integrated)

4 (FIPWAY,ETHWAY/TCP_IP

Modbus +)

96 K16 96/112 K16(7)

References TSX P57 302 TSX P57 352 TSX P57 402 TSX P57 452

(1) Maximum characteristics for the station managed by the processor

(2) 87 slots with 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, [111] slots with 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.

(3) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative

Flexible I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is not cumulative (see section 3.5-4 of this manual).

(4) In-rack discrete I/O. Discrete I/O on FIPIO bus, third party fieldbus, AS-i sensor/actuator bus are to be counted additionally.

(5) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : number of app-specific channels)

(6) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP.

3/3

A

Catalog (continued)

Type of processor PMX processors which can be integrated in TSX RKY ii racks

Station characteristics (1)

TSX RKY..EX racks 2

TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 4

Module slots (2)

I/O profile (3)

21

Fixed

No. of discrete I/O (4)

No. of analog I/O chan.

No.of app-spec.chan.(5)

Control loops

Network connection

512

24

8

10

[27]

8

16

87

1024

80

24

[111]

128

32

Flexible

2040 max.

255 max.

48 max.

1 3 4

(FIPWAY, ETHWAY/TCP_IP, Modbus +) (FIPWAY, ETHWAY/TCP_IP, Modbus+)

1 (integrated)

1 (6) 2 (6)

FIPIO master connection

Third party fieldbus connection

AS-i sensor/actuator bus connection

Memory characteristics

Internal memory

Memory extension

2

48 K16

64 K16

4

48 K16

128 K16

8

80 K16

256 K16

96/112 K16(7)

References TPMX P57 102 TPMX P57 202 TPMX P57 352 T PMX P57 452

(1) Maximum characteristics for the station managed by the processor

(2) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, [27] or [111] slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor

(3) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative

Flexible I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is not cumulative (see section 3.5-4 in this part).

(4) In-rack discrete I/O. Discrete I/O on FIPIO bus, third party fieldbus, AS-i sensor/actuator bus are to be counted additionally.

(5) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : number of app-specific channels)

(6) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP.

3/4

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

3.2-2 Physical description

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Standard format processors :

TSX P57 102/202/252/302/352

T PMX P57 102

Double format processors :

TSX P57 402/452

T PMX P57 202/352/452

1 Display block comprising 4 or 5 indicator lamps :

• RUN indicator lamp (green) : on if the processor is operating (program running),

• ERR indicator lamp (red) : when on, this indicates faults relating to the processor and its installed devices

(PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card)

• I/O indicator lamp (red) : when on, this indicates faults originating from another station module or a configuration fault,

• TER indicator lamp (yellow) : when flashing, this indicates activity on the terminal port. The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic.

• FIP indicator lamp (yellow): when flashing, this indicates activity on the FIPIO bus (only on TSX / TPMX P57 i 52 processors). The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic.

2 Pencil-point RESET button which causes the PLC to perform a cold start when pressed.

3 Terminal port (TER connector) : enables a peripheral device (with or without its own power supply) to be connected : programming or adjustment terminal, man-machine interface terminal, printer, etc.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

A

4 Terminal port (AUX connector) : enables a peripheral device (with or without its own power supply) to be connected : programming or adjustment terminal, manmachine interface terminal, printer, etc.

5 Slot for a type 1 PCMCIA format memory extension card.

!

If no card is present, this slot is fitted with a cover which MUST remain in place; if removed, the processor will stop.

6 Slot for a type 3 PCMCIA format communication card which enables a FIPWAY, FIPIO

Agent, UNI-TELWAY, or serial link communication channel to be connected to the processor.

If no communication card is present, this slot is fitted with a cover.

7 9-pin SUB D connector for connection to the FIPIO master bus. This connector is only available on TSX P57 i 52 or T PMX P57 i 52 processors.

3.2-3 Installation/mounting

• Installing a standard format processor module

A standard format processor module is always installed on the TSX RKY ii

rack at

address 0 and in position 00 or 01 depending on whether the rack is equipped with a standard format or double format power supply module.

• Rack with TSX PSY 2600/1610 standard format power supply module : PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

In this instance, the processor module will be installed in position 00 (preferred position) or position 01 (in which case, position 00 must be empty).

• Rack with TSX PSY 3610/5500/5520/

8500 double format power supply module :

In this instance, since the power supply module takes up two positions (PS and

00), the processor has to be installed in position 01.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

___________________________________________________________________________

3/6

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

• Installing a double format processor module

A double format processor module is always installed on the TSX RKY ii rack at

address 0 and in positions 00 and 01 or 01 and 02 depending on whether the rack is equipped with a standard format or double format power supply module.

- Rack with TSX PSY 2600/1610 double format power supply module :

In this instance, the processor module will be installed in positions 00 and 01

(preferred position) or in positions 01 and 02, in which case position 00 must be empty.

• Rack with TSX PSY 3610/5500/5520/

8500 double format power supply module :

In this instance, since the power supply module takes up two positions (PS and

00), the processor has to be installed in positions 01 and 02.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Note : The rack where the processor is installed is always address 0

• Mounting :

The procedure for mounting modules is defined in section 6.4-1.

!

The rack power supply must always be powered down prior to mounting a processor module.

Precautions to be taken when replacing a processor

!

If a TSX / PMX 57 processor is being replaced by another processor which has already been programmed and contains an application, the power must be cut to all the PLC station control devices.

Before restoring the power to the control devices, check that the processor actually contains the required application.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/7

A

3.2-4 Display

Five indicator lamps on the processor front panel enable rapid diagnostics of the PLC status :

RUN indicator lamp green) : shows the application status

• On : PLC running normally, program execution,

• Flashing : PLC stopped or affected by software blocking fault,

• Off : the PLC is not configured : application missing, invalid or

RUN

TER

FIP incompatible.

PLC in error mode : processor or system fault.

ERR

I / O

RUN

TER

FIP

ERR

I / O

ERR indicator lamp (red) : signals faults relating to the processor and its ancillary equipment (memory card and PCMCIA communication card)

• On : PLC in error mode : processor or system fault,

• Flashing :

- PLC not configured (application missing, invalid or incompatible).

- PLC affected by software blocking fault,

- memory card battery fault

- Bus X fault (1)

• Off : normal status, no internal fault.

I/O indicator lamp (red) : signals configuration faults and faults arising from other station modules :

• On : I/O fault originating from another module or channel, or a configuration fault

• Flashing : Bus X fault (1),

• Off : normal status, no internal fault.

TER indicator lamp (yellow) : signals activity on the TER terminal port

• Flashing : link active. The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic

• Off : link inactive

FIP indicator lamp (yellow), only on TSX/TPMX P57 i 52 processors : this indicates activity on the FIPIO bus

• Flashing : link active. The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic

• Off : link inactive

(1) A Bus X fault is indicated by the ERR and I/O indicator lamps flashing simultaneously.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/8

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

3.3

PCX 57 processors, which can be integrated in a PC

3.3-1 Presentation

Integrated in a host PC (1) which is running under Windows 95/98 or Windows NT and has a 16-bit ISA bus, PCX 57 processors, using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software, manage an entire PLC station made up of racks, discrete I/O modules, analog I/O modules and application-specific modules which can be distributed over one or more racks connected on Bus X. The PCX 57 processor communicates with the PC on which it is installed via the 16-bit ISA bus. To do this, a communication driver (ISAWAY 95/98 or ISAWAY NT) must be installed.

H o s t

P C

PCX 57 processor

Two types of processor are available to meet the differing needs of users :

• TPCX 57 1012 processors : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 102 processor.

•- TPCX 57 3512 processors : processor with the same capacity as a TSX P57 352 processor.

Characteristics of the host PC

To receive a PCX 57 processor, the host PC must :

• operate under Windows 95/98 or Windows NT,

• have an 8 MHz 16-bit ISA bus,

• have two standard slots available on the ISA bus (consecutive and 20.32 mm apart), with sufficient space in terms of height and width. The format of the PCX 57 processor card is identical to that of a 16-bit ISA PC card,

• comply with the ISA standards (signals, power supply, etc)

(1) In the remainder of this document, the term host PC covers a Groupe Schneider industrial

PC type device or any other commercially available PC which has the characteristics defined above.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/9

A

3.3-2 Catalog

Type of module Processors which can be integrated in a PC

Station characteristics (1)

TSX RKY..EX racks 2

TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks 4

Module slots (2)

I/O profile (3)

21

Fixed

[27]

No. of discrete I/O (4)

No. of analog I/O chan.

No. of app-spe. chan (5)

FIPIO master conn.

Network connection

512

24

8

1(FIPWAY, ETHWAY/TCP_IP

Modbus +)

Third party fieldbus connection

AS-i sensor/actuator bus connection

Memory characteristics

Internal memory

2

32 K16

64 K16 Memory extension

References TPCX 57 1012

8

16

87 [111]

1024

128

32

1 (integrated)

3(FIPWAY, ETHWAY/TCP_IP

Modbus +)

2 (6)

8

80 K16

256 K16

TPCX 57 3512

(1) Maximum characteristics for the station managed by the processor

(2) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, [27] or [111] slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor

(3) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative

(4) In-rack discrete I/O. Discrete I/O on FIPIO bus, third party fieldbus, AS-i sensor/actuator bus are to be counted additionally.

(5) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : number of application-specific channels)

(6) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/10

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

3.3-3 Physical description

1 BAT, RUN, TER, I/O and

FIP indicator lamps (the

FIP lamp is only present on the TPCX

57 3512 model).

2 Slot for a type 1

PCMCIA format memory extension card.

3 Micro-switches for coding the position of the module on the rack.

4 Micro-switches for coding the rack address on Bus X.

3

4

5

6

5 Slot for a type 3 PCMCIA format memory extension card.

6 9-pin female SUB D connector for remote connection of Bus X to an extendable rack.

10

7 Terminal port (TER connector) : enables a peripheral device (with or without its own power supply) to be connected : programming or adjustment terminal, man-machine interface terminal, printer, etc.

8 Pencil-point RESET button which causes the PLC to perform a cold start when pressed.

9 ERR indicator lamp.

10 9-pin male SUB D connector for connection to the FIPIO master bus. This connector is only present on the PCX P57 3512 processor.

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

1

2

11 16-bit ISA connector for connection to the host PC.

12 Micro-switches for coding the address of the PCX 57 processor on the ISA bus (I/O space).

13 Coding devices for selecting the interrupt (IRQ ii), used by the processor on the ISA bus.

14 Slot which takes a battery for backing up the processor internal RAM memory.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/11

A

3.3-4 Mounting / installation

Mounting (see section 6.5)

Precautions to be taken when replacing a processor

!

If a PCX 57 processor is being replaced by another processor which has already been programmed and contains an application, the power must be cut to all the PLC station control devices.

Before restoring the power to the control devices, check that the processor actually contains the required application.

• Physical installation in the PC

The PCX 57 processor mechanically occupies two consecutive slots 1 and 2 on the

ISA bus but electrically only uses one

1

. The second slot

2

is used by the mechanical part of the PCMCIA communication card.

The size and dimensions of the PCX 57 processor card are given in section 6 in this part.

Note : It is possible to install 2

PCX 57 processors in one PC.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/12

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

• Logical installation on Bus X

The PCX 57 processor logically occupies the same slot as a TSX/PMX 57 processor

(rack address 0, position 00 or 01).

The TSX RKY ii EX rack at address 0 must receive a power supply module and the position normally occupied by a TSX 57 or PMX 57 processor will be empty (virtual slot of PCX 57 processor). For Premium PLCs with two types of power supply

(standard format or double format), the empty position at rack address 0 will depend on the type of power supply used.

Note : The racks can be addressed in any order on Bus X.

Using a standard format power supply module :

Rack address : 0

Position address : 00

TSX RKY ii EX rack at address x

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Special feature of rack at address 0 :

- The power supply module always occupies position PS.

- Position 00, virtual slot for the processor, must be empty.

- The other modules should be installed from position 01 onwards.

TSX RKY ii EX rack at address y

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

TSX RKY ii EX rack at address 0

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

___________________________________________________________________________

3/13

A

Using a double format power supply module :

TSX RKY ii EX rack at address x

Rack address : 0

Position address : 01

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Special feature of rack at address 0 :

- The power supply module always occupies positions PS and 00.

- Position 01, the virtual slot for the processor, must be empty.

- The other modules should be installed from position 02 onwards.

TSX RKY ii EX rack at address 0

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

TSX RKY ii EX rack at address y

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

!

The slot corresponding to the address of the PCX 57 processor (physically free on the rack) should not be used by another module.

!

For the PCX 57 processor to read its address on Bus X, the Bus X address must be configured using the micro-switches on the processor card.

(See section 6.5-4 : preliminary operations before installing the processor in the PC).

3.3-5 Display

Six indicator lamps (BAT, RUN, TER, I/O, FIP and ERR) on the processor card enable rapid diagnostics of the PLC status.

Because of the lack of space available on the front cover, only the ERR indicator lamp is visible when the PC receiving the processor is closed. In order to assist the user, the state of the RUN, I/O and ERR and FIP indicator lamps is displayed via a utility in the

Windows 95 or Windows NT system taskbar on the PC in which the processor card is installed. This function is only available when the host PC is operational (ISAWAY driver installed).

___________________________________________________________________________

3/14

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

ERR

BAT indicator lamp (red) : this indicates the state of the backup battery for the processor internal RAM memory.

• on if battery missing, run down, wrong way round, or incompatible type

• off during normal operation,

RUN indicator lamp (green) : shows the application status

• On : PLC running normally, program execution,

• Flashing : PLC stopped or affected by software blocking fault,

• Off : the PLC is not configured : application missing, invalid or incompatible.

PLC in error mode : processor or system fault.

TER indicator lamp (yellow) : signals activity on the TER terminal port

• Flashing : link active. The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic

• Off : link inactive

I/O indicator lamp (red) : signals configuration faults and faults arising from other station modules :

• On : I/O fault originating from another module or channel, or a configuration fault

• Flashing : Bus X fault (1),

• Off : normal status, no internal fault.

FIP indicator lamp (yellow), only on TPCX 57 3512 processors : this indicates activity on the FIPIO bus

• Flashing : link active. The frequency of flashing depends on the amount of traffic

• Off : link inactive

ERR indicator lamp (red) : signals faults relating to the processor and its ancillary equipment (memory card and PCMCIA communication card)

• On : PLC in error mode : processor or system fault,

• Flashing :

- PLC not configured (application missing, invalid or incompatible).

- PLC affected by software blocking fault,

- memory card battery fault

- Bus X fault (1)

• Off : normal status, no internal fault.

(1) A Bus X fault is indicated by the ERR and I/O indicator lamps flashing simultaneously.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/15

A

3.4

Auxiliary functions common to all processors

3.4-1 Terminal port

• On TSX 57 and PMX 57 processors

Each processor has a terminal port (non-isolated RS 485 link), with two 8-pin mini-

DIN connectors, used to physically connect two devices on the processor front panel :

- TER connector :

This is used to connect an FTX type or PC compatible terminal, or to connect the PLC to the UNI-TELWAY bus by means of the TSX P ACC 01 isolator box. This port enables power of 5V to be supplied to the connected accessory (within the limits of the current available from the power supply unit).

- AUX connector :

This is used to connect a peripheral device with its own power supply, (terminal, man-machine interface terminal or printer) (no voltage supplied to this connector).

The default communication mode for the TER and AUX connectors is UNI-TELWAY master at 19200 bauds and, by configuration, UNI-TELWAY slave mode or ASCII character mode.

• On PCX 57 processors

Each processor has a terminal port (non-isolated RS

485 link), with two 8-pin mini-DIN connectors, used to physically connect a device to the processor :

- TER connector :

This is used to connect an FTX type or PC compatible terminal, or to connect the PLC to the UNI-TELWAY bus by means of the TSX P ACC 01 isolator box. This port enables power of 5V to be supplied to the connected accessory (within the limits of the current available from the PC power supply).

The default communication mode for the terminal port is UNI-TELWAY master at

19200 bauds and, by configuration, UNI-TELWAY slave mode or ASCII character mode.

Note :

The various connection possibilities and the different operating modes for these terminal ports are explained in the "Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3".

___________________________________________________________________________

3/16

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

3.4-2 Slot for PCMCIA communication card

Each processor has a slot for inserting a type 3 PCMCIA format communication card.

This slot can take any card which conforms to the internal interface standard.

Processors :

TSX P57

TPMX P57 !

Do not insert or remove a communication card when the processor is powered up.

Note :Further information on how to install the various communication cards is provided in the "Communication, Bus and Network

Interfaces Installation Manual - Volume 3"

Processor :

PCX 57

The various types of communication card, which can be integrated in the following processors :

• TSX SCP111 : multiprotocol card (UNI-TELWAY,

Modbus/Jbus, character mode), RS 232 D, 9 signals, non-isolated,

• TSX SCP112 : multiprotocol card (UNI-TELWAY,

Modbus/Jbus, character mode), current loop (20mA

CL),

• TSX SCP114 : multiprotocol card (UNI-TELWAY,

Modbus/Jbus, character mode), RS 485, compatible with isolated RS 422, Type 3 PCMCIA c o m m u n i c a t i o n cards

• TSX FPP 10 : FIPIO Agent bus card,

• TSX FPP 20 : FIPWAY network card,

• TSX MBP 100 : Modbus+ network card,

• TSX MDM 10 : Modem cards.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/17

A

3.4-3 Memories

• Internal RAM memory

Each processor has an internal RAM memory. This memory can receive the whole application. If this is too large, the memory can be extended by a PCMCIA memory card.

Processors

TSX P 57 102 - TPCX 57 1012

TSX P57 202 - T PMX P57 102/202

TSX P57 252/302

TSX P57 352 - T PMX P57 352 - TPCX 57 3512

TSX P57 402

Internal RAM memory capacity

32 K16

48 K16

64 K16

80 K16

96 K16

TSX P57 452 - TPMX P57 452 96/112 K16(1)

(1) When the application is stored in the internal RAM, memory capacity is limited to 96 K16 .

When the application is in the PCMCIA card, the internal memory capacity is 112 K16.

Note : Organization of the application memory (internal RAM + PCMCIA memory card) is described in this part - section 8.4.

Internal RAM memory backup :

- On TSX 57 and PMX 57 processors

The processor internal RAM memory can be protected by an optional battery located in the power supply module. This protection is obviously only effective if the power supply and processor modules are in place on the rack.

- On PCX 57 processors

The processor internal RAM memory can be protected by an optional battery located on the processor card.

Backup period

The backup period depends on two factors :

- the percentage of time for which the PLC is powered down and thus the time for which the battery is used,

- the ambient temperature when the PLC is powered down

Ambient temperature when powered down

30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C

Backup period

PLC powered down 12 hours/day

PLC powered down 1 hour/day

5 years 3 years 2 years 1 year

5 years 5 years 4.5 years 4 years

The processors have their own local backup facility which is effective when removing :

- the battery from the TSX PSY power supply (backup on TSX/PMX 57 processors),

- the battery from the PCX 57 processor card.

The backup period depends on the ambient temperature. If the processor was previously powered up, the guaranteed time varies as follows :

Ambient temperature during power down 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C

Backup period 2 h 45 min 20 min 8 min

___________________________________________________________________________

3/18

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

• PCMCIA memory extension card on TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor

The slot located on the processor front panel, protected by a cover, can be used to insert an optional type 1

PCMCIA format memory card. This card can be used to extend the processor internal memory in order to store the application program and the constants.

Note : before inserting a PCMCIA memory card, the protective cover must first be removed.

Handling PCMCIA memory cards with the power on

A PCMCIA memory card can be inserted or removed with the power on. To become operational, the memory card handle must be fitted; if this is missing, the processor will not start (processor faulty, ERR indicator lamp on).

When a memory card complete with handle is inserted, this causes the processor to cold-start.

!

If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted.

Handle

PCMCIA memory card

• PCMCIA memory extension card on PCX 57 processor

PCX 57 processors have a slot which can take a type 1 PCMCIA format memory extension communication card.

PCMCIA memory card

!

The memory cards inserted in a

PCX 57 processor do not have a handle, thus they must be inserted or removed with the PC powered down.

PCMCIA memory cards do not have a location coding device, so should be inserted in the direction shown in the diagram opposite.

PCX 57 processor

!

If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted and the PC started.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/19

A

Three types of memory card are available :

• Standard memory cards :

- protected RAM type memory extension card : used predominantly during creation and debugging of the application program, this can be used for all online functions for transferring and modifying the application.

The memory is protected by a removable battery integrated in the memory card.

- Flash Eprom type memory extension card : used once the application program has been debugged, this can only be used to perform a global transfer of the application and to overcome the problems of battery backup.

• BACKUP type memory card :

Already loaded with the application program, this can be used to reload the application program into the processor internal RAM memory without needing to use a programming terminal.

This card cannot be used unless the application is only in the processor internal

RAM memory and the total size (program + constants) is less than 32 Kwords.

References of standard and Backup type memory extension cards

References

TSX MRP 032P

TSX MRP 064P

TSX MRP 0128P

TSX MRP 0256P

Type/Capacity

RAM/32 K16

RAM/64 K16

Processor compatibility

TSX P57 102 TSX P57 2 i 2 TSX P57 3 i 2

TPMX P57 102 TPMX P57 202 TSX P57 4 i 2

TPCX 57 1012 TPMX P57 352

TPMX P57 452

TPCX 57 3512

Yes Yes Yes

RAM/128 K16

RAM/256 K16

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

TSX MFP 032P

TSX MFP 064P

Flash Eprom/32 K16

Flash Eprom/64 K16

Yes

Yes

TSX MFP 0128P Flash Eprom/128 K16 No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

TSX MFP BAK032P BACKUP/32 K16 Yes Yes Yes

Note:

Memory capacity : K16 = Kwords (word of 16 bits)

Organization of the application memory (internal RAM + PCMCIA memory card) is described in this part - section 8.4

___________________________________________________________________________

3/20

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

• Application + files memory cards

In addition to the traditional application storage zone, these memory cards have :

- for all cards, a file area for archiving data by program.

Application examples :

- automatic storage of application data and remote viewing via modem link

- storage of manufacturing recipes

- etc

- for some cards, an area for archiving the client application symbol database. This symbol database is compressed to that it does not cause any space problems in the zone allocated to it (128 K16).

There are two types of memory card :

- application + files protected RAM type memory extension card . The memory is protected by a removable battery integrated in the memory card.

- application + files Flash Eprom memory extension card . In this case, the data storage area is protected RAM, which means that this type of card must have a backup battery.

References of application + files memory extension cards

References area

Type/Capacity

Application File area

(type

RAM)

TSX MRP 232P RAM/32 K16 128 K16 –

TSX MRP 264P RAM/64 K16 128 K16 –

Compatibility with processors

Symb. TSXP57102 TSXP572 i 2 TSXP573 i 2 area

(RAM type)

TPMXP57102 TPMX

TPCX571012 P57202

TSXP574 i 2

TPMXP57452

TPCX573512

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

TSX MRP 2128P RAM/128 K16 128 K16 128 No

K16

TSX MRP 3256P RAM/256 K16 640 K16 128 No

(5x128K16) K16

TSX MFP 232P Flash Eprom/ 128 K16 –

32 K16

Yes

TSX MFP 264P Flash Eprom/ 128 K16 –

64 K16

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

___________________________________________________________________________

3/21

A

3.4-4 Processor RESET pushbutton

Using a pencil to push this button on the processor front panel causes the application to cold-start :

• Processor in normal operation : cold start in STOP or in RUN, according to procedure defined at the time of configuration,

• Processor faulty : forced start in STOP.

Note :

The operating modes which are effective after a cold start are described in this part - section 9

!

On PCX 57 processors the RESET button should be pressed with an insulated object.

TSX / PMX processors

PCX processors

___________________________________________________________________________

3/22

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

3.4-5 Realtime clock

Each processor has a battery-backed realtime clock which manages :

• the current date and time,

• the date and time of the last application stop

The date and time are still managed when the processor is powered down (see the backup period, section 3.4-3) provided that :

• The TSX/PMX 57 processor is mounted on the rack with its power supply module in place, and fitted with a backup battery,

• The PCX 57 processor is fitted with a backup battery.

• Current date and time

The processor updates the current date and time in system words %SW49 to %SW53.

This data is encoded in BCD format.

System words

%SW49

%SW50

%SW51

%SW52

%SW53

High order byte

00

Seconds (0 to 59)

Hours (0 to 23)

Month (1 to 12)

Century (0 to 99)

Low order byte

Days of the week (1 to 7)

00

Minutes (0 to 59)

Days of the month (1 to 31)

Year (0 to 99)

• Access to the date and time :

- via the processor debug screen,

- via the program :

reads : system words %SW49 to %SW53 if system bit %S50 = 0

immediate updating : writes system words %SW49 to %SW53 if system bit

%S50 = 1

incremental updating : system word %SW59 is used to set the date and time field by field starting from the current value if system bit %S59 = 1 bit 0 = 1 increments the day of the week bit 1 = 1 increments the seconds bit 2 = 1 increments the minutes bit 3 = 1 increments the hours bit 4 = 1 increments the days bit 5 = 1 increments the months bit 6 = 1 increments the years bit 7 = 1 increments the centuries bit 8 = 1 decrements the day of the week bit 9 = 1 decrements the seconds bit 10 = 1 decrements the minutes bit 11 = 1 decrements the hours bit 12 = 1 decrements the days bit 13 = 1 decrements the months bit 14 = 1 decrements the years bit 15 = 1 decrements the centuries

Note : the processor does not manage the changeover from winter to summer time automatically.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/23

A

• Date and time of the last application stop

The date and time of the last application stop are stored in BCD format in system words

%SW54 to %SW58.

System words

%SW54

%SW55

%SW56

%SW57

%SW58

High order byte

Seconds (0 to 59)

Hours (0 to 23)

Month (1 to 12)

Century (0 to 99)

Day of the week (1 to 7)

Low order byte

00

Minutes (0 to 59)

Days of the month (1 to 31)

Year (0 to 99)

Cause of the last application stop

- access to the date and time of the last application stop :

By reading system words %SW54 to %SW58

- cause of the last application stop :

By reading the low order byte of system word %SW58 (value stored in BCD format)

%SW58 = 1 application changes to STOP mode,

%SW58 = 2 stops the application after a software fault,

%SW58 = 4 power break or the power supply RESET button pressed

%SW58 = 5 stop due to hardware fault

%SW58 = 6 application stop after HALT instruction

___________________________________________________________________________

3/24

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

3.5

Characteristics

3.5-1 General characteristics

TSX 57 processors

Maximum Max. no. of TSX RKY12EX racks

TSX P v

configurationMax. no. of TSX RKY 4EX/4EX/8EX racks

Max. no. of slots (1)

Functions I/O profile (2)

Maximum In-rack discrete I/O number In-rack analog I/O of channels Application-specific (3)

Maximum Integrated UNI-TELWAY number (terminal port) of Network (ETHWAY, connections FIPWAY, Modbus +)

FIPIO master (integrated)

Third party fieldbus

AS-i fieldbus

Memory structure

Realtime clock can be backed up

Internal protected RAM

PCMCIA memory card (maximum capacity)

Max. memory size

Application Master task

Fast task

Event processing (1 event has priority)

Application Internal 100% Boolean code RAM 65% Boolean+35% numerical execution time for 1K instructions

System overhead

PCMCIA 100% Boolean card 65% Boolean+35% numerical

MAST no FIPIO bus used task FIPIO bus used

FAST task

-

57 102 57 202 57 252

2

4

21/27 87/111 87/111 fixed fixed fixed

512 1024 1024

24

8

1

1

-

2

1

32

-

8

16

80

24

1

1

1

4

8

16

80

24

1

1

Yes Yes Yes

32K16 48K16 64K16

64K16 128K16 128K16

96K16 176K16 192K16

1 1 1

1

64

1

1

4

1

64

0.72 ms 0.31 ms 0.31ms

1.39 ms 0.78 ms 0.78 ms

0.72 ms 0.47 ms 0.47 ms

1.39 ms 0.98 ms 0.98 ms

2.9 ms 2 ms

– –

2 ms

3.8 ms

0.8 ms 0.6 ms 0.6 ms

(1) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX, 27 and 111 slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKT 8EX. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.

(2) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative.

3/25

A

General characteristics (continued)

TSX 57 processors TSX P v

57 302 57 352 57 402 57 452

Maximum No. of TSX RKY 12EX racks config.

No. of TSX RKY 4EX/4EX/8EX racks 16

8

16

8

16

8

16

8

Max. no. of slots (1) 87/111 87/111 87/111 87/111

Functions I/O profile (2)

Maximum In-rack discrete I/O fixed

1024 number In-rack analog I/O of channels Application-specific (3)

Maximum Integrated UNI-TELWAY number (terminal port) of Network (ETHWAY, connections FIPWAY, Modbus +)

FIPIO master (integrated) -

1

3

128

32 fixed

1024

128

32

1

3

1

2

flexible

2040

255

48

1

4

2 flexible

2040max

255 max

48 max

1

4

1

2

Memory

Third party fieldbus (4)

AS-i fieldbus

Realtime clock can be backed up

Internal protected RAM

PCMCIA mem. card (max. capacity)(K16)

2

8

Yes

(K16) 64

256

8

Yes

80

256

8

Yes

8

Yes

96 96/112 (5)

256 256

Max. memory size

Application Master task

(K16) 320

1

336

1

352

1

368

1 structure Fast task 1

Event processing (1 event has priority) 64

Application Internal 100% Boolean

1

64

1

64

1

64

0.31 ms 0.31 ms 0.31 ms 0.31 ms code execution time

RAM 65% Boolean+35% num.

0.78 ms 0.78 ms 0.5 ms 0.5 ms for 1K PCMCIA 100% Boolean instructions card 65% Boolean+35% num.

System overhead

MAST no FIPIO bus used task FIPIO bus used

FAST task

0.47 ms 0.47 ms 0.47 ms 0.47 ms

0.98 ms 0.98 ms 0.68 ms 0.68 ms

2 ms 2 ms 0.6 ms 0.6 ms

– 3.8 ms – 1.1 ms

0.6 ms 0.6 ms 0.2 ms 0.2 ms

(1) 87 slots with 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, 111 slots with 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks. For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.

(2) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and app.-specific channels is cumulative.

Flexible I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is not cumulative, distribution is defined by a formula (see section 3.5-4).

(3) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : number of app-specific channels).

3/26

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

General characteristics (continued)

PMX 57 processors

Maximum No. of TSX RKY 12EX racks

TPMX P v 57 102 57 202 57 352 57 452

2 8 8 8

configuration No. of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks

Max. no. of slots (1)

Functions I/O profile (2)

Maximum In-rack discrete I/O number In-rack analog I/O of channels Application-specific (3)

No. of control loops managed

Maximum Integrated UNI-TELWAY number (terminal port) of Network (ETHWAY, connections FIPWAY, Modbus +)

4

21/27 87/111 87/111 87/111 fixed fixed fixed flexible

512 1024 1024 2040max

24

8

10

1

1

16

80

24

10

1

1

16

128

32

10

1

3

16

255 max

48 max

10

1

4

FIPIO master (integrated) -

Third party fieldbus (4) -

AS-i fieldbus 2

1

1

4

-

2

8

1

2

8

Memory

Realtime clock can be backed up

Internal protected RAM

Yes

(K16) 48

PCMCIA mem. card (max. capacity)(K16) 64

Max. memory size (K16) 112

Yes

48

128

176

1

Yes Yes

80 96/112 (5)

256

336

1

256

368

1 Application Master task structure Fast task

1

1

Event processing (1 event has priority) 32

1

64

1

64

1

64

Application Internal 100% Boolean code RAM

0.31 ms 0.31 ms 0.31 ms 0.31 ms

65% Boolean+35% numerical 0.78 ms 0.78 ms 0.5 ms 0.5 ms

execution time PCMCIA 100% Boolean 0.47 ms 0.47 ms 0.47 ms 0.47 ms for 1K instr.

card

Processing

65% Boolean+35% numerical 0.98 ms 0.68 ms 0.68 ms 0.68 ms

Process loop (ms) 4 to 9.5

0.4 to 1 0.4 to 1 0.4 to 1 time

System overhead

Cascaded loop

MAST task no FIPIO bus used

FIPIO bus used

FAST task

(ms) 8 to 16

2 ms

0.6 ms

0.8 to 1.6 0.8 to 1.6 0.8 to 16

0.6 ms

1.1 ms

0.2 ms

0.6 ms

0.2 ms

0.6 ms

1.1 ms

0.2 ms

(1) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, 27 or 111 slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks.

For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.

(2), (3), (4), (5) : See definition on previous page.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/27

A

General characteristics (continued)

PCX 57 processors TPCX v

Maximum Max. no. of TSX RKY ii EX racks

configurationNo. of TSX RKY 4 EX/6EX/8EX racks

Max. no. of slots (1)

Functions I/O profile (2)

Maximum In-rack discrete I/O number In-rack analog I/O of channels Application-specific (3)

Maximum Integrated UNI-TELWAY number (terminal port) of Network (ETHWAY, connections FIPWAY, Modbus +)

FIPIO master (integrated)

Third party fieldbus (4)

AS-i fieldbus

Memory structure

Realtime clock can be backed up

Internal protected RAM

PCMCIA memory card (maximum capacity)

Max. memory size

Application Master task

Fast task

Event processing (1 event has priority)

Application Internal 100% Boolean code RAM 65% Boolean+35% numerical

execution time PCMCIA 100% Boolean for 1K inst.

System overhead card

MAST task

65% Boolean+35% numerical no FIPIO bus used

FIPIO bus used

FAST task

1

-

-

2

Yes

32K16

64K16

96K16

1

1

32

0.72 ms

1.39 ms

0.72 ms

1.39 ms

2.9 ms

0.8 ms

8

1

57 1012

2

4

21/27 fixed

512

24

57 3512

8

16

87/111 fixed

1024

128

32

1

3

(1) 21 or 87 slots with 2 or 8 TSX RKY 12EX racks, 27 or 111 slots with 4 or 16 TSX RKY 8EX racks.

For standard format modules, except power supply modules and processor.

(2) Fixed I/O profile : the number of discrete I/O, analog and application-specific channels is cumulative.

(3) Counter, axis control, etc, channels (see section 3.5-3 : number of application-specific channels).

(4) INTERBUS-S, PROFIBUS-DP.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/28

1

2

8

Yes

80K16

256K16

336K16

1

1

64

0.31 ms

0.78 ms

0.47 ms

0.98 ms

2 ms

3.8 ms

0.6 ms

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

General characteristics (continued)

Programming software

Programming languages

PL7 Junior under Windows 95/98 or NT

Ladder language,

Grafcet language, Structured Text language, List language

3.5-2 Electrical characteristics

Since the processors can accept certain devices which do not have their own power supply, the power consumption of these devices must be taken into account when calculating the overall power consumption.

• Devices without their own power supply which can be connected to the terminal port

- Adjustment terminal : T FTX 117 ADJUST,

- TSX P ACC01 box for connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus.

• Devices without their own power supply which can be integrated in the processor :

- TSX FPP 10/20 PCMCIA communication cards

- TSX SCP 111/112/114 PCMCIA communication card

- TSX MBP 100 PCMCIA communication card

- TSX MDM 10 modem card

TSX 57 and PMX 57 processors

Consumption of TSX PSY iii power supply module at 5VDC Typical

Processors + TSX P 57 102 440 mA

PCMCIA memory card 450 mA TSX P 57 202/302

TPMX P57 102

TSX P 57 252/352 500 mA

1300 mA TSX P 57 402

TPMX P57 202

TSX P57 452

TPMX P57 352/452

1350 mA

Dissipated power Typical

Processors +

PCMCIA memory card

2.2 W

2.25 W

TSX P 57 102

TSX P 57 202/302

TPMX P57 102

TSX P 57 252/352

TSX P 57 402

TPMX P57 202

TSX P57 452

TPMX P57 352/452

2.5 W

6.5 W

6.75 W

Maximum

600 mA

650 mA

750 mA

1700 mA

1750 mA

Maximum

3 W

3.25 W

3.75W

8.5W

8.75 W

___________________________________________________________________________

3/29

A

PCX 57 processors

PCX 57 processors have their own 5 VDC power supply, generated from the 12 VDC power supply of the host PC. The 12 VDC power supply of the host PC must therefore have sufficient power to take a PCX 57 processor.

Consumption of host PC at 12 VDC

Processors +

PCMCIA memory card

TPCX 57 1012

Typical

550 mA

Maximum

800 mA

Dissipated power

Processors +

PCMCIA memory card

TPCX 57 3512

TPCX 57 1012

600 mA

Typical

6.6 W

900 mA

Maximum

9.6W

TPCX 57 3512 7.2 W 10.8 W

Limit voltage of host PC at 12 VDC

11.4 V

12.6 V

Devices which can be connected to or integrated in the processor

TSX PSY iii power supply module consumption at 5 VDC Typical

Devices without their own power supply T FTX 117 ADJUST 310 mA

which connect to the terminal port (TER)TSX P ACC01

PCMCIA communication cards TSX FPP 10 which can be integrated in the processor

TSX FPP 20

TSX SCP 111

150 mA

330 mA

330 mA

140 mA

TSX SCP 112

TSX SCP 114

TSX MBP 100

TSX MDM 10

120 mA

150 mA

220 mA

195 mA

Dissipated power Typical

Devices without their own power supply T FTX 117 ADJUST 1.5 W which connect to the terminal port (TER) TSX P ACC01 0.5 W

PCMCIA communication cards which can be integrated in the processor

TSX FPP 10

TSX FPP 20

TSX SCP 111

1.65 W

1.65 W

0.7 W

TSX SCP 112

TSX SCP 114

TSX MBP 100

0.6 W

0.75 W

1.1 W

Maximum

340 mA

250 mA

360 mA

360 mA

300 mA

300 mA

300 mA

-

310 mA

Maximum

1.7 W

1.25 W

1.8 W

1.8 W

1.5 W

1.5 W

1.5 W

1.55 W

3/30

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

3.5-3 Definition and number of application-specific channels

App.-specific function

Counting

Motion control

Module/card

TSX CTY 2A

TSX CTY 2C

TSX CTY 4A

TSX CAY 21

TSX CAY 41

TSX CAY 22

TSX CAY 42

TSX CAY 33

App.-specific channels

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Y e s

Y e s

Y e s

Y e s

Stepper motor control

Modem

TSX CFY 21

TSX CFY 11

Y e s

Weighing TSX ISP Y100 Yes

Communication Serial links TSX SCP11 iC (in the processor) No

TSX SCP11 i (in the TSX SCY 21 i )Yes

TSX JNP11 i (in the TSX SCY 21 i ) Yes

TSX SCY 21 (integrated channel) Y e s

TSX MDM10

FIPIO agent TSX FPP10 in the processor

Y e s

No

Y e s 1

2

2

0 (*)

1

1

1

1

0 (*)

FIPIO master integrated in the processor No 0 (*)

(*) Although these channels are application-specific channels, they are not to be taken into account when calculating the maximum number of application-specific channels supported by the processor.

2

4

2

4

3

No.

2

2

4

Note : only those channels configured using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software are counted.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/31

A

3.5-4 I/O profile

• Fixed I/O profile :

The maximum number of in-rack discrete I/O, analog I/O and application-specific channels indicated in the various characteristics tables is cumulative.

• Flexible I/O profile :

The maximum number of in-rack discrete I/O, analog I/O and application-specific channels indicated in the various characteristics tables of the TSX/PMX P57 4 i 2 processors is not cumulative.

Each channel and group of channels (discrete, analog, application-specific) occupies space in the internal RAM and the system RAM. Since the system RAM is limited to

8800 bytes, the user must calculate the system RAM usage of the various modules and application-specific channels used in his terminal so that the system RAM occupation is less than 8800 bytes.

Note : If the system RAM occupation is greater than 8800 bytes, this will lead to a NON

CONFIGURED state of the processor when the application has been loaded.

The table on the next page gives the system RAM usage level for each type of module.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/32

TSX 57/PMX 57/PCX57 processors 3

A

Type of module

8 or 16-channel discrete I/O : TSX DEY• / TSX DSY•

28-channel discrete I/O : TSX DMY•

32 & 64-channel discrete I/O (1) : TSX DEY• / TSX DSY•

Safety : TSX PAY•

Bus X rackmaster : TSX REY 200

4, 8 or 16-channel analog : TSX AEY• / TSX ASY•

1, 2 or 4-channel counter : TSX CTY•

2, 3 or 4-channel axis control : TSX CAY•

1 or 2-channel stepper motor : TSX CFY•

Weighing : TSX ISP Y100

Serial link : TSX SCP 11•

Serial link : TSX SCY 2160•

Modem : TSX MDM 10

AS-i fieldbus : TSX SAY 100

FIPIO bus agent : TSX FPP10

Third party fieldbus INTERBUS-S: TSX IBY 100

60

25

System RAM usage in bytes

Per module Per channel

40 –

120

80

40

21

85

30

30

95

25

25

Network

PROFIBUS-DP: TSX PBY 100

ETHWAY: TSX ETY 110/120/210,

Modbus +: TSX MBP 100,

25

25

FIPWAY: TSX FPP 20 – –

(1) Mixing tasks (MAST, FAST) in channel groups of a 64-channel discrete I/O module generates a system RAM memory usage equivalent to 20 additional bytes per channel group.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/33

A

___________________________________________________________________________

3/34

TSX PSY iiii

Section 4

4 TSX PSY iiii power supplies

4.1

Presentation

4.1-1 General

TSX PSY iiii power supply modules are designed to supply power to each

TSX RKY iii rack and its modules. The power supply module is selected according to the distributed supply (DC or AC) and the required power (standard format or double format version).

Moreover, each power supply module has auxiliary functions such as :

• a display block, an alarm relay,

• a slot which takes a battery for backing up the data in the processor RAM memory,

• a pencil-point type pushbutton which, when pressed, simulates a power break, causing a warm restart of the application,

• a 24 VDC sensor power supply (only on versions powered by an AC supply).

Power supply modules for AC supply

Standard format model Double format model

TSX PSY 5500

A

TSX PSY 2600

100...240 VAC

Power supply modules for DC supply

Standard format model

TSX PSY 8500

100...120 / 200...240 VAC

Double format model

TSX PSY 1610 TSX PSY 3610

24 VDC, non-isolated

TSX PSY 5520

24...48 VDC, isolated

___________________________________________________________________________

4/1

A

4.1-2 Physical description

Power supplies take the form of the following modules :

• standard format, for TSX PSY 2600 and TSX PSY 1610 modules,

• double format, for TSX PSY 5500/3610/5520/8500 modules.

1 Display block comprising :

• an OK indicator lamp (green), on if the voltages are present and correct,

• a BAT indicator lamp (red), on when the battery is defective or missing,

• a 24V indicator lamp (green), on when the sensor voltage is present. This indicator lamp is only found on TSX

PSY 2600/5500/8500 AC power supplies.

2 Pencil-point RESET button which, when pressed, causes a warm restart of the application.

3 Slot which takes a battery for backing up the processor internal RAM memory.

4 Cover which protects the module front panel.

5 Screw terminals for connection :

• to the power supply network,

• of the alarm relay contact,

- of the sensor power supply for TSX

PSY 2600/5500/8500 AC supplies.

6 Hole for a cable clamp,

7 Fuse located under the module which protects :

- the 24 VR voltage on the TSX PSY 3610

DC power supply,

• the primary voltage on the TSX PSY 1610

DC power supply.

Note : On the TSX PSY 2600/5500/

5520/8500 power supplies, the protective fuse on the primary voltage is inside the module and cannot be accessed.

8 110/220 voltage selector, present only on the TSX PSY 5500/8500 AC power supplies. When delivered, the selector is set to 220.

Standard format

Double format

___________________________________________________________________________

4/2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

7

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A

4.2

Catalog

Module type Power supplies for AC supply

Input characteristics

Nominal voltages 100...240 VAC 100...120VAC / 200...240VAC

Limit values 85...264 VAC 85...140VAC / 190...264VAC

Limit frequency

Accepted duration of

AC supply micro-cuts

47...63 Hz

10 ms

Apparent power

Nominal input current

50 VA

0.5A to 100V

0.3A to 240V

150 VA

1.7A to 100V / 0.5A to 240V

Output characteristics

Total useful power

Auxiliary functions

Alarm relay

26 W 50 W

Output voltages a

5V, 24VR (1), 24VC (2)

Nominal current 5V a 5 A

24VR a

0.6 A

24VC a 0.5 A

7 A

0.8 A

0.8 A yes (1 N/O volt-free contact on terminal block)

80 W

5V, 24VC (2)

15 A not supplied

1.6 A

Display

Backup battery yes, via indicator lamps on the front panel yes (status monitoring via indicator lamp on module front panel)

Conformity to standards IEC 1131-2

References TSX PSY 2600 TSX PSY 5500 TSX PSY 8500

(1) 24V a voltage for supplying power to the relays, installed on "relay output" modules.

(2) 24 V voltage for supplying power to the sensors.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/3

A

Catalog

Module type Power supplies for DC supply

Input characteristics

Nominal voltages 24 VDC non-isolated

Limit values

Accepted duration of

AC supply micro-cuts

Nominal input current

19.2 ... 30 VDC

1ms

1.5 A

Output characteristics

Total useful power 26 W

Output voltages a

5V, 24VR (1)

Nominal current 5V a 3 A

24VR a

0.6 A

2.7A

50 W

7A

0.8 A

24...48 VDC isolated

19.2...60 VDC

3 A /24V

1.5A/48V

50 W

7 A

0.8 A

Auxiliary functions

Alarm relay

Display

Backup battery yes (1 N/O volt-free contact on terminal block) yes, via indicator lamps on the front panel yes (status monitoring via indicator lamp on module front panel)

Conformity to standards IEC 1131-2

References TSX PSY 1610 TSX PSY 3610 TSX PSY 5520

(1) 24V a

voltage for supplying power to the relays, installed on "relay output" modules.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/4

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A

4.3

Auxiliary functions

• Alarm relay

This relay, which is included in every power supply module, has a volt-free contact which can be accessed on the module screw connection terminals.

Connection terminal block

Ral

Principle

- Alarm relay of the module located on the rack supporting the processor (rack 0)

During normal operation, with the PLC running, the alarm relay is activated and its contact is closed (state 1). If the

PLC in RUN application stops, even partially, such as when a "blocking" fault appears,

PLC in STOP or faulty the output voltages are incorrect, or the supply voltage disappears, this relay is de-energized and its associated contact opens (state 0).

Alarm relay

1

0

Alarm relay operation rack 0

Appearance of a PLC blocking fault or incorrect voltages

Note :

If using a PCX 57 type processor which can be integrated in a PC, the power supply alarm relay is not managed and thus is always open.

If this function is absolutely essential to correct operation of the installation, the power supply module alarm relay function may be replaced by using a relay output from a module on Bus X or the FIPIO bus. To do this, this output must be :

- a relay output,

- configured with a fallback to 0 (default configuration),

- initialized at state 1 before execution of the application program.

When configured in this way, the relay output will behave in the same way as the alarm relay controlled by a TSX 57 processor.

- Alarm relay of modules located on the other racks (racks 1 to 7)

Once the module is powered up and the output voltages are correct, the alarm relay is activated and its contact is closed (state 1).

If the supply voltage disappears or the output voltages are incorrect, the relay is deenergized (state 0).

These operating modes enable these contacts to be used in external failsafe safety circuits such as, for example, interlocking of preactuator power supplies, data feedback.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/5

A

• Backup battery

Each power supply module has a slot to take a battery which supplies power to the internal RAM memory located in the processors, and therefore protects the data when the PLC is powered down. This battery, supplied in the same packaging as the power supply module, should be installed by the user, taking care to respect the polarity.

Note :

If using a PCX 57 type processor which can be integrated in a PC, the backup battery is built into the processor and its characteristics are the same as those described below.

- Battery characteristics : thionyl lithium chloride battery, 3.6 V / 0.8 Ah, size 1 / 2AA.

- Replacement part reference : TSX PLP 01

- Data backup period :

The data backup period depends on two factors :

- the percentage of time for which the PLC is powered down and thus the time for which the battery is used,

- the ambient temperature when the PLC is powered down.

Ambient temperature when powered down

Backup PLC powered down 12 hours/day

30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C

5 years 3 years 2 years 1 year period PLC powered down 1 hour/day 5 years 5 years 4.5 years 4 years

- Monitoring the state of the battery : When powered up, the power supply module monitors the state of the battery. In the event of a problem, the user receives a visual warning from the BAT indicator lamp (red), which comes on; if this happens, the battery must be changed immediately.

- Changing the battery : The battery can be changed with the power supply module powered up or immediately after it is powered down. In the latter instance, the user intervention time available is limited.

The backup period depends on the ambient temperature. If the processor was previously powered up, the guaranteed time varies as follows :

Ambient temperature during power-down

Backup period

20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C

2 hrs 45 min 20 min 8 min

___________________________________________________________________________

4/6

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A

• Display

Every power supply module has a display block comprising :

- Three indicator lamps (OK, BAT, 24V) for TSX PSY 2600/

5500/8500 AC power supplies,

- Two indicator lamps (OK, BAT) for TSX PSY 1610/

3610 / 5520 DC power supplies,

OK indicator lamp (green) :

- on during normal operation,

- off when the output voltages are below the thresholds.

OK

BAT

24 V

BAT indicator lamp (red) :

- off during normal operation,

- on if battery missing, run down, wrong way round, or incompatible type.

24V indicator lamp (green) :

- on during normal operation,

- off if the 24V sensor voltage delivered by the power supply is no longer present.

• RESET pushbutton

Action on this pushbutton results in a sequence of service signals identical to that for :

- a power break when pressed,

- a power-up when released.

These actions (press and release) effect a warm restart of the application (see section 8.5-2 - Part A).

• Sensor power supply

TSX PSY 2600/5500/8500 AC power supplies have an integrated power supply which delivers a 24 VDC voltage to supply the sensors.

This sensor power supply is accessible on the module screw terminal block.

!

This power supply cannot be wired in parallel with an external power supply.

Note :

The "24 VDC sensor supply" output on the TSX PSY 8500 module is SELV (safety extra low voltage) type. It therefore ensures the safety of the user.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/7

A

4.4

Installation / insertion

4.4-1 Installation

• TSX PSY 2600/1610 standard format power supply modules :

These are installed in the first slot of each TSX RKY   iii rack and occupy position PS.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

• TSX PSY 3610/5500/5520/8500 double format power supply modules :

These are installed in the first two slots of each TSX RKY i i i rack and occupy positions PS and 00.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Note :

Every power supply module has a locating system which ensures that it can only be installed in the slots designated above.

Important

The TSX PSY 8500 power supply module does not supply a 24 VR voltage. Thus a rack which is fitted with this module will not be able to take some modules, such as relay output and weighing modules (see section 4.6).

4.4-2 Insertion / connections

Inserting modules : see section 6.4-1 of this part.

Connections : see section 7.2 of this part.

!

When inserting or removing a TSX PSY iiii

power supply module, the external power supplies must be powered down.

Important:

The PLC internal 0V is connected to the machine ground. The machine ground itself must be connected to the earth ground.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/8

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A

4.5

Characteristics

4.5-1 Characteristics of AC power supplies

References

Primary Nominal voltages (V)

Limit voltages (V)

Nominal/limit frequencies

TSX PSY 2600 TSX PSY 5500 TSX PSY 8500 c

100…240 c

85..264

100..120/200..240

85..140/ 190..264

100..120/200..240

85..140/ 170..264

50 -60 / 47-63 Hz 50 -60 / 47-63 Hz 50 -60 / 47-63 Hz

Apparent power at

25°C

I 2 t on activation

50 VA 150 VA

0.63 A 2 s at 100 V4 A 2 s at 100 V

2.6 A 2 s at 240 V 2 A 2 s at 240 V

150 VA

Nominal current drawn : Irms

0.5 A at 100 V

1.7 A at 100 V

1.4 A at 100 V

0.3 A at 240 V

0.5 A at 240 V

0.5 A at 240 V

Initial power-up

I inrush

37 A at 100 V

38 A at 100 V

75 A at 240 V

38 A at 240 V

30 A at 100 V

60 A at 240 V

15 A 2 s at 100 V

8 A 2 s at 240 V

( 1 ) It on activation

0.034 As at 100V 0.11 As at 100V

0.067 As at 240V 0.11 As at 240V 0.15 As at 240V

Accepted duration of micro-cuts

10 ms

10 ms

0.15 As at 100V

10 ms

Integrated phase protection by fuse inside module (cannot be accessed)

Secondary Total useful power 26 W

5VDC output Nominal voltage 5.1 V

Nominal current 5 A

Power (typical) 25 W

24VR output Nominal voltage 24 VDC

(24V relay) Nominal current 0.6 A

(3) Power (typical) 15 W

24VC output Nominal voltage 24 VDC

(24V sensor)Nominal current 0.5 A

50 W

5.1 V

7 A

35 W

24 VDC

0.8A

19 W

24 VDC

0.8 A

77/85/100 W (2)

5.1 V

15 A

75 W not supplied not supplied not supplied

24 VDC

1.6 A

Power (typical) 12 W

Outputs protected against

19 W overloads/short-circuits/overvoltages

38 W

Dissipated power 10 W

Conformity to standards

20 W

IEC 1131-2

20 W

IEC 1131-2 IEC 1131-2

Isolation Dielectric primary/secondary2000 Vrms 2000 Vrms withstand primary/ground 2000 Vrms 2000 Vrms

(50/60 Hz-1min) 24VDC output/ground –

Insulation primary/secondary

100 M

Ω ≥

100 M

Ω resistance primary/ground

100 M

Ω ≥

100 M

3000 Vrms

3000 Vrms

– 500 Vrms

100 M

100 M

(1) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously or when calculating the size of protection devices.

(2) 77 W at 60°C, 85 W at 55°C, 100 W at 55°C if the rack is fitted with fan modules.

4/9

A

4.5-2 Characteristics of DC power supplies

• Non-isolated power supplies

References

Primary Nominal voltages

TSX PSY 1610

24 VDC

TSX PSY 3610

24 VDC

Limit voltages (including ripple)

(1)

19.2...30 VDC 19.2...30 VDC

(possible up to 34V for 1 hour in 24 hours)

Nominal input current : I rms at 24VDC

Initial power-up

I inrush

1.5 A

2.7 A

100 A at 24 VDC

150 A at 24 VDC at I 2 t on activation 12.5 A 2 s 20 A 2 s

25°C (2) It on activation

Accepted duration of

AC supply micro-cuts

Integrated protection on + input

(fuse located under the module)

Secondary Total useful power (typical)

5VDC output Nominal voltage

Nominal current

Power (typical)

24VR output (3) Nominal voltage

0.2 As

1 ms

0.5 As

1 ms by 5x20 fuse, time-delay, 3.5 A

30 W

5 V

3 A no

50 W

5.1 V

7 A

15 W 35 W

U supply — 0.6V

U supply — 0.6V

(24 VDC relay) Nominal current

Power (typical)

0.6 A

15 W

0.8A

19 W

Integrated protection Overloads yes on outputs against Short-circuits yes

(4)

Dissipated power

Overvoltages yes

10 W yes yes yes

15 W

Conformity to standards IEC 1131-2 IEC 1131-2

(1) When supplying power to modules with "relay outputs", the limit range is reduced to

21.6V...26.4V.

(2) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously or when calculating the size of protection devices.

(3) 24 V a output for supplying power to the "relay output" module relays.

(4) The 24VR output voltage cannot be accessed by the user and is protected by a fuse located under the module (5x20, 4A, Medium).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/10

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A

• Isolated power supply

References

Primary Nominal voltages

Limit voltages (including ripple)

Nominal input current : I rms

Initial power-up

I inrush

I 2 t on activation at

25°C

(1) It on activation

Accepted duration of AC supply micro-cuts

Integrated protection on + input

TSX PSY 5520

24...48 VDC

19.2...60 VDC

3 A at 24 VDC

1.5 A at 48 VDC

15 A at 24 VDC

15 A at 48 VDC

50 A 2 s at 24 VDC

55 A 2 s at 48 VDC

7 As at 24 VDC

6 As at 48 VDC

1 ms by fuse inside the module

(cannot be accessed)

50 W Secondary Total useful power (typical)

5 VDC output Nominal voltage

Nominal current

24 VR output (2)

(24 VDC relay)

Power (typical)

Nominal voltage

Nominal current

Power (typical)

Integrated protection Overloads on outputs against Short-circuits

Overvoltages

Dissipated power

Conformity to standards

5.1 V

7 A

35 W

24 V

0.8 A

19 W yes yes yes

20 W

IEC 1131-2

Isolation Dielectric withstand

Insulation resistance primary / secondary primary / ground primary / secondary primary / ground

2000 Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min

2000 Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min

10 M

10 M

(1) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously or when calculating the size of protection devices.

(2) 24V a output for supplying power to the "relay output" module relays.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/11

A

4.5-3 Characteristics of the alarm relay contact

Characteristics

Limit operating AC voltage

Thermal current

D C

AC load Resistive Voltage

AC12 duty Power

DC load

Inductive Voltage

AC14 and Power

AC15 duty

Resistive Voltage

Alarm relay contact

19...264 V

10...30 V (possible up to 34V for 1 hour in 24 hours)

3 A c

24 V c

48 V c

110 V c

220 V

50 VA (5) 50 VA (6) 110 VA (6) 220 VA (6)

110 VA (4) 220 VA (4) c

24 V c

48 V c

110 V c

220 V

24 VA (4) 10VA (10) 10 VA (11) 10 VA (11)

24 VA (8) 50 VA (7) 50 VA (9)

110 VA (2) 110 VA (6)

220 VA (1) a

24 V

Inductive Voltage

DC13 duty Power

(L/R = 60 ms)

Response

Min. switchable load

Activation time

Type of contact

Deactivation

Integrated Against overloads

protection and short-circuits

Against inductive overvoltages in c

40 W (3) a

24 V

10 W (8)

24 W (6)

1 mA / 5 V

< 10 ms

< 10 ms

Normally open

None, a quick-blow fuse must be fitted

Isolation

(test voltage)

(1) 0.1 x 10 6

(2) 0.15 x 10

(3) 0.3 x 10 6

Against inductive overvoltages in

Contact/ground a

Insulation resistance

operations

6 operations

operations

None, an RC circuit or MOV peak limiter (ZNO) suitable for the voltage must be fitted in parallel across the terminals of each preactuator

None, a discharge diode must be fitted across the terminals of each preactuator

2000 Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min (on TSX PSY 2600/

5500/1610/3610/5520 modules).

3000Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min (on TSX PSY 8500 module)

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

(5) 0.7 x 10 6 operations.

(6) 1 x 10 6 operations.

(7) 1.5 x 10 6 operations.

(9) 3 x 10 6 operations.

(10) 5 x 10 6 operations.

(11) 10 x 10 6 operations.

4/12

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A

4.6 Power consumption table for selecting a power supply module

The power required to supply a rack depends on the types of module installed on it. It is therefore necessary to draw up a power consumption table in order to define which power supply module should be inserted on the rack (standard or double format module).

The tables on the following pages show the typical consumption of each module and can be used to calculate the consumption of each rack and on each output according to which modules have been installed.

Power available on each power supply module

P o w e r

(typical)

Power supply Standard f o r m a t m o d u l e s

TSX TSX TSX

Double format

TSX TSX TSX

PSY 1610 PSY 2600 PSY 3610 PSY 5520 PSY 5500 PSY 8500

Total useful power

(all outputs included) (1)

30W (30 W) 26W (30W) 50W (55W) 50W (55W)50W (55W) 77W at 60°C

85W at 55°C

100W with

TSX FAN •

Power available on 5 VDC output

Power available on 24 VR output

15 W

15 W

25 W

15 W

35 W

19 W

35 W

19 W

35 W

19 W

75 W not supplied

Power available on 24 VC output not

(sensor power supply supplied on front panel term. blk)

12 W not supplied not supplied

19 W 38 W

(1) The values in brackets are the maximum values which can be tolerated for 1 out of every 10 minutes. These values must not be included when calculating the consumption requirement.

Caution :

When defining the power requirements, the total power drawn on each output (5 VDC,

24 VR and 24 VC) must not exceed the total useful power of the module.

Important:

The TSX PSY 8500 power supply module has no 24 VR output for supplying certain modules with 24 VDC.

Thus, for all racks which have this type of power supply, the following measures should be taken :

• TSX DSY 08R• / 16R• relay output modules and the TSX ISP Y100 weighing module should not be installed on these racks.

• TSX ASY 800 analog output modules should be configured for an external power supply (3 modules maximum per rack).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/13

A

Power consumption table

Rack number :

Module type References

Processor +

PCMCIA

TSX P57 102

TSX P57 202/302 memory card TSX P57 252/352

TSX P57 402

TSX P57 452

T PMX P57 102

TPMX P57 202

TPMX P57 352

TPMX P57 452

No.

Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)

On 5 VDC On 24 VR On 24 VC (2)

Module Total Module Total Module Total

440

450

500

1300

1350

450

1300

1350

1350

Discrete inputs TSX DEY 08D2

TSX DEY 16A2

TSX DEY 16A3

TSX DEY 16A4

TSX DEY 16A5

TSX DEY 16D2

TSX DEY 16D3

TSX DEY 16FK

TSX DEY 32D2K

TSX DEY 32D3K

TSX DEY 64D2K

80

80

80

250

135

55

80

80

80

140

155

80

135

135

75

160

275

315

Total

(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.

(2) If using an external a

24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/14

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A

Power consumption table (continued)

Rack number:

Module type References

Report

Discrete output TSX DSY 08R4D

TSX DSY 08R5

TSX DSY 08R5A

TSX DSY 08S5

TSX DSY 08T2

TSX DSY 08T22

TSX DSY 08T31

TSX DSY 16R5

TSX DSY 16S4

Discrete

I/O

Emergency stop safety

TSX DSY 16S5

TSX DSY 16T2

TSX DSY 16T3

TSX DSY 32T2K

TSX DSY 64T2K

TSX DMY 28FK

TSX DMY 28RFK

TSX PAY 262

TSX PAY 282

No.

Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)

On 5VDC On 24VR On 24VC (2)

Module Total Module Total Module Total

55

55

55

125

55

55

55

80

220

220

80

80

140

155

300

300

150

150

80

70

80

135

75

75

Bus X remote TSX REY 200 location

500

Total

(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.

(2) If using an external a

24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/15

A

Power consumption table (continued)

Rack number:

Module type References No.

Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)

On 5VDC On 24VR On 24VC (2)

Module Total Module Total Module Total

Report

Analog

Counter

TSX AEY 414

TSX AEY 420

TSX AEY 800

TSX AEY 810

TSX AEY 1600

TSX AEY 1614

TSX ASY 410

TSX ASY 800 (3)

TSX CTY 2A

TSX CTY 2C

TSX CTY 4A

660

500

270

475

270

300

990

200

280

850

330

300

30

15

36

Axis control

TSX CAY 21

TSX CAY 22

TSX CAY 41

TSX CAY 42

TSX CAY 33

1100

1100

1500

1500

1500

15

15

30

30

30

Stepper motor TSX CFY 11 control TSX CFY 21

Weighing TSX ISP Y100

510

650

150

50

100

145

Grand total

(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.

(2) If using an external a 24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply .

(3) If using an external

a

24 VR power supply, do not take the 300 mA consumption on the internal

24 VR into account when selecting the rack power supply.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/16

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A

Power consumption table (continued)

Rack number:

Module type References

Report

Communication TSX ETY 110 (3)

(4)

TSX ETY 120 (3)

(4)

TSX ETY 210 (3)

(4)

TSX IBY 100

TSX PBY 100

TSX SAY 100

TSX SCY 21601

TSX SCP 111

TSX SCP 112

TSX SCP 114

TSX FPP 10

TSX FPP 20

TSX JNP 112

TSX JNP 114

TSX MBP 100

TSX MDM 10

No.

Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)

On 5VDC On 24VR On 24VC (2)

Module Total Module Total Module Total

800

1200

800

1200

800

1200

500

400

110

350

140

120

150

330

330

120

150

220

195

Grand total

(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.

(2) If using an external a

24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply .

(3) Without remote power supply (RJ45)

4/17

A

Power consumption table (continued)

Rack number :

Module type References No.

Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)

On 5V DC On 24 VR On 24 VC (2)

Module Total Module Total Module Total

Report

Other (devices TSX P ACC01 without their own power supply which

T FTX 117 can be connected on the term. port)

150

310

Grand total

(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.

(2) If using an external a

24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/18

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A

Power requirement

The power requirement for a rack should be calculated on the basis of the consumption table drawn up using the tables defined on the preceding pages. The currents which apply to each output (5 VDC, 24 VR and 24 VC) are those which appear on the grand total line of the preceding table.

Rack number :

1 Power required on 5 VDC output :

2 Power required on 24 VR output :

3

4

Power required on 24 VC output :

Total power required :

.................. x10 -3 A x 5 V = ............................. W

................... x10 -3 A x 24 V = ............................. W

...................x10

-3 A x 24 V = ............................. W

= ............................. W

Caution : The power calculated should be compared to the power supplies in the table below.

• Power required on each output - power available on each output :

1 - 1a, 2 - 2a, 3 - 3a

• Sum of the power required on each output - total power available :

4 - 4a

Power available (at each output and total)

Power available

Modules

TSX PSY 1610

TSX PSY 2600

TSX PSY 3610

TSX PSY 5520

TSX PSY 5500

TSX PSY 8500

On 5 VDC output

1a

15 W

25 W

35 W

35 W

35 W

75 W

On 24 VR output

2a

15 W

15 W

19 W

19 W

19 W

On 24 VC output

3a

12 W

19 W

38 W

Total

4a

30 W

26 W

50 W

50 W

50 W

77/85/100 W (1)

(1) 77 W at 60°C, 85 W at 55°C, 100 W at 55°C if the rack is fitted with fan modules.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/19

A

4.7

Definition of protection devices at the head of the line

It is recommended that a protection device such as a circuit-breaker or a fuse be installed on the power supply at the head of the line.

The information below shows the minimum rating for the circuit-breaker and line fuse for a given power supply module.

• Selecting a line circuit-breaker

When selecting the rating for the circuit-breaker, the following three characteristics, which are given for each power supply, should be taken into account :

- nominal input current : Irms,

- inrush current : I,

- It.

The minimum rating for the circuit breaker is selected as follows :

- circuit-breaker rating IN > Irms power supply,

- I max. circuit-breaker > I inrush power supply,

T

Characteristics supplied by the circuit-breaker manufacturer

- It circuit-breaker at point A on the curve

Thermal zone

> It power supply.

Magnetic zone

A

10

0

IN IA IB I

• Selecting the line fuse

When selecting the rating for the line fuse, the following two characteristics, which are given for each power supply, should be taken into account :

- nominal input current : Irms,

- I 2 t.

The minimum rating for the fuse is selected as follows :

- fuse rating IN > 3 x Irms power supply,

- I 2 t of the fuse > 3 x I 2 t power supply

Note :

A summary of the characteristics of power supplies ( I rms, I inrush, It I 2 t) is given on the next page.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/20

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A

Reminder of the Irms, I inrush, It and I 2 t characteristics of each supply module

M o d u l e s

I rms

TSX at 24 VDC

PSY 2600 PSY 5500 PSY 8500 PSY 1610 PSY 3610 PSY 5520

– – – 1.5 A 2.7 A 3 A at 48 VDC at 100 VAC at 240 VAC

0.5 A

0.3 A

1.7 A

0.5 A

1.4A

0.5 A

1.5 A

I

I inrush at 24 VDC

(1) at 48 VDC

I t

(1)

2 t

(1) at 100 VAC 37 A at 240 VAC 75 A at 24 VDC at 48 VDC at 100 VAC at 240 VAC at 24 VDC

38 A

38 A

0.034 As 0.11 As

15 A

15 A

7 As

– 6 As

0.067 As 0.11 As 0.15 As –

– – – 12.5 A 2 s

20 A 2 s

50 A 2 s at 48 VDC – – at 100 VAC 0.63 A 2 s 4 A 2 s at 240 VAC 2.6 A 2 s 2 A 2 s

30 A

60 A

0.15 As

15A 2 s

8 A 2 s

100 A

0.2 As

150 A

0.5 As

55 A 2 s

(1) Values on initial power-up and at 25°C.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/21

A

___________________________________________________________________________

4/22

5 Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200

5.1

Presentation

5.1-1 General

Bus X for Premium PLCs is used for connecting eight 12-position racks

(TSX RKY12EX) or sixteen 4, 6 or 8-position racks (TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX) distributed over a maximum length of 100 meters.

For applications which require a greater distance between racks, the Bus X distributed remote rackmaster module (TSX REY 200) can be used to significantly increase the distance while retaining all the features and performance capabilities inherent in a PLC station which consists of a single Bus X segment without a remote rackmaster module.

The system consists of :

• A Bus X remote rackmaster module (TSX REY 200) called the "Master", located on the rack at address 0 (rack containing the processor) which is on the main Bus X segment. This module has 2 channels used to locate 2 Bus X segments remotely at a maximum distance of 250 meters.

• 1 or 2 TSX REY 200 modules called "Slaves", each located on a rack on the remote bus segments.

• Each slave module is connected to the master module using a TSX CBRY 2500 /

TSX CBRY K5 kit (cable + connectors).

Topology example

Bus X main segment

TSX REY 200

Master

Bus X

100 m

Bus X remote segment

Bus X

100 m

TSX REY 200

Slave

Processor

TSX REY 200

Slave

Bus X

100 m

Bus X remote segment

A

___________________________________________________________________________

5/1

A

5.1-2 Physical description of the module

1 Display block with 6 indicator lamps :

- RUN indicator : indicates the operating status of the module

- ERR indicator : indicates a module internal fault

- I/O indicator : indicates a fault external to the module

- MST indicator : indicates whether the module is acting as master or slave

- CH0 indicator : indicates the operating status of channel 0

- CH1 indicator : indicates the operating status of channel 1.

2 Connector for connecting channel 0 of the module

3 Connector for connecting channel 1 of the module

1

2

3

___________________________________________________________________________

5/2

Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5

A

5.2

Topology of a PLC station with remote rackmaster modules

5.2-1 TSX/PMX 57 station

___________________________________________________________________________

5/3

A

5.2-2 Station PCX 57

≤ location

Bus X remote

(250 m - X1)

L = X2

Bus X

≤ location

Bus X remote

(250 m - X1)

___________________________________________________________________________

5/4

Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5

A

5.3

Installing the module

5.3-1 Master module

• On a TSX/PMX 57 station

The master module must be installed :

- on the rack which contains the processor (rack at address 00). This rack is on the

Bus X main segment

- in any position on this rack other than those positions specifically for the power supply module and the processor module.

Restrictions :

- position 00 of the rack at address 0 is prohibited for any module (including the processor module). This position can only be occupied by a double format power supply module.

The diagrams below indicate the various possible situations, depending on the format of the power supply and the processor.

Rack at address 0 with single format power supply and processor :

• Power supply in position PS

• Processor must be in position 01

• Position 00 always empty

• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack

Rack at address 0 with double format power supply and single format processor :

• Power supply in positions PS and 00

• Processor must be in position 01

• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Rack at address 0 with single format power supply and double format processor :

• Power supply in position PS

• Processor must be in positions 01 and 02

• Position 00 always empty

• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack

Rack at address 0 with double format power supply and processor :

• Power supply in positions PS and 00

• Processor must be in positions 01 and 02

• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

___________________________________________________________________________

5/5

A

• On PCX 57 station

In the same way as on a TSX/PMX 57 station, the master module must be installed:

- on the rack which virtually supports the processor (rack at address 0). This rack is located on the main Bus X segment

- in any position on this rack other than the position specifically for the power supply module and that occupied by the processor module.

Restrictions:

- position 00 of the rack at address 0 is prohibited for any module. Only a double format power supply can occupy this position. The virtual position of the processor

(unoccupied position) must be position 01.

The diagrams below indicate the various possible situations, depending on the format of the power supply

Rack at address 0 with single format power supply :

• Power supply in position PS

• Virtual position of the processor must be position 01 (position always empty)

• Position 00 always empty

• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Rack at address 0 with double format power supply :

• Power supply in position PS

• Virtual position of the processor must be position 01 (position always empty)

• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

___________________________________________________________________________

5/6

Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5

A

5.3-2 Slave module

The slave module is installed in one of the racks of the remote bus segment, in any position on this rack other than the position specifically for the power supply module.

Rack with single format power supply module :

• Power supply in position PS

• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack

Rack with double format power supply module :

• Power supply in positions PS and 00

• TSX REY 200 module in one of the available positions on the rack

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

___________________________________________________________________________

5/7

A

5.4

Configuring the module

The module is configured for the master or slave function automatically :

• if the module is installed on the rack at address 0, it will automatically be declared as the master

• if the module is installed on a rack at an address other than 0, it will automatically be declared as a slave

Note 1 :

If 2 racks are declared at address 0, the master module must be located on the rack supporting

"low" module addresses as shown in the diagram below.

"Low" module addresses :

• addresses 0 to 6 on TSX RKY8EX rack

• addresses 0 to 4 on TSX RKY6EX rack

• addresses 0 to 2 on TSX RKY4EX rack

TSX RKY 8EX

P

S

ON

OK

Example:

2 TSX RKY 8EX racks at address 0

OFF

TSX RKY 8EX

P

S

NOK

ON

OFF

Microswitch 4 located on the rack

Note 2 :

If 2 racks are declared at address 0, the rack supporting the "high" module addresses cannot take a slave remote rackmaster module.

"High" module addresses :

• addresses 8 to 14 on TSX RKY8EX rack

• addresses 8 to 12 on TSX RKY6EX rack

• addresses 8 to 10 on TSX RKY4EX rack

___________________________________________________________________________

5/8

Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5

A

5.5

Maximum distances according to the type of module

The diagram below shows the maximum permitted distances for the various Bus X segments and Bus X remote locations:

• Each Bus X segment (X1, X2 or X3) : maximum length 100

• Each Bus X remote connection (XD1 or XD2) : maximum length 250 meters.

Bus X main segment (X1)

TSX REY 200

Master

Bus X

100 m

Processor

XD1

Bus X remote segment (X2)

Bus X

100 m

TSX REY 200

Slave

XD2

TSX REY 200

Slave

Bus X

100 m

Bus X remote segment (X3)

Taking these elements into account, the maximum distance between the processor and the furthest modules can be 350 meters.

This distance of 350 meters is only possible for standard discrete I/O modules. The following pages give restrictions for each type of module.

Note:

The remote location is not permitted for TSX SCY •••/TSX ETY •••/

TSX IBY •••/TSX PBY ••• communication modules. These modules must be located on the main

X1 segment on Bus X.

___________________________________________________________________________

5/9

A

• Standard and safety discrete I/O modules

350 m

250 m

Standard discrete I/O modules:

TSX DEY••• / TSX

DSY••• and safety modules

TSX PAY•••

Exception:

TSX DEY 16FK module

Bus X

100 m

• Mixed, analog, application-specific, bus sensor/actuator discrete I/O modules

175 m

Modules:

• Mixed discrete TSX DMY ••• and standard discrete

TSX DEY 16 FK,

• Analog TSX AEY ••• / TSX ASY •••,

• Application-specific TSX ISP Y••• / TSX CTY ••• / TSX

CAY ••• / TSX CFY •••,

• Bus sensor/actuator TSX SAY 100.

Bus X

100 m

175 m

Note: For the following modules:

• TSX DEY 16 FK index PV

06,

• TSX DMY 28FK / 28 RFK,

• TSX AEY 810 / 1614,

• TSX ASY 410 index PV

11,

• TSX ASY 800,

• TSX CTY 2C,

• TSX CAY 22 / 42 / 33, the maximum distance permitted (remote cable length + Bus X cable) is 225 m

___________________________________________________________________________

5/10

Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5

A

• Communication modules

!

Remote location not permitted. Modules must be located on the main Bus

X segment.

No

Modules:

• Communication TSX SCY •••

• Network TSX ETY •••

• Fieldbus TSX IBY ••• / TSX PBY •••

Remote location not permitted. Modules must be located on the main bus segment

___________________________________________________________________________

5/11

A

5.6

Connections

5.6-1 Connection accessories

The locate Bus X remotely, the following must be used:

• the TSX CBRY 2500 kit comprising one 250 m cable on a drum,

• 1 set of TSX CBRY K5 connectors.

The user must fit connectors at both ends of the cable. The procedure for fitting the connectors on the cable is described in the quick reference guide supplied with the TSX

CBRY 2500 kit.

The following items are therefore required for setting up a remote Bus X connection:

1 TSX CBRY 2500 kit comprising : one 250 meter cable on a drum

Drum

1 set of 5 TSX CBRY K5 connectors for connecting 2 remote cables, plus one as a spare.

Connectors

___________________________________________________________________________

5/12

Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5

A

5.6-2 Connection principle

Bus X main segment Bus X remote segment

Channel 0

TSX REY 200

Master

Bus X remote location (XD2)

250m

TSX CBRY 2500 + TSX CBRY K5

(Cable + connector)

Channel 0

TSX REY 200

Slave

Channel 1

Processor

Channel 0

TSX REY 200

Slave

Bus X remote location (XD2)

250m

TSX CBRY 2500 + TSX CBRY K5

(Cable + connector)

Bus X remote segment

Note:

Each Bus X segment is installed according to the rules defined in part A - section 2.4.

Reminder

Each Bus X segment must have a line terminator A/ and /B at either end.

5.7

Module consumption

Consumption on 5 VDC power supply : 500 mA

Dissipated power : 2.5 W

___________________________________________________________________________

5/13

A

5.8

Diagnostics

5.8-1 Using indicator lamps

The display block on the front panel of the TSX REY 200 module is used for diagnosing the remote location system according to the following tables.

CH0

CH1

RUN

Mst

ERR

I / O

Module acting as master (positioned on rack at address 00)

Status of indicator lamps

ERR RUN M s t I/O CH0 CH1

Module status Comments

Fault

OK

OK

OK

Fault

No communication with the processor

Channel 0 active,

Channel 1 inactive

Channel 0 inactive,

Channel 1 active

Channel 0 active,

Channel 1 active

Channel 0 inactive,

Channel 1 inactive

Module acting as slave function (positioned on rack at address other than 00)

Status of indicator lamps

ERR RUN M s t I/O CH0 CH1

Module status Comments

Fault

OK

No communication with the processor

Channel 0 active,

Fault Channel 0 inactive,

Key : indicator lamp status

On Off Flashing Indeterminate

___________________________________________________________________________

5/14

Bus X remote rackmaster module : TSX REY 200 5

A

5.9

Managing an installation equipped with a Bus X remote rackmaster module

!

Any use of a Bus X remote rackmaster module (TSX REY 200) in an installation requires the management of the installation or machine to be subject to the presence of all the racks configured in the application.

To do this, an application program check tests whether all the racks in the application are present by testing bit %MWxy.Mod.2:X6 on at least one module in each rack (explicit exchange).

This test prevents any incorrect declaration in the addressing of the racks, and in particular if two racks accidentally have the same address.

This test is only of use if the installation is restarted (power-up, modification of the installation, processor RESET, configuration change).

___________________________________________________________________________

5/15

A

___________________________________________________________________________

5/16

6 Mounting

6.1

Rack installation rules

6.1-1 Positioning the racks

When mounting TSX RKY iii racks certain installation rules must be respected :

1 As the various modules (power supply, processors, discrete I/O, etc) are cooled by natural convection, the various racks must be installed horizontally and on a

vertical plane to assist ventilation.

Note :

If using fan modules, see section 10 of this part.

2 If several racks are installed in the same enclosure, it is recommended that the following positioning guidelines are respected :

• leave a space of at least 150 mm between two superposed racks, to allow for the cable ducts and to facilitate air circulation.

• it is advisable to install equipment which generates heat (transformers, process power supplies, power contactors, etc) above the racks.

• leave a space of at least 100 mm on each side of a rack to allow room for the cables and to facilitate air circulation.

1

100 a 100

A

2 a a

2 2

1 a

50 mm

1 Equipment or enclosure.

2 Cable duct or clip.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/1

A

6.2

Rack dimensions

TSX RKY 4EX

160 mm (1)

200 mm (2)

(1) Modules with screw terminal block

(2) Maximum depth with all types of module and associated connections

187.9 mm

TSX RKY 6/6EX

261.6 mm

TSX RKY 8/8EX

335.3 mm

TSX RKY 12/12EX

482.6 mm

Note :

If using fan modules, see section 10 of this part.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/2

Mounting 6

A

6.3

Mounting/fixing racks

TSX RKY ii and TSX RKY ii EX racks can be mounted :

• on a 35 mm wide DIN rail fixed with M6x25 screws

• on a Telequick pre-slotted mounting plate or on a panel,

The installation rules described in section 6.1 should be respected, regardless of the type of mounting.

Note :

If using fan modules, see section 10 of this part.

6.3-1 Mounting on a 35 mm wide DIN rail

Fix with 4 M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-CF56 1/4 turn sliding nuts.

AF1-CF56 AM1-ED

(1) 170.4 mm

(2) 244.1 mm

(3) 317.8 mm

(4) 465.1 mm

(1) TSX RKY 4EX

(2) TSX RKY6 and TSX RKY 6EX

(3) TSX RKY8 and TSX RKY 8EX

(4) TSX RKY 12 and TSX RKY 12EX

___________________________________________________________________________

6/3

A

6.3-2 Mounting on panel or Telequick pre-slotted mounting plate

• Mounting on panel : cut-out (dimensions in mm)

4 fixing holes (1)

8.75

a b

8.75

(1) The fixing hole diameter must be large enough for M6 screws.

• Mounting on AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted mounting plate (dimensions in mm)

Fix the rack with 4 M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-EA6 clip nuts

AF1-EA6 AM1-PA

16 8.75

a b

8.75

Racks

TSX RKY 4EX

TSX RKY 6/6EX

TSX RKY 8/8EX

TSX RKY 12/12EX a

170.4 mm

244.1 mm

317.8 mm

465.1 mm b

187.9 mm

261.6 mm

335.3 mm

482.6 mm

Thickness

16 mm

16 mm

16 mm

16 mm

• Maximum tightening torque for fixing screws : 2.0 N.m

___________________________________________________________________________

6/4

Mounting 6

A

6.4

Mounting modules and terminal blocks

Modules can be inserted and removed while powered up with the exception of the processor module and PCMCIA communication cards.

To insert/remove powered-up modules, they must be manually screwed and unscrewed to ensure that the signals on Bus X are connected/disconnected in the correct sequence. This sequence is not necessarily respected if an electric screwdriver is used.

!

Powered-up modules must be removed/installed with the terminal block or HE10 connector disconnected, having taken care to cut the sensor/preactuator power supply if it is greater than 48V.

6.4-1 Inserting a module in a rack

1 Locate the pins on the rear of the module in the centering holes at the bottom of the rack

( 1 ).

2

2 Swivel the module, bringing it into contact with the rack ( 2 ).

1

3 Fix the module firmly onto the rack by tightening the screw at the top of the module ( 3 ).

Maximum tightening torque : 2.0 N.m

3

___________________________________________________________________________

6/5

A

6.4-2 Fitting a screw terminal block on a module

The first time a screw terminal block is mounted on a module which takes this type of connection, the terminal block has to be coded with the type of module on which it is mounted. This is done by transferring 2 physical coding devices from the module onto the screw terminal block. This mechanical code prohibits any subsequent mounting of the terminal block with this code on any other type of module.

1 With the module already in place on the rack, mount the terminal block as shown opposite ( 1 ).

The code is transferred automatically during this initial operation.

2

2 Swivel the terminal block into position to plug onto the module ( 2 ).

1

3 Lock the terminal block onto the module by tightening the appropriate screw ( 3 ).

Maximum tightening torque : 2.0 N.m

3

Note :

When replacing a module in position on the rack with another module, the screw terminal block on the old module already has physical coding devices which relate to that module.

There are two possible options :

• Replace the module with a module of the same type : in order to install the coded terminal block on the new module, it will first be necessary to remove the physical coding devices on the new module before installing the terminal block,

• Replace the module with another type of module : it will first be necessary to remove the old physical coding devices on the terminal block before mounting it as described above.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/6

Mounting 6

A

6.5

Mounting a PCX 57 processor in a PC

6.5-1 The various components

On delivery, the PCX 57 processor includes several component parts :

• A processor card and a mechanical subassembly for receiving a type 3 PCMCIA communication card.

• A battery for backing up the processor RAM memory, to be inserted in the appropriate slot on the processor card (see section 6.6.2 in this part).

• a TSX TLYEX /B line terminator.

(see section 2.4-2 in this part).

• A removable cover for a PCMCIA communication card dedicated to the PCX 57 processor (see part D in the

"Communication, Bus and Network Interfaces" manual).

• Front plate equipped with a 9-pin SUB D connector for connecting a TSX CBY •• 0K Bus X extension cable and a ribbon cable for connection to the PCX 57 processor. This accessory is to be used for incorporating the PCX 57 processor inside a Bus X segment. (See the installation in the quick reference guide included with the processor).

• Daughter board which provides the interface between the above front plate and the PCX 57 processor card.

This accessory for use with the above front plate.

It is installed in the place of the line terminator A/ incorporated as standard in the processor. (See the installation in the quick reference guide included with

A

B

6/7

A

The various components (continued)

• An installable disk containing the Windows 95 version of the ISAWAY driver (see the quick reference guide included with the processor).

• An installable disk containing the Windows NT version of the ISAWAY driver (see the quick reference guide included with the processor).

• OFS data server software

• A quick reference guide for setting up the PCX 57 processor.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/8

Mounting 6

A

6.5-2 Dimensions

249

42.1

The dimensions are given in millimeters

31.5

12.5

Note : A PCX processor occupies two slots on the PC ISA bus. These slots must be consecutive and 20.32 mm apart.

6.5-3 Installation precautions

It is advisable to limit the static electricity charges, which could cause significant damage to the electronic circuits. To do this, proceed as follows :

• Hold the card by the edges, without touching the connectors or the visible circuits.

• Do not remove the card from its antistatic protective packaging until you are ready to install it in the PC.

• If possible, connect yourself to ground during these operations.

• Do not place the card on a metal surface.

• Avoid unnecessary movement as static electricity is produced by clothing, carpets and furniture.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/9

A

6.5-4 Preliminary operations before installation in the PC

Before installing the processor card in the PC, certain operations must be performed :

• Insert the battery in the appropriate slot if necessary (see section

6.6-2),

• Insert the PCMCIA memory card if necessary (see section 5.7-2),

Configure the address of the processor on Bus X (rack address, module position).

This address should be the same as that defined in the configuration screen in PL7

Junior or PL7 Pro. The address is configured using the micro-switches on the processor card.

Rack address : the virtual slot of the processor is always at rack address

0

Processor position : the virtual position of the processor will depend on the type of power supply installed on the rack.

single format power supply : virtual position of the processor = 00 double format power supply : virtual position of the processor = 01

Default configuration :

- rack address = 0

- module position = 00

Coding of processor position, here : 00

Coding of rack address, here : 0

P C X

A D D

R A C K

A D D

___________________________________________________________________________

6/10

Mounting 6

A

Positioning the RACK ADD micro-switches according to the rack address

Rack address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Position of the

RACK ADD microswitches

Unused addresses

Positioning the PCX ADD micro-switches according to the position of the processor on the rack

Processor position

0 0 0 1

Position of the

PCX ADD micros w i t c h e s

• Configuring the base I/O address of the processor on the ISA bus

The PCX 57 processor uses :

- eight consecutive addresses in the I/O space of the ISA bus,

- one interrupt (IRQ ii ).

Before configuring the PCX 57 processor, it is advisable to define an I/O space and an IT available in the PC using the standard utilities under Windows 95/98 or

Windows NT.

!

An incorrect configuration may cause the PC to malfunction.

When the available resources have been determined, the PCX 57 is configured as follows :

-

Configure the base address of the PCX 57 processor on the ISA bus.

This address is configured using the 6 micro-switches near the PCX 57 ISA connector. They represent from left to right address bits SA9 to SA4 (see the diagram and examples opposite).

By default, address H '220' is configured.

Note : This address should be the same as that defined in the ISAWAY driver configuration screen.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/11

A

Default value

'H220'

SA

∇ ∇ ∇ ∇ ∇ ∇

Switch 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

H'000' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

H'110' 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

H'220' 2 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

H'330' 3 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

4 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

5 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

6

7

8

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Coding example

___________________________________________________________________________

6/12

Mounting 6

A

- Next, configure the interrupt used by the processor on the ISA bus (IRQ ii )

This is configured using a jumper which must be placed according to the interrupt to be selected. The default selection is IRQ 10.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/13

A

6.5-5 Installing the processor card in the PC

!

The PC must be powered down during installation of the processor.

Procedure :

When the preliminary operations described earlier have been completed, proceed as follows :

• With the electricity supply to the PC switched off, remove the cover of the computer and locate two free consecutive ISA slots,

!

Installation restriction :

The PC must respect the following standard

P C

ISA slot 1

ISA slot 2

• Remove the covers and fixing screws already in place which correspond to the available slots,

• Install the card in the appropriate slots,

• Fix the card firmly onto the PC by replacing and tightening the fixing screws,

• Close the computer and connect all the cables and accessories which must be added with the PC powered down :

- Bus X cable and TSX TLYEX /B line terminator,

!

The processor changes to blocking fault if line terminator /B is not installed :

- on the PCX 57 processor, if this is not connected to a rack by a TSX CBY ii X Bus cable. In this case, the /B line terminator must be installed on the processor

Bus X output (see section 2.4-2),

- on the connector available on the last rack of the station if the PCX 57 processor is connected to a rack by a TSX CBY ii Bus X cable. In this case, the /B line terminator must be installed (see section 2.4-2).

This mechanism enables the user to see whether Bus X has been terminated.

- FIPIO bus cable and PCMCIA communication card if required,

• Power up the PC and start installing the software :

- ISAWAY driver corresponding to the OS installed : WINDOWS 95/98 or Windows NT,

(see the quick reference guide included with the processor),

- OFS data server if used,

(see the OFS software installation manual),

6/14

Mounting 6

A

6.5-6 Integrating a PCX 57 processor inside a Bus X segment

The PCX 57 processor is equipped as standard to be integrated at the head of the Bus

X line. It therefore has an integrated line terminator A/.

If the user wishes to integrate the processor inside a Bus X segment, two accessories which are supplied with the module are used :

• A front plate equipped with :

- a 9-pin SUB D connector for connecting a TSX CBY•

Bus X cable,

- a ribbon cable for connecting the 9-pin SUB D connector to the processor card.

• A daughter board equipped with two connectors which performs the interface function between the PCX 57 card and the 9-pin SUB D connector on the front plate described above. This daughter board is installed in the place of line terminator A/, which is fitted as standard on the PCX 57 card.

Front plate

Daughter board

Installation procedure

!

The PCX 57 processor card, and thus the PC, must be powered down when installing these accessories.

1 Remove line terminator A/ from its slot on the processor.

2 Fit the daughter board in place of line terminator A/.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/15

A

3 With the processor card installed in the PC, fit the front plate in the available slot, to the immediate left of the processor card as shown in the diagram below.

4 Connect the ribbon cable to the connector on the daughter board installed in step

2.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/16

Mounting 6

A

Example of the topology of a PCX 57 station with the processor integrated inside a Bus X segment

Rack at address 0

TSX TLY EX

A

B

TSX CBY ••0K

TSX CBY ••0K

Host PC

PCX 57

PCX 57

TSX CBY ••0K

TSX TLY EX

A

B

TSX CBY ••0K

Important

In this situation, as the PCX 57 processor is no longer integrated at the head of the line, the TSX TLY EX line terminators (A/ and /B) must be installed on each of the racks located at the end of the line.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/17

A

6.6

Fitting/removing the RAM memory backup battery

6.6-1 With a TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor

This battery, located on the TSX PSY

iiii

power supply module, backs up the processor internal RAM memory and the realtime clock in the event of a mains power supply failure. Supplied in the same packaging as the power supply module, it should be installed by the user.

Fitting the battery

1 Open the access cover located on the front panel of the power supply module,

2 Position the battery in its compartment, taking care to respect the polarity, as shown on the plate,

3 Close the access cover.

Changing the battery

The battery may be changed once a year, as a preventative measure, or when the BAT indicator lamp lights up (see section 6.6-3 : frequency of changing the battery). Follow the same procedure as for installation :

1 Open the battery access cover,

2 Take the defective battery out of its compartment,

3 Insert the new battery, taking care to respect the polarity,

4 Close and lock the access cover.

If there is a loss of power supply when changing the battery, the RAM memory is backed up by the processor which has its own local backup facility

(see section 6.6-3).

Important : So as not to forget to change the battery every year, it is advisable to note the date of the next change due where indicated inside the access cover.

Next change

LITHIUM

BATTERY

Thionyl chloride

1/2AA

___________________________________________________________________________

6/18

Mounting 6

A

6.6-2 With a PCX 57 processor

This battery, located on the TPCX P57

iiii

processor module, backs up the processor internal RAM memory and the realtime clock in the event of a mains power supply failure. Supplied in the same packaging as the processor, it should be installed by the user.

Note : With a PCX 57 processor, there is no need to put a battery in the power supply of the rack which usually receives the processor (rack at address 0).

Fitting the battery for the first time

This operation must be performed before inserting the card in the PC.

1 Remove the cover 1 by squeezing the sides,

2 Position the battery

2 in its compartment, taking care to respect the polarity, as shown on the plate,

3 Replace the cover

1 which holds the battery in its slot.

Changing the battery

The battery may be changed once a year, as a preventative measure, or when the BAT indicator lamp lights up (see section 6.6-3 : frequency of changing the battery).

However, since this indicator lamp is not visible when the PC is closed, system bit %S68 can be used by the application program to create an alarm to indicate that the battery needs changing.

Procedure

1 Switch the PC off,

2 Disconnect the cables connected to the processor,

3 Open the PC,

4 Remove the card from its slot,

5 Remove the cover

1

,

6 Remove the defective battery from its slot,

7 Insert the new battery, taking care to respect the polarity,

8 Replace the cover 1 ,

9 Replace the card in its slot, close the PC, connect the external elements and switch on.

!

The operation to change the battery should not exceed a certain length of time

when the PC is switched off as the data in the RAM memory may be lost (see section 6.6-3).

___________________________________________________________________________

6/19

A

6.6-3 Frequency of changing the battery

Battery backup period

The time for which the battery provides its backup function for the processor internal

RAM memory and the realtime clock depends on two factors :

- the percentage of time for which the PLC is powered down and thus the time for which the battery is used,

- the ambient temperature when the PLC is powered down.

Ambient temperature when powered down

Backup period

PLC powered down 12 hours/day

PLC powered down 1 hour/day

30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C

5 years 3 years 2 years 1 year

5 years 5 years 4.5 years 4 years

Processor backup facility

The processors have their own local backup facility for the processor internal RAM memory and the realtime clock which is effective when removing :

- the battery, the power supply or the TSX/PMX 57 processor,

- the battery from the PCX 57 processor.

The backup period depends on the ambient temperature. If the processor was previously powered up, the guaranteed time varies as follows :

Ambient temperature during power-down

Backup period

20°C

2 hrs

30°C 40°C 50°C

45 min 20 min 8 min

___________________________________________________________________________

6/20

Mounting 6

A

6.7

Inserting/removing the PCMCIA memory extension card

6.7-1 On a TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor

A handle is required to insert the memory card in its slot.

Fitting the handle onto the card

1 Position the end of the memory card

(opposite end from the connector) at the handle opening.

The triangular-shaped markers on both the handle and the label of the card should be on the same side.

2 Slide the memory card into the handle until it stops. It then forms an integral part of the handle.

markers locating device with 1 ridge connector markers locating device with 2 ridges handle

Inserting the memory card

To install the memory card in the processor, proceed as follows :

1 Remove the protective cover by unlocking and then pulling it towards the front of the PLC,

2 Position the PCMCIA card with its handle into the slot which is now vacant. Slide in until the card stops, then push the handle to connect the card.

Note :

When installing the PCMCIA card in its slot, make sure that the physical locating devices are correctly positioned :

• 1 ridge towards the top,

• 2 ridges towards the bottom

Note 2 :

If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/21

A

6.7-2 On a PCX 57 processor

!

The memory extension card must be installed on the processor card with the power off and before it is inserted in the PC.

To install the memory card in the PCX 57 processor, proceed as follows :

1 Position the PCMCIA card in the appropriate slot.

2 Slide it as far as it will go into the slot.

3 Position the card in the PC with the power off.

Note :

If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted and the PC has been powered up.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/22

Mounting 6

A

6.8

Changing the battery on a RAM type PCMCIA memory card

RAM type PCMCIA memory cards (TSX MRP iiii

) must be fitted with a battery (reference

TSX BAT M01), which has to be changed at certain intervals (see the table below).

• On a TSX 57 / PMX 57 processor

1 Remove the card from its slot by pulling the handle towards the front of the PLC.

2 Separate the PCMCIA card from its handle by pulling them apart.

3 Hold the PCMCIA card so as to allow access to the battery slot at the nonconnector end of the card.

4 Unlock the battery holder, located at the non-connector end of the card. To do this, press the clip towards the bottom of the card (in the opposite direction to the writeprotect micro-switch) while pulling it back.

5 Remove the battery with holder from its slot.

5

6 Replace the defective battery with a new 3 V battery. The polarity must be respected by placing the + markers on the holder and the battery on the same side.

4

Write-protection

Clip

Slot for the battery

6

7 Put the battery with holder back in its slot and lock it in place. To do this, simply reverse the removal procedure.

Markers

8 Fix the PCMCIA card in its handle.

9 Replace the card with its handle in the PLC.

• On a PCX 57 processor

Having removed the card from its slot, follow steps 3 to 7 described above, then replace the card.

Battery service life

PCMCIA card stored in normal conditions (-20 °C to 70 °C)

12 months

PCMCIA card installed in an operating

PLC or PC (0 °C to 60 °C)

36 months

Note : During operation, when the PCMCIA card battery is faulty, the processor ERR indicator lamp flashes.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/23

A

6.9

Precautions to be taken when replacing a processor

!

If a TSX / PMX / PCX 57 processor is being replaced by another processor which has already been programmed and contains an application, the power must be cut to all the PLC station control devices.

Before restoring the power to the control devices, check that the processor actually contains the required application.

6.10 Screw tightening torques

Technical components

Fixing screws for PLCs, modules and terminals

Ground connection screws

Screws for discrete I/O module terminals

Screws for power supply terminals

Screws for SUB D connectors

Screws for various wire and cable connectors

Screws for TSX PAY/REY/SAY/••• module enclosed terminal blocks

Maximum tightening torques

2.0 N.m

0.8 N.m

0.5 N.m

___________________________________________________________________________

6/24

7 Connections

7.1

Ground connections

7.1-1 Grounding the racks

The functional grounding of racks is provided by the rear panel, which is metal. This ensures that PLCs meet environmental standards, provided that the racks are fixed to a metal support which is correctly grounded. The various racks which may constitute a TSX 57 PLC station must be fitted either on the same support or on different supports which must however be correctly interconnected.

To protect personnel, the s terminals of each rack must, without exception, be connected to the protective earth ground. To do this, use a green/yellow wire with a cross-section of at least 2.5 mm 2 and as short as possible.

A connected to earth ground green/yellow wire connected to earth ground

Important

The PLC internal 0V is connected to the machine ground. The machine ground itself must be connected to the earth ground.

Maximum tightening torque on ground connection screw : 2.0 N.m

7.1-2 Grounding the modules

The modules are grounded by metal plates located on the module rear panel. When the module is in position, these metal plates are in contact with the rack metalwork, thus providing the connection to ground.

Ground contacts

___________________________________________________________________________

7/1

A

7.2

Connection of power supplies

7.2-1 Rules for connection

The TSX PSY iiii

power supply modules on each rack have a non-removable terminal block, protected by a cover, which is used to connect the mains supply, the alarm relay, the protective ground and, for AC power supplies, the power supply for the 24 VDC sensors.

This terminal block is fitted with captive screw clamp terminals with a maximum connection capacity of 2 x 1.5 mm 2 cross-section wires with cable ends, or 1 x 2.5 mm 2 cross-section wire (maximum tightening torque on screw terminals : 0.8 N.m). The wires exit vertically downwards, and can be secured by a cable clamp.

Sensor

24V a supply

Alarm relay

110 - 220V c

supply

Protective ground

PG

24 V

0 V

L

N

Alarm relay

24V a supply (1)

Protective ground

PG

NC

NC

24 V

0 V

AC power supply

TSX PSY 2600/5500/8500

DC power supplies

TSX PSY 1610/3610/5520

!

For TSX PSY 5500/8500 power supply modules, set the voltage selector position according to the mains voltage being used

(1) 24V...48V for the TSX PSY 5520 power supply

(110 or 220VAC).

___________________________________________________________________________

7/2

Connections 7

A

Be sure to install a device for protecting and breaking the power supply upstream of the PLC station.

When choosing protection devices, the user should take account of the inrush currents defined in the table of characteristics for each power supply (see section 4.5).

Note :

Given that the TSX PSY 1610/2610/5520 DC power supplies have a very strong inrush current, it is not advisable to use them on DC supplies with return current protection (fold back).

When a power supply module is connected on a DC supply, in order to avoid line losses, it is essential to limit the length of the power supply cable :

• TSX PSY 1610 power supply module :

length limited to 30 meters each way (60 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 2.5mm

2

- length limited to 20 meters each way (40 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 1.5mm

2

• TSX PSY 3610 and TSX PSY 5520 power supply modules :

- length limited to 15 meters each way (30 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 2.5mm

2

- length limited to 10 meters each way (20 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 1.5mm

2

Warning :

Interconnection of several PLCs which are powered by a secure DC supply not connected to ground.

The 0V and the mechanical ground are connected inside PLCs, line supply wiring accessories and some operator panels.

Special connection arrangements must be made for specific applications which use a free-floating mounting. These depend on the installation method used. In this case, it is essential to use an isolated DC supply. Please contact us when defining the electrical installation.

___________________________________________________________________________

7/3

A

7.2-2 Connecting AC power supply modules

L

N

Connecting a PLC station comprising a single rack

100-240 V AC supply

Q

PE

KM

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)

Power supply for sensors relating to the rack (2)

TSX

PSY ii00

(1)

24 V

0 V

L

N

Q

KM

: general isolator,

: line contactor or circuit-breaker,

Protective fuse :

TSX PSY 2600/5500/8500 AC power supply modules are fitted as standard with a protective fuse. This fuse, wired in series with input L, is located inside the module and cannot be accessed.

(1) isolation strip for locating ground fault.

(2) available current :

- 0.6 A with TSX PSY 2600 power supply module (see characteristics section 4.5-1)

- 0.8 A with TSX PSY 5500 power supply module (see characteristics section 4.5-1)

- 1.6 A with TSX PSY 8500 power supply module (see characteristics section 4.5-1)

___________________________________________________________________________

7/4

Connections 7

A

Connecting a PLC station comprising a number of racks

100-240 V AC supply

L

N

Q

PE

KM

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)

Power supply for sensors relating to the rack (2)

TSX

PSY ii00

24 V

0 V

(1)

L

N

(1)

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply see section 7.2-5)

Power supply for sensors relating to the rack (2)

TSX

PSY ii00

24 V

0 V

L

N

Note :

When there are a number of PLC stations, all powered from a single supply, the connection principle is identical.

Q : general isolator,

K M : line contactor or circuit-breaker,

Protective fuse :

TSX PSY 2600/5500/8500 AC power supply modules are fitted as standard with a protective fuse. This fuse, wired in series with input L, is located inside the module and cannot be accessed.

(1) isolation strip for locating ground fault.

(2) available current :

- 0.6 A with TSX PSY 2600 power supply module, (see characteristics section 4.5-1)

- 0.8 A with TSX PSY 5500 power supply module, (see characteristics section 4.5-1)

- 1.6 A with TSX PSY 8500 power supply module (see characteristics section 4.5-1)

___________________________________________________________________________

7/5

A

7.2-3 Connecting DC power supply modules via a floating 24 VDC or 48 VDC supply

Warning :

For a free-floating mounting (not connected to ground) used in specific applications and in particular in Marine Applications, a TSX PSY 5520 (24 / 48 VDC) isolated power supply must be used.

Low voltage AC supply

Battery charger +

-

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)

Rack 0

T S X

P S Y

5520

NC

NC

24 V

0 V

Battery +

-

Isolation tester +

-

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)

Rack x

T S X

P S Y

5520

NC

NC

24 V

0 V

+24V

Floating 24 VDC supply for the sensor, actuator and discrete I/O module power supply

-0V

Notes :

A device can be used to measure the degree of isolation of the 24 VDC (or 48VDC) continuously in relation to ground and to sound an alert if the degree of isolation is abnormally low.

I/O modules in the Premium range are isolated.

___________________________________________________________________________

7/6

Connections 7

A

L

N

PE

7.2-4 Connecting DC power supply modules via an AC supply

• TSX PSY 1610/3610 non-isolated power supply modules

- Connecting a PLC station comprising a single rack, with AC supply referenced to ground

100-240 V AC supply

Q

(2)

Sensor/preactuator power supply

KM

(3)

+ 24 VDC

+

Fu1(4)

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)

TSX

PSY ii10

NC

NC

(1)

24 V

0 V

Q : general isolator,

KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,

(1) : external shunt supplied with the power supply module

(2) : isolation strip for locating ground fault. In this instance the power supply needs to be unplugged in order to disconnect the AC supply from the ground.

(3) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part E) .

(4) : protective fuse, (4 A, time-delayed) which is only necessary with a TSX PSY 3610 power supply module.

The TSX PSY 1610 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input (3.5 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed).

___________________________________________________________________________

7/7

A

L

N

- Connecting a PLC station comprising a number of racks, with AC supply referenced to ground

100-240 V AC supply

Q

PE

KM Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)

(3)

+ 24 VDC

+

TSX

PSY ii10

NC

NC

Fu1(4)

(2)

24 V

0 V

(1)

Sensor/ preactuator power supply

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)

TSX

PSY ii10

NC

NC

Fu1(4)

24 V

0 V

(1)

Q : general isolator,

KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,

(1) : external shunt supplied with the power supply module,

(2) : isolation strip for locating ground fault. In this instance the power supply needs to be unplugged in order to disconnect the AC supply from the ground.

(3) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part E).

(4) : protective fuse, (4A, time-delayed) which is only necessary with a TSX PSY 3610 power supply module.

The TSX PSY 1610 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input (3.5 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed).

Note :

When there are a number of PLC stations, all powered from a single supply, the connection principle is identical.

___________________________________________________________________________

7/8

Connections 7

A

L

N

• TSX PSY 5520 isolated power supply

- Connecting a PLC station comprising a single rack, with AC supply referenced to ground

100-240 V AC supply

Q

PE

(1)

Sensor/preactuator power supply

(1)

KM

(2)

— +

+ 24/48

VDC

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)

T S X

PSY ii 20

5520

NC

NC

24 V

0 V

Q : general isolator,

KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,

Protective fuse :

The TSX PSY 5520 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse. This fuse, wired in series with the 24/48V input, is located inside the module and cannot be accessed.

(1) : isolation strip for locating ground fault.

(2) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part E).

___________________________________________________________________________

7/9

A

L

N

- Connecting a PLC station comprising a number of racks, with AC supply referenced to ground

100-240 V AC supply

Q

PE

KM

(2)

— +

+ 24/48

VDC

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)

T S X

PSY ii 20

5520

NC

NC

24 V

0 V

(1)

Sensor/ preactuator/ power supply

(1)

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 7.2-5)

T S X

PSY ii 20

5520

NC

NC

24 V

0 V

Q : general isolator,

KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,

Protective fuse :

The TSX PSY 5520 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input : 5 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed,

(1) : isolation strip for locating ground fault.

(2) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part E).

Note :

Where there are a number of PLC stations, all powered from a single supply, the connection principle is identical.

___________________________________________________________________________

7/10

L

Connections 7

A

7.2-5 Sensor and preactuator power supply interlocking

It is advisable to interlock the various power supplies in the following sequence :

1 Power up the PLC and input (sensor) power supply via the KM contactor (see previous circuit diagrams),

2 If the PLC is running in AUTO mode, power up the output (preactuator) power supply via the KA contactor. This is interlocked with the alarm relay contact of each power supply.

In addition, safety standards require authorization to be given by an operator before restarting the installation after a stop (caused by a power failure or use of the emergency stop button). The following interlocking circuit diagrams take account of these standards.

The MANU/AUTO switch gives the option of forcing the outputs from a programming terminal, when the PLC is stopped.

Example 1 : PLC station supplied with AC

Emergency stop

Start KA

Preactuator power supply

AUTO alarm relay contact

RAL0

MANU alarm relay contact (1)

RAL0

RAL1

RAL2

KA RC

N

KA : contactor interlocked with the alarm relay of the power supply in AUTO operation.

(1) If the PLC station comprises a number of racks : connect all the power supply

"alarm relay" contacts (RAL0,

RAL1, RAL2, etc) in series.

___________________________________________________________________________

7/11

A

Example 2 : PLC station supplied with DC

+

Emergency stop

Start KA

Preactuator power supply

AUTO alarm relay contact

RAL0

MANU

Sensor power supply alarm relay contact (1)

RAL0

RAL1

RAL2

KA

KA : contactor interlocked with the alarm relay of the power supply in AUTO operation.

(1) If the PLC station comprises a number of racks : connect all the power supply

"alarm relay" contacts (RAL0,

RAL1, RAL2, etc) in series.

___________________________________________________________________________

7/12

8 Functions/Performance

8.1

Addressing discrete I/O channels

The addressing for all TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC bit and word objects is defined in the PL7 reference manual. This section only covers the addressing principle for discrete

I/O.

Channel addressing is geographical; ie. it depends on :

• the rack address,

• the physical position of the module on the rack,

• the extendable rack when 2 racks are used on the same address

Module positions (y)

0

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

TSX RKY 12EX

1

ON

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

TSX RKY 8EX

PS 08 09 10 11 12 13 14

TSX RKY 8EX

A

4

ON

PS 00 01 02 03 04

TSX RKY 6EX

7

ON

PS 00 01 02

TSX RKY 4EX

OFF

PS 08 09 10 11 12

TSX RKY 6EX

OFF

PS 08 09 10

TSX RKY 4EX

ON OFF

Note : When using 2 extendable racks on the same address, the position of the modules is defined by the setting of microswitch 4 on the rack (see section 2.3-3 - part A) :

• ON : module position y (y = 00 to 06 depending on the type of rack)

8/1

A

• Rack addresses

Rack references TSX v

RKY 6 RKY 8 RKY 12 RKY4EX RKY 6EX RKY 8EX RKY 12EX

Rack address (x) 0 0 0 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7

• Module positions using standard racks

Rack references

Module position (y)

TSX v RKY 6

00 to 04

RKY 8

00 to 06

RKY 12

00 to 10

• Module positions using extendable racks

Rack references micro

ON

TSX v

RKY 4EX RKY 6EX RKY 8EX RKY 12EX

Module position (y) 00 to 02 00 to 04 00 to 06 00 to 10 switch 4

OFF

Module position (y) 08 to 10 08 to 12 08 to 14 not usable

Note:

One rack address can contain up to 2 TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX extendable racks. In this case, the position of the modules is defined by the position (ON or OFF) of microswitch 4 which is located on the rack (see section 2.3-3 : principle for addressing 2 racks at the same address).

• Channel numbers (i)

TSX DEY i

/ DSY i

/DMY i modules 64 I/O

Channel number (i) 0 to 63

32 I/O 28 I/O

0 to 31 I=0-15, O=16-27

16 I/O

0 to 15

8 I/O

0 to 7

The syntax of a discrete I/O address is as follows :

% I or Q

Symbol I = input

Q = output rack x address x = 0 to 7 module y position y = 00 to 14 Point

• Examples

%Q7.3 means : output 3 of the module in position 07 in rack 0.

%I102.5 means : input 5 of the module in position 02 in rack 1 channel i number i = 0 to 63

___________________________________________________________________________

8/2

Functions/Performance 8

A

8.2

Single task application structure

The application comprises only the master (MAST) task, which may be executed either cyclically or periodically, depending on the selection at the time of configuration.

8.2-1 Cyclic execution

This type of operation corresponds to the normal execution of the PLC scan (default selection). It consists of sequencing the scans of the main task (MAST), one after another.

Program processing

Program processing

I.P.

I.P.

I.P.

I.P.

%I

Scan n (time T1)

%Q %I

Scan n+1 (Time T2)

%Q

I.P. (internal processing) : the system implicitly monitors the PLC (managing the system bits and words, updating the realtime clock current values, updating the status indicator lamps, detecting changes to RUN/STOP, etc) and processing requests originating from the programming terminal or the communication system,

%I (reading the inputs) : writing the status of information on the inputs to the memory,

Program processing : execution of the application program, written by the user,

%Q (updating outputs) : assigning physical outputs of discrete, analog and applicationspecific modules according to the status calculated by the application program.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/3

A

Operating cycle

PLC running : the processor performs internal processing, reading of inputs, application program processing and updating of outputs. Reading of inputs and updating of outputs occur in parallel with the internal processing.

Reading the inputs

Internal processing

PLC stopped : the processor only performs internal processing and reading of inputs.

The output values are handled by the module according to the fallback mode configured for each channel or group of channels.

• fallback to 0 or 1: the physical outputs are forced to the fallback value (the image memory is not changed),

• maintain state : the module physical outputs are maintained at their last value.

RUN

Program processing

Updating outputs

STOP

Internal processing

Watchdog overrun

The application scan time is monitored by the PLC (watchdog) and must not exceed the value defined at the time of configuration.

In the event of an overrun, system bit %S11 is set to 1 and the application is declared to be faulty, which causes the PLC to stop immediately (the processor ERR and RUN indicator lamps flash).

Comment

To avoid tripping the watchdog when making a modification in RUN mode, it is necessary to leave approximately 50 ms time available between the maximum duration of the MAST task and duration of the watchdog.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/4

Functions/Performance 8

A

8.2-2 Periodic execution

In this operating mode, the internal processing, reading of inputs, application program processing and updating of outputs are performed periodically according to a time defined during configuration (from 1 to 255 ms) which can be adjusted by system word %SW0.

At the start of a PLC scan, a timer, initialized with the current configured value, starts to count down. The PLC scan must finish before expiry of this downcount, which at 0 starts a new scan.

Program processing

Program processing

I.P.

I.P.

I.P.

I.P.

%I %Q %I %Q

Scan n (Time T) Scan n+1 (Time T)

I.P. (internal processing) : the system implicitly monitors the PLC (managing the system bits and words, updating the realtime clock current values, updating the status indicator lamps, detecting changes to RUN/STOP, etc) and processing requests originating from the programming terminal or the communication system,

%I (reading the inputs) : writing the status of information on the inputs to the memory,

Program processing : execution of the application program, written by the user,

%Q (updating of outputs) : assigning the physical outputs of discrete, analog and application-specific modules according to the status calculated by the application program.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/5

A

Operating cycle

PLC running : the processor performs internal processing, reading of inputs, application program processing and updating of outputs. Reading of inputs and updating of outputs occur in parallel with the internal processing.

If the period is not yet over, the processor completes its operating cycle with "system" tasks or background tasks until the end of the period.

PLC stopped : the processor only performs internal processing and reading of inputs.

The output values are handled by the module according to the fallback mode configured for each channel or group of channels.

• fallback to 0 or 1: the physical outputs are forced to the fallback value (the image memory is not changed),

• maintain state : the module physical outputs are maintained at their last value.

Start of period

Reading the inputs

RUN

Program processing

Updating the outputs

Internal processing

STOP

Internal processing

Period overrun : if the operating time exceeds that assigned to the period, the

PLC indicates a period overrun by setting task system bit %S19 to 1; processing continues and is executed in its entirety (it should not exceed the watchdog time limit).

The next scan is sequenced after implicit writing of the outputs of the current scan.

End of period

Watchdog overrun

The application scan time is monitored by the PLC (watchdog) and must not exceed the value defined at the time of configuration.

In the event of an overrun, system bit %S11 is set to 1 and the application is declared to be faulty, which causes the PLC to stop immediately (the processor ERR and RUN indicator lamps flash). The duration of the watchdog must, without exception, be longer than the duration of the period.

Comment

To avoid tripping the watchdog when making a modification in RUN mode, it is necessary to leave approximately 50 ms time available between the maximum duration of the period and the duration of the watchdog.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/6

Functions/Performance 8

A

8.3

Multitask application structure

The application structure of a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC can be single task or multitask.

In a single task structure, only the main MAST task is used in cyclic or periodic operation

(see previous section). In a multitask structure, 2 control tasks (MAST and FAST) and event-triggered tasks are offered and executed according to their priority. The triggering of one of these tasks (occurrence of an event or start of scan) interrupts the execution of less important tasks in progress. The interrupted task recommences when the priority task is complete. The structure of this kind of application is as follows :

• the main MAST task, low priority, is always present. It can be cyclic or periodic,

• the FAST task, medium priority, is optional. It is always periodic,

• the event-triggered tasks EVTi, highest priority, are called by the system when an event occurs. These tasks are optional and are useful for applications requiring short software response times. There can be no more than 32 on a TSX/PMX/PCX 5710 PLC and 64 on a TSX /PMX/PCX 57 20, 57 30 and 5740 PLC.

In all TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs, the event-triggered task EVT0 has higher priority than the other event-triggered tasks (EVT1 to EVT63).

Master task

MAST

Fast task

FAST

Priority

Event-triggered task

EVTi , i • 0

Event-triggered task

EVT0

+

Example of multitask processing :

• cyclic master task (MAST),

• fast task with 20 ms period (FAST),

• event-triggered task.

Event

Fast I P Q I P Q I P Q

Key

I : reading of inputs

P : program processing

Q : updating outputs

I P Q

I P Q I P Q

Master

I P P Q I P P Q I P

System

20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

8/7

A

8.3-1 Control tasks

• MAST master task

This task has the lowest priority and controls the majority of the application program. It can be configured to execute cyclically (default mode) or periodically. With periodic execution, the period duration can be configured in the PL7 Junior program and can be adjusted by system word %SW0 (%SW0 = 0 : cyclic execution).

The MAST task is organized according to the model described in the previous section : implicit reading of inputs, execution of the application program and implicit writing of outputs.

• FAST task

This task has a higher priority than the MAST task and is periodic in order to allow the lower priority time to be executed.

The period duration can be configured in the PL7 Junior program and adjusted by system word %SW1. This can be higher than that of the MAST task in order to adapt to slow periodic processing. The program executed must nevertheless remain short in order not to penalize the main task (MAST).

Note

When the FAST task is empty (no program), it does not exist in the PLC and the system bits and words associated with it are not significant. Hence the channels associated with the task are not exchanged.

• Period overrun

With periodic execution (MAST and FAST task), if the operating time exceeds that assigned to the period, the PLC signals a period overrun by setting system bit %S19 of the task to state 1; processing continues and is executed in its entirety (it must not exceed the watchdog time limit). The next scan is sequenced after implicit writing of the outputs of the current scan.

• Watchdog overrun

With cyclic or periodic execution, the application scan time is monitored by the PLC

(watchdog) and must not exceed the value defined during configuration. In the event of an overrun, system bit %S11 is set to 1 and the application is declared to be faulty, which causes the PLC to stop immediately (the processor ERR and RUN indicator lamps flash). The duration of the watchdog must, without exception, be longer than the duration of the period.

• Assigning channels to control tasks

In addition to the application program, the tasks execute "system" functions related to managing their associated implicit I/O. Associating a channel or group of channels with a task is defined in the configuration screen of the corresponding module; the task associated by default is the MAST task.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/8

Functions/Performance 8

A

Discrete I/O module channels :

The modularity of the discrete I/O modules being 8 successive channels (channels 0 to

7, channels 8 to 15, etc), the I/O can be assigned in groups of 8 channels, to either the

MAST or FAST task. For example, it is possible to assign the channels of a 32-input module as follows :

- inputs 0 to 7 assigned to the MAST task,

- inputs 8 to 15 assigned to the FAST task,

- inputs 16 to 23 assigned to the MAST task,

- inputs 24 to 31 assigned to the FAST task.

Counter and axis control module channels :

Each channel of a counter or axis control module can be assigned to either the MAST or FAST task. For example, for a 2-channel counter module, it is possible to assign : channel 0 to the MAST task and channel 1 to the FAST task.

Analog module channels :

Each channel (TSX AEY 414 and TSX ASY 410 modules) or group of 4 channels (TSX

AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules) can be assigned to either the MAST or FAST task

(MAST task by default).

Note

In order to maximize performance, the module channels should ideally be grouped in a single task.

• Task monitoring

In RUN mode, tasks can be enabled or inhibited by writing a system bit. When a task is inhibited, it exchanges its I/O but does not execute its application program.

MAST task monitoring : system bit %S30 (0 = task inhibited, 1 = task enabled).

FAST task monitoring : system bit %S31 (0 = task inhibited, 1 = task enabled).

By default, the MAST and FAST tasks are active.

8.3-2 Event-triggered tasks

Event-triggered tasks allow control events to be taken into account and processed as quickly as possible (for example, the event inputs of the TSX DEY 16FK and TSX DMY

28 FK discrete modules, threshold reached on a counter module, etc).

___________________________________________________________________________

8/9

A

Control events

These are external events which can be triggered by, for example :

• the event inputs of TSX DEY 16FK and TSX DMY 28 FK discrete modules, on a rising or falling edge,

• the counter channel(s) on counter modules,

• the reception of telegrams in a PLC equipped with a TSX FPP 20 or TSX SCY 2160 i module.

• etc.

It is possible to configure up to :

• 32 events in TSX/PMX/PCX 5710 PLCs,

• 64 events in TSX/PMX/PCX 57 20, 57 30 and 57 40 PLCs.

The association between a channel and an event number is made in the channel configuration screen.

The appearance of a control event diverts the application program towards the processing which is associated with the I/O channel or with the reception of a telegram, which caused the event :

External event IT

Event-triggered task

(EVTi)

Internal processing

All the inputs associated with the channel which caused the event are read automatically. (*)

Implicit reading :

• of inputs associated with the channel, origin of the event,

• of inputs used in the task program

The processing time must be as short as possible.

Event processing

All the outputs used in the EVTi task are updated.

Implicit updating of outputs used in the EVTi task

Notes :

The EVTi task I/O are also exchanged in the MAST or FAST task (in each period or scan), which can cause inconsistencies linked to the input chronology (loss of edge, for example).

(*) In the case of telegrams, data is read by the RCV_TLG function (refer to the "Communication" manual).

Enabling and inhibiting event-triggered tasks

Event-triggered tasks can be globally enabled or inhibited by the application program, via system bit %S38. If one or more events take place while the event-triggered tasks are inhibited, the associated processing is lost.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/10

Functions/Performance 8

A

Masking and unmasking control events

Two PL7 language instructions, available to the application program, allow both global masking and unmasking of control events. If one or more events take place during masking, they are memorized by the system and the associated processing in the eventtriggered tasks will only be performed after unmasking; the order of appearance is maintained.

The masking of event-triggered tasks must be short so that :

• there is not too long a delay in taking account of events,

• events are not lost (memorization capacity overrun).

Priority of control events

In a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC, there are 2 levels of priority for control events : event 0

(EVT0) has higher priority than the other events (EVT1 to EVT31 or EVT63 depending on the processor).

When an event occurs, if an event-triggered task of the same or higher priority level is being executed, it is memorized in a stack and the processing associated with this new event will only be performed after the processing in progress. If the stack overflows, events will be lost; an error is indicated by system bit %S39 being set to 1.

Maximum number of channels used in event-triggered tasks

The number of channels associated with the total number of control events is limited (see table below).

Type of channel

Discrete I/O channels

Analog channels

App.-specific channels

32

8

4

Type of processor

TSX/TPMX P57 1 i 2

TPCX 57 1012

(32 EVT)

TSX/TPMX P57 2 i 2

TSX/TPMX P57 3 i 2 (64 EVT)

TSX/TPMX P57 4 i 2

TPCX 57 3512

128

16

16

Notes

• I/O exchanges of the EVTi task are performed by channel (for some analog and application-specific modules) or by group of channels (for discrete modules and some analog modules). For this reason, if the processing modifies, for example, outputs 2 and 3 of a discrete module, it is the image (PLC memory) of outputs 0 to

7 which will be transferred to the module.

• any exchange of an input/output in an event-triggered task can cause loss of rising edge information, concerning processing performed on this channel (or group of channels), in the task where it has been declared : MAST or FAST.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/11

A

8.4

User memory structure

The memory space of TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs consists of an internal RAM memory designed to receive the application program. It varies in capacity according to the type of processor :

• 32 Kwords for a TSX P 57 102 or TPCX 571012 processor,

• 48 Kwords for a TPMX P57 102 or TSX/TPMX P 57 202 processor,

• 64 Kwords for a TSX P 57 252/TPMX P 57 302 processor,

80 Kwords for a TSX/TPMX P 57 352 or TPCX 573512 processor,

• 96 Kwords for a TSX P 57 402 processor,

• 112 Kwords (1) for a TSX/TPMX P 57 452 processor.

(1) When the application is in the internal RAM, the memory capacity is limited to 96 Kwords,

When the application is in the PCMCIA memory card, the memory capacity is 112 Kwords.

Furthermore, this internal RAM memory can be extended with a PCMCIA memory card with a capacity of :

• 32 or 64 Kwords, RAM or FLASH EPROM type for a TSX/TPMX P 57 102 or

TPCX 571012 processor,

• 32, 64 or 128 Kwords, RAM or FLASH EPROM type for a TSX/TPMX P 57 2 i 2 processor,

• 32, 64, 128 or 256 Kwords, RAM or FLASH EPROM (1) type for a TSX/TPMX P 57 3 i 2,

TSX/TPMX P 57 4 i 2, TPCX 57 3512 processor,

(1) FLASH EPROM memory card, limited to 128 Kwords

8.4-1 Application memory

The application memory can be divided into memory zones, physically shared between the internal RAM memory and the PCMCIA memory card (if the TSX/PMX/PCX 57 processor is equipped with a memory card) :

• the application data zone is always in internal RAM,

the application program zone (application descriptor and executable task code) is in internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card

the constants, initial values and configuration zone is in internal RAM or in the

PCMCIA card.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/12

Functions/Performance 8

A

With respect to these zones, 2 types of application memory organization are possible depending on whether or not the PLC is equipped with a PCMCIA memory card.

TSX /PMX/PCX 57 (with no PCMCIA card)

Data

Internal

R A M Program

TSX /PMX/PCX 57 (with PCMCIA card)

Data

Internal

R A M

Constants

Data : application data,

Program : descriptor and executable task code,

Constants : constant words, initial values and configuration

PCMCIA card

Program

Constants

Application in internal RAM

So that the application is loaded entirely in the protected internal RAM (*) of the PLC without PCMCIA memory extension card, its size must be compatible with that of the

RAM memory :

• 32 Kwords (TSX P57 102/TPCX 57 1012), split for example into 7.5 Kwords of application data and 24.5 Kwords of program and constants.

• 48 Kwords ( TPMX P57 102 and TSX/TPMX P 57 202), split for example into 10 Kwords of application data and 38 Kwords of program and constants.

• 64 Kwords (TSX P 57 252/TPMX P 57 302), split for example into 15 Kwords of application data and 49 Kwords of program and constants.

• 80 Kwords (TSX/TPMX P 57 352 et TPCX 573512), split for example into 20 Kwords of application data and 60 Kwords of program and constants.

• 96 Kwords (TSX P 57 402, TSX/TPMX P 57 452), split for example into 25 Kwords of application data and 71 Kwords of program and constants.

Note :If the PLC station has a TSX/TPMX P57 452 processor, the capacity of the internal RAM is limited to 96 Kwords.

(*) The internal RAM is protected by an optional 3.6 V battery located on the power supply module which has an autonomy of at least 1 year (see section 6 of this part).

___________________________________________________________________________

8/13

A

Application in the PCMCIA card

In this case, the memory card contains the executable program, the constants, the configuration, etc; the internal RAM is reserved exclusively for data.

In the creation and debugging phases of the program, it is necessary to use a protected

RAM type PCMCIA card. Once the program is operational, it will be able to be executed in this memory card or transferred to a FLASH EPROM type PCMCIA card, to ensure protection in the event of failure of the RAM type memory card battery.

Comment

When an application has been configured for execution in the internal RAM memory of a PLC (no PCMCIA memory card defined in the processor configuration screen), the presence of this card must first be declared (in the processor configuration screen) before transferring this application to a PLC equipped with a PCMCIA memory card.

Application protection

Whatever the structure of the PLC memory : whether the application is situated in the internal RAM or in the PCMCIA card, the application can be protected in order to inhibit access in online mode under PL7 Junior / PL7 Pro (program reading and debugging).

To "remove" the protection from such an application, it must be transferred again, without protection, from the terminal to the PLC. This operation requires the source program of the application to have been previously loaded into the terminal.

A protected application in a PCMCIA card can be executed by another PLC, but never duplicated. In addition to the protection offered by PL7 Junior, PCMCIA cards have a lock which inhibits any write access (program loading or modification).

Application backup

With Premium PLCs, it is possible to back up the application (program and constants) on a Backup memory card (reference TSX MFP BAK 032P). The internal RAM memory can thus be reloaded with the contents of this Backup memory card.

Note : This Backup function is not available when the application is being executed on a RAM or

FLASH EPROM PCMCIA memory card.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/14

Functions/Performance 8

A

• Loading an application "backup" from the PLC internal RAM memory.

This operation consists of transferring the application program from the PLC internal

RAM memory to a Backup PCMCIA memory card (reference TSX MFP BAK 032P).

To do this, perform the following steps.

1 insert the Backup memory card into its slot with the write-protection tab WP in the

OFF position,

2 transfer the application from the PLC internal RAM to the Backup card (PLC/

Backup menu, RAM v Backup zone option),

3 at the end of this operation, remove the Backup card and set the WP switch to ON

(backup protected).

!

If the application in the PLC is protected, inserting the Backup memory card reinitializes the PLC internal RAM memory. In this case, the procedure for loading the Backup memory card is as follows :

1 ensure that the application program to be saved is available in the terminal. If it is not, transfer this program to the terminal,

2 insert the Backup memory card into its slot with the write-protection tab WP in the

OFF position,

3 transfer the application from the terminal to the PLC internal RAM (PLC/Transfer program menu, : PC v PLC option),

4 transfer the application from the PLC internal RAM to the Backup card (PLC/Backup menu, RAM v Backup zone option),

5 at the end of this operation, remove the Backup card and set the WP switch to ON

(backup protected).

Note :

These various transfers are executed from a terminal equipped with PL7 Junior/PL7 Pro software.

• Retrieving an application "backup" from a preloaded memory card

This operation, using a preloaded memory card (reference TSX MFP BAK 032P), enables the application program to be updated without using a terminal. The writeprotection tab on this memory card must be in the ON position. When this type of card is inserted in a TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC, its contents are automatically transferred to the internal RAM memory of this PLC. At the end of the transfer, the

PLC is placed in forced STOP (whatever the configured RUN AUTO option).

As long as the "backup" card is in the PLC, a power break / power return always causes its start-up in forced STOP.

Removal of the card causes the PLC to cold start, in RUN or STOP according to the

RUN AUTO configuration.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/15

A

8.5

Performance

8.5-1 MAST task scan time

Program processing

I.P. at start of scan

%I

Scan time

I.P. at end of scan

%Q

IP = internal processing

MAST scan time =

Program processing time (Ttp)

+

Internal processing time at start and end of scan (Tti)

• Definition of the program processing time Ttp

Ttp =

Application code execution time (Texca)

+

Grafcet overhead time (ToG7)

Application code execution time (Texca)

Texca =

Σ of the time of each instruction executed by the application program

on each scan

The execution time of each instruction as well as the typical application used to verify these are given in the manual TLX DR PL7 33E - part B - section 8.

By way of indication, the table below gives the execution time in milliseconds (ms), for

1K instruction (1).

(1) 1K instruction = 1024 instructions

___________________________________________________________________________

8/16

Functions/Performance 8

A

Processors Application code execution time Texca (1)

Internal RAM PCMCIA card

100% Boolean 65% Boolean + 100% Boolean 65% Boolean +

35% numerical 35% numerical

TSX P57 102

TPCX 57 1012 0.72 ms

TSX P57 202 / 252

TSX P57 302 / 352 0.31 ms

TPMX P57 102

T PCX 57 3512

TSX P57 402 / 452

TPMX P57 202

TPMX P57 352 / 452

0.31 ms

1.39 ms

0.78 ms

0.5 ms

0.72 ms

0.47 ms

0.47 ms

1.39 ms

0.98 ms

0.68 ms

Note : not all the application program instructions need to be executed on each PLC scan.

(1) with all instructions executed on each PLC scan

___________________________________________________________________________

8/17

A

- Grafcet overhead time (ToG7)

ToG7 =

TGF

+

(TEA x number of steps active at the same time )

+

(TTP x number of transitions which are true at the same time).

Processors

TSX P57 102

TPCX 57 1012

TSX P57 202 / 252

TSX P57 302 / 352

TPMX P57 102

T PCX 57 3512

TSX P57 402 / 452

TPMX P57 202 / 352 / 452

TGF

0.332 ms

0,291 ms

0.13 ms

TEA

0.121 ms

0.106 ms

0.05 ms

TTP

0.491 ms

0.431 ms

0.19 ms

• Definition of the internal processing time at the start and end of the scan (Tti)

Tti =

MAST task system overhead time (TosM)

+ max [System time for communication in reception (Tcomr); management time at start of scan for implicit I/O %I (Tge%I)]

+ max [System time for communication in transmission (Tcome); management time at end of scan for implicit I/O %Q (Tgs%Q)]

MAST task system overhead time (TosM)

Processors

TSX P57 102

TPCX 57 1012

TSX P57 202 / 302

TPMX P57 102

TSX P57 252 / 352

TPCX 57 3512

TSX P57 402

TPMX P57 202

Time without FIPIO application Time with FIPIO application

2.9 ms –

2 ms

2 ms

0.6 ms

3.8 ms

TSX P57 452

TPMX P57 352 / 452

0.6 ms 1.1 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

8/18

Functions/Performance 8

A

- Management time of implicit I/O (%I and %Q) at the start and end of the scan

Tge%I =

60

µs

+ Σ of IN times for each module (see below)

Tgs%Q =

60

µs

+ Σ of OUT times for each module (see below)

Input (IN) and output (OUT) management times for each module :

Discrete I/O, analog, counter, axis control and stepper motor control modules.

Type of module

8-channel discrete inputs

16-channel discrete inputs

(all modules except TSX DEY 16FK)

32-channel discrete inputs

64-channel discrete inputs

Fast discrete inputs (8 channels used)

(TSX DEY 16FK/TSX DMY 28FK module)

Fast discrete inputs (16 channels used)

(TSX DEY 16FK/TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK module)

8-channel discrete outputs

16-channel discrete outputs

32-channel discrete outputs

64-channel discrete outputs

Analog inputs (per group of 4 channels)

Analog outputs (4 channels)

Counter (TSX CTY 2A/4A), per channel

Counter (TSX CTY 2C), per channel

Stepper motor control (TSX CFY ii

), per channel

Axis control (TSX CAY ii

), per channel

Input

(IN)

27 µs

Management times

Output

(OUT)

Total

(IN + OUT)

27 µs

27 µs – 27 µs

48 µs

96 µs

29 µs

37 µs

26 µs

33 µs

47 µs

94 µs

84 µs

59 µs

55 µs

65 µs

75 µs

85 µs

16 µs

22 µs

15 µs

20 µs

30 µs

60 µs

59 µs

20 µs

21 µs

20 µs

22 µs

48 µs

96 µs

45 µs

59 µs

41 µs

53 µs

77 µs

154 µs

84 µs

118 µs

75 µs

86 µs

95 µs

107 µs

Note:

The times given for discrete I/O modules assume that all the module channels are assigned to the same task.

Example: using a TSX DEY 32 D2 K module

- if the 32 channels are assigned to the same task, take the "32-channel discrete inputs" time.

- if only 16 channels are assigned to the same task, take the "16-channel discrete inputs" time, not the "32-channel discrete inputs" time divided by 2.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/19

A

- Communication system time

Communication (excluding telegram) is managed during the MAST task "Internal

Processing" phases :

- at the start of the scan for message reception (Tcomr)

- at the end of the scan for message transmission (Tcome)

The MAST task scan time is therefore affected by communication traffic. The communication time per scan varies considerably depending on :

- the traffic generated by the processor : number of communication EFs which are active simultaneously,

- the traffic generated by other devices in the direction of the processor or devices for which the processor, as master, acts as a router.

This time is only spent in scans where there is a new message to be managed.

Examples of communication system times :

- PL7 Junior software with terminal online and animation table open

Processors

TSX P57 102

TPCX 57 1012

TSX P57 202 / 252

TSX P57 302 / 352

TPMX P57 102

T PCX 57 3512

TSX P57 402 / 452

TPMX P57 202

TPMX P57 352 / 452

Average time per scan

2.5 ms

1.8 ms

0.8 ms

Maximum scan time

3.4 ms

2.4 ms

1 ms

- 1 SEND_RQ OF (mirror request, 100 characters)

Instruction execution time : 2 ms (for a TSX P 57 202 processor) to be included in the application code execution time for scans where the EF is actually executed.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/20

Functions/Performance 8

A

Communication system time

Processors

TSX P57 102

TPCX 57 1012

TSX P57 202 / 252

TSX P57 302 / 352

TPMX P57 102

T PCX 57 3512

TSX P57 402 / 452

TPMX P57 202

TPMX P57 352 / 452

Transmission time

1.4 ms

1 ms

0.4 ms

Reception time

1.4 ms

1 ms

0.4 ms

These times cannot all occur in the same scan. Transmission occurs in the same scan as execution of the instruction as long as the communication traffic is low, but not in the same scan as reception of the response.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/21

A

Example of calculating MAST task scan times in the following conditions :

For an application with the following characteristics :

• TSX P 57 202 processor,

• Program execution in PLC internal RAM,

• 10 K instructions, 65% Boolean + 35 % numeric,

• 1 communication OF of the SEND_REQ type,

• 128 discrete inputs distributed on : seven TSX DEY 16D2 modules + one TSX DEY

16FK module

• 80 discrete outputs, distributed on : five TSX DSY 16T2 modules,

• 32 analog inputs distributed on : two TSX AEY 1600 modules,

• 16 analog outputs distributed on : four TSX ASY 410 modules,

• 2 counter channels distributed on : 1 TSX CTY 2A module,

Application code execution time (Texca) :

• Without communication OF : 10x 0.78

• With 1 communication OF of the SEND_REQ type = (10x0.78) + 2

System overhead time (TosM)

=

=

=

7.8 ms

9.8 ms

2 ms

Management time for implicit I/O (%I and %Q) at the start and end of the scan :

Module reference

Type of module

TSX DEY 16 D2 16-channel discrete inputs 7

TSX DEY 16 FK 16-channel discrete inputs 1

(fast inputs)

Number of modules

TSX DSY 16T2 16-channel discrete outputs 5

TSX AEY 1600 Analog inputs 2 (32 channels)

TSX ASY 410

TSX CTY 2A

Analog outputs

Counter

4 (16 channels)

1 (2 channels)

Management time at start (IN) at end (OUT)

238 µs

37 µs

22 µs

165 µs

672 µs

236 µs

110 µs

100 µs

236 µs

40 µs

Total management time 1458 µs 398 µs

• Management time at start of scan : Tge%I = 60µs + 1458 µs = 1518 µs = 1.52 ms

• Management time at end of scan : Tgs%Q = 60µs + 398 µs = 458 µs = 0.46 ms

Communication system time :

• Sending the request : Tcome

• Receiving the response : Tcomr

= 1 ms

= 1 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

8/22

Functions/Performance 8

A

Scan time without execution of the communication OF

TcyM = Texca + TosM + Tge%I + Tgs%Q

= 7.8 ms + 2 ms + 1.52 ms + 0.46 ms = 11.78 ms

Scan time with execution of the communication OF and transmission of the request

TcyM = Texca + TosM + Tge%I + max [request transmission time (Tcome), Tgs%Q]

= 9.8 ms + 2 ms + 1.52 ms + max [1ms; 0.46 ms] = 14.32 ms

Scan time with reception of the response

TcyM = Texca + TosM + max [response reception time (Tcomr), Tge%I] + Tgs%Q

= 7.8 ms + 2 ms + max [1 ms; 1.52 ms] + 0.46 ms = 11.78 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

8/23

A

8.5-2 FAST task scan time

FAST scan time =

Program processing time (Ttp)

+

Internal processing time at start and end of scan (Tti)

• Definition of the program processing time Ttp

Ttp = Execution time of application code with respect to the FAST task (Texca)

- Application code execution time (Texca) : see the definition in section 8.5-1

• Definition of the internal processing time at the start and end of the scan (Tti)

Tti =

FAST task system overhead time (TsoF)

+

Management time for implicit I/O (%I and %Q) at start and end of scan

- FAST task system overhead time (TosF)

Processors

TSX P57 102

TPCX 57 1012

TSX P57 202 / 252

TSX P57 302 / 352

TPMX P57 102

TPCX 57 3512

TSX P57 402 / 452

TPMX P57 202

TPMX P57 352 / 452

FAST task system overhead time

0.8 ms

0.6 ms

0.2 ms

- Management time for implicit I/O (%I and %Q) : see section 8.5-1

___________________________________________________________________________

8/24

Functions/Performance 8

A

8.5-3 Response time on an event

Time between a rising edge on an event-triggered input and the corresponding edge on an output set by the event-triggered task program.

Example : program with 100 Boolean instructions and input module TSX DEY 16 FK

Processors Response time

TSX DSY 08T22 module

Minimum Typical

TSX DSY 32T2K module

Maximum Minimum Typical Maximum

TSX P57 102

TPCX 57 1012 1.2 ms

TSX P57 202 / 252 1 ms

TSX P57 302 / 352

TPMX P57 102

TPCX 57 3512

TSX P57 402 / 452

TPMX P57 202

TPMX P57 352 / 452

0.7 ms

1.3 ms

1.1 ms

0.8 ms

2.8 ms

2.2 ms

0.8 ms

1.9 ms

1.8 ms

1.5 ms

2.4 ms

2.2 ms

1.9 ms

4.2 ms

3.7 ms

2.1 ms

8.5-4 Precision of the internal time bases

For time management, Premium PLCs have :

• a time/date clock (10 -5 precision) from which system words %SW49 to %SW58 are refreshed.

• a realtime clock with a theoretical period of 1 ms but whose actual period is 0.99973

ms (10 -5 precision) which controls :

- the task periods,

- the timers, monostables, GRAFCET step activity times, etc,

- periodic system bits %S4 to %S7,

- system word %SD18.

This difference (0.027%) between the theoretical value and the actual value is completely acceptable for the above uses. However any timestamping operation performed using this clock will result in a gain of around 24 seconds per 24 hour period, which will not occur if the same operation is performed using the time/date clock.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/25

A

___________________________________________________________________________

8/26

9 Operating modes

9.1

Setting the PLC to RUN/STOP

Principle

The RUN/STOP function is used to start

(RUN) or stop (STOP) execution of the application program.

This function can be performed from :

• A programming or adjustment terminal,

• A discrete physical input which will previously have been dedicated to this function during the application configuration stage.

Setting the PLC to STOP using this physical input has priority over setting it to

RUN from a terminal or network.

PLC status

RUN

STOP

1

Physical input %Ixy.i

0

Set to RUN/STOP by physical input %Ixy.i

Operating modes of the physical RUN/STOP input

• Operation of the physical RUN/STOP input (%Ixy.i)

- At state 0, this input forces the application to stop (STOP state),

- A rising edge on this input causes the application to start up (RUN state),

- At state 1, the application can be controlled freely from a terminal,

- If there is a fault on the RUN/STOP input, the application stops. Once the fault has disappeared, and if the input is at state 1, the application restarts in RUN mode.

• Processing on a restart

- the cold start is performed in RUN if :

- the RUN/STOP input is at state 1,

- there is no fault on this input at the time of the start.

- the warm restart is performed in RUN if :

- the RUN/STOP input is at state 1,

- there is no fault on this input at the time of the start,

- the PLC has not received a STOP command before the break.

Summary of the PLC status during a warm restart

(depending on the state of the RUN/STOP input before the break and on return of power)

RUN/STOP input state on return of power

RUN/STOP input state before power break

State 1, PLC in RUN mode

State 1, PLC in STOP mode

State 0

Faulty

State 1

PLC in RUN mode

PLC in STOP mode

PLC in RUN mode

PLC in RUN mode

State 0 or faulty

PLC in STOP mode

PLC in STOP mode

PLC in STOP mode

PLC in STOP mode

___________________________________________________________________________

9/1

A

A

9.2

Processing on power break and power return

9.2-1 Break in the power supply on the rack supporting the TSX/PMX 57 processor (rack 0) or on the PC supporting the PCX 57 processor

On a power break, the system memorizes the application context. When the power supply returns, the saved context is compared to the current one, which defines the type of start which will be executed :

• If the application context has changed (loss of system context or new application), the

PLC performs a cold start and initializes the application,

• If the application context is identical, the PLC performs a warm restart without initializing the data.

Cold start

Cold starting is performed in RUN or in STOP depending on the state of the "automatic start-up in RUN" bit defined during configuration, or on the state of the RUN/STOP input.

• PLC response :

Initialization of the application data :

- Setting of the internal bits and I/O image to 0.

- Initialization of the system bits and words.

- Initialization of the function blocks from the configuration data.

- Canceling of any forcing.

- Setting of the internal words (%MWi) to 0 if no save was requested during configuration, otherwise they are left in their current state.

- Initialization of the data declared in the DFBs : either to 0, or to the initial value declared in the code, or with the value saved during the SAVE function.

Other initializations :

- Initialization of the message and event stacks.

- Transmission of the configuration parameters to all the discrete I/O modules and application-specific modules (analog, counter, axis control, communication, etc).

Start-up of the application, if start-up in RUN is requested :

- Restart of the first scan in the MAST task.

- Setting of system bits %S0 (cold start) and %S13 (first scan in RUN) to 1 at the start of the first MAST task scan.

- Setting of system bits %S0 and %S13 to 0 at the end of the first MAST task scan.

- Activation of other tasks.

___________________________________________________________________________

9/2

Operating modes 9

A

The PLC will respond differently on a cold start depending on whether it is equipped with a PCMCIA memory card (see diagram below).

PLC cold start

Yes

PCMCIA card present

No

Valid application in internal RAM

No

Yes

Cold start in RUN or in STOP (1) on the application in RAM memory.

The application is not valid, and the

ERR indicator lamp flashes.

Valid application in the

PCMCIA card ?

No

Yes

Cold start in RUN or in STOP (1) on the

PCMCIA card application. If an application in internal RAM is valid, it is deleted.

The application is not valid, and the

ERR indicator lamp flashes. If an application in internal RAM is valid, it is not accessible but is not deleted.

(1) Starting in RUN or in STOP is defined during configuration

• Processing of the application program on a cold start

If the user requires specific processing of the application in the event of a cold start, the state of system bit %S0, which remains at 1 during the first MAST task scan, must be tested at the start of the MAST task.

___________________________________________________________________________

9/3

A

• Actions causing a cold start

Actions

Loading an application

Action on the processor RESET button

Action on the processor RESET button following a blocking fault

Manipulation of the handle or

Inserting/removing a PCMCIA memory card

Initialization from PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro

Forcing system bit %S0

Restart after a power break with loss of context

Characteristics of the start

Forced cold start in STOP

Cold start in STOP or in RUN according to the configuration

Forced cold start in STOP

Cold start in STOP or in RUN according to the configuration

Cold start in STOP or in RUN according to the configuration, without initialization of the discrete I/O and application-specific modules.

Cold start in STOP or in RUN according to the configuration

Warm restart

A restart after a power break is treated as a warm restart if the application context has not changed.

• PLC response :

Restart of program execution program execution restarts from the line at which the power break occurred, without updating the outputs at the end of the restart cycle.

Initialization at the end of the restart cycle

- of the message and event stacks.

- transmission of the configuration parameters to all the discrete I/O modules and application-specific modules (analog, counter, axis control, communication, etc).

- deactivation of event-triggered and FAST tasks until the end of the first MAST task scan.

Restart

- Restart of the first scan in the MAST task.

- Setting of system bits %S1 (warm restart) and %S13 (first scan in RUN) to 1 at the start of the first MAST task scan.

- Setting of system bits %S1 and %S13 to 0 at the end of the first MAST task scan.

- Activation of other tasks.

• Processing the warm restart

If the user requires specific processing of the application in the event of a warm restart, the state of system bit %S1, which remains at 1 during the first MAST task scan, must be tested at the start of the MAST task.

___________________________________________________________________________

9/4

Operating modes 9

A

• Actions causing a warm restart

Actions

Action on the RESET button of the power supply module in rack 0

Forcing system bit %S1

Characteristics of the restart

Warm restart

Warm restart

Restart after a power break without loss of Warm restart context

(1) except on a station with a PCX 57 processor

Diagram of a cold start / warm restart

Reading inputs Stop the processor and save the application context

Program execution

TOP

>

If %S0 = 1, processing relating to cold start.

If %S1 = 1, processing relating to warm restart

>

Power failure detected

No >

BOT

Power return

Yes identical

Comparison of the saved context with the current context

Warm restart different

Cold start

Configuration self-tests

Configuration self-tests

Setting bit

%S0 or %S1 and %S13 to 0

Setting %S1 and %S13 to 1

Updating outputs

Initialization of the application

Setting %S0 and %S13 to 1

___________________________________________________________________________

9/5

A

9.2-2 Break in the power supply on a rack other than rack 0

All the channels on this rack are seen as faulty by the processor but the other racks are not affected, and the values of the faulty inputs cease to be updated in the application memory. In the case of a discrete input module they are set to 0, unless they have been forced, in which case they keep their forced value.

If the duration of the failure is less than 10 ms for AC power supplies or 1 ms for DC power supplies, it is not seen by the program which runs normally.

9.3

Processing on insertion/removal of a PCMCIA memory card

9.3-1 On TSX/PMX 57 PLCs

TSX/PMX 57 PLC processors are equipped with a cover on the front panel which must be removed in order to insert a PCMCIA memory card. Removing the cover causes the

PLC to stop without saving the application context. The module outputs change to fallback mode.

Insertion of the memory card fitted with its handle causes the PLC to cold start. Similarly, removing the memory card causes the PLC to stop without saving the application context.

!

If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted.

9.3-2 On PCX 57 PLCs

!

The PCMCIA memory card must not be inserted in or removed from a PCX 57 processor which is powered up. Such intervention, although not destructive for the processor or any other device, will cause random behavior of the processor, and operation cannot therefore be guaranteed.

!

If the program contained in the PCMCIA memory card has the RUN AUTO option, the processor automatically starts in RUN once the card has been inserted and the

PC has been powered up.

___________________________________________________________________________

9/6

Operating modes 9

A

9.4

Processing after action on the processor RESET button

All the processors have a RESET button on the front panel which, when pressed, causes the PLC to cold start in RUN or in STOP (1), on the application contained in the memory card (or in the internal RAM).

RESET following a processor fault

When a processor fault appears, the rack 0 (2) alarm relay is deactivated (open contact) and the module outputs change to the fallback position or their state is maintained, according to the choice made at the time of configuration. Pressing the RESET button causes the PLC to cold start, forced into STOP.

(1) Starting in RUN or in STOP is defined during configuration

(2) With a TSX/PMX 57 processor. This relay is not controlled in the case of a PCX 57 processor.

Note :

When the RESET button is used, and during the PLC cold start, the terminal link ceases to be active.

9.5

Processing after action on the power supply RESET button

The power supply module in each rack has a RESET button on the front panel, which can be activated to trigger an initialization sequence for the modules on the rack it is supplying.

If this button is activated on the power supply module on the rack containing the TSX/

PMX 57 processor (rack 0), it causes a warm start.

Special case of a PCX 57 processor

In this case, since the processor is not physically present on the rack at address 0, activation of the RESET button on the rack power supply does not cause a warm restart of the application. However, the modules on this rack are reinitialized.

___________________________________________________________________________

9/7

A

9.6

Response of the PCX 57 to an action on the PC

Note

The PCX 57 processor operating modes are identical to those of TSX / PMX 57 processors.

• Power up / down of the PC receiving the PCX 57 processor :

Warm restart of the PCX 57 if the application context has not changed.

• Micro-cuts on the AC supply powering the PC :

Since the PCX 57 does not have a mechanism for filtering micro-cuts, any micro-cut which is not filtered by the PC internal power supply causes the PCX 57 to warm restart if the application context has not changed.

• Pressing the PC RESET button :

As a general rule, and provided that the RESET button on the PC activates the RSTDRV signal on the ISA bus, pressing the RESET button on the PC causes the PCX 57 to warm restart if the application context has not changed,

• Software RESET of the PC (CTRL ALT DEL),

These actions have no effect on the current status of the PCX 57 processor (if the PCX

57 processor is in RUN, it stays in RUN, etc). They do not cause a warm restart or a cold start.

Comment :

A software blocking fault on the PC has no effect on the current status of the PCX 57 processor (same response as to that for a PC software RESET).

• Software commands (Shutdown or Restart)

On some PCs (a small minority), the Shutdown or Restart software commands cause a warm restart of the PCX 57.

This behavior of the PCX 57 has been observed on certain PCs where the mother board manages the RSTDRV signal in a particular way during the PC RESET phases.

On the majority of PCs, these software commands do not affect the behavior of the PCX

57.

___________________________________________________________________________

9/8

Operating modes 9

A

9.7

Behavior on insertion/removal of a module when powered-up

All modules can be inserted when powered-up, with the exception of the processor module and PCMCIA communication cards.

Insertion and removal of modules when powered-up means that a module can be replaced without stopping the application.

The removal of a module activates system bits associated with the I/O, and the faults associated with the module and its channels. Inputs are no longer updated in the application memory and are set to 0 in the case of a discrete input module, unless they have been forced, in which case they keep their forced value while the module is missing. The processor I//O indicator lamp comes on.

When the new module is inserted, the system tries to configure it with the configuration of the module it is replacing.

If this configuration is successful (module with the same reference), the channels are once again taken into account by the application, and the faults caused by the absence of the module disappear. The processor I/O indicator lamp goes off.

If this reconfiguration fails (module with a different reference), the channels are not taken into account by the application, the system bits associated with the I/O and the faults associated with the module and its channels remain active, and the processor I/O indicator lamp stays on.

9.8

Behavior of the I/O on downgraded operating mode

9.8-1 Safety value of discrete and analog outputs

• Situations :

- the PLC is not configured

- the PLC is in STOP mode without previously having been in RUN mode (for example after loading the application, or on a cold start in STOP mode),

- the PLC is in RUN mode but the task which manages the output module is in STOP mode and has never been in RUN mode,

- power break on the rack where the output module is positioned,

- output module does not conform to the configuration.

• Behavior :

Outputs are set to the safety value : 0 for discrete and analog outputs.

___________________________________________________________________________

9/9

A

9.8-2 Discrete and analog outputs switching to fallback mode

• Situations :

These occur as soon as the application ceases to function normally

- the PLC switches to STOP mode,

- the PLC switches to "error" (processor fault) or to "HALT or software fault" (application blocking fault),

- the task which manages these outputs switches to STOP mode,

- insertion of a breakpoint in the task which manages these outputs,

- command to switch outputs to fallback mode by system bit %S9 or the debug screen,

- communication fault detected by the output module (output not updated by the processor).

• Behavior :

The output values are managed by the module depending on the fallback mode for each channel or group of channels :

- fallback : the module physical outputs are forced to the fallback value configured (0 or

1). (The image memory is not modified),

- maintain state: the module physical outputs are maintained at their last value.

The default operating mode is fallback to 0.

9.8-3 I/O faults

• Situations :

- channel fault,

- module fault,

- module missing or does not conform to the configuration,

- communication fault detected by the processor.

• Behavior :

- faulty discrete input channel : the value in the application memory is set to 0, unless it is forced, in which case it is maintained at the forced value,

- other types of faulty input : in the case of a communication fault, the value in the application memory is not updated (the value is maintained),

- faulty output channel : the value of the output continues to be managed by the application and is only sent to the module if the latter conforms to the configuration.

The fault is indicated by the system bits associated with the I/O and the fault information associated with the module and its channels. The processor I/O indicator lamp is lit.

___________________________________________________________________________

9/10

Operating modes 9

A

9.9

Alarm relay management

9.9-1 On TSX/PMX 57 PLCs

Only the alarm relay on the power supply module in rack 0 is managed according to the state of the application. It opens for the duration of a stop, even a partial stop, of the application, and in particular on the occurrence of a blocking fault. However, the alarm relay in the power supply module for the other racks remains closed.

The relay on the power supply module for a rack other than that of rack 0, is only significant of the state of the power supply for this rack. It opens when this power supply is no longer operating.

9.9-2 On PCX 57 PLCs

If using a PCX 57 type processor which can be integrated in a PC, the alarm relay on the power supply for rack 0 is not managed and thus is always open.

If this function is absolutely essential to the correct operation of the installation, the power supply module alarm relay may be replaced by using a relay output from a module on the Bus X or FIPIO bus. To do this, this output must be :

• a relay output,

• configured with a fallback to 0 (default configuration),

• initialized at state 1 before executing the application program.

When configured in this way, the relay output will behave in the same way as the alarm relay on the power supply module in rack 0 controlled by a TSX / PMX57 processor.

9.10 Loading the operating system (OS)

The operating system for TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLCs can be updated from the programming terminal by downloading via the processor terminal port.

For a PCX 57 PLC, downloading can be performed from the PC which supports the

PCX 57 processor. In this case, the PC serial output should be connected on the PCX 57 processor terminal port by a TSX PCU 1030 cable.

The operating system updating procedure is explained in the manual

"PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro Software Operating Modes".

___________________________________________________________________________

9/11

A

___________________________________________________________________________

9/12

10 Appendix

10.1 Fan modules

10.1-1 General presentation

The fan modules installed above

TSX/PMX/PCX 57 PLC station racks provide forced air convection to ensure an even ambient temperature inside the unit and thus eliminate any hot spots which may exist.

A temperature probe integrated into every fan module indicates to the user that the ambient temperature has reached its maximum value.

The use of fan modules is advised in the following cases :

Ambient temperature in the range 25°C...60°C : this increases the lifetime of the various TSX Premium PLC components (25% increase in MTBF).

• Ambient temperature in the range 60°C...70°C : since the ambient temperature is limited to 60°C without ventilation, forced ventilation is used to decrease the temperature inside the modules by 10°C, bringing the internal module temperature to the equivalent of an ambient temperature of 60°C.

Three fan modules are available for adaptation to the main power supplies : fan module with 24 VDC,

110 VAC or 220 VAC supply voltage.

Depending on the rack modularity (4, 6, 8 or 12 positions), 1, 2 or 3 fan modules must be installed above each rack :

• TSX RKY 12 / 12EX racks with 12 positions :

3 fan modules,

• TSX RKY 8 / 8EX racks with 8 positions :

2 fan modules,

• TSX RKY 4EX/6 / 6EX racks with 4 and 6 positions :

1 fan module

TSX RKY 12/12EX

TSX RKY 8/8EX

TSX RKY 4EX/6/6EX

RKY 12/12EX

RKY 8/8EX

RKY 4EX/6/6EX

___________________________________________________________________________

10/1

A

A

10.1-2 Physical presentation

1 Terminal block for connecting :

- the module power supply voltage,

- the power supply for the temperature probe and the associated indicator lamp or preactuator.

Each terminal can receive one 1.5 mm 2 wire without a cable end or two 1 mm 2 wires with cable ends.

3

4

1

2

3

2 Terminal for grounding the module.

3 Holes for fixing the module (M4 x 12 screws). When using these modules with TSX

Premium PLCs, the fan modules must be fixed on a 35 x 15 AM1-ED iii type rail

.

4 Tilted shutters which enable the air to be directed to the front.

10.1-3 Catalog

Type of module Fan

Characteristics

Power supply voltage

Temperature probe

No. of modules per rack

References

24 VDC 110 VAC 220 VAC

Yes (temperature detection • 80°C ± 5°C), open on alarm

1 module on a rack with 4 and 6 positions (TSX RKY 4EX/6/6EX)

2 modules on a rack with 8 positions (TSX RKY 8/8EX)

3 modules on a rack with 12 positions (TSX RKY 12/12EX)

TSX FAN D2 P TSX FAN A4 P TSX FAN A5 P

___________________________________________________________________________

10/2

Appendix 10

A

10.1-4 Dimensions

• Single fan module (measurements in millimeters)

138

Back view

110

Right-hand view

• Fan module + rack (measurements in millimeters)

146

Front view

160 mm (1)

200 mm (2)

(1) with screw terminal module

(2) Maximum depth associated with all types of modules and their connectors

Racks

TSX RKY 4EX

TSX RKY 6/6EX

TSX RKY 8/8EX

TSX RKY 12/12EX

Number of positions

4

6

8

12 a a

187.9 mm

261.6 mm

335.3 mm

482.6 mm

___________________________________________________________________________

10/3

A

10.1-5 Mounting

The fan modules associated with TSX/PMX/PCX Premium

PLCs must be mounted on 35 mm x 15 mm rails (type AM1-

ED iii

) to compensate for the thickness of the rack.

Note :

The fixing distances for TSX RKY ii

racks are defined in part A

- section 6.3.

35x15 rail

Support

Fan module

TSX Premium PLC

Mounting positions for the fan modules depending on the type of rack

Racks with 6 positions (TSX RKY 6/6EX) Racks with 8 positions (TSX RKY 8/8EX)

Racks with 4 positions (TSX RKY 4EX)

___________________________________________________________________________

10/4

Appendix 10

A

10.1-6 Installation rules for racks with fan modules

(See general rules on positioning racks which are not fan-cooled, section 6.1 in this part).

100 a

100

2 a a

2

2 a > 50 mm b > 30 mm

1 Equipment or enclosure.

2 Cable duct or clip.

1

___________________________________________________________________________

10/5

A

10.1-7 Connections

• Connecting the fan module power supply

TSX FAN D2 P TSX FAN A4 P

θ θ

Fu 1

24 VDC

+24V

0V

Fu 1

110 VAC

L

N

TSX FAN A5 P

θ

Fu 1

220 VAC

L

N

Note : when using several fan modules of the same type, use one common power supply for all the fan modules.

• Connecting the temperature probe power supply

The temperature probe can be power supplied either in AC or DC and connected to an indicator lamp, a PLC input, etc.

DC power supply AC power supply

Fu 2

24/48 VDC

θ

Fu 2

110/220 VAC

θ

Note : when using several fan modules, the probe contacts will be placed in series.

(1)

Fu 2

θ

Fan module 1

θ

Fan module 2

θ

Fan module 3

(1) a

24 / 48 V or c

110 / 220 V

___________________________________________________________________________

10/6

Appendix 10

A

10.1-8 Characteristics

Type of module

Power supply voltage Nominal

TSX FAN D2 P

24 VDC

TSX FAN A4 P

110 VAC

TSX FAN A5 P

220 VAC

Limit 20...27.6 VDC 90...120 VAC 180...260 VAC

Current drawn at nominal voltage 180 mA 180 mA 100 mA

Temperature probe Power supply voltage : a

24 / 48 VDC or c

110 / 220 VAC

Breaking capacity 1 A at 24 VDC / 10 000 operations

(on resistive load) 1 A at 48 VDC / 30 000 operations

1 A at 110 VAC / 30 000 operations

0.5 A at 220 VAC / 10 000 operations

Activation

Status

Temperature > 75 °C ± 5°C closed if temperature < 75°C ± 5°C open if temperature > 75°C ± 5°C

___________________________________________________________________________

10/7

A

___________________________________________________________________________

10/8

Discrete I/O modules

Contents

Part B1

Section Page

1 Presentation 1/1

1.1 Description 1/1

1.1-1 General description 1/1

1.1-2 Physical description 1/2

1.2 Catalog 1/3

1.3 Installing, inserting and removing modules 1/10

1.3-1 Installation 1/10

1.3-2 Inserting/removing modules 1/10

1.4 Labeling 1/11

1.4-1 Modules with screw terminal block 1/11

1.4-2 Module with HE10 connectors 1/12

1.5 Channel addressing 1/13

2 Discrete I/O functions 2/1

2.1 General functions 2/1

2.1-1 Constant current inputs 2/1

2.1-2 Protecting DC transistor outputs 2/1

2.1-3 Reactivating outputs 2/1

2.1-4 Output fallback 2/2

2.1-5 Sharing the I/O 2/2

2.2 Specific functions for certain modules 2/3

2.2-1 Programmable input filtering for TSX DEY 16 FK and

TSX DMY 28FK/DMY 28RFK modules 2/3

2.2-2 Latching inputs on TSX DEY 16 FK and DMY 28FK modules 2/4

2.2-3 Event management on inputs for TSX DEY 16 FK and

TSX DMY 28 FK modules 2/5

2.2-4 Reflex and timer functions on the TSX DMY 28RFK module 2/6

___________________________________________________________________________

B1/1

B1

B1 Discrete I/O modules

Contents

Part B1

Section Page

2.3 Diagnostic functions 2/8

2.3-1 Module diagnostics 2/8

2.3-2 Process diagnostics 2/8

2.4 Protection 2/10

2.4-1 Built-in protection for 24 VDC transistor output modules 2/10

2.4-2 Fuse protection 2/10

2.4-3 Protection of relay output contacts (TSX DSY 08R5/16R5) 2/11

3 General installation rules 3/1

3.1 Recommendations for use 3/1

3.2 General wiring rules and recommendations 3/2

3.3 Compatibility of sensors v inputs and preactuators v outputs 3/5

3.3-1 Compatibility of sensors with inputs 3/5

3.3-2 Compatibility of preactuators with outputs 3/7

3.3-3 Using negative logic (24 VDC) 3/8

3.4 Software installation and associated language objects 3/10

3.5 Discrete I/O display and diagnostics 3/10

4 Characteristics 4/1

4.1 Characteristics of input modules with terminal block 4/1

4.1-1 24 - 48 VDC positive logic input modules 4/1

4.1-2 24 VDC negative logic input module 4/2

4.1-3 AC voltage input modules 4/3

___________________________________________________________________________

B1/2

Discrete I/O modules

Contents

Part B1

Section Page

4.2 Characteristics of input modules with connectors 4/4

4.2-1 24 VDC positive logic fast input module 4/4

4.2-2 24 VDC and 48 VDC 32-channel positive logic input modules 4/5

4.2-3 24 VDC 64-channel positive logic input module 4/6

4.2-4 Temperature derating 4/7

4.3 Characteristics of outputs with terminal block 4/8

4.3-1 DC transistor output modules (positive logic) 4/8

4.3-2 Relay output modules, thermal current 3 A 4/9

4.3-3 DC relay output module 4/10

4.3-4 Relay output module, thermal current 5 A 4/11

4.3-5 Triac output modules 4/12

4.4 Characteristics of transistor output modules with connector 4/13

4.4-1 DC transistor output modules (positive logic) 4/13

4.5 Characteristics of mixed I/O modules with connectors 4/14

4.5-1 24 VDC positive logic fast inputs 4/14

4.5-2 DC transistor outputs (positive logic) 4/15

5 Connection 5/1

5.1 Connection methods 5/1

5.1-1 Connection to modules with screw terminal block 5/1

5.1-2 Connection to modules with HE10 connectors 5/2

5.2 Module connections 5/4

5.2-1 TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2 modules 5/4

5.2-2 TSX DEY 16D3 module 5/6

5.2-3 TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 / 16A5 modules 5/7

5.2-4 TSX DEY 16FK module 5/9

5.2-5 TSX DEY 32D2K / 64D2K modules 5/11

5.2-6 TSX DEY 32D3K module 5/14

5.2-7 TSX DSY 08T2 / 16T2 / 16T3 / 08T22 / 08T31 modules 5/16

5.2-8 Relay modules 50 VA : TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5 5/19

___________________________________________________________________________

B1/3

B1

B1 Discrete I/O modules

Contents

Part B1

Section

5.2-9 Relay modules 100 VA : TSX DSY 08R5A / 08R4D

5.2-10 TSX DSY 08S5 / 16S5 / 16S4 modules

5.2-11 TSX DSY 32T2K / 64T2K modules

5.2-12 TSX DMY 28FK/DMY 28RFK modules

6 TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O

Page

5/21

5/23

5/26

5/29

6/1

6.1

Presentation

6.2

TSX Micro I/O module and sub-base compatibility

6/1

6/6

6.3

TSX Premium I/O module and sub-base compatibility

6.4

Module v interface sub-base connection principle

6/7

6/8

6.5

Sensor or preactuator connection to sub-bases 6/10

6.5-1 ABE-7H08R10, ABE-7H08R11, ABE-7H16R10,

ABE-7H16R11 sub-bases

6.5-2 ABE-7H12R10, ABE-7H12R11 sub-bases

6.5-3 ABE-7H08R21, ABE-7H16R20, ABE-7H16R21,

ABE-7H16R23 sub-bases for type 2 inputs

6.5-4 ABE-7H12R20, ABE-H12R21 sub-bases

6.5-5 ABE-7H08S21, ABE-7H16S21 sub-bases with

6/10

6/11

6/12

6/13

1 isolator per channel

6.5-6 ABE-7H12S21 sub-base with 1 isolator per channel

6.5-7 ABE-7H16R30, ABE-7H16R31 sub-bases

6.5-8 ABE-7H12R50 sub-base

6.5-9 ABE-7H116R50 sub-base

6.5-10 ABE-7H16F43 output sub-base with 1 fuse and

1 isolator per channel

6.5-11 ABE-7H16S43 input sub-base with 1 fuse and

1 isolator per channel

6.5-12 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7R08S111,

6/14

6/15

6/16

6/17

6/18

6/19

6/20

ABE-7R16S111, ABE-7R16S210, ABE-7R16S212

6.5-13 Fixed solid state relay input adaptor sub-bases :

6/21

ABE-7S16E2B1, ABE-7S16E2E1, ABE-7S16E2E0,

ABE-7S16E2F0, ABE-7S16E2M0 6/24

___________________________________________________________________________

B1/4

Discrete I/O modules

Contents

Part B1

Section

6.5-14 Solid state output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S16S2B0,

ABE-7S16S2B2 and ABE-7S08S2B0, ABE-7S08S2B1

6.5-15 Solid state or electromechanical relay output sub-bases, relay 10mm wide

6.5-16 Electromechanical or solid state relay input or output

sub-bases, relay 12.5 mm wide

Page

6/25

6/28

6/34

6.6

Compatibility table for relays and ABE-7R16T iii , ABE-7P16T iii ,

ABE-7P16F iii sub-bases 6/41

6.7

Accessories 6/42

6.8

Sub-base electrical characteristics

6.8-1 Fixed input adaptor sub-bases

6.8-2 Fixed solid state output adaptor sub-bases

6.8-3 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases

6.8-4 Removable output electromechanical relays

6.8-5 Removable input solid state relays

6.8-6 Fixed output solid state relays

6/43

6/43

6/44

6/45

6/46

6/47

6/48

6.9

Dimensions and mounting 6/49

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

B1/5

B1 Discrete I/O modules

Section

Contents

Part B1

Page

___________________________________________________________________________

B1/6

1 Presentation

1.1

Description

1.1-1 General description

Inputs : these receive signals from sensors and perform the acquisition, adaptation, electrical isolation and filtering functions and protect against interference signals.

Outputs : these store instructions given by the processor in order to control preactuators via decoupling and amplifying circuits.

A wide range of discrete inputs and outputs meet requirements encountered on the following levels :

• functional : AC or DC I/O, positive or negative logic,

• connection via screw terminal blocks or HE 10 connectors,

• modularity : 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels/module.

B1

Modularity

C o n n e c t i o n

64 I or 64 Q

HE10 connectors

32 I or 32 Q

32 I

28 I/O

(16 I+12 Q)

16 I

Modularity

Connection

Screw terminal

blocks

(Term i nal blocks not

shown)

64 I or 64 Q 32 I or 32 Q 8/16 I or 8/16 Q 16 Q or 8 Q

B1

1.1-2 Physical description

I/O modules are standard format (1 slot), and are incorporated in a plastic case which provides IP20 protection for all the electronics.

The internal shielding elements are connected to the protective ground for the rack via contacts located at the back of the modules (see part A section 7.1-2).

Modules with connection via screw terminal block

1 Module display and diagnostics block.

2 Removable screw terminal block for direct connection of the I/O to sensors and preactuators.

Reference : TSX BLY 01.

3 Pivoting door providing access to terminal block screws and also acting as a reference label holder.

4 Rotating support containing the locating device.

Notes :

• The terminal blocks are supplied separately.

• Some output modules have integrated fuses, which can be accessed from the front when the terminal block, 2, is removed.

1

4

2

3

4

Modules with connection via HE10 connectors

Each module is composed of the following elements :

1 Module display and diagnostics block.

2 HE10 connectors, protected by a cover. They enable connection of the I/O to sensors and preactuators either directly or via TELEFAST 2 connection sub-bases.

1

2

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

1.2

Catalog

Module type Inputs with screw terminal block

Presentation 1

B1

M o d u l a r i t y

V o l t a g e

I s o l a t i o n

IEC 1131-2 c o n f o r m i t y

L o g i c

Proximity sensor compatibility

Filtering

C o n n e c t i o n

References

8 inputs

24 VDC

16 inputs

48 VDC 24 VAC

24 VDC

48 VAC 100..120

200..240

VAC VAC

Isolated inputs

Type 2

Positive

(1)

Negative

2-wire DC and 3-wire PNP 2-wire DC & proximity sensors, IEC 947-5-2 3-wire NPN proximity sensor, IEC

947-5-2

2-wire AC proximity sensor (IEC 947-5-2)

Integrated, 50 or 60 Hz supply Integrated 4 ms

Screw terminal block

TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY

08D2 16D2 16D3 16A2 16A3 16A4 16A5

(1) For module TSX DEY 16A2, type 2 conformity only applies to the 24 VAC version

B1

Catalog (continued)

Module type Inputs with HE10 connectors

M o d u l a r i t y

V o l t a g e

16 fast inputs

24 VDC

32 inputs

48 VDC

I s o l a t i o n Isolated inputs

Type 1 IEC 1131-2 c o n f o r m i t y

L o g i c

Type 2

Positive

Proximity sensor compatibility

2-wire proximity sensor, see characteristics section 3.3-1

3-wire PNP proximity sensor fixed 4 ms Filtering (0.1.. 7.5 ms in steps of 0.5)

Programmable filter Yes

Latching Yes

Event Yes

64 inputs

24 VDC

Type 1

Connection

References

HE 10 connectors

TSX DEY

16FK

TSX DEY

32D2K

TSX DEY

32D3K

TSX DEY

64D2K

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

Presentation 1

B1

Catalog (continued)

Module type Transistor outputs with screw terminal block

M o d u l a r i t y

V o l t a g e

Isolation

Current

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Protection

Fallback

L o g i c

Response time

C o n n e c t i o n

References

8 outputs 16 outputs

24 VDC 48 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC

Isolated outputs

0.5 A 2 A 1 A 0.5 A 0.25 A

Yes

Outputs protected against short-circuits and overloads with automatic or controlled reactivation with a rapid electromagnet demagnetization circuit

Configurable fallback mode for outputs. Continuous monitoring of output control and outputs set to 0 if an internal fault is detected

Positive

0.3 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 0.2 ms

Screw terminal block

TSX DSY

08T2

TSX DSY

08T22

TSX DSY

08T31

TSX DSY

16T2

TSX DSY

16T3

B1

Catalog (continued)

Module type Relay outputs with screw terminal block

Modularity

Voltage

Isolation

Current

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Protection

Fallback

Unlocking terminal block

Logic

Connection

References

8 outputs 16 outputs

12..24 VDC or

24..240 VAC

24..130 VDC 24..48 VDC or 12..24 VDC or

24..240 VAC

Outputs isolated between contact and ground

24..240 VAC

3 A 5 A 3 A

Yes

No protection Protection by interchangeable fuses

Outputs set to 0 on detection of a fault, reactivated after fuse replacement

Configurable fallback mode for outputs.

No protection

Automatic output cut-off facility when the terminal block is unlocked

Positive/negative

Screw terminal block

TSX DSY

08R5

TSX DSY

08R4D

TSX DSY

08R5A

TSX DSY

16R5

___________________________________________________________________________

1/6

Catalog (continued)

Module type Triac outputs with screw terminal block

Presentation 1

B1

Modularity

V o l t a g e

Isolation

Current

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Protection

Fallback

Unlocking terminal block

Connection

References

8 outputs

48..240 VAC

16 outputs

Isolated outputs

2 A

Yes

1 A

24..120 VAC

Protection by interchangeable fuses Outputs not protected against shortcircuits or overloads. Flameproof protection by non-interchangeable fuses.

Configurable fallback mode for outputs.

Automatic output cut-off facility when the terminal block is unlocked

Screw terminal block

TSX DSY

08S5

TSX DSY

16S5

TSX DSY

16S4

B1

Catalog (continued)

Module type Solid state outputs with connectors

M o d u l a r i t y

V o l t a g e

Isolation

C u r r e n t

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Protection

Fallback

L o g i c

C o n n e c t i o n

References

32 outputs

24 VDC

64 outputs

Isolated outputs

0.1 A

Yes

Outputs protected against short-circuits and overload with automatic or controlled reactivation

Configurable fallback mode for outputs. Continuous monitoring of output control and outputs set to 0 if an internal fault is detected

Positive

HE 10 connectors

TSX DSY

32T2K

TSX DSY

64T2K

___________________________________________________________________________

1/8

Catalog (continued)

Module type Mixed I/O with connectors

Presentation 1

B1

Modularity

12 outputs

Inputs

Voltage

Isolation

16 fast inputs

24 VDC

Isolated inputs

16 fast inputs

12 reflex outputs

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Logic

Event

Outputs

Voltage

Type 1

Positive

Prox. sensor compatibility 2-wire proximity sensor, see characteristics section 4.2, 3-wire proximity sensor

Programmable filtering (0.1.. 7.5 ms in steps of 0.5)

Latching Yes

Yes

Isolation

Current

IEC 1131-2 conformity

24 VDC

Isolated outputs

0.5 A

Yes

Protection Outputs protected against short-circuits and overloads with automatic or controlled reset with a fast demagnetization circuit for electromagnets

Fallback

Logic

Response time

C o n n e c t i o n

References

Configurable fallback mode for outputs. Continuous monitoring of output control and outputs set to 0 if an internal fault is detected

Positive

0.6 ms

HE 10 connectors

TSX DMY 28FK TSX DMY 28RFK

B1

1.3

Installing, inserting and removing modules

1.3-1 Installation

All TSX Premium discrete I/O modules are standard format.

They are supplied with power by the backplane bus and include a display on the front panel (see section 3.5).

The modules can be placed in either a standard rack or an extendable rack. They can be moved safely without switching off the power supply to the rack.

Extendable rack Standard rack

Modules with connectors

Modules with terminal block

1.3-2 Inserting/removing modules

Discrete I/O modules should be inserted in the rack as follows :

• Position the two pins at the bottom of the card in the corresponding slots in the rack.

• Tilt the module upwards and plug in the backplane connector.

• Tighten the fixing screw at the top of the module (see part A, section 6.4, Mounting modules).

Warning

If this screw is not tightened, the module will not stay in position in the rack.

! Reminder :

Modules must be inserted and removed with the sensor and preactuator supply off and

the terminal block disconnected.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/10

Presentation 1

1.4

Labeling

1.4-1 Modules with screw terminal block

The module has three-fold labeling :

1 on the display block, the module reference,

2 under the display block, the module characteristics

3 on the terminal block, a removable label, to be placed inside the door, printed on both sides with the following information : external view (door closed) :

• module reference,

• type of channels,

• a box for writing in the module position number (address),

• designation of each channel

(symbol), internal view (door open) :

• I/O wiring diagram with channel numbers and connection terminal numbers.

View with door closed

TSX DEY 16D2

16 Current Sinking

Inputs

24VDC IEC type 2

I 0

1

2

3

TSX DEY 16D2

16I 24 VDC

IEC type 2

TSX DEY 16D2

16 Current Sinking

Inputs

24VDC IEC type 2 I 0

13

14

15

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

1

2

3

8

9

10

11

12

6

7

4

5

13

14

15

Note :

The terminal block labels are included with the module.

___________________________________________________________________________

View with door open

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

0 VDC

+24 VDC

I 0

1

12

13

14

15

9

10

11

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

B1

B1

1.4-2 Module with HE10 connectors

The module labeling is laser-engraved :

• TSX DEY ii / DSY ii input or output modules

1 Marking on the display block shows :

• the module reference,

2 Marking of module characteristics

3 Marking of addresses of corresponding channels :

• module channels 0 to 15 (I or Q),

4 Marking of addresses of corresponding channels :

• module channels 16 to 31 (I or Q),

5 Marking of addresses of corresponding channels :

• module channels 32 to 47 (I or Q),

6 Marking of addresses of corresponding channels :

• module channels 48 to 63 (I or Q),

• TSX DEY 32D3K input modules and TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK mixed I/O modules

1 Marking on the display block shows :

• the module reference,

2 Marking of module characteristics

3 Marking of addresses of corresponding input channels :

• input channels 0 to 15 of the

TSX DEY 32D3K or TSX DMY 28FK/

28RFK (I) modules,

4 Marking of addresses of corresponding channels :

• input channels 16 to 31 of the

TSX DEY 32D3K (I) module,

• output channels 16 to 27 of the

TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK (Q) modules.

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

5

4

6

___________________________________________________________________________

1/12

Presentation 1

1.5

Channel addressing

Channel addressing is geographical; in other words it depends on :

• the rack address (0 to 7),

• the physical position of the module in the rack :

- 00 to 02 for a rack with 4 slots,

- 00 to 04 for a rack with 6 slots,

- 00 to 06 for a rack with 8 slots,

- 00 to 10 for a rack with 12 slots.

The syntax for a discrete I/O address is as follows :

% I or Q Rack address

Module position

.

Symbol I = Input

Q = Output

0 to 7 00 to 14 Point

Example :

%I102.5 indicates : input bit 5 of the module in position 2 of rack 1.

channel number

0 to 63

For more information, see :

• in this manual - part A - section 7.1,

• in the application-specific manual TLX DS 57 PL7 33E - Volume 1 - part B.

B1

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

1/14

2 Discrete I/O functions

2.1

General functions

2.1-1 Constant current inputs

24 and 48 VDC inputs are "constant current" type. Although the input voltage may be greater than 11 V (for 24 VDC inputs) or 20 V (for 48 VDC inputs), the input current is constant.

This characteristic has the following advantages :

• it ensures minimum current when energized conforming to the IEC standard,

• it limits the current drawn when the input voltage increases, thus avoiding unnecessary temperature rise in the module,

• it reduces the current drawn on the sensor power supply, whether provided by the

PLC power supply or a process power supply.

B1

2.1-2 Protecting DC transistor outputs

All transistor outputs (except those which are specifically marked "Unprotected"), have a protective device which detects the appearance of an overload or short-circuit when an output is active. Any such fault deactivates the output (tripping) and the fault is signaled on the front panel display. The indicator lamp for the faulty channel flashes, and the I//O fault lamp lights up.

The fault is also fed back to the system. Language interface objects and debug screens are used to display the fault.

To use an output after tripping, it must be reactivated (see section 2.1-3).

2.1-3 Reactivating outputs

When an output is tripped following a fault, it can be reactivated so that it is active again.

Reactivation may be either automatic or controlled, depending on the option selected during configuration. This applies to modules with DC transistor outputs and to

modules with relay and triac outputs protected by interchangeable fuses. (See application-specific manual TLX DS 57 PL7 33E - Volume 1 - part B "Discrete functions")

• If the automatic option has been selected, reactivation is executed by the module.

There is a delay of about 10 seconds, and if the fault persists, the reactivation is repeated every 10 seconds until the fault disappears.

• If the controlled option has been selected, reactivation is executed after a command from the application program or from the terminal, via the debug screen. The minimum time between two reactivations is 10 seconds, and the module incorporates a delay to prevent repeated reactivations occurring very close together.

Reactivation affects one group of 8 channels at a time, but has no effect on channels which are not active or faulty.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

B1

2.1-4 Output fallback

All TSX Premium discrete module outputs can be placed in a state determined by the user when there is a fault on the PLC bus (base rack or extension rack), or if the processor stops. This state, known as the fallback position, is selected during configuration.

Several options are available :

• Fallback strategy configured per group of 8 channels with one of the following options :

- maintain channel states (last state given by the module),

- switch to fallback position.

• Fallback value : if switching to fallback position is requested, all 8 channels in the same group will take the fallback value (0 or 1) set during configuration. The fallback value is determined channel by channel.

2.1-5 Sharing the I/O

Each module is split functionally into groups of 8 channels. Each group of channels can be assigned to a specific application task. This is most useful for modules with a large number of channels (eg : TSX DEY 64D2K) where, for example, 48 channels could be assigned to the Master task (Mast), 8 channels to a Fast task (Fast) and 8 channels would not be used for any task.

This property can be accessed in the PL7 Junior / PL7 Pro software in configuration mode.

Note :

Inputs belonging to a single group (of channels) can easily be used by different tasks. When sharing the output channels of the same group, it is wise to take a certain number of precautions.

The channels of a single group have consecutive numbers, the first channel of each group always being a multiple of 8, (eg channels 0 to 7, 8 to 15, ... 24 to 31, ... 56 to 63).

Operating modes are common to channels in a group, and some functions are handled in common for all the channels in a group.

Example :

• Fallback strategy.

• Reactivation of outputs after tripping.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/2

2 Discrete I/O functions 2

2.2

Specific functions for certain modules

2.2-1 Programmable input filtering for TSX DEY 16 FK and TSX DMY 28FK/

DMY 28RFK modules

The input filter time for TSX DEY 16FK, TSX DMY 28FK and TSX DMY 28RFK modules can be modified in configuration mode.

Input filtering is performed by :

• a fixed analog filter which provides maximum immunity for 0.1 ms to filter out line interference,

• a digital filter which can be configured in increments of 0.5 ms. This filtering can be modified in configuration mode via the terminal.

B1

Configurable filter times (in ms)

0.1

1 2 3

0.5

1.5

2.5

The default filter time is 4 ms.

3.5

4

4.5

5

5.5

6

6.5

7

7.5

Note

• To avoid signals due to contact bounce when mechanical contacts are closed, it is advisable to use filter times of more than 3ms.

• In order to comply with standard IEC 1131-2, the filter time must be set to

3.5 ms.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/3

B1

2.2-2 Latching inputs on TSX DEY 16 FK and DMY 28FK modules

Principle

Use the latching function to take account of particularly short pulses and those which are shorter than the PLC scan time.

This function takes the pulse into account so that it may be processed in the master

(MAST) or fast (FAST) task during the next scan without interrupting the PLC scan.

The pulse is taken into account when the input changes state. This may be either :

• change from state 0 vÆ

to state 1,

• change from state 1 v

to state 0,

Example of processing a latch on pulse 0 v 1

PLC scan n

PLC scan n+1

PLC scan n+2

PLC scan n+3

PLC scan n+4

PLC scan

I P Q I P Q I P Q I P Q I P Q

Pulse arrival

Inputs latched

1

0

1

0

Example of processing a latch on pulse 1 v 0

PLC scan n

PLC scan n+1

PLC scan n+2

PLC scan n+3

PLC scan n+4

PLC scan

I P Q I P Q I P Q I P Q I P Q

Pulse arrival

1

0

Inputs latched

1

0

,, Reading and processing

Key

I = read inputs, P = process program, Q = update outputs

Note

The time which separates the arrival of two pulses on the same input must be greater than or equal to the time of two PLC scans.

The minimum duration of the pulse should be greater than the filter time selected.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/4

2 Discrete I/O functions 2

2.2-3 Event management on inputs for TSX DEY 16 FK and TSX DMY 28 FK modules

Principle

TSX DEY 16FK and TSX DMY 28FK modules can be used to configure up to 16 event-triggered inputs. These inputs enable acceptance of events and ensure their immediate processing (interrupt processing). Event-triggered processing is assigned

priority 0. Event 0 is only associated with channel 0.

These inputs can be associated with event-triggered processing (Evti) and are defined in configuration mode by :

• i = 0 to 31 for TSX/TPMX P57102 and TPCX 57 1012 processors

• i = 0 to 63 for TSX/TPMX P57 2 i 2 processors

• i = 0 to 63 for TSX/TPMX P57 3 i 2 and TPCX 57 3512 processors

• i = 0 to 63 for TSX/TPMX P57 4 i 2 processors

Event-triggered processing is initiated on a rising edge (0 v 1) or falling edge (1 v 0) of the associated input or simply on an edge : an EVT state (see Language interface) enables it to be differentiated during processing.

When two edges are detected on a module simultaneously, the events are processed in ascending order of channel number.

The principle of event-triggered processing is defined in part A, section 1.6-5 of the reference manual.

The recursion time of the edges on each input or the pulse width on an input programmed as RE + FE must correspond to the following diagram :

B1

RE or

FE

T recursion

RE

+

FE

T width

T recursion or T width > 0.25 ms + 0.25 X module event number

• Max. frequency of Evt = 1kHz / module Evt number

• Max number of events in bursts : 100 Evt per 100 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

2/5

B1

2.2-4 Reflex and timer functions on the TSX DMY 28RFK module

This module is used for applications which require a response time faster than the FAST task or only event processing (< 500

µ s).

It is used for control system functions executed at module level and independently of the PLC task, using the following as input variables :

• the physical inputs (%I) of the module

• the output commands (%Q) of the module

• the channel or module fault data

• the states of the module physical outputs

These functions are programmed using PL7 software in configuration mode. The configuration screen for each output comprises two main parts :

• one part representing a simplified ladder rung layout with 4 lines of 4 contacts to achieve a combinational logic function of the input variables listed above,

• the other part representing the function used which can be either direct control of the output using the configured combinational logic, or a function block.

%I5.2

%I5.3

%I5.4

%Q5.20

ERR 2

%I5.8

ERR 3

%I5.7

%Q5.25

%I5.2

%I5.3

%I5.4

%Q5.20

Val

Monostable

%Q

5.25

ERR 2

%I5.8

ERR 3

Sel

%I5.7

___________________________________________________________________________

2/6

2 Discrete I/O functions 2

List of main function blocks :

• on-delay timer function block

• off-delay timer function block

• on-delay/off-delay timer function block

• 2-value timer function block

• selectable on-delay/off-delay timer function block

• retriggerable monostable function block

• time-delayed non-retriggerable monostable function block

• 2-value monostable function block

• oscillator function block

• dual threshold counter function block

• single threshold counter with monostable function block

• interval counter function block used to measure time or length

• Burst function block used to generate a defined number of oscillator periods

• PWM function block used to generate continuous oscillation with a fixed frequency but variable cyclic ratio

• slow speed detection function block

• speed monitoring function block

• command / control function block used to control an action and to check that it has been executed within a given time :

- type 1 command / control function block : (1 single command),

- type 2 command / control function block : (2 commands, FWD and REV),

• function block command during a number of counting points (standard positioning),

• fault indication function block,

• D latch function block, memorization of edge,

• T latch function block, division by 2.

A further description of these various function blocks and their software setup can be found in the application-specific manual TLX DS 57 PL7 33E - Volume 1 - part B.

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

2/7

B1

2.3

Diagnostic functions

Dialog fault

Any communication fault, hindering normal operation of an output module or the fast input module, is indicated on the front panel by the red module "ERR" lamp flashing, and by the %@ module.ERR fault bit.

A communication fault can be caused by a hardware fault on the backplane bus, by a processor fault or by a faulty extension cable.

Internal module fault

Any internal fault which the module is able to detect is indicated on the front panel by the red "ERR" lamp coming on and the green "RUN" lamp going off.

Some instances of total module failure cannot be detected but are characterized by all lamps going off (as with a power supply fault).

2.3-2 Process diagnostics

Monitoring sensor/preactuator voltage

All input modules and transistor output modules have a device for monitoring the sensor and preactuator voltage.

When the sensor or preactuator voltage is below a certain threshold at which correct module operation cannot be ensured, the red I/O lamp lights up, and the "External voltage" fault is also indicated in the language objects.

• For an input module, when the sensor voltage is correct, the state perceived by the input is indeed that of the sensor, whatever type of sensor is being used (within the recommended range).

• For an output module, when the preactuator voltage is correct, the state determined for the preactuator is the state determined by the application. However, it is up to the user to check that the preactuator supply voltage is within the range accepted

by the preactuators being used (bear in mind the residual output voltage).

This monitoring is unique to modules with terminal blocks. On 32 or 64-channel modules with connectors, there is one monitoring device per connector (or one for every 16 channels).

A sensor or actuator voltage fault causes all inputs and outputs affected by the fault to switch to fault mode, that is all channels for a module with terminal block, and the group(s) of 16 channels, on a 32 or 64-channel module with connectors.

Note :

Relay and triac output modules do not monitor preactuator voltage.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/8

2 Discrete I/O functions 2

Monitoring the presence of the terminal block

All modules with connection via terminal block include a facility for checking that the terminal block is on the module. If the terminal block is missing or if it is not properly attached to the module, the "I/O" lamp flashes and a "Terminal block" fault is indicated in the language interface.

Module with connectors do not have a facility for monitoring the presence of connectors.

The module power supply monitoring performs this function.

Monitoring short-circuit and overload

Transistor output modules include a load state monitoring facility. If there is a short-circuit or an overload on one or more outputs, they trip. The faults are indicated on the front panel by the lamps of the faulty channels flashing, and by the red "I/O" lamp lighting up.

The faults are indicated in the language interface by the "Short-circuit fault" bit on each channel and by the "Trip" bit of channel groups per module.

The tripping of a channel is indicated by :

• I/O indicator lamp on (I/O fault),

• channel lamp flashing,

• channel fault bit being set to 1 (%Ix.i.ERR =1),

• a fault bit in the module status word.

Monitoring sensor voltage

All input modules include a facility for monitoring the sensor voltage for all module channels. This facility checks that the supply voltage for the sensors and the module is at a sufficient level to ensure correct operation of the module input channels (see section

4 for the various characteristics of each module).

If the sensor voltage is lower than or equal to a defined threshold, it is signaled by :

• I/O indicator lamp on (I/O fault),

• channel fault bit %Ix.i.ERR =1,

• a fault bit in the module status word and in the channel status word.

Note : The sensor supply should be protected by a fast blow fuse.

Monitoring preactuator voltage

All modules with 24/48 VDC transistor outputs include a facility for monitoring the preactuator supply voltage for all module channels. This facility checks that the supply voltage for the preactuator and the module is at a sufficient level to ensure correct operation of the module output channels.

This voltage should be greater than 18V (24 VDC power supply), 36 V (48 VDC power supply) for modules with DC transistor outputs. If the preactuator voltage is less than or equal to this threshold, the outputs change to state 0 and the fault is indicated by :

• I/O indicator lamp ON (I/O fault),

• channel fault bit %Ix.i.ERR =1,

• a fault bit in the module status word and in the channel status word.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/9

B1

B1

2.4

Protection

2.4-1 Built-in protection for 24 VDC transistor output modules

Protection of each channel against short-circuits and overload

All channels incorporate a protection device providing protection against this type of fault.

Protection against polarity reversal

Modules have a device which causes the power supply to short-circuit, without damaging the module, to protect against polarity reversal.

In order for this protection to function in optimum conditions, it is essential to place a fast blow fuse on the power supply upstream of the preactuators.

Note :

As a general rule it is advisable to fit one fuse for all the module output channels; see section 4.3 for a table of characteristics.

Protection against inductive overvoltages

Each output is individually protected against inductive overvoltages and is equipped with a zener diode fast demagnetization circuit for electromagnets which enables a reduction in the mechanical cycle time of certain fast machines.

2.4-2 Fuse protection

TSX DSY 08R5A/08R4D modules and

TSX DSY 08S5/16S5 output modules are equipped with interchangeable fuses which can be accessed on the front panel of the modules when the terminal block is removed.

If there is a fault, the front panel displays the module diagnostics.

The I/O indicator lamp is on; the channel fault bit %Ix.i.ERR =1.

Interchangeable fuses

The fuses can be accessed once the terminal block has been removed.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/10

2 Discrete I/O functions 2

2.4-3 Protection of relay output contacts (TSX DSY 08R5/16R5)

These relay outputs do not include a protection device for the contacts so as to enable control of :

Preactuator

• electrically isolated inputs, with a low energy level which require zero leakage current,

• power circuits, by eliminating induced overvoltages at source.

For this reason, it is imperative to connect the following to the terminals of the preactuator coils :

- an RC circuit or an MOV (ZNO) peak limiter, for use with AC supply,

- a discharge diode for use with DC supply.

Relay contact

Module

Relay contact

Preactuator

B1

Note : A relay output used on an AC load must not then be used on a DC load and vice versa.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/11

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

2/12

3 General installation rules

3.1

Recommendations for use

Installation/removal of screw terminal blocks or HE10 connectors

Screw terminal blocks or HE10 connectors are installed or removed with the power supply to the preactuators and sensors off.

Inserting and removing modules

The terminal block must be disconnected when modules are inserted and removed, however, this can be done while the PLC is powered up.

Locking modules into their slot

In order to ensure that the contacts and electrical ground are securely connected, the fixing lock on the modules should be pushed in as far as possible.

Choice of DC power supplies for sensors and preactuators

Regulated or rectified power supplies with filtering

When using external 24 VDC power supplies, it is advisable to use :

• either regulated power supplies,

• or non regulated power supplies with filtering of :

- 1000 µF/A for full wave single rectification and 500 µF/A for 3-phase rectification,

- Maximum ripple (peak to peak) : 5%

- Maximum voltage variation : - 20% to + 25% of the nominal voltage

(ripple included)

Note :

Unfiltered rectified power supplies must not be used.

Cadmium/nickel battery power supply

This type of power supply may be used for the sensors and preactuators as well as the associated I/O. In normal operation, the latter tolerate a maximum voltage of 30 VDC.

When this type of battery is being charged, the battery voltage may reach 34 VDC for a duration of 1 hour. For this reason, all I/O modules operating on 24 VDC tolerate a voltage of 34 VDC, limited to 1 hour in 24 hours.

This type of operation has the following restrictions :

• the maximum current at 34 VDC tolerated by the outputs must never exceed the current defined for a voltage of 30 VDC,

• a derating in temperature which limits to :

- 80% of the I/O at state 1 up to 30°C,

- 50% of the I/O at state 1 at 60°C.

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

3/1

B1

3.2

General wiring rules and recommendations

Discrete I/O contain protection circuits ensuring excellent immunity to industrial conditions. However, certain rules must be observed :

External power supplies for sensors and preactuators

These power supplies must be protected against short-circuits and overloads by fast blow fuses.

Caution

If the 24 VDC installation does not conform to SELV standards (safety extra low voltage), the 0V of the 24 VDC power supplies must be connected to the mechanical ground, which itself must be taken to ground as near to the power supply unit as possible. This is necessary for the safety of personnel in the event of one of the AC supply phases coming into contact with the 24 VDC.

Note :

If an I/O module with a screw terminal block or HE10 connector is present in the PLC, the sensor or preactuator voltage must be connected to it, otherwise an "external power supply" fault will be displayed with the I/O LED on.

For module with connectors, the sensor/preactuator power supply must be connected to each connector, except if the corresponding channels are not used and have not been assigned to any task (See the "Discrete functions" section in the applicationspecific installation manual).

Inputs

• Usage recommendations for fast input modules (TSX DEY 16 FK/DMY 28FK/DMY 28RFK)

- when using 24 VDC inputs, it is advisable to set the filter time for the required function.

- if the filter time is reduced to less than 3 ms, use of sensors with mechanical contact outputs is not recommended in order to avoid the effect of contact bounce when the contact is closed.

- in order to achieve optimal operation, the use of DC inputs and sensors is recommended as AC inputs have a much longer response time.

• 24 VDC inputs and line coupling with AC supply

Close coupling between cables carrying AC and cables carrying DC input signals may interfere with operation.

(see simplified schematic on the next page)

___________________________________________________________________________

3/2

General installation rules 3

24 VDC inputs and line coupling with an AC supply (continued)

Simplified schematic

– a power supply

+

M o d u l e

C

+24 VDC

Input %I.

–0 VDC

Output %Q

.

L N to c power supply

The power supply has the neutral connected directly or indirectly to ground

When the contact at the input is open, AC crossing the parasitic capacitance of the cable may generate a current in the input which may cause it to change to state 1.

Line capacitance not to be exceeded.

The following values are given for coupling with a 240 VAC/50 Hz line.

For coupling with a different voltage, apply the following formula :

Permissible capacitance = Capacitance at 240 VAC x 240

line voltage

Modules

TSX DEY 32/64D2K

TSX DEY 16D2 45 nF

TSX DEY 16FK/DMY 28FK Filtering 1.1 ms

TSX DMY 28RFK

Max. permissible coupling capacitance with 240 VAC/50 Hz line

25 nF

Capacity 10 nF

3.5 ms

30 nF

7.5 ms

60 nF

Note :

By way of an example, a standard 1 meter cable has a coupling capacitance of 100 to 150 pF.

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

3/3

B1

• 24 to 240 VAC inputs and line coupling

In this case, when the line controlling the input is open, current circulates due to the capacitance of the cable coupling.

Simplified schematic

N a power supply

L

M o d u l e

C

L

Input %I.

N

Line capacitance not to be exceeded :

Module

TSX DEY 16A2

TSX DEY 16A3

TSX DEY 16A4

TSX DEY 16A5

Maximum coupling capacitance

50 nF

60 nF

70 nF

85 nF

Outputs

• for high currents, it is advisable to segment the terminal connections by protecting each one with a fast blow fuse,

• use wire of sufficient cross-section to avoid voltage drops and temperature rises.

Cable routing

• inside and outside the equipment,

In order to limit the AC coupling, power circuit cables (power supply, power contactors, etc) must be separated from the input cables (sensors) and the output cables (preactuators).

• outside the equipment,

I/O cables must be placed in a sheath separate to that used for power cables and placed in separate metal ducting, which must be connected to ground. These cables must be separated by a minimum distance of 100 mm.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/4

General installation rules 3

3.3

Compatibility of sensors v inputs and preactuators v outputs

3.3-1 Compatibility of sensors with inputs

Compatibility between 3-wire sensors and 24 and 48 VDC inputs

• 3-wire sensors and positive logic inputs (sink)

IEC 1131-2 type 1 and type 2,

All inductive or capacitive proximity sensors, 3-wire

PNP type photoelectric detectors, operating at 24 and

48 VDC, are compatible with all positive logic inputs.

+

PNP

+

%I.

(Input)

Module

• 3-wire sensors and negative logic inputs (source)

All inductive or capacitive proximity sensors and 3wire NPN type photoelectric detectors, operating at 24

VDC, are compatible with negative logic inputs from the Premium range.

+

NPN

+

%I.

(Input)

Compatibility between 2-wire sensors and 24 VDC inputs

• 2-wire sensors and positive logic inputs (sink)

IEC 1131-2 type 1.

All proximity sensors or other 2-wire sensors, operating at 24 VDC and having the characteristics listed below, are compatible with all 24 VDC positive logic type 1 inputs from the Premium range.

Residual voltage at closed state :

7 V

Minimum switching current :

2.5 mA

Residual current at open state :

1.5 mA.

• 2-wire sensors and positive logic inputs (sink)

IEC 1131-2 type 2.

All 2-wire proximity sensors, operating at 24 and 48

VDC and conforming to standard IEC 947-5-2, are compatible with all 24 and 48 VDC positive logic type

2 inputs.

• 2-wire sensors and negative logic inputs (source)

All proximity sensors or other 2-wire sensors, operating at 24 VDC and having the characteristics listed below, are compatible with all 24 VDC negative logic type inputs from the Premium range.

Residual voltage at closed state :

7 V

Minimum switching current :

2.5 mA

Residual current at open state :

1.5 mA.

+

+

+

+

+

Module

%I.

(Input)

Module

%I.

(Input)

Module

%I.

(Input)

Module

___________________________________________________________________________

3/5

B1

B1

Compatibility between 2-wire sensors and 24/48/100...120/200...240 VAC inputs

All 2-wire AC proximity sensors conforming to standard IEC 947-5-2 and other 100...120

VAC sensors are compatible with all 110...120 VAC IEC 1131-2 type 2 inputs.

All 2-wire AC proximity sensors conforming to standard IEC 947-5-2 and other 200...240

VAC sensors are compatible with all 200...240 VAC IEC 1131-2 type 2 inputs from the

Premium range in the 220...240 VAC range.

Summary table

Type of input

Type of proximity sensor

24 VDC 24/48 VDC 24 VDC 24/48 VAC

Type 1 Type 2 100..120 VAC positive positive negative Type 2 logic logic logic

200...240 VAC

Type 2

All 3-wire prox. sensors (DC), PNP

All 3-wire prox. sensors (DC), NPN

Telemecanique or other 2-wire

Proximity sensors (DC) with the following characteristics:

Residual voltage at closed state

7V

Minimum switching current

2.5 mA

Residual current at open state

1.5 mA

2-wire proximity sensor (AC/DC)

2-wire proximity sensor (AC)

(1) in nominal voltage range 220...240 VAC

Key

DC : operates at a voltage

AC : operates at c voltage

AC/DC : operates at c or a voltage

(1)

(1)

Compatibility

___________________________________________________________________________

3/6

General installation rules 3

3.3-2 Compatibility of preactuators with outputs

Compatibility between DC preactuators and outputs

• Respect the maximum current and output switching frequency specified in the characteristics tables.

• In the case of low consumption preactuators, the output leakage current at rest state must be taken into account such that :

I nominal • 50 x I leakage,

I nominal = current drawn by the preactuator,

I leakage = leakage current in the output at rest state.

Compatibility between tungsten filament lamps and transistor outputs (constant current)

• For outputs with protection against short-circuits, respect the maximum power of the tungsten filament lamps specified in the characteristics tables, otherwise there is the risk of tripping the outputs due to the lamp pull-in current at the moment of illumination.

Compatibility between AC preactuators and relay outputs

• Preactuators with inductive AC have a pull-in current which may exceed the holding current by ten times during a maximum time of 2/F seconds (F= AC frequency). For this reason, the relay outputs are designed to withstand this duty cycle (AC14 and

AC15). The characteristics table for relay outputs specifies the maximum permitted holding power (in VA) as a function of the number of operations.

Reminder of the definition of thermal current

The current which may continuously flow through a closed relay, with an acceptable rise in temperature. Under no circumstances should this current be switched by the relay.

Compatibility between filament lamp and triac outputs

• respect the maximum power equal to U x I max.

Compatibility between AC preactuators and triac outputs

• respect the maximum specified current,

• In the case of low consumption preactuators, the output leakage current at rest state must be taken into account such that :

I nominal • 50 x I leakage,

I nominal = current drawn by the preactuator,

I leakage = leakage current in the output at rest state.

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

3/7

B1

3.3-3 Using negative logic (24 VDC)

Negative logic (Source inputs / Sink outputs) can be used with the following modules :

• for the inputs :

- TSX DEY16A2 (this module intended for use with AC, can also be used with DC : negative logic).

Caution :

The filter time for the inputs of the TSX DEY 16A2 module is between 10 and 20 ms.

• for the outputs :

- relay outputs modules : TSX DSY 16R5 or TSX DSY 08R4D.

Wiring diagram :

Input module : TSX DEY 16A2

2-wire proximity sensor

+24 VDC

0 V

3-wire NPN p r o x i m i t y s e n s o r

+

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

I 0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

7

9

11

13

1

3

5

15

Comment :

The use of negative logic is not recommended when the sensor 0V is connected to ground. This is because if one of the wires were to be accidentally disconnected and come into contact with the mechanical ground, the input might be set to state

3/8

General installation rules 3

Relay output module : TSX DSY 16R5

+24 VDC

Loads

Fuses

8

10

16

18

2

4

6

12

14

20

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

Q0

1

2

3

5

6

C0-3

4

7

C4-7

8

9

10

11

C8-11

12

13

14

15

C12-15

0 V

Relay output module : TSX DSY 08R4D

+24...130 VDC

1

2

Q0

Loads

4

6

*

8

3

5

*

7

Q1

C0-1

*(24 V strap)

C2-3

9

Q2

10

11

Q3

12

14

13

*

15

Q4

C4-5

Q5

16

18

17

*

19

Q6

C6-7

Q7

20

0 V

(*) : Strap required for the 24 V

___________________________________________________________________________

3/9

B1

B1

3.4

Software installation and associated language objects

Discrete I/O used in the application program should be software configured using a configuration editor :

• declaration of the various modules in their respective position (in the rack),

• definition of the channel parameters for each module :

- filter time for fast inputs,

- assignment of channels to a task,

- type of output reactivation,

- fallback mode for output channels,

- etc.

The software installation and the language objects associated with discrete I/O are described in the PL7 Junior / PL7 Pro software installation manual TLX DS 57 PL7 33E,

Volume 1.

3.5

Discrete I/O display and diagnostics

The use and operation of display blocks is described in this manual in part C,

"Maintenance/Diagnostics".

The discrete I/O diagnostics are based on

3 indicator lamps :

• RUN green,

• ERR red,

• I/O red, on the front panel of each module as shown in the diagram opposite.

The zone below the diagnostic indicator lamps contains the lamps which relate to the input or output channels.

The channel is active when the corresponding lamp is on.

64-channel modules also have a +32 indicator lamp.

Lamps : RUN - ERR - I/O

Channel status lamps

___________________________________________________________________________

3/10

General installation rules 3

There are several different display blocks depending on the module :

8-channel modules have :

- 3 module status lamps,

- 8 channel status lamps,

• 16-channel modules have :

- 3 module status lamps,

- 16 channel status lamps,

RUN ERR

I / O

RUN ERR

I / O

5

6

3

4

7

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

0

1

2

11

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

B1

• 28, 32 and 64-channel modules have :

- 3 module status lamps,

- 1 + 32 lamp, displaying channels

32 to 63 for the 64 channel

module,

- 32 channel status lamps.

5

6

3

4

7

0

1

2

RUN

+ 32

ERR

I / O

11

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

19

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

27

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

Note : for mixed I/O modules with 28 I/O,

TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK :

• lamps 0 to 15 display the state of the inputs,

• lamps 16 to 27 display the state of the outputs,

Switch for displaying channels higher than 31. Only on

64-channel modules.

Example : displaying channel

41, lamps 9 and +32 lit if the channel is at state 1

___________________________________________________________________________

3/11

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

3/12

4 Characteristics

4.1

Characteristics of input modules with terminal block

4.1-1 24 - 48 VDC positive logic input modules

B1

Module reference

Nominal input Voltage

TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2

24 VDC

TSX DEY 16D3

48 VDC values

Input limit values

Input impedance

Response time

Dielectric strength

Insulation resistance

Type of input

Current at state 1 Voltage

Current at state 0 Voltage

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

(at U nominal) typical/maximum

7 mA

11 V

6.5 mA

(for U = 11V)

5 V

2 mA

7 mA

30 V

6.5 mA

(for U = 30V)

10 V

2 mA

19...30 V (possible up to 38...60 V

34 V, limited to 1 hour per

24 hours)

4 k

7 k

4 ms / 7 ms 4 ms / 7 ms

IEC 1131-2 conformity type 2

Compatibility 2-wire/3-wire prox. sensors (1) IEC 947-5-2 type 2

IEC 947-5-2

1 500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

10 M

(at 500 VDC) current sink current sink

Paralleling of inputs (1)

Sensor voltage O K

Y e s

> 18 V monitoring threshold Fault < 14 V

Monitoring response time on appearance 1 ms < T < 3 ms on disappearance 8 ms < T < 30 ms

Consumption 5V

Sensor supply typical maximum typical

55/80 mA

65/90 mA

25 mA + (7 x N) mA

Y e s

> 36 V

< 24 V

1 ms < T < 3 ms

8 ms < T < 30 ms

80 mA

90 mA

25 mA+(7 x N) mA

consumption (3) maximum

Dissipated power (3)

Temperature

derating (3)

33 mA + (7 x N) mA

1W + (0.15 x N) W

33 mA+(7 x N) mA

1W + (0.3 x N) W

The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60% of the inputs at state 1

(this characteristic is not relevant to module TSX DEY 08D2).

(1) See section 3.3-1

(2) This characteristic enables several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module, or on different modules if redundant inputs are required.

(3) N = Number of channels at 1

(4) See section 4.2-4.

4/1

B1

4.1-2 24 VDC negative logic input module

Module reference

Nominal input values

Input limit values

Voltage

Current at state 1 Voltage

Current at state 0 Voltage

Input impedance

Response time

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included) at U nominal typical maximum

IEC 1131-2 conformity

TSX DEY 16A2

24 VDC

16 mA (outgoing)

Usup — 14V

6.5 mA (outgoing)

Usup — 5 V

2 mA (outgoing)

19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to

1 hour per 24 hours)

1.6 k

10 ms

20 ms

Negative logic not considered in the standard

Compatibility 2-wire/3-wire prox. sensors (1) IEC 947-5-2

Dielectric strength

Insulation resistance

Type of input

Paralleling of inputs

1500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

10 M

(at 500 VDC) resistive

No

Sensor voltage monitoring threshold

Monitoring response time

Consumption 5V

O K

Fault

> 18 V

< 14 V on appearance 20 ms < T < 40 ms

Sensor supply consumption

Dissipated power typical on disappearance 5 ms < T < 10 ms

80 mA maximum 90 mA typical maximum

15 mA + (15 x No. of channels at 1) mA

19 mA + (15 x No. of channels at 1) mA

1W + (0.4 x No. of channels at 1) W

Temperature

derating (2)

The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60% of the inputs at state 1

(1) See section 3.3-1

(2) See section 4.2-4.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/2

Characteristics 4

4.1-3 AC voltage input modules

Module reference

Nominal input

Voltage

Current

TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY

16A2 16A3 16A4

TSX DEY

16A5

24 VAC 48 VAC 100..120 VAC 200..240 VAC

15 mA 16 mA 12 mA 15 mA values

Input limit values

Type of input

Frequency at state 1 at state 0

Frequency

Sensor supply

Peak current on activation (at U nominal)

Input impedance at U nominal

Response time

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Voltage

50 / 60 Hz

10 V

29 V

74 V

Current

6 mA

6 mA

6 mA

(U=10V) (U=29V) (U=74V)

Voltage

5 V

10 V

20 V

Current

4 mA

4 mA

4 mA

47...63 Hz

Activation

Deactivation

20...26 V 40...52 V 85..132 V

15 mA 80 mA 160 mA

159 V

6 mA

(U=159V)

40 V

4 mA

170...264V

300 mA

1.6 k

3.2 k

9.2 k

20 k

Resistive Capacitive Capacitive Capacitive

15 ms

20 ms type 2

10 ms

20 ms type 2

Compatibility 2-wire prox. sensors (1) IEC 947-5-2

10 ms

20 ms type 2

10 ms

20 ms type 1

Sensor voltage O K monitoring threshold Fault

Monitoring on appearance

> 18 V > 36 V > 82 V

< 14 V < 24 V < 40 V

20 ms < T < 50 ms

> 164 V

< 80 V response time

Consumption 5V

Consumption sensor supply

Power

dissipated (2) on disappearance typical/maximum

5 ms < T < 15 ms

80/90 mA 80/90 mA 80/90 mA typical/maximum 15/19 mA 16/20 mA 15/19 mA

+(15xN) +(16xN) +(15xN) m A m A m A

1 W+ 1 W 1 W

(0.35xN)W (0.35xN)W (0.35xN)W

80/90 mA

12/16 mA

+(12xN) m A

1 W

(0.4xN)W

Dielectric strength

Insulation resistance

Input / ground or 1500 Vrms1500 Vrms 1500 Vrms 2000 Vrms

Input/internal logic (50/60 Hz for 1 minute)

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

Temperature derating (2) The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for

60% of the inputs at state 1

(1) See section 3.3-1 (2) N = Number of channels at 1 (3) See section 4.2-4.

4/3

B1

B1

4.2

Characteristics of input modules with connectors

4.2-1 24 VDC positive logic fast input module

Reference

Nominal input values

Input limit values

Voltage

Current at state 1 Voltage

Current at state 0 Voltage

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

Input impedance at U nominal

Response time Default

Configurable filtering

Type of input

Paralleling of inputs (1)

IEC 1131-2 conformity

TSX DEY 16FK

24 VDC

3.5 mA

11 V

3 mA

5 V

1.5 mA

19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to

1 hour per 24 hours)

6.3 k

4 ms

0.1...7.5 ms (in increments of 0.5) current sink

Y e s

Type 1

Compatibility 2-wire proximity sensor (2)Y e s

3-wire proximity sensor (2)Y e s

O K > 18 V Sensor voltage monitoring threshold Fault

Monitoring response time

Consumption 5V on appearance on disappearance typical maximum

< 14 V

8 ms < T < 30 ms

1 ms < T < 3 ms

250 mA

300 mA

Sensor supply consumption

Dissipated power

Dielectric strength

Input / ground or internal logic

Insulation resistance

Temperature

derating (3) typical maximum

20 mA + (3.5 mA per input at 1)

30 mA + (3.5 mA per input at 1)

1.2 W + (0.1 W x No. of channels at 1)

1 500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60 % of inputs at state 1

(1) This characteristic enables several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module, or on different modules if redundant inputs are required.

(2) See section 3.3-1

(3) See section 4.2-4.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/4

Characteristics 4

4.2-2 24 VDC and 48 VDC 32-channel positive logic input modules

Reference

Type of input

TSX DEY 32D2K TSX DEY 32D3K

Nominal input values

Input limit values

Input impedance at U nominal

Response time

Voltage 24 VDC

Current 3.5 mA at state 1 Voltage

11 V

Current

3 mA at state 0 Voltage

5 V

Current

1.5 mA

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

7 mA

30 V

6.5 mA (for U=30V)

10 V

2 mA

19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to

1 hour per 24 hours)

6.3 k

4 ms

6.3 k

4 ms

48 VDC

38...60 V

IEC 1131-2 conformity Type 1

Compatibility 2-wire and 3-wire proximity sensor Yes (1) current sink

Type 2

Y e s current sink

Paralleling of inputs

Sensor voltage O K monitoring threshold Fault

Monitoring on appearance response time on disappearance

Consumption 5V Typical

Maximum

Sensor supply consumption

Dissipated power

Typical

Maximum

No

> 18 V

< 14 V < 24 V

8 ms < T < 30 ms

1 ms < T < 3 ms

135 mA

155 mA

Y e s

> 36 V

300 mA

350 mA

30 mA + (3.5xN) mA 50 mA + (7xN) mA

40 mA + (3.5xN) mA 66 mA + (7xN) mA

1 W + (0.1 W 2.5 W + (0.34 W x No. of channels at 1) x No. of channels at 1)

Dielectric strength

Input / ground or internal logic

Insulation resistance

Temperature

derating (2)

N = Number of channels at 1

(1) See section 3.3-1

(2) See section 4.2-4.

1 500 Vrms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for

60 % of inputs at state 1 at nominal voltage

B1

4/5

B1

4.2-3 24 VDC 64-channel positive logic input module

Reference

Nominal input Voltage

TSX DEY 64D2K

24 VDC values

Input limit values

Response time

Current 3.5 mA at state 1 Voltage

11 V

Current

3 mA at state 0 Voltage

5 V

Current

1.5 mA

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

Input impedance at U nominal

19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to

1 hour per 24 hours)

6.3 k

4 ms

IEC 1131-2 conformity Type 1

Compatibility 2-wire and 3-wire prox. sensor (1)Y e s

Type of input

Paralleling of inputs current sink

No

Sensor voltage O K monitoring threshold Fault

Monitoring response time

Consumption 5V

Sensor supply consumption on appearance on disappearance

Typical

Maximum

Typical

Maximum

Dissipated power

Dielectric strength

Input / ground or internal logic

Insulation resistance

Temperature

derating (2)

N = Number of channels at 1

(1) See section 3.3-1

(2) See section 4.2-4.

> 18 V

< 14 V

8 ms < T < 30 ms

1 ms < T < 3 ms

135 mA

175 mA

60 mA + (3.5xN) mA

80 mA + (3.5xN) mA

1.5W + (0.1 W x No. of channels at 1)

1 500 Vrms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for

60 % of inputs at state 1

___________________________________________________________________________

4/6

Characteristics 4

4.2-4 Temperature derating

All the characteristics of the various discrete modules are given for a simultaneous loading of

60% of the channels at state

1. For operation with a higher loading, see the derating curve opposite.

Percentage of inputs at state 1

100%

80%

60%

40%

20%

Temperature

0%

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 in C°

Note 1

There is no derating for relay output modules, the user must check that the overall consumption on the 24 V relay power supply is sufficient.

For transistor outputs, temperature derating is on the maximum current used by the active outputs.

Example 1 : a module with sixteen 24 VDC/0.5 A transistor outputs, each switching 0.5 A.

At 60°C, the maximum permitted current at the outputs is 16 x 0.5 x 60% = 4.8 which corresponds to about 10 outputs active simultaneously.

Example 2 : the same module (sixteen 24 VDC/0.5 A transistor outputs) each switching 0.3 A.

At 60°C, the maximum permitted current at the outputs is 16 x 0.3 x 60% = 2.9 A, which corresponds to 16 outputs active simultaneously. In this case, there is no derating on the outputs; the maximum permitted current of the module is not exceeded.

Note 2 : special case for the TSX DEY 32D3K module with 32 inputs

For extreme uses of this module (in terms of sensor voltage and temperature), the derating conditions defined below must be met.

The following curves indicate the percentage of inputs simultaneously at state 1, depending on the :

• operating temperature,

• sensor supply voltage.

Percentage of inputs at state 1

100%

80%

55%

60%

50%

40%

Sensor supply voltage

48VDC

54VDC

60VDC

B1

20%

Temperature

0% in C°

___________________________________________________________________________

4/7

B1

4.3

Characteristics of outputs with terminal block

4.3-1 DC transistor output modules (positive logic)

Module reference

Nominal values

Limit values

(for U

30 V or 34 V, ripple included)

TSX DSY v

08T2/16T2 08T22 08T31 16T3

Voltage / Current 24V/0.5A 24V/2A 48V/1A 48V/0.25A

Voltage

Current / channel 0.625 A

Current / module 4 A / 7 A 14 A

Tungsten filament lamp power (max.)

19...30 V (1)

6 W

2.5 A

10 W

38...60 V 38...60 V

1.25 A 0.31 A

7 A

10 W

4 A

6 W

Leakage current at state 0 at state 1 Residual voltage

Min. load impedance

Response time (2)

< 0.5 mA < 1 mA < 1 mA < 0.5 mA

< 1.2 V < 0.5 V < 1 V

48

12

48

1.2 ms

< 1.5 V

192

200 µs 200 µs 1.2 ms

0.5 / LI 2 Hz Switching frequency on inductive load

Paralleling of outputs

Compatibility with DC inputs, IEC 1131-2

Built-in protection

Against overvoltages

Against reverse polarity

Against short-circuits and overloads

Preactuator voltage monitoring threshold

O K

Fault

Yes (2 maximum)

Yes (type 1 and type 2)

Yes, by transil diode

Yes, by reverse-mounted diode. Provide a fuse on the + 24 V or + 48 V of the preactuators.

Yes, by current limiter and electronic circuit-breaker 1.5 In < Id < 2 In

> 18 V

< 14 V

> 18 V > 36 V

< 14 V < 24 V

> 36 V

< 24 V

Monitoring response time

Consumption 5V on appearance on disappearance

T < 4 ms T < 4 ms

T < 30 ms T < 30 ms typical 55/80 mA 55 mA 55 mA 80 mA

Consumption 24V preactuator

(without load current) maximum 65/90 mA 65 mA 65 mA typical 30/40 mA 30 mA maximum 40/60 mA 50 mA

30 mA

50mA

90 mA

40 mA

60 mA

Dissipated power

(N = number of outputs at 1)

1 / 1.1 W 1.3 W

+ +

2.2 W

+

2.4 W

+

0.75WxN

0.2WxN

0.55WxN 0.85WxN

Dielectric strength output/ground or internal logic 1 500 Vrms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

Insulation resistance > 10 M

at 500 VDC

Temperature derating The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60% of the max. module current

(1) 34 V permissible for 1 hour per 24 hours.

(2) All outputs have fast demagnetization circuits for electromagnets. Electromagnet discharge

4/8

Characteristics 4

4.3-2 Relay output modules, thermal current 3 A

Modules

Operating voltage limit DC/AC

Thermal current

TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5

10...34 VDC / 19...264 VAC

3 A

Maximum current per common

AC load Resistive

3 A (must not exceed this value)

Voltage c

24 V c

48 V c

100..120V

c

200..240V

D C load

AC12 duty

Inductive

Power 50 VA (5) 50 VA (6) 110 VA (6) 220 VA (6)

110 VA (4) 220 VA (4)

Voltage c

24 V c

48 V c

100..120V

c

200..240V

AC14 and

AC15 duty

Resistive

DC12 duty

Power 24 VA (4) 10VA (10) 10VA (11) 10 VA (11)

24 VA (8) 50 VA (7) 50 VA (9)

110 VA (2) 110 VA (6)

220 VA (1)

Voltage a 24 V

Power 24 W (6)

40 W (3)

Inductive Voltage a 24 V

DC13 duty Power

(L/R = 60 ms)

10 W (8)

24 W (6)

Min switchable load 1 mA / 5 V

Response time

Type of contact

Built-in protection

Activation

Deactivation

Against overloads and short-circuits

Against inductive overvoltages in c

< 8 ms

< 10 ms

Normally open

None, a fast blow fuse must be fitted to each channel or group of channels

None, an RC circuit or MOV peak limiter (ZNO) suitable for the voltage must be fitted in parallel across the terminals of each preactuator

Dielectric strength

Insulation resistance

Power

Against inductive overvoltages in a

Outputs/ground

Outputs/internal logic

5 V internal

None, a discharge diode must be fitted across the terminals of each preactuator

2000 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

Typical 55/80 mA Maximum 65/90 mA consumption

Dissipated power

24 V relay (per channel at 1) Typical 8.5 mA Maximum 10 mA

0.25 W + (0.2 W x No. of outputs at 1)

(1) 0.1 x 10 6 operations

(2) 0.15 x 10 6 operations

(3) 0.3 x 10 6 operations

(5) 0.7 x 10 6 operations.

(6) 1 x 10 6 operations.

(7) 1.5 x 10 6 operations.

(9) 3 x 10 6 operations.

(10) 5 x 10 6 operations.

(11) 10 x 10 6 operations.

(4) 0.5 x 10 6 operations (8) 2 x 10 6 operations.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/9

B1

B1

4.3-3 DC relay output module

Module reference

Limit operating voltage

D C

A C

Thermal current

Maximum current per common

DC load Resistive

DC12 duty

Voltage

Power

TSX DSY 08R4D

19...143 V not allowed

5 A

6 A (must not exceed this value) a 24 V a 48 V a 100...130 V

50 W (6) 100 W(6)

100 W (3) 200 W (3) a

24 V a

48 V

20 W (8) 50 W(8)

50 W (6) 100 W(6)

220 W (6)

440 W (3) a

100...130 V

110 W (8)

220 W (6)

Inductive

DC13 duty

(L/R = 60 ms)

Activation

Deactivation

Voltage

Power

Response time

Type of contact

Built-in protection common against overvoltages against overloads

< 10 ms

< 15 ms

2x2 C/O (1) (on-delay/off-delay)

2x2 N/O (on-delay)

R-C and Ge-Mov circuit

Interchangeable 6.3 A fast blow fuse per and short-circuits

Dielectric strength

Insulation resistance

Power

Outputs/ground

Outputs/internal logic

5 V

2000 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

Typical 55 mA consumption

24 V

Maximum 65 mA

Typical 10 mA per channel at 1

Dissipated power (2)

Relay Maximum 12 mA per channel at 1

0.25 W + (0.24 W x No. of outputs at 1)

(1) N/C = normally closed - N/O = Normally open

(3) 0.3 x 10 6 operations

(6) 1 x 10 6 operations.

(8) 2 x 10 6 operations.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/10

Characteristics 4

4.3-4 Relay output module, thermal current 5 A

Module reference

Limit operating voltage

Thermal current

D C

A C

TSX DSY 08R5A

19...60 V

19...264V

5 A

Maximum current per common

AC load Resistive

AC12 duty

Inductive

6 A (must not exceed this value)

Voltage c

24 V c

48 V c

100..120V

c

200..240V

Power 100 VA(5) 100 VA(6) 220 VA(6) 440 VA(6)

200 VA(4) 440 VA(4)

Voltage c

24 V c

48 V c

100..120V

c

200..240V

D C load

AC14 and

AC15 duty

Inductive

Power 50 VA (4) 20VA (10) 20 VA (11) 20 VA (11)

50 VA (8) 110 VA (7) 110 VA (9)

220 VA(2) 220 VA(6)

440 VA (1)

Resistive Voltage a 24 V a 48 V

DC12 duty Power 24 W (6) 50 W (6)

50 W (3) 100 W (3)

Voltage a

24 V a

48 V

DC13 duty Power

(L/R = 60 ms)

10 W (8) 24 W (8)

24 W (6) 50 W (6)

Response Activation < 10 ms time

Type of contact

Deactivation < 15 ms

2x2 C/O (1) (on-delay/off-dlay)

2x2 N/O (on-delay) against overvoltages R-C and Ge-Mov circuit Built-in protection common against overloads Interchangeable 6.3 A fast blow fuse per and short-circuits

Dielectric strength

Power consumption

Outputs/ground

Outputs/internal logic

Insulation resistance

5 V

2000 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min

Typical

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

55 mA

Maximum 65 mA

Dissipated power

(1) 0.1 x 10 6 operations

(2) 0.15 x 10 6 operations

(3) 0.3 x 10 6 operations

(4) 0.5 x 10 6 operations

24 V Typical 10 mA per channel at 1

Relay Maximum 12 mA per channel at 1

(5) 0.7 x 10

(6) 1 x 10 6

(7) 1.5 x 10

0.25 W + (0.24 W x No. of outputs at 1)

6

6

operations.

operations.

operations.

(8) 2 x 10 6 operations.

(9) 3 x 10 6 operations.

(10) 5 x 10 6 operations.

(11) 10 x 10 6 operations.

B1

4/11

B1

4.3-5 Triac output modules

Module reference

Limit operating voltage

Permissible current (1)

Leakage current

Response time

Built-in protection

D C

A C

TSX DSY 08S5/16S5 not allowed

41..264V

TSX DSY 16S4 not allowed

20..132V

TSX DSY 08S5 2 A / chan. - 12A/module 1 A / chan. - 12A/module

TSX DSY 16S5 1 A / chan. - 12A/module

TSX DSY 08S5

2 mA

TSX DSY 16S5

1.5 mA

Activation

10 ms

1.5 mA

Deactivation

10 ms against overvoltages Ge-Mov against overloads and short-circuits

Interchangeable fast blow fuse per common - 5 A

Flameproof protection non interchangeable per common of 10 A

Dielectric strength

Outputs/ground

Outputs/internal logic

2000 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min

Insulation resistance

Consumption on

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

Typical TSX DSY 08S5125 mA

TSX DSY 16S5220 mA

220 mA

5V supply

Dissipated power

MaximumTSX DSY 08S5

TSX DSY 16S5230 mA

135 mA 230 mA

TSX DSY 08S5 0.5 W + 1 W/A per output 0.85 W+1 W/A per output

TSX DSY 16S50.85 W + 1 W/A per output

(1) temperature derating is as shown on graph below

Important :

When using TSX DSY 08S5 modules at 220 VAC, it is essential not to use different phases between groups of channels on the same module.

I max/module (A)

12

6

4

2

0

10

8

T (°C)

4/12

Characteristics 4

4.4

Characteristics of transistor output modules with connector

4.4-1 DC transistor output modules (positive logic)

Module reference

Nominal values Voltage / current

TSX DSY 32T2K

24V / 0.1A

TSX DSY 64T2K

24V / 0.1A

Limit values

(for U

30V or 34V, ripple included)

Voltage 19...30 V, possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour per 24 hours).

Current / channel 0.125 A

Current / module 3.2 A

Tungsten filament lamp power 1.2 W (maximum)

0.125 A

5 A

1.2 W (maximum)

Leakage current

Residual voltage

Min load impedance at state 0 at state 1

Response time (1)

Switching frequency on inductive load

Paralleling of outputs

Compatibility of DC inputs with

IEC 1131-2

Built-in Against overvoltages

< 0.1 mA for U = 30 V

< 1.5 V for I = 0.1 A

220

1.2 ms

0.5 / LI 2 Hz

Yes : 3 max.

Yes (type 1 and type 2)

< 0.1 mA for U = 30 V

< 1.5 V for I = 0.1 A

220

1.2 ms

0.5 / LI 2 Hz

Yes : 3 max.

Yes (type 1 and type 2)

Yes, by transil diode protection Against reverse polarity Yes, by reverse-mounted diode - provide a 2 A fuse on the + 24 V of the preactuators (1 per connector).

Against short-circuits and overloads

Preactuator voltage O K

Yes, by current limiter and electronic circuit-breaker 0.125 A < Id < 0.185 A

> 18 V > 18 V monitoring threshold Fault

Monitoring on appearance

< 14 V

T < 4 ms response time on disappearance T < 30 ms

< 14 V

T < 4 ms

T < 30 ms

Consumption 5V typical/maximum 135 mA / 155 mA

Consumption 24V typical/maximum 30 mA / 40 mA

preactuator (without load current)

135 mA / 175 mA

60 mA / 80 mA

Dissipated power

Dielectric strength output/ground or internal logic

1.6 W + 0.1 W / output 2.4 W + 0.1 W / output

1 500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

Insulation resistance

Temperature derating

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60% of the max. module current

(1) All outputs have fast demagnetization circuits for electromagnets. Electromagnet discharge time < L/R.

4/13

B1

B1

4.5

Characteristics of mixed I/O modules with connectors

4.5-1 24 VDC positive logic fast inputs

Module references

Nominal input values

Input limit values

Voltage

Current at state 1 Voltage

Current at state 0 Voltage

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

Input impedance at U nominal

Response time

Type of input

Paralleling of inputs (1)

Default

Configurable filtering

TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK

24 VDC

3.5 mA

11 V

3 mA

5 V

1.5 mA

19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to

1 hour per 24 hours)

6.3 k

4 ms

0.1...7.5 ms (in increments of 0.5) current sink

Y e s

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Compatibility

Sensor voltage

Type 1

2-wire proximity sensor (2)

3-wire proximity sensor (2)

O K > 18 V

Y e s

Y e s monitoring threshold Fault

Monitoring response time

Consumption 5V on appearance on disappearance

Sensor supply consumption typical maximum typical maximum

< 14 V

8 ms < T < 30 ms

1 ms < T < 3 ms

300 mA

350 mA

20 mA + (3.5 mA per input at 1)

Dissipated power

Dielectric strength

Input / ground or internal logic

Insulation resistance

Temperature

derating (3)

30 mA + (3.5 mA per input at 1)

1.2 W + (0.1 W x Number of inputs at 1)

1 500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60 % of inputs at state 1

(1) This characteristic enables several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module, or on different modules if redundant inputs are required.

(2) See section 3.3-1

4/14

Characteristics 4

4.5-2 DC transistor outputs (positive logic)

Module references

Nominal values

Limit values

Residual voltage

Min load impedance

Voltage / current

Voltage

(for U

30 V or 34 V, Current / channel ripple included) Current / module

Tungsten filament lamp power (max.)

Leakage current at state 0 at state 1

Response time (2)

Switching frequency on inductive load

Paralleling of outputs

Compatibility with IEC 1131-2 DC inputs

Built-in Against overvoltages protection Against reverse polarity

TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK

24VDC/0.5A

19...30 V (1)

0.625 A

4 A

6 W

< 1 mA

< 1.2 V

48

0.6 ms

0.5 / LI 2 Hz

Yes (2 maximum)

Yes (type 1 and type 2)

Against short-circuits and overloads

Sensor voltage O K

Yes, by transil diode

Yes, by reverse-mounted diode - Provide a fuse on the + 24 V of the preactuators.

Yes, by current limiter and electronic circuit-breaker 1.5 In < Id < 2 In monitoring threshold Fault

Monitoring on appearance response time on disappearance

Consumption 24V preactuator typical

T < 30 ms

30/40 mA

(without load current) maximum 40/60 mA

1 W + (0.75 W) / output Dissipated power

Dielectric strength

Input/ground or Input/internal logic

> 18 V

< 14 V

T < 4 ms

Insulation resistance

Temperature derating

1500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

The characteristics at 60°C are ensured for 60% of the max. module current

(1) 34 V permissible for 1 hour per 24 hours.

(2) All outputs have fast demagnetization circuits for electromagnets. Electromagnet discharge time < L/R.

B1

4/15

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

4/16

5 Connections

5.1

Connection methods

5.1-1 Connection to modules with screw terminal block

The terminal blocks of the I/O modules have an automatic transfer coding device for when they are first used. This avoids handling errors while a module is being replaced.

The coding ensures electrical compatibility for each type of module. See part A, section 5.4.

B1

Each terminal can accept bare wires or wires fitted with cable ends or open lugs.

The capacity of each terminal is :

• minimum :

• maximum :

1 wire, 0.2 mm 2 (AWG 24) without cable end,

1 wire, 2 mm 2 without cable end or,

1 wire, 1.5 mm 2 with cable end.

5.5 mm

(1)

(1) 5.5 mm maximum

The screw clamps have a recess for screwdrivers with the following heads :

• Pozidrive N°1 cruciform,

• flat, Ø 5 mm diameter

The screw terminal connection blocks are fitted with captive screws. They are supplied unscrewed. The maximum capacity of the terminal block is 16 wires, 1 mm 2 (AWG) +

4 wires, 1.5 mm 2 (AWG).

Maximum tightening torque on connection terminal screw : 0.8 N.m

Opening the cover

B1

5.1-2 Connection to modules with HE10 connectors

20-wire preformed cable, 22 gauge (0.34 mm 2 ),

Used for simple and direct wire-to-wire connection of the I/O on modules with HE10 connectors to sensors, preactuators or terminals.

This preformed cable comprises :

• at one end, an HE10 moulded connector carrying 20 wires, 0.34 mm 2 cross-section within a sheath,

• at the other end, flying leads color-coded conforming to standard DIN 47100.

Note : A nylon cord inside the cable enables the sheath to be stripped easily.

There are two product references : TSX CDP 301 : 3 meters.

TSX CDP 501 : 5 meters.

Preformed cable

Module

Correspondence between wire color and the HE10 connector pin number white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green white-yellow brown-green yellow-brown white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown

TSX CDP i

01

Top

1

HE10

2

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17 18

19

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

20

Bottom

___________________________________________________________________________

5/2

Connections 5

Sheathed rolled ribbon cable 28 gauge (0.08 mm 2 )

Used to connect the I/O from modules with HE10 connectors to TELEFAST 2 rapid connection and wiring interfaces. This cable comprises 2 HE10 connectors and a sheathed rolled ribbon cable with 0.08 mm 2 cross-section wires.

Given the small cross-section of the wires, it is recommended that they be used only for low current inputs or outputs ( < 100 mA per input or output).

There are three product references : TSX CDP 102 : length 1 meter

TSX CDP 202 : length 2 meters

TSX CDP 302 : length 3 meters

Connection cable 22 gauge (0.34 mm 2 )

Used to connect the I/O of modules with HE10 connectors to TELEFAST 2 rapid connection and wiring interfaces. This preformed cable comprises 2 HE10 moulded connectors and a cable with 0.34 mm 2 cross-section wires used for carrying higher currents (> 500 mA).

There are five product references : TSX CDP 053 : length 0.50 meters.

TSX CDP 103 : length 1 meter.

TSX CDP 203 : length 2 meters.

TSX CDP 303 : length 3 meters.

TSX CDP 503 : 5 meters.

B1

Module

Module

TSX CDP ii3 cable

TX CDP i02 cable

TELEFAST 2 ABE-7H iiiii

Maximum tightening torque on TSX CDP• cable connector screw : 0.5 N.m

B1

5.2

Module connections

5.2-1 TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2 modules

Presentation

TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2 modules comprise :

• 8 inputs 24 VDC, positive logic type 2 for

TSX DEY 08D2 modules,

• 16 inputs 24 VDC, positive logic type 2 for

TSX DEY 16D2 module,

The inputs are connected via a removable screw terminal block on the module.

Simplified input schematic

Fuse

+

Sensor

Sensor voltage monitoring and supply

Input % I (0...n)

Input

Module

___________________________________________________________________________

5/4

TSX DEY 08D2 module connections

Sensors

FU1

+ –

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

0 V

18

+24 VDC

20

19

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

Inputs

I 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

TSX DEY 16D2 module connections

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

Sensors

2

4

12

14

6

8

10

16

FU1

+ –

0 V

18

+24 VDC

20

19

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

Inputs

I 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

17

Connections 5

B1

B1

5.2-2 TSX DEY 16D3 module

Presentation

The TSX DEY 16D3 module has 16 inputs, 48 VDC.

This module is connected to a 20-pin screw terminal block. Inputs are type 2, positive logic.

TSX DEY 16D3 module connections

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

FU1

Sensors

+ –

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

0 V

18

20

+48 VDC

19

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

Inputs

I 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

17

___________________________________________________________________________

5/6

Connections 5

5.2-3 TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 / 16A5 modules

Presentation

TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 and 16A5 modules have AC inputs, type 2. They are connected to 20-pin screw terminal blocks.

Simplified input schematic

B1

UVAC Power supply monitor circuit

Electrical isolation

Sensor

+5 V

PNP

Filtering

Inputs

0VAC

Module

TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 / 16A5 module connections

Sensors

FU1 UVAC

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

3

5

7

9

11

I 0

Inputs

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13 12

13

15 14

15

17

19

UVAC = 24 V for TSX DEY 16A2

48 V for TSX DEY 16A3

115 V for TSX DEY 16A4

230 V for TSX DEY 16A5

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

B1

TSX DEY 16A2 module connections with negative logic DC inputs

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

Sensors

+24 VDC

0 V

FU1

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

Inputs

I 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

17

18

19

20

!

The use of negative logic is not recommended when the sensor 0V is connected to ground. This is because if one of the wires were to be accidentally disconnected and come into contact with the mechanical ground, the input might be set to state 1.

This would cause an undesriable control action.

___________________________________________________________________________

5/8

Connections 5

5.2-4 TSX DEY 16FK module

Presentation

This module has 16 fast input channels, 24 VDC. They are type 1 inputs, proximity sensor compatible conforming to the characteristics in section 4.

The module is fitted with an HE10 male connector :

• connector A addresses 0 to 15

The connector can accept :

• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the sensor terminal,

• or a TSX CDP•02 ribbon cable or a TSX CDP••3 cable for connection to a TELEFAST 2 interface.

A

B1

Simplified schematic

Fuse

Sensor

+

Sensor voltage monitoring and supply

Input % I (0...n)

Input

Module

B1

TSX DEY 16FK module connections

Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue

1

3

5

7

9

11 white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown

FU1

+

0 V white-pink pink-brown

13

15

17

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

I 0

Inputs

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Note :

The colors are used to show the correspondence between the HE10 connector pins and the wires of a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable.

___________________________________________________________________________

5/10

Connections 5

B1

5.2-5 TSX DEY 32D2K / 64D2K modules

Presentation

TSX DEY 32D2K and 64D2K modules have 24 VDC inputs. These are type 1 proximity sensor compatible inputs conforming to the characteristics in section 4.

The TSX DEY 32D2K module is fitted with 2 HE10 male connectors :

• connectors A and B are used to connect inputs :

- A (0 to 15)

- B (16 to 31)

The TSX DEY 64D2K module is fitted with 4 HE10 male connectors :

• connectors A and B for connecting channels :

- A (0 to 15)

- B (16 to 31)

• connectors C and D for connecting channels :

- C (32 to 47)

- D (48 to 63)

A

C

B

D

Each connector can accept :

• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the sensor terminal,

• or a TSX CDP•02 ribbon cable or a TSX CDP••3 cable for connecting to a TELEFAST

2 interface.

Simplified input schematic

Fuse

+

Sensor

+

24 VDC

Sensor voltage monitoring and supply

Input % I (0...n)

A

B

___________________________________________________________________________

B1

TSX DEY 32D2K module connections

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown

FU1

+

0 V white-pink pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

17 18

20

Sensors

B white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown

FU1

+ white-pink

0 V pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

19

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

17 18

20

Inputs

I 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Inputs

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

___________________________________________________________________________

5/12

Connections 5

TSX DEY 64D2K module connections

Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown

FU1

+

0 V white-pink pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

C

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Inputs

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

33

35

37

39

41

43

45

47

Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown

FU1

+ white-pink

0 V pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

D

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Inputs

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue

1

3

5

7

9

11 white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown

FU1

+

0 V white-pink pink-brown

13

15

17

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

I 0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

Inputs

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown

FU1

+

0 V white-pink pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

B

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Inputs

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

B1

B1

5.2-6 TSX DEY 32D3K module

Presentation

The TSX DEY 32D3K has 48 VDC inputs. These are type

2 proximity sensor compatible inputs conforming to the characteristics in section 4.

The TSX DEY 32D3K module is fitted with 2 HE10 male connectors :

• connectors A and C are used to connect inputs :

- A (0 to 15)

- C (16 to 31)

A

C

Each connector can accept :

• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the sensor terminal,

• or a TSX CDP•02 ribbon cable or a TSX CDP••3 cable for connecting to a TELEFAST

2 interface.

Simplified input schematic

Fuse

Sensor

+

48 VDC

+

Sensor voltage monitoring and supply

Input % I (0...n)

Input

Module

___________________________________________________________________________

5/14

Connections 5

B1

TSX DEY 32D3K module connections

Sensors white brown

1 green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue

3

5

7

9

11 white-green brown-green

13 white-yellow yellow-brown

15

+48 VDC white-gray gray-brown

FU1

+ white-pink

0 V pink-brown

17

19

C

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Inputs

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

18

20

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

Sensors white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+48 VDC white-gray gray-brown

FU1

+ white-pink

0 V pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Inputs

I 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

B1

5.2-7 TSX DSY 08T2 / 16T2 / 16T3 / 08T22 / 08T31 modules

Presentation

TSX DSY 08T2 / 16T2 and 08T22 modules have protected 24 VDC transistor outputs, TSX DSY 16T3 /08T31 modules have 48 VDC protected transistor outputs.

These five modules are fitted with a 20-pin screw terminal block, which can be removed in order to connect the outputs.

Simplified output schematic

+

C U R R E N T

M O N I T O R

C I R C U I T

C O M M A N D

V O L T A G E

M O N I T O R

C I R C U I T

SOLID STATE

S W I T C H

R

T r a n s i l

T r a n s i l

%Q. (0...n)

P r e a c t u a t o r

L o a d

+

FU

Module Output

___________________________________________________________________________

5/16

Connections 5

TSX DSY 08T2/08T22 module connections

Preactuators

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

TSX DSY 08T22

2

4

6

8

1

3

5

7

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

0 V

+

FU2

+24 VDC

FU2 = 6.3 A fast blow fuse

16

18

20

17

19

Outputs

Q0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Preactuators

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

– +

FU2

0 V

TSX DSY 08T2

+24 VDC

FU2 = 16 A fast blow fuse

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

TSX DSY 16T2 module connections

0

Preactuators

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

Outputs

Q0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

17

18

0 V

19

+24 VDC

20

– +

FU2

FU2 = 6.3 A fast blow fuse

___________________________________________________________________________

Outputs

Q0

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

B1

B1

TSX DSY 16T3 module connections : 48 VDC supply

Preactuators

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

Outputs

Q0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

FU2 = 10 A fast blow fuse

17

– +

FU2

18

0 V

+48 VDC

20

19

TSX DSY 08T31 module connections

Preactuators

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

– +

FU2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

0 V

+48 VDC

20

19

Outputs

Q0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

FU2 = 10 A fast blow fuse

___________________________________________________________________________

5/18

5.2-8 Relay modules 50 VA : TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5

Presentation

TSX DSY 08R5 and 16R5 modules have 8 relay outputs and 16 relay outputs respectively.

They are fitted with a 20-pin screw terminal block, which can be removed in order to connect the outputs.

Connections 5

B1

Simplified output schematic

+

B

P r e a c t u a t o r s

%Q.

(0...n)

C o m m o n

C O M M A N D

Warning :

Module Output

The relay contact must be protected by placing across the preactuator terminals :

• either an RC circuit or MOV (ZNO) peak limiter when using AC,

• or a discharge diode when using DC.

B1

TSX DSY 08R5 module connections

R

0

C

MOV

19...240 VAC

AC load

7

DC load

– 24 VDC +

Protection device must be placed across terminals of each preactuator

0

2

FU

FU

4

6

5

7

1

3

19 to 240 VAC or 24 VDC

TSX DSY 16R5 module connections

R

0

C

MOV

19...240 VAC

AC load

7

DC load

– 24 VDC +

Protection device must be placed across terminals of each preactuator

Note : When the supply voltage from the preactuators is from a 3-phase supply which is equal to or greater than 200 VAC, the preactuators must all be supplied from the same phase.

5/20

0

1

2

3

FU

4

5

6

7

FU

8

9

10

FU

11

12

13

14

FU

19 to 240 VAC

15

Outputs

8

10

2

4

6

12

13

14

15

16

18

17

19

20

1

3

5

7

9

Q0

1

2

3

C0-3

4

5

6

7

C4-7

11

Outputs

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

C4-7

8

9

10

11

C8-11

12

13

14

15

C12-15

Q0

1

2

3

6

7

C0-3

4

5

Connections 5

5.2-9 Relay modules 100 VA : TSX DSY 08R5A / 08R4D

Presentation

TSX DSY 08R5A and 08R4D modules each have 8 protected relay outputs. They are fitted with a 20-pin screw terminal block, which can be removed in order to connect the outputs.

B1

Simplified C/O output schematic

Channels 0 to 3

N/C

Channel 0 / 2

N/O

N/C

Channel 1 / 3

N/O

FU

N/C : Normally closed - N/O : Normally open

FU = interchangeable 6.3 A fast blow fuse. 1 fuse per common

Simplified N/O output schematic

Channels 4 to 7

Common

Channel 4 / 6

Channel 5 / 7

FU

FU = 6.3 A - interchangeable fast blow fuse. 1 fuse per common.

Common

B1

TSX DSY 08R5A module connections

Preactuators

T0

R0

R1

R2

R3

T1

T2

T3

4

5

6

7

2

4

6

*

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

Q0

3

Q1

C0-1

5

*

7

C2-3

9

Q2

11

Q3

13

*

15

Q4

C4-5

Q5

17

*

19

Q6

C6-7

Q7

Outputs

FU

FU

FU

FU

* = strap 24 V must be connected when using

24 V AC or DC.

FU = 6.3 A fast blow fuse

19 to 240 VAC or 19 to 60 VDC (nominal = 48 VDC)

TSX DSY 08R4D module connections

Preactuators

T0

R0

T1

R1

2

4

1

6

8

*

Q0

3

Q1

C0-1

5

*

7

C2-3

Outputs

FU

FU

T2 9

Q2

R2 10

T3 11

Q3

R3 12

4

5

14

16

13

15

* Q4

C4-5

Q5

FU

6

7

18

20

17

*

19

Q6

C6-7

Q7

FU

* = strap 24 V must be connected when using 24

V AC or DC .

FU = 6.3 A fast blow fuse

5/22

Connections 5

B1

5.2-10 TSX DSY 08S5 / 16S5 / 16S4 modules

Presentation

Each module comprises :

• 8 triac outputs for the TSX DSY 08S5 module,

• 16 triac outputs for TSX DSY 16S4/16S5 modules,

The modules must be fitted with a removable 20-pin screw terminal block.

Simplified output schematic for a TSX DSY 08S5/16S5 module

V D C

(*) O u t p u t n

L o a d

(*)

Module

(*) RC not present on TSX DSY 16S5 module

Simplified output schematic for a TSX DSY 16S4 module

Fu

48...240

V A C s u p p l y

Preactuator

V D C

Output n

Load

U L N

24...120 VAC supply

Fu

Module Preactuator

Note :

Protect the module outputs against short-circuits at the load, by means of a 5 A ultra fast blow and high breaking capacity fuse.

B1

TSX DSY 08S5 module connections

Preactuators

0

1

6

7

P N

48...240 VAC

TSX DSY 16S5 module connections

4

5

2

3

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

3

1

Outputs

Q0

5

C0-1

2

7

3

9

11

C2-3

4

13

5

15

17

7

C4-5

6

19

C6-7

FU

FU

FU

FU = interchangeable 5

A ultra fast blow fuse

FU

Preactuators Outputs

Q0

0

2

1 2

1

3

1

2

3

3

4

4

6

5

C0-3

4

5

FU

5

6 8

7

6

7

7

9

8

10

12

9

11

C4-7

8

9

10

FU

10 13

11

11 14

13

12 16

15

17

C8-11

12

13

14

FU

FU = interchangeable

5 A ultra fast blow fuse

14 18

15

15 19

C12-15

20 FU

P N

48...240 VAC

___________________________________________________________________________

5/24

Connections 5

B1

TSX DSY 16S4 module connections

Preactuators

P N

24...120 VAC

0

2

1

5

7

9

11

8

10

3

Fu

4

6

Fu

Fu

12

13

14

15

Fu

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

Outputs

Q0

9

10

11

7

C4-7

8

C8-11

12

13

14

15

C12-15

1

2

3

5

6

C0-3

4

Note :

Protect the module outputs against short-circuits at the load, by means of a 5 A ultra fast blow and high breaking capacity fuse.

B1

5.2-11 TSX DSY 32T2K / 64T2K modules

Presentation

TSX DSY 32T2K and 64T2K modules have positive logic source type transistor outputs.

These modules are fitted with male HE10 connectors :

• 2 connectors A and B for TSX DSY 32T2K modules

- connector A for outputs 0 to 15

- connector B for outputs 16 to 31

• 4 connectors A, B, C and D for TSX DSY 64T2K modules

- connector A for outputs 0 to 15

- connector B for outputs 16 to 31

- connector C for outputs 32 to 47

- connector D for outputs 48 to 63

The connectors can accept :

• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the preactuator terminal,

• or a TSX CDP••3 cable or TSX CDP•02 ribbon cable for connection to a TELEFAST 2 wiring interface.

A

B

A

C

B

D

Simplified output schematic

+ 24 VDC f u s e

Limitation and tripping t r a n s i l

+

Output 0 to n

Preactuator load monitor

Solid state switch

L o a d

– 0 V

Module Preactuator

___________________________________________________________________________

5/26

Connections 5

TSX DSY 32T2K module connections

FU2 = 2 A fast blow fuse

Preactuators

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

0 V

+

FU2

+24 VDC

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15 white brown

1 green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green

3

5

7

9

11

13 white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n

15 white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown

17

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Outputs

Q0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

11

10

12

13

15

14

!

It is essential to connect :

• + 24 VDC to terminals

17 and 19,

• 0 V to terminals 18 and

20

Preactuators

16

18

17

19 white brown green yellow

1

3

5

B

2

4

6

Outputs

Q16

17

19

21

18

20

20 gray pink

21

7 8 23

22

22 blue red

23

9 10 25

24

24 black purple

25

11 12 27

26

26 gray-pink red-blue

27

13 14 29

28

28 white-green brown-green

29

16 31

30

30 white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n

15

31

FU2 = 2 A fast blow fuse

0 V

+

FU2

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown white-pink p i n k - b r o w n

17

19

18

20

Note :

The colors show the correspondence between the HE10 connector pins and the flying leads of

___________________________________________________________________________

B1

B1

TSX DSY 64T2K module connections

Preactuators

32

34

33 white brown green yellow

35

36 gray pink

37

38 blue red

39

40

42

41

43 black purple gray-pink red-blue

44

46

45

47

1

3

5

7

9

11 white-green brown-green

13 white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n

15

0 V

+

FU2

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown

17

19

C

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

33

Outputs

Q32

35

34

36

37

39

38

40

41

43

42

45

44

46

47

FU2 =

2 A fast blow fuse

Preactuators

0 white brown

1

2

4

6

3

5 green yellow gray pink blue red

7

8

10

12

14

9

11

13

15

1

3

5

7 black purple gray-pink red-blue

9

11 white-green brown-green

13 white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n

15

0 V

+

FU2

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown

17

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

Outputs

Q0

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

11

10

13

12

14

15

Preactuators

48

50

52

54

56

58

60

62

0 V

+

FU2

+24 VDC

49

51

53

55

57

59

61

63 white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n

15 white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown

FU2 = 2 A fast blow fuse

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

17

19

D

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Outputs

Preactuators

Q48 white

49 16 brown

1

50

17 green

51 18 yellow

3

52

19 gray

53 20 pink

5

54

21 blue

55 22 red

7

57

56

24

23 black purple

9

58

25 gray-pink

59 26 red-blue

11

60

27 white-green

61 28 13 brown-green

63

62

30

29 white-yellow y e l l o w - b r o w n

15

31

!

It is essential to connect :

• + 24 VDC to terminals

17 and 19,

• 0 V to terminals

18 and 20

0 V

+

FU2

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown

FU2 = 2 A fast blow fuse

17

19

B

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Outputs

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

Q16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

Note : The colors show the correspondence between the HE10 connector pins and the flying

5/28

Connections 5

5.2-12 TSX DMY 28FK/DMY 28RFK modules

Presentation

This mixed I/O module comprises :

• 16 fast input channels, 24 VDC. They are type 1 inputs, proximity sensor compatible conforming to the characteristics in section 4.

• 12 output channels, 24 VDC / 0.5A

The module is fitted with two male HE10 connectors :

• connector A for inputs : addresses 0 to 15

• connector C for outputs : addresses 16 to 27

The connector can accept :

• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the sensor terminal,

• or a TSX CDP•02 ribbon cable or a TSX CDP••3 cable for connection to a TELEFAST 2 interface.

Simplified input schematic

+

FU

Sensor

Sensor voltage monitoring and supply

Input % I (0...n)

A

C

B1

Input

Simplified output schematic

Module

+

R

C U R R E N T

M O N I T O R

C I R C U I T

C O M M A N D

FU

T r a n s i l

T r a n s i l

%Q (16...27)

P r e a c t u a t o r

V O L T A G E

M O N I T O R

C I R C U I T

SOLID STATE

S W I T C H

L o a d

+

___________________________________________________________________________

B1

TSX DMY 28FK and TSX DMY 28RFK module connections

Preactuators

16

18

20

22

24

26

0 V

+

FU2

+24 VDC white brown

17 green yellow

19 gray pink

21 blue red

23 black purple

25

27 gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

C

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

FU2 = 10 A fast blow fuse

Outputs

Q16

17

18

19

21

20

22

23

25

24

27

26

Sensors white brown

1 green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue

3

5

7

9

11 white-green brown-green

13 white-yellow yellow-brown

FU1

+

+24 VDC white-gray gray-brown white-pink

0 V pink-brown

15

17

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Inputs

I 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

Note :

The colors show the correspondence between the HE10 connector pins and the flying leads of a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable.

___________________________________________________________________________

5/30

6 TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O

B1

6.1

Presentation

The TELEFAST 2 system is a range of products for rapid connection of discrete I/O modules to the application. It replaces screw terminal blocks, and provides remote location of single-wire termination.

The TELEFAST 2 system can only be connected to modules equipped with HE10 connectors. It is composed of interface sub-bases and connecting cables. Several types of sub-base exist :

• Connection interface sub-bases for discrete I/O, 8/12/16 channels :

- 8-channel sub-base :

ABE-7H08R10, ABE-7H08R11,

ABE-7H08R21

• with 1 isolator/channel

ABE-7H08S21

- 12 and 16-channel compact sub-bases :

ABE-7H12R50*,

ABE-7H16R50.

- 12 and 16-channel sub-bases :

ABE-7H12R10 (1), ABE-7H12R11 (1),

ABE-7H12R20 (1), ABE-7H12R21 (1),

ABE-7H16R10, ABE-7H16R11,

ABE-7H16R20, ABE-7H16R21/23,

ABE-7H16R30, ABE-7H16R31,

• with 1 isolator/channel

ABE-7H12S21 (1), ABE7-H16S21

• with 1 fuse + 1 isolator/channel

ABE-7H16S43 (for Inputs)

ABE-7H16F43 (for Outputs)

Method of identifying the various discrete I/O connection sub-bases

ABE-7H ii i i i

0 or even number = without LED per channel odd number = with LED per channel

08 = 8-channel sub-base

12 = 12-channel sub-base

16 = 16-channel sub-base

(1) none of the 12-channel sub-bases are compatible with

TSX Premium discrete I/O

1 = 1 screw terminal per channel on 1 row

2 = 2 screw terminals per channel on 2 rows

3 = 3 screw terminals per channel on 3 rows

4 = 2 screw terminals per channel on 1 row

5 = 1 screw terminal per channel on 2 rows

(compact version)

Primary function :

R = Direct connection

S = Isolator/channel

6/1

B1

• Input connection interface and adaptor sub-bases, 16 isolated channels

- ABE-7S16E2B1: 16 inputs 24 VDC,

- ABE-7S16E2E1 : 16 inputs 48 VDC,

- ABE-7S16E2E0 : 16 inputs 48 VAC,

- ABE-7S16E2F0 : 16 inputs 110/120

VAC,

: 16 inputs 220/240

VAC.

• Solid state output connection interface and adaptor sub-bases, 8 and 16 channels :

8 channel sub-bases

- ABE-7S08S2B0 : 8 solid state outputs

24VDC/0.5 A, with fault detection feedback to the

PLC.

- ABE-7S08S2B1 : 8 solid state outputs

24VDC/2A, with fault detection feedback to the

PLC.

16 channel sub-base

- ABE-7S16S2B0 : 16 solid state outputs 24VDC/

0.5A, with fault detection feedback to the PLC,

- ABE-7S16S2B2 : 16 solid state outputs 24VDC/

0.5A, without fault detection feedback to the PLC.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/2

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• Relay output connection interface and adaptor sub-bases, 8 and 16 channels :

B1

8-channel sub-bases

- ABE-7R08S111 : 8 relay outputs,

1 "N/O" with distribution of "+ or c

" poles.

- ABE-7R08S210 : 8 relay outputs,

1 "N/O", volt-free contact.

16-channel sub-base

- ABE-7R16S111 : 16 relay outputs,

1"N/O", 2x8 commons "+ or c

".

- ABE-7R16S210 : 16 relay outputs,

1 "N/O", volt-free contact,

- ABE-7R16S212 : 16 relay outputs,

1 "N/O" with distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels.

• 16 channels v

2 x 8 channels adaptor sub-base

- ABE-7ACC02 : outputs can be split :

• 16 channels in 2 blocks of 8,

• 12 channels in 1 block of 8 + 1 block of 4.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/3

B1

• Input or output adaptor interface sub-bases, with or without removable electromechanical or solid state relays, 16 channels

Output sub-bases

1"N/O", volt-free contact

- ABE-7R16T210 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay,

- ABE-7P16T210 : 10 mm wide relay, not supplied,

- ABE-7P16T214 : as above but with 1 fuse per channel.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1"N/O", with distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels

- ABE-7R16T212 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay,

- ABE-7P16T212 : 10 mm wide relay, not supplied,

- ABE-7P16T215 : as above but with 1 fuse per channel.

0Vdc

LC

+24Vdc

Fus I = 1A max

Q1

Q2

Q0

ABE7P16T214

Q5

Q6

Q3

Q4

Q7

16 Relays Outputs

Q9

Q10

Q11

Q12

Q8

Q13

Q14

Q15

1"N/O", with distribution of both poles per group of 4 channels

- ABE-7P16T318 : without 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay,

1 fuse +

1 isolator/channel

___________________________________________________________________________

6/4

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

1"C/O", volt-free contact

- ABE-7R16T230 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay,

- ABE-7R16T330 : with 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay,

- ABE-7P16T330 : 12.5 mm wide relay, not supplied,

- ABE-7P16T334 : as above but with 1 fuse per channel.

1"C/O", common per group of 8 channels

- ABE-7R16T231 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay.

1"C/O", with distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels

- ABE-7R16T332 : with 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay,

- ABE-7P16T332 : 12.5 mm wide relay, not supplied.

2 "C/O", volt-free contact

- ABE-7R16T370 : with 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay.

• Input sub-bases for 12.5 mm wide solid state relay

- ABE-7P16F310 : volt-free,

- ABE-7P16F312 : distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

6/5

B1

6.2

TSX Micro I/O module and sub-base compatibility

Discrete I/O modules

Modularity

Connection sub-bases

8 channels

ABE-7H08R ii

.

ABE-7H08S21

12 channels

ABE-7H12R ii

ABE-7H12S21

16 channels

ABE-7H16R ii

ABE-7H16S21

ABE-7H16R23

ABE-7H16F43

ABE-7H16S43

TSX DMZ 28DTK DMZ64DTK DEZ 12D2K

1x16I 1x12Q 2x16I 2x16Q 1x12I

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

DSZ 08T2K

1X8Q

Input adaptor sub-bases

16 channels

ABE-7S16S2 ii

ABE-7P16F3 ii

Output adaptor sub-bases

8 channels

ABE-7S08S2 ii

ABE-7R08S iii

16 channels

ABE-7R16S iii

ABE-7R16T iii

ABE-7P16T iii

(3)

(3)

(3)

(1)

(1)

(2)

(1) with adaptator 16 v

2x8 channels ABE-7ACC02

(2) except ABE-7S08S2B0

(3) caution : the 4 unused outputs are at state 1

Combination possible

___________________________________________________________________________

6/6

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.3

TSX Premium I/O module and sub-base compatibility

Discrete I/O modules TSX DEY DEY : 32D2K DEY

16FK 64D2K

DMY

3 2 D 3 K 28FK/28RFK

DSY : 32T2K

64T2K

1x16I 2x16I 4x16I 2x16I 1x16I 1x12Q 2x16Q 4x16Q Modularity

Connection sub-bases

8 channels

ABE-7H08R ii

ABE-7H08S21

12 channels

ABE-7H12R ii

ABE-7H12S21

16 channels

ABE-7H16R ii

ABE-7H16S21

ABE-7H16R23

ABE-7H16F43

ABE-7H16S43

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

B1

Input adaptor sub-bases

16 channels

ABE-7S16E2 ii

ABE-7P16F3 ii

Output adaptor sub-bases

8 channels

ABE-7S08S2 ii

ABE-7R08S iii

16 channels

ABE-7R16S iii

ABE-7R16T iii

ABE-7P16T iii

(1) with adaptator 16 v

2x8 channels ABE-7ACC02

(2) only with sub-base ABE-7H16R20

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

Combination possible

___________________________________________________________________________

6/7

ABE-7

B1

6.4

Module v interface sub-base connection principle

The connection between an HE 10 connector located on a discrete I/O module and a connection sub-base is made using a sheathed rolled ribbon cable (TSX CDP i 02) or a connection cable (TSX CDP ii 3) equipped with 20-pin HE10 connectors at each end.

• Sheathed rolled ribbon cables, 28 gauge : 0.08 mm 2 (see description section 5.1-2).

Given the small cross section of the wires, it is recommended that they be used for the connection of low current I/O (< 100 mA per channel).

There are three product references :

- TSX CDP 102 : 1 meter long,

- TSX CDP 202 : 2 meters long,

- TSX CDP 302 : 3 meters long.

• Connection cables, 22 gauge : 0.34 mm 2 (see description section 5.1-2)

Used to connect any I/O with a current of > 500 mA per channel.

There are five product references :

- TSX CDP 053 : 0.5 meters long,

- TSX CDP 103 : 1 meter long,

- TSX CDP 203 : 2 meters long,

- TSX CDP 303 : 3 meters long,

- TSX CDP 503 : 5 meters long,

(1) TSX CDP i 02 ribbon cable or TSX CDP ii 3 cable

(1)

(1)

Module with HE10 connector

(16 channels per connector)

___________________________________________________________________________

6/8

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

Connection of 16 channels (2 x 8) using an ABE-7ACC02 adaptor sub-base.

Example 1 : Connection of 16 channels (2 x 8) connecting channels 0 to 7 7

Module with HE10 connector

(16 channels per connector)

B1

(1)

(1)

ABE-7ACC02

(1) TSX CDP i02 ribbon cable

or TSX CDP ii 3 cable

(1) connecting channels 8 to 15

___________________________________________________________________________

6/9

B1

6.5 Sensor or preactuator connection to sub-bases

6.5-1 ABE-7H08R10, ABE-7H08R11, ABE-7H16R10, ABE-7H16R11 sub-bases

+24VDC 0VDC

ABE7-H08R11

8 Digital I/O

PLC

+ +

_ _

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

+24VDC 0VDC

PLC 0 1 2

ABE7-H16R11

3 4 5 6 7 8

16 Digital Inputs / Outputs

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

+ +

_ _

Input functions connection Output functions connection

+ 24

VDC

Module and sensor supply

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08R10/11

ABE-

7H16R10/11

+ 24

VDC

Module and preactuator supply

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08R10/11

ABE-

7H16R10/11

+ – sensors

+ preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

• on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to supply "+" (positive logic inputs),

Connection of preactuator common :

• on terminals 3 or 4 : preactuators connected to supply "–" (positive logic outputs).

!

Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

• for output functions :

2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H16R ii sub-base

-6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H08R ii sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6/10

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-2 ABE-7H12R10, ABE-7H12R11 sub-bases

B1

+24VDC

PLC

+ +

_ _

0VDC ABE7-H12R11

0 1 2 3

12 Digital Inputs / Outputs

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

•

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12R10/11

+ – sensors

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12R10/11

– – + preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to the supply "+" (positive logic inputs).

!

Terminals 200/201/202 and 203 are connected to the "–" pole.

Connection of preactuator common :

The use of a number of terminals connected to the "–" pole (3, 4, 200, 201, 202 and 203) creates commons for each group of 4 or 2 channels (positive logic outputs)

!

Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

• for output functions :

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12R ii

sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6/11

B1

6.5-3 ABE-7H08R21, ABE-7H16R20, ABE-7H16R21, ABE-7H16R23 sub-bases for type 2 inputs

+24VDC 0VDC

PLC

ABE7-H08R21

8 Digital I/O

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

+

_

+24VDC

+

PLC

_

0VDC ABE7-H16R21

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

16 Digital Inputs / Outputs

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Input functions connection

+ 24

VDC

Module and sensor supply

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08R21

ABE-

7H16R20/21

7H16R23

+

(1)

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08R21

ABE-

7H16R20/21

+

(2)

– sensors preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

Connection of preactuator common :

In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals

3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic outputs).

!

Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

• for output functions :

- 2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H16R ii sub-base

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H08R ii sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6/12

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-4 ABE-7H12R20, ABE-H12R21 sub-bases

+24VDC 0VDC ABE7-H12R21

0 1 2 3 4 5

12 Digital Inputs / Outputs

6 7 8 9 10 11

PLC

_

+

B1

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12R20/21

+

(1)

– sensors

Output functions connection

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

Module and preactuator supply

ABE-

7H12R20/21

+

(2)

Preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

!

Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "–"pole.

Connection of preactuator common :

In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals

3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "–" (positive logic outputs).

!

Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "–"pole.

!

The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

output functions :

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12R ii sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6/13

B1

6.5-5 ABE-7H08S21, ABE-7H16S21 sub-bases with 1 isolator per channel

+24VDC 0VDC

ABE7-H08S21

8 Digital I/O

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

PLC

+

_

+24VDC

+

PLC

_

0VDC ABE7-H16S21

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

16 Digital Inputs / Outputs

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08S21

ABE-

7H16S21

+

(1) sensors

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08S21

ABE-

7H16S21

+ preactuators

(2)

Connection of sensor common :

In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

Connection of preactuator common :

In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals 3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "–" (positive logic outputs).

!

Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

output functions :

- 2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H16S21 sub-base

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H08S21 sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6/14

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-6 ABE-7H12S21 sub-base with 1 isolator per channel

+24VDC 0VDC ABE7-H12S21

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

12 Digital Inputs / Outputs

7 8 9 10 11

PLC

_

+

B1

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12S21

+

(1)

– sensors

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12S21

+

(2)

Preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

!

Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "–"pole.

Connection of preactuator common :

In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals 3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "–" (positive logic outputs).

!

Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "–"pole.

!

The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

output functions :

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12S21 sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6/15

B1

6.5-7 ABE-7H16R30, ABE-7H16R31 sub-bases

+24VDC

_

0VDC ABE7-H16R31

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

16 Digital Inputs / Outputs

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

+

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H16R30/31

+

(1)

(2)

Connection of sensor common :

In order to create the sensor supply common :

place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+",

connect terminal 4 to one of the "C" terminals on the third row (2) : terminals 300 to

315 should be connected to the supply "–".

!

Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/16

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-8 ABE-7H12R50 sub-base

+24VDC 0VDC

PLC

0

1

2

3

+ +

_ _

ABE7-H12R50

12 Digital I/O

4

5

6

7

8

9 11

10

B1

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12R50

+ – sensors

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12R50

+ –

Preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

!

Terminals 200/201/202 and 203 are connected to the "–" pole.

Connection of preactuator common :

The use of a number of terminals connected to the "–" pole (3, 4, 200, 201, 202 and 203) creates commons for each group of 4 or 2 channels (positive logic outputs).

!

The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

output functions :

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12R50 sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6/17

B1

6.5-9 ABE-7H116R50 sub-base

+24VDC 0VDC

PLC

ABE7-H16R50

16 Digital I/O

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 11

10 12

13 15

14

+ +

_ _

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H16R50

+ – sensors

Output functions connnection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H16R50

+ –

Preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

Connection of preactuator common :

on terminals 3 or 4 : preactuators connected to supply "–" (positive logic output).

!

The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

output functions :

- 2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12R50 sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6/18

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-10 ABE-7H16F43 output sub-base with 1 fuse and 1 isolator per channel

B1

NC

NC

NC

NC

114

214

113

213

115

215

212

111

112

110

210

211

109

209

108

208

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

3

2

1

4

___________________________________________________________________________

6/19

B1

6.5-11 ABE-7H16S43 input sub-base with 1 fuse and 1 isolator per channel

NC

NC

NC

NC

114

214

113

213

115

215

112

212

111

211

110

210

109

209

108

208

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

202

101

102

100

200

201

3

2

1

4

___________________________________________________________________________

6/20

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-12 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7R08S111, ABE-7R16S111,

ABE-7R16S210, ABE-7R16S212

• ABE-7R08S111 sub-bases : 8 relay outputs, 1"N/O" 2 x 4 commons "+ or c "

ABE-7R16S111 : 16 relay outputs, 1"N/O" 2 x 8 commons "+ or c "

B1

+24VDC

PLC Fuse I=1Amax.

0VDC

ABE7- R08S111

8 Relays Outputs

Q0

Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

Q5

Q6

Q7

PLC

+24VDC

Fuse I=1Amax.

0VDC

ABE7-R16S111 16 Relays Outputs

Q0

Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

Q5

Q6

Q7

13

14

Q8

Q9

Q10

Q11

Q12

Q13

Q14

Q15

13

14

Sub-base and module output supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-7R08S111

Preactuator

supply

24...240 VAC or

24...127VDC

Ph

N

U1

Fu

Fu

Ph

U2

N preactuators

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-7 i sub-base and module output supply

ABE-7R16S111

Preactuator

supply

24...240 VAC or

24...127VDC

Ph

N

Ph

U1

U2

Fu

Fu

N preactuators

Type and rating of fuse supplied with the sub-base :

1 A fast blow fuse.

Fu : fuse to be rated according to the load

Protection of relay contacts :

Protection circuit must be placed across the preactuator terminals :

• RC or MOV circuit for AC,

• discharge diode for DC

___________________________________________________________________________

6/21

B1

• ABE-7R16S210 sub-base : 16 relay outputs, 1 "N/O", volt-free contacts

NC

NC

NC

NC

113

213

112

212

111

211

110

210

115

215

114

214

106

206

207

105

205

104

204

109

209

208

107

108

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

3

2

1

4

___________________________________________________________________________

6/22

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• ABE-7R16S212 sub-base : 16 relay outputs, 1 "N/O", with distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels

B1

206

105

205

104

204

103

101

201

202

100

203

102

209

108

109

208

107

210

207

106

200

112

212

111

211

110

114

214

113

213

115

215

4

3

1

2

___________________________________________________________________________

6/23

B1

6.5-13 Fixed solid state relay input adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S16E2B1,

ABE-7S16E2E1, ABE-7S16E2E0, ABE-7S16E2F0, ABE-7S16E2M0

105

205

206

104

204

103

203

108

208

207

106

107

202

101

102

201

100

200

210

109

110

209

112

212

111

211

215

114

115

214

113

213

4

3

1

2

___________________________________________________________________________

6/24

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-14 Solid state output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S16S2B0, ABE-7S16S2B2 and ABE-7S08S2B0, ABE-7S08S2B1

• ABE-7S16S2B0 and ABE-7S16S2B2 sub-bases : 16 solid state outputs/ 24VDC / 0.5A

B1

114

214

113

213

115

215

112

212

111

211

110

210

109

209

108

208

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

101

201

100

200

102

202

NC

NC

4

3

1

2

___________________________________________________________________________

6/25

B1

• ABE-7S08S2B1 sub-base : 8 solid state outputs / 24 VDC / 2A

NC

NC

NC

NC

3

2

1

4

100

200

NC

NC

101

201

NC

NC

102

202

NC

NC

103

203

NC

NC

104

204

NC

NC

105

205

NC

NC

106

206

NC

NC

107

207

___________________________________________________________________________

6/26

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• ABE-7S08S2B0 sub-base : 8 solid state outputs / 24 VDC / 0.5A

+24VDC

Fuse I=2Amax.

On protected outputs only

+

0VDC

Q0

ABE7-S08S2B0 8 non Isolated Outputs 24VDC 0,5A

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7

B1

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-7 i sub-base, TSX i module output and preactuator supply

Type and rating of fuse supplied with the sub-base :

2 A fast blow fuse

ABE-708S2B0

1 2 3 4 200

100

201

101

202

102

203

103

– +

Fu

Preactuators

207

107 chan. 7 Fu : fuse to be rated according to the load chan. 0 chan. 1 chan. 2 chan. 3

___________________________________________________________________________

6/27

B1

6.5-15 Solid state or electromechanical relay output sub-bases, relay 10mm wide

• 1"N/O" sub-bases, volt-free contact

- ABE-7R16T210 with electromechanical relays

- ABE-7P16T210 relay not supplied

6

8

5

7

115

215

114

214

113

213

112

212

111

211

110

210

109

209

108

208

2

1

4

3

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

___________________________________________________________________________

6/28

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• 1"N/O" sub-bases, with distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels

- ABE-7R16T212 with electromechanical relays

- ABE-7P16T212 relay not supplied

6

5

8

7

115

215

114

214

113

213

112

212

111

211

110

210

109

209

108

208

2

1

4

3

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

___________________________________________________________________________

6/29

B1

B1

• ABE-7R16T230 sub-base with electromechanical relays (1 "C/O"), volt-free contact

112

312

313

111

311

114

314

113

6

5

115

315

110

310

109

309

108

308

2

1

105

305

104

304

103

303

102

302

107

307

106

306

101

301

100

300

8

7

215

4

3

207

210

202

214

213

212

211

209

208

206

205

204

203

201

200

___________________________________________________________________________

6/30

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• ABE-7R16T231 sub-base, with electromechanical relays (1"C/O"), distribution of one common per group of 8 channels

B1

109

309

108

308

111

311

110

310

113

313

112

312

2

1

107

307

106

306

115

315

114

314

6

5

105

305

104

304

102

302

103

303

101

301

100

300

4

3

8

7

___________________________________________________________________________

6/31

B1

• ABE-7P16T214 sub-base relays not supplied

1"N/O", volt-free contact

1 fuse per channel

6

5

8

7

115

215

114

113

213

214

112

212

111

211

110

210

108

208

109

209

2

1

4

3

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

___________________________________________________________________________

6/32

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• ABE-7P16T215 sub-base relays not supplied

1"N/O", distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels

1 fuse per channel

6

5

8

7

115

215

114

214

113

213

112

212

111

211

110

210

109

209

108

208

2

1

4

3

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

___________________________________________________________________________

6/33

B1

B1

6.5-16 Electromechanical or solid state relay input or output sub-bases, relay 12.5 mm wide

• 1"C/O" sub-bases, volt-free contact

- ABE-7R16T330 with electromechanical relays

- ABE-7P16T330 relays not supplied

115

215

315

114

214

314

113

213

313

112

212

312

111

211

311

110

210

310

109

209

309

108

208

308

107

207

307

106

206

306

105

205

305

104

204

304

103

203

303

102

202

302

101

201

301

100

200

300

___________________________________________________________________________

6/34

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

B1

• 1"C/O" sub-bases, distribution of both poles per group of 4 channels

- ABE-7R16T332 with electromechanical relays

- ABE-7P16T332 relays not supplied

14

13

12

11

10

9

16

15

3

4

5

6

1

2

7

8

210

310

110

209

309

109

108

206

306

105

307

106

107

207

208

308

305

104

205

211

311

212

312

111

302

101

201

301

100

202

102

200

300

204

304

103

203

303

215

315

114

115

313

112

213

314

113

214

___________________________________________________________________________

6/35

B1

• ABE-7R16T370 sub-bases, with electromechanical relay (2 "C/O"), volt-free contact

___________________________________________________________________________

6/36

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

B1

• ABE-7P16T334 sub-base, relays not supplied (1"C/O"), volt-free contact

210

310

110

211

311

209

309

109

108

107

207

307

208

308

314

113

214

213

313

114

312

111

212

112

205

305

105

206

306

106

204

304

104

103

203

303

102

215

315

115

101

201

302

301

100

200

202

300

___________________________________________________________________________

6/37

B1

• ABE-7P16T318 sub-base, relays not supplied

1"C/O" distribution of both poles per group of 4 channels

1 fuse and 1 isolator per channel

8

114

213

214

113

NC

212

112

7

211

111

NC

6

110

209

210

109

NC

115

NC

208

108

5

207

107

NC

4

106

205

206

105

215

NC

204

104

3

203

103

NC

202

2

102

201

101

NC

200

100

1

___________________________________________________________________________

6/38

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• ABE-7P16F310 solid state relay input sub-base (relays not supplied), volt-free

B1

215

NC

115

114

NC

200

100

NC

101

202

201

NC

102

104

204

203

NC

NC

103

205

NC

105

NC

106

NC

206

107

207

209

NC

108

NC

208

NC

109

210

110

NC

111

211

NC

112

212

NC

113

213

NC

214

___________________________________________________________________________

6/39

B1

• ABE-7P16F312 solid state relay input sub-base (relays not supplied), distribution of both poles per group of 8 channels

101

201

NC

NC

200

100

202

102

203

NC

NC

107

207

106

NC

NC

208

206

205

105

104

204

109

209

108

3

2

4

1

103

6

5

8

7

111

211

112

212

110

210

113

213

214

215

114

115

NC

NC

___________________________________________________________________________

6/40

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

B1

6.6

Compatibility table for relays and ABE-7R16T iii , ABE-7P16T iii ,

ABE-7P16F iii sub-bases

___________________________________________________________________________

6/41

B1

6.7

Accessories

• Add-on shunt terminal block :

ABE-7BV10 : terminal block with 10 screw terminals

ABE-7BV20 : terminal block with 20 screw terminals

• Adaptor sub-base :

ABE-7ACC02 : used to switch from 16 channels to 2x8 channels

• Mounting kit :

ABE-7ACC01 : is used to fix sub-bases to solid plates

ABE-7BV20

• Dust and damp-proof cable bushing :

ABE-7ACC84 : is used to feed through the enclosure without isolating the leads

• Enclosure feed through :

ABE-7ACC83 : HE10 connectors for 8/12 channels v

M23 cylindrical connector.

ABE-7ACC82 : HE10 connector for 16 channels v

M23 cylindrical connector.

ABE-7ACC80 : HE10 connectors for 32 channels v

"HARTING" type connector.

ABE-7ACC81 : plug-in connector for ABE-7ACC80

ABE-7ACC82

• Removable continuity module :

ABE-7ACC20 : 10 mm wide

ABE-7ACC21 : 12.5 mm wide

• Software for marking customer labels :

ABE-7LOGV10

• Glass 5 x 20 fast blow fuse :

ABE-7FU012 0.125 A

ABE-7F7050

ABE-7FU100

0.5

1

A

A

ABE-7FU200

ABE-7FU630

• Self-adhesive label holder :

AR1-SB3 for AB1-R. / AB1-G. type labels

2

ABE-7ACC80

A

6.3 A

• Relays for ABE-7R16T iii , ABE-7P16T iii and ABE-7P16F iii sub-bases :

ABR-7S iii : electromechanical output relays

(see page 6/41)

ABS-7S iii : solid state output relays

(see page 6/41)

ABS-7E iii : solid state input relays

(see page 6/41)

ABR-7S3 ii ABR-7S2 ii

___________________________________________________________________________

6/42

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.8

Sub-base electrical characteristics

6.8-1 Fixed input adaptor sub-bases

Types of sub-base

Number of channels

ABE-7 ABE-7 ABE-7 ABE-7 ABE-7

S16E2B1 S16E2E1 S16E2E0 S16E2F0 S16E2M0

16 16

Control circuit characteristics (application inputs)

16 16 16

Nominal values Voltage 24VDC 48VDC

Input limit values

Current

Frequency -

12 mA

-

13 mA

At state 1 Voltage > 13.7 V > 30 V

Current > 5 mA > 6 mA

At state 0 Voltage < 5 V < 10 V

48VAC 110/ 230/

130VAC 240VAC

12 mA 8.3 mA 8 mA

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

> 32 V

> 5 mA

< 10 V

> 79 V

> 5 mA

< 30 V

> 164 V

> 4.5 mA

< 40 V

Frequency

Current < 2 mA

-

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

-

< 2 mA < 1.5 mA < 2 mA < 2 mA

47...63 Hz 47...63 Hz 47...63 Hz

19..30 V 38.4...60 V 38.4...53 V 96...143 V 184...264 V

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Response time

Maximum switching frequency

Rated insulation voltage

Rated impulse withstand voltage

(1.2 / 50) type 1

State 0 to 1 0.05 ms 0.05 ms 20 ms

State 1 to 0 0.4 ms

I/O

I/O type 2

0.4 ms type 1

20 ms

1000 Hz 1000 Hz 25 Hz

300 V

2.5 kV type 1

20 ms

20 ms

25 Hz type 1

20 ms

20 ms

25 Hz

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

6/43

B1

6.8-2 Fixed solid state output adaptor sub-bases

Types of sub-base ABE-7

S i i S2B0

8 / 16 Number of channels

Output circuit characteristics

DC load Resistive,

DC12 duty

Voltage 24 VDC

Inductive,

DC13 duty

Current 0.5 A

Voltage 24 VDC

Filament lamp

Current 0.25 A

10 W

ABE-7

S16S2B2

16

24 VDC

0.5 A

24 VDC

0.25 A

10 W

ABE-7

S08S2B1

8

24 VDC

2 A (1)

24 VDC

0.5 A (1) no

Limit values

Leakage current at state 0

Residual voltage at state 1

Minimum current per channel

Response time State 0 to 1

Built-in protection

State 1 to 0

Against overloads and short-circuits

Against inductive overvoltages

Against reverse polarity

Switching frequency on inductive load

Fault detection feedback

Rated insulation voltage

I/O

Rated impulse withstand voltage

(1.2 / 50)

I/O

Voltage 19...30 VDC

< 0.3 mA

< 0.6 V

19...30 VDC

< 0.3 mA

< 0.6 V

19...30 VDC

< 0.5 mA

< 0.5 V

1 mA

0.1 ms

1 mA

0.1 ms

1 mA

0.1 ms

0.02 ms 0.02 ms 0.02 ms

Yes by current limiter and circuit-breaker

Id > 0.75 A Id > 0.75 A Id > 2.6 A

Yes by integrated zener diode

Yes by peak limiter

< 0.6 LI

Y e s

2

300 V

2.5 kV

< 0.6 LI

No

2 < 0.5 LI

Y e s

2

(1) from 50°C to + 60°C alternating between channels

___________________________________________________________________________

6/44

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.8-3 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases

Types of sub-base

Number of channels

Contact characteristics

Limit operating voltage AC c

DC a

Thermal current

A C load

Resistive,

AC12 duty

Voltage

Inductive,

AC15 duty

ABE-7

R i i S111

8 / 16

250 V

30 V

3 A

230 VAC

Current (1) 0.6 A

Voltage 230 VAC

ABE-7

R i i

8 / 16

250 V

125 V

5 A

230 VAC

1.5 A

S210

230 VAC

D C load

Resistive,

DC12 duty

Current (1) 0.4 A

Voltage 24 VDC

0.9 A

24 VDC

Minimum switching

Current (1) 0.6 A

Inductive,

DC13 duty

Voltage 24 VDC

L/R = 10 ms Current (1) 0.2A

Current

Voltage

1 mA

5 V

10 ms Response time State 0 to 1

State 1 to 0

Maximum rate of on-load operation

Built-in protection

Against overloads and short-circuits

6 ms

0.5 Hz

1.5 A

24 VDC

0.6 A

10 mA

5 V

10 ms

5 ms

0.5 Hz

None, fit a fast blow fuse per channel or group of channels

Against inductive overvoltages in AC

ABE-7

R16S212

16

250 V

125 V

5 A

230 VAC

1.5 A

230 VAC

0.9 A

24 VDC

1.5 A

24 VDC

0.6 A

10 mA

5 V

10 ms

5 ms

0.5 Hz

None, an RC circuit or an MOV (ZNO) peak limiter appropriate to the voltage must be placed across the terminals of each preactuator

Against inductive overvoltages in DC

Rated insulation voltage

Coil/contact

Rated impulse withstand Coil/contact

voltage (1.2 / 50)

None, a discharge diode must be placed across the terminals of each preactuator

300 V

2.5 kV

(1) for 0.5 x10 6 operations

___________________________________________________________________________

6/45

B1

B1

6.8-4 Removable output electromechanical relays

Relay references

Relay width

ABR-7

Contact characteristics

Contact type

Max operating voltage AC c

(in line with IEC 947-5-1)DC a

Thermal current v

S21

10 mm

1"N/O"

250 V

125 V

4 A

L/R = 10 ms Current (1) 0.6 A

Minimum switching Current

Voltage

10 mA

5 V

Response time State 0 to 1 10 ms

State 1 to 0 5 ms

0.5 Hz Maximum rate of on-load operation

Rated insulation voltage

Rated impulse withstand voltage

(1.2 / 50)

Coil/contact

Coil/contact

S23

10 mm

1"C/O" 1"C/O"

250 V 264 V

125 V

4 A

125 V

5 A

Frequency of the operating current

AC load Resistive, Voltage 230 VAC

AC12 duty Current (1) 1.5 A

50/60 Hz

230 VAC

1.2 A

230 VAC

3 A

230 VAC

2.5 A

DC load

Inductive, Voltage 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC

AC15 duty Current (1) 0.9 A 0.7 A 1.7 A 1.3 A

Resistive,

DC12 duty

Inductive,

DC13 duty

Voltage

Current (1)

Voltage

24 VDC

1.5 A

24 VDC

24 VDC

1.2 A

24 VDC

24 VDC

3 A

24 VDC

24 VDC

2.5 A

24 VDC

0.45 A

10 mA

5 V

10 ms

5 ms

0.5 Hz

S33

12.5 mm

1.4 A

13 ms

13 ms

0.5 Hz

300 V

2.5 kV

S37

12.5 mm

2"C/O"

264 V

125 V

5 A

1 A

100 mA 100 mA

5 V 5 V

15 ms

20 ms

0.5 Hz

(1) for 0.5 x10 6

___________________________________________________________________________

6/46

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.8-5 Removable input solid state relays

References

Relay width

ABS-7 v

EC3AL EC3B2 EC3E2 EA3E5 EA3F5 EA3M5

12.5mm 12.5mm 12.5mm 12.5mm 12.5mm

12.5mm

Control characteristics

Rated operating D C voltage (Us) A C

Maximum operating voltage

(ripple included) a

5V c

6 V

Max Us current

24V

30 V

48V

60 V

48V

53 V

— —

110/130V 230/240V

143 V 264 V

13.6 mA 15 mA 15 mA 12 mA 8.3 mA 8 mA

State 1 guaranteed Voltage

Current

State 0 guaranteed Voltage

Current

Maximum switching

frequency (cyclic ratio 50%)

3.75 V

2 V

11 V

4.5 mA 6 mA 6 mA 5 mA 5 mA

5 V

0.09 mA 2 mA

30 V

10 V

2 mA

32 V

10 V

1.5 mA

1000 Hz 1000 Hz 1000 Hz 25 Hz

79 V

30 V

2 mA

25 Hz

164 V

4.5 mA

40 V

2 mA

25 Hz

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Response time

— Type 2 Type 2 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1

State 0 to 1 0.05 ms 0.05 ms 0.05 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms

State 1 to 0 0.4 ms 0.4 ms 0.4 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms

I/O 300 V Rated insulation voltage

Rated impulse withstand voltage

(1.2 / 50)

I/O 2.5 kV

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

6/47

B1

6.8-6 Fixed output solid state relays

References

Relay width

ABS-7

Output circuit characteristics

Rated operating D C v

SC2E

10mm

SA2M

10mm

SC3BA

12.5mm

SC3E

12.5mm

SA3M

12.5mm

voltage

Maximum voltage

A C load

A C a c

5..48V

Resistive, Current —

AC12 duty

— 24V 5..48V

— 24..240V — — 24..240V

57.6VDC 264 VAC 30 VDC 60 VDC 264 VAC

0.5 A — — 2 A

D C load

Resistive, Current 0.5 A

DC12 duty

Inductive, Current —

DC13 duty

Filament lamp

DC6 duty

Leakage current at state 0

2 A

1.5 A

0.3 A

10 W

< 0.5 mA < 2 mA < 0.3 mA < 0.3 mA < 2 mA

Residual voltage at state 1

Minimum current per channel

Response time

Switching frequency on inductive load

Rated insulation voltage

Rated impulse withstand voltage

(1.2 / 50)

< 1 V

1 mA

< 1.1 V

10 mA

State 0 to 1 0.1 ms 10 ms

State 1 to 0 0.6 ms 10 ms

— —

I/O

I/O

300 V

2.5 kV

< 0.3 V

1 mA

0.1 ms

0.02 ms

< 0.5 LI 2

< 1.3 V

1 mA

0.1 ms

0.6 ms

< 1.3 V

10 mA

10 ms

10 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

6/48

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.9

Dimensions and mounting

• Dimensions

67

58 84 125

B1

15

(1) Dimension with add-on shunt terminal block

ABE-7BV20 or

ABE-7BV10

67

58

(1)

ABE-7H08R1 i

ABE-7H08R2 i

ABE-7H12R50

ABE-7H16R50

ABE-7R08S111

ABE-7H08S21

(1)

ABE-7H12R1 i , ABE-7H12R2 i

ABE-7H12S21 , ABE-7H16R1 i

ABE-7H16R2 i , ABE-7H16R3 i

ABE-7H16S21 , ABE-7R16S111

ABE-7R08S210 , ABE-

7S08S2B0

206

15

57

48

ABE-7H16F43

ABE-7H16S43

ABE-7S16E2B1

ABE-7S16E2E1

ABE-7S16E2E0

ABE-7S16E2F0

ABE-7S16E2M0

ABE-7S08S2B1

ABE-7S16S2B0

ABE-7S16S2B2

ABE-7R16S210

ABE-7R16S212

50

ABE-7ACC02

15

___________________________________________________________________________

6/49

B1

• Dimensions (cont)

74

65 211

15

Reference with dimensions of

211x88 mm

(product pictured with removable relays and screws not mounted)

83

74

(1)

ABE-7R16T210

ABE-7R16T212

ABE-7R16T231

ABE-7R16T230

ABE-7P16T210

ABE-7P16T212

ABE-7P16T214

ABE-7P16T215

272

(1)

15

Reference with dimensions of

272x88 mm

(product pictured with removable relays and screws not mounted)

ABE-7R16T330

ABE-7R16T332

ABE-7R16T370

ABE-7P16T330

ABE-7P16T332

ABE-7P16T334

ABE-7P16T318

(1) Dimension with add-on shunt terminal block

ABE-7BV20 or ABE-7BV10

___________________________________________________________________________

6/50

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• Mounting

TELEFAST 2 connection sub-bases are mounted on 35 mm DIN rails.

Special mounting requirements for certain sub-bases

The following sub-bases must be mounted on a vertical plane and in a horizontal position :

• input adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S16E2E1

• solid state output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S ii S2B i

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

6/51

B1

___________________________________________________________________________

6/52

TSX PAY safety modules

Section

1 Presentation

1.1

General description

1.2

Physical description

1.3

Module range

1.4

Installing TSX PAY modules

1.5

Software setup

2 Safety function

2.1

Description

2.1-1 User functions of the product

2.1-2 Operating modes

2.2

Operating modes

2.3

Functional diagrams

2.3-1 Emergency stop function

2.3-2 Protective guard function with automatic start

2.4

Fault processing

2.4-1 Detection of faults on the inputs

2.4-2 Detection of faults on the outputs

2.4-3 Detection of internal module faults

2.4-4 Detection of ground faults

2.4-5 Limitations

Contents

Part B2

B2

Page

1/1

1/1

1/2

1/3

1/4

1/4

2/1

2/4

2/4

2/5

2/6

2/6

2/6

2/6

2/7

2/7

2/1

2/1

2/2

2/4

___________________________________________________________________________

B2/1

B2 TSX PAY safety modules Contents

Part B2

Section

3 Connections and wiring examples

3.1

Safety system

3.1-1 ES PB or LS connections

3.1-2 Feedback loop connection

3.1-3 Reset connection

3.2

Telefast ABE-7CPA13 sub-base

3.2-1 Connectors

3.2-2 Marking of the TSX CPP x02 cable

3.3

Wiring example

3.4

TSX CPP 301 cable

3.5

Safety outputs

3.6

Connecting modules in series

4 Maintenance and diagnostics

4.1

Display LEDs

4.2

Language interfaces

4.2-1 Input data

4.2-2 Diagnostic data

4.3

Display block diagnostics

4.3-1 Module status

4.3-2 Safety system status

4.4

Maintenance table

___________________________________________________________________________

B2/2

Page

3/1

3/6

3/7

3/7

3/8

3/1

3/2

3/4

3/5

3/9

3/10

3/11

4/1

4/1

4/2

4/2

4/2

4/3

4/3

4/3

4/4

TSX PAY safety modules Contents

Part B2

B2

Section

4.5

Test procedures

4.5-1 External power supply

4.5-2 Emergency stop inputs

4.5-3 Feedback loop input

4.5-4 Activation of the Reset input

4.5-5 State of the output control bit

5 Detailed characteristics

5.1

Characteristics of TSX PAY modules

5.2

Characteristics of TSX CPP x02 and TSX CPP 301 cables

5.3

Standards

6 Wiring recommendations

6.1

General wiring rules and recommendations

6.2

Cable length and dimensions

6.3

Ground connection

6.4

Protection of the safety system

6.5

Protection of the safety outputs

Page

4/5

4/5

4/5

4/6

4/6

4/6

5/1

5/1

5/4

5/5

6/1

6/1

6/1

6/3

6/3

6/4

___________________________________________________________________________

B2/3

B2 TSX PAY safety modules

Section

Contents

Part B2

Page

___________________________________________________________________________

B2/4

1 Presentation B2

1.1

General description

TSX PAY safety modules and TSX CPP ... and ABE-7CPA13 accessories are used to interrupt one or more category 0 emergency stop (ES) or safety stop control circuits

(safety components). The complete safety system satisfies the requirements of European standards EN418 for emergency stops and EN60204-1 for safety circuits.

The modules also meet the safety requirements for the electrical monitoring of limit switches (LS) activated by protection devices.

TSX PAY TSX PAY

TSX CPP 301

TSX

CPP x02

ABE7-CPA13

TSX PAY 262 and TSX PAY 282 safety modules offer :

• A safety system designed to safely control the emergency stop (ES) circuits on machines. The modules are equipped with a safety block in hard-wired logic for emergency stop monitoring.

• Complete diagnostics of the safety system by reading the state of the pushbuttons or limit switches for the emergency stop input circuit, the reset input, the feedback loop, the control bit of the two output circuits and the supply state of the safety system. This data is transmitted to the TSX Premium CPU in the form of 28 discrete input bits.

The PLC has no effect on the safety modules, and the safety system part is connected to an external power supply.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

B2

1.2

Physical description

TSX PAY modules have the same format as Premium PLC interfaces.

They occupy a single slot.

1 IP20 rigid housing to support and protect the electronic card

2 Block for displaying the operating modes, any errors and state of the safety system

3 Module reference label (right side)

4 Laser marking of the module external power supply

5 Label marking the characteristics of the safety outputs (left side)

6 Free zone for user referencing

7 High-density 44-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the safety system

8 Front panel label for identifying the safety outputs

9 Removable screw terminal block for connecting the safety outputs

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

Presentation 1

B2

1.3

Module range

Modules

Target applications

For emergency stop and limit switch monitoring

From 1 to 12 double-contact PB/LS.

Break per relay :

2 safety outputs

Power supply : 24VDC

1 to 12 double-contact PB/LS.

Break per relay :

4 safety outputs

Power supply : 24VDC

Category

Number of outputs

Number of inputs

Connection

Input string

Outputs

Power supply

4

2F (Immediate stop)

12 double or single contacts

By 44-pin HD SUB-D connectors

By 6-pin screw terminal block

24VDC

4F (Immediate stop)

12 double or single contacts

By 44-pin HD SUB-D connectors

By 6-pin screw terminal block

24VDC

Output string voltage 24VDC

PLC diagnostics

24VDC

Reading the state of the input contacts (PB or LS)

Reading the reset input

Reading the output control bit

Reading the feedback loop

Presence of safety system power supply / monitoring (see section 2.2)

Reset monitoring

Standards

Yes, by means of a strap Yes, by means of a strap

EN 60204-1, EN 292, EN 418, prEN 1921, BS 2771-1, DIN VDE 0113-1,

EN 954, EN 1088, EN 574 type III A, NF C 79-130, NF E 09-053

Display

Synchronism of inputs

28 LEDs + 3 Premium standard state LEDs approx. 400ms (<1s, automatic start)

Module ref.

TSX PAY 262 TSX PAY 282

TSX CPP X02 connection cables and ABE 7CPA13 terminal blocks must be ordered separately.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

B2

1.4

Installing TSX PAY modules

TSX PAY 262 and TSX PAY 282 modules have a standard format.

They can be installed in any of the positions of a TSX RKY ... rack, with the exception of positions dedicated to the power supply and processor modules.

The I/O of PAY ... modules must be counted as discrete in-rack I/O, respecting the limits defined for each type of processor.

1.5

Software setup

Software setup (configuration, debugging, etc) is performed using PL7 Premium / PL7

PRO software (see the Premium PLC application-specific manual "Basic Functions").

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

2 Safety function B2

2.1

Description

2.1-1 User functions of the product

TSX PAY modules provide the following functions :

• Monitoring of the emergency stop PBs and limit switches (LS) of moving guards for immediate stop (Emergency stop category 0 according to standard EN 418)

• Detection of desynchronism between the channels (>400ms) in automatic start-up mode

• Hard-wired safety block independent of the operating mode of the Premium PLC

• Regardless of the failures in the safety system components, the safety function is guaranteed by :

- 2 safety output circuits

- double-contact inputs for the emergency stop PB or LS

• Wiring of one (+) channel on an input (x) and the (-) channel on another input (x+12) in the case of a double contact

• Self-checking redundancy concept (similar to the PREVENTA XPS-ASF range, see the Telemecanique catalogue "Components for safety applications")

• Restart control via action on an auxiliary input : reset input

• Possibility of monitoring the reset input via action on a falling edge

• Selection of start-up mode via external wiring : manual, automatic or on a falling edge

• Self-testing of outputs by reading their state in the feedback loop

• Self-testing of input channels by means of the continuous comparison of their respective states

• Complete diagnostics of the safety system by :

- reading the state of the emergency stop PB or LS inputs

- reading the reset input

- reading the feedback loop

- reading the safety output control bit

- reading the state of the safety system power supply

- monitoring the module external power supply

• Possibility of selecting external power supply monitoring by PL7

Note :

PB (pushbutton)

ES (emergency stop)

LS (limit switch)

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

B2

2.1-2 Operating modes

• Diagram of the product

S121 + Double

Single

S232 B1

A1

24VDC

External power supply

A2

K1 K2

Y1

Y2/S33

S34

Feedback loop

Reset

Y3

Y4

Reset monitoring

(Shunt)

S112

Single

S01

• External power supply

The 24 VDC external power supply is wired between terminals A1 and A2. It must be protected by an external fuse.

• Use of single/double contact ES PB and LS

The wiring of terminal B1 makes it possible to choose the type of ES PB, single or double :

- B1 connected to S121, the module will be wired with double contacts between terminals S121 to S232 for positive polarity and between terminals S01 to S112 for negative polarity

- B1 connected to S232, the module will be wired with single contacts between terminal S121 and S232 for positive polarity, a global shunt between terminals

S01 and S112 having been produced for negative polarity

• Use of ES PB and LS contact

- Pressing one of the emergency stop buttons, or a break in the external power supply, will directly cause the safety output circuits K1 and K2 to open.

- After unlocking the emergency stop PBs or closing the limit switches of the input circuit, the safety output contacts (terminals 13-14, 23-24, 33-34, 43-44) are closed by sending a pulse to the enable input (terminals S33-S34).

___________________________________________________________________________

2/2

Safety function 2

• Reset

The resetting of the safety system is active when the feedback loop between terminals Y1 and Y2 is closed AND when there is a reset request (S24) between terminals S33 and S34.

Terminals Y3/Y4 are used to choose whether or not this reset input is monitored :

- Y3/Y4 open means activation of the outputs (recommended use) when the PB is pressed and then released (falling edge on S34).

- Y3/Y4 closed means immediate activation of the outputs when the PB is interrogated.

Notes :

. The shunt between terminals Y3-Y4 must be as short as possible.

. No other connections may be made to these terminals.

A shunt performed on terminals Y3-Y4 on the one hand and S33-S34 on the other hand makes it possible to automatically activate the outputs as soon as the two input channels are closed. A desynchronization time of 400 ms is permissible.

• Safety outputs

The PAY 262 module has two outputs wired between terminals 13-14 and 23-24; these two outputs may have their own power supply.

The PAY 282 module has four outputs wired between terminals 13-14, 23-

24, 33-34, 43-44; these outputs are grouped into blocks of two, and each block may have its own power supply.

The relays (with guided contacts) or contactors connected downstream of the outputs must be inserted in the feedback loop between terminals Y1 and Y2. It is only possible to start the unit if the relays with safety functions have become inactive after receiving the stop command. The feedback loop must be closed for each new start-up operation.

An additional external condition, managed by the PLC, may be inserted in the feedback loop in order to prevent a reset if a fault is detected in the safety system.

• Diagnostics

The PLC always knows the state of the safety system, by means of the input data.

B2

___________________________________________________________________________

2/3

B2

2.2

Operating modes

The safety function is autonomous in respect of the operation of the PLC. It does not follow the PLC operating modes and is capable of cutting off the power even when the

PLC is powered off or in Stop or if the CPU is absent : it is not a safety PLC.

The only exchanges between the CPU and the module are diagnostic data sent from the module to the CPU; no output is controlled by the PLC.

The module can be connected or disconnected with the power on; however, it is necessary to disconnect the HD SUB-D and the screw terminal block.

2.3

Functional diagrams

2.3-1 Emergency stop function

Supply voltage

On

(+) channel input

(S121 to S232)

(-) channel input

(S01 to S112)

Feedback loop

Y1-Y2

Start button

S33-S34 "N/O"

(with monitoring)

Output 13-14 "N/O"

Emergency stop not activated

Emergency stop activated

Output 23-24 "N/O" < 10 ms

Depending on the wiring of Y3-Y4, the reset is performed on an edge or a state.

A single open ES PB contact opens the safety outputs.

It is necessary to open the two channels to enable a reset : this is the input self-test.

The reset is only possible if loop Y1-Y2 is closed : this is the output self-test.

Key

Closed

Open

___________________________________________________________________________

2/4

Safety function 2

B2

2.3-2 Protective guard function with automatic start

(+) channel input

(S121 to S232)

(-) channel input

(S01 to S112)

Feedback loop

Y1-Y2

Shunt to

S33-S34 "N/O"

Supply voltage

Switch 1

Protector open

Output 13-14 "N/O"

Output 23-24 "N/O"

400 ms

Switch 2

Guard closed

Guard opens

< 10 ms

The use of the 2 separate limit switches (switches 1 and 2) means that the mechanism respects a time delay on closing of the 2 switches of less than 400ms.

The manufacturer characteristics guarantee the absence of control if the time is greater than 1s. In this configuration, automatic reset is selected.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/5

B2

2.4

Fault processing

2.4-1 Detection of faults on the inputs

The module is capable of detecting a short-circuit between the two ES PB or LS channels; in this case, bit Ix.27 indicates a fault in the safety system.

The module also carries out an input self-test, in the case of use with double contacts : if there is an inconsistency in the state of the ES PB or LS when interrogated, the safety outputs open but a reset is no longer possible.

To memorize a fault, it is essential to :

- maintain a permanent power supply

- activate a single ES PB at a time (detection of a short-circuiting ES)

Application solutions using a PLC output in the feedback loop and fault detection by means of the module diagnostic data can be used to improve the memorization of a fault.

2.4-2 Detection of faults on the outputs

Detection of a fault on the outputs requires the use of mechanically linked auxiliary contact relays (see the Telemecanique catalogue "Components for safety applications")

: this is the output self-test. The "N/C" contacts on relays K3 and K4 must be looped back in series on the feedback loop, between terminals Y1 and Y2. This wiring prevents the resetting of the safety system if one of the two control relays (K3 or K4) sticks.

2.4-3 Detection of internal module faults

In the event of the failure of an internal component, the TSX PAY modules ensure the safety function by opening the output contacts (K1, K2) immediately or at the next interrogation (when an ES PB or LS is opened or the power is switched off). Once this happens, the output contacts (K1, K2) can no longer be closed and the module should be changed.

If such a fault causes over-consumption on the 24VDC, the current is limited to 750mA.

In this case, bit Ix.27, the state of the safety system power supply, changes to 0.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/6

Safety function 2

2.4-4 Detection of ground faults

The TSX PAY modules have been designed to meet the requirements of standard

EN60204-1, which deals in particular with cases of short-circuits to ground. As the

0VDC is connected to ground, the consequences of one or several short-circuits to ground may be :

- a short-circuit of one or several ES PB or LS on negative polarity, if double contacts are used. The outputs open when an ES PB or LS is interrogated, by means of the opening of the contact on positive polarity, as a reset is no longer possible because of the self-test performed on the inputs,

- a short-circuit of the 24VDC external power supply, whether the wiring uses single or double contacts. Immediate opening of the safety outputs because of the absence of a power supply in the safety system. External power supply A1-A2 is protected by the current limitation to 750mA, and bit Ix.27=0 indicates a fault in the safety system.

B2

2.4-5 Limitations

The interrogation of a short-circuited ES PB or LS opens the safety outputs and the self-test does not permit a reset. However, the opening of a second ES PB or LS before the reset also renders this self-test ineffective, as in this case the two channels reach a consistent state (see section 2.4-1).

In the same way, the input self-test is rendered ineffective if a break in the external power supply occurs (or is triggered) after the interrogation of a faulty ES PB or LS, as the power-up reinitializes the module and makes a reset possible once again.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/7

B2

___________________________________________________________________________

2/8

3 Connections and wiring examples B2

3.1

Safety system

Wiring is via :

• a TSX CPP 301 cable, of which the ends of the strands are free

• a TSX CPP x02 cable with the Telefast ABE-7CPA13 connection sub-base (see section 3.2-2)

The connection diagrams below indicate the connections of the Telefast sub-base; they have been checked and tested with the greatest of care.

Risks may arise if :

• the wiring diagrams are modified by changing connections or adding components if the latter are not integrated (or are insufficiently integrated) into the safety circuit.

• the user does not respect the requirements of the safety standards for the installation, use, adjustment and maintenance of the machine. It is important to strictly respect an inspection and maintenance interval of 1 year.

• the module is manipulated when the supply voltages have not been cut off

___________________________________________________________________________

3/1

B2

3.1-1 ES PB or LS connections

Double contacts (recommended use)

This double contact wiring of the inputs is suitable for applications requiring a safety level of category 3 or 4.

Short-circuits between channels are detected.

Short-circuits of an ES PB or LS are detected and located.

( - )

S 2 3

S 2 2

S 2 1

S 2 0

S 1 9

S 1 8

S 1 7

S 1 6

S 1 5

S 1 4

S 1 3

S 1 2

S 4

S 5

S 6

S 7

S 8

S 0

S 1

S 2

S 3

S 9

S 1 0

S 1 1

( + )

2 5

2 3

2 1

1 9

3 3

3 1

2 9

2 7

SO1

S11/S02

S21/S12

S31/S22

S41/S32

S51/S42

S61/S52

S71/S62

1 7

1 5

1 3

1 1

9

1 0

1 2

S81/S72

S91/S82

S101/S92

S111/S102

S112

S232

S231/S222

1 4

1 6

1 8

S221/S212

2 0

2 2

2 4

S211/S202

S201/S192

S191/S182

S181/S172

4 0

3 9

S171/S162

2 6

2 8

3 0

3 2

3 4

S161/S152

S151/S142

S141/S132

S131/S122

S121

S121

B1

(-) channel

(+) channel

If using less than 12 double contacts, the unused input terminals must be bridged.

Example : Contacts S7 to S11 and S19 to S23 not used.

A bridge is required between terminals S71/S62 and S112 and terminals

S191/S182

___________________________________________________________________________

3/2

Connections and wiring examples 3

Single contact

This wiring is not suitable for applications requiring a safety level of category 3 or

4.

All the faults are not detected; a short-circuit on an ES PB or LS is not detected. In this case, the interrogation of this PB does not cause the fault relays to open (loss of the safety function).

B2

( - )

S 1 8

S 1 9

S 2 0

S 2 1

S 2 2

S 2 3

S 1 2

S 1 3

S 1 4

S 1 5

S 1 6

S 1 7

( + )

SO1

S112

S121

S122/S131

S132/S141

S142/S151

S152/S161

S162/S171

S172/S181

S182/S191

S192/S201

S202/S211

S212/S221

S222/S231

S232

S232

B1

2 8

2 6

2 4

2 2

2 0

3 3

9

4 0

3 2

3 0

1 8

1 6

1 4

1 2

1 0

3 8

3 9

2 4

V D C

0 VDC

If using less than 12 double contacts, the unused input terminals must be bridged.

Example : Contact S18 not used.

A bridge is required between terminals S172/S181 and S182/S191.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/3

B2

3.1-2 Feedback loop connection

The design of a category 4 immediate stop circuit requires redundancy and a check on interrogation of the power break devices.

The wiring of the "N/C" contacts (K3, K4) or (K3, K4, K5, K6) makes a check possible upon each interrogation.

The relays (K3, K4) or (K3, K4, K5, K6) must have mechanically linked contacts.

Category three wiring corresponds to :

- no wiring of the auxiliary contacts in the feedback loop (a strap connects terminals

Y1 and Y2/S33)

- conventional contactors, with unguided contacts being sufficient

Use of 2 contactors (category 4)

N(-)

K 3 K 4

1 4

2 4

K 2 K 1

Y 1

K4 K3

Y 2

1 3

2 3

F 2

L1(+)

Use of 4 contactors (category 4)

N(-)

K 3 K 4

1 4

2 4

3 4

K 5 K 6

4 4

K 2 K 1

Y 1

K4 K3

Y 2

K6 K5

13/

2 3

F 2

L1(+)

33/

4 3

F 2

L2(+)

___________________________________________________________________________

3/4

3.1-3 Reset connection

Automatic reset (protective guard)

Connections and wiring examples 3

B2

5

6

4

3

S 3 3

S 3 4

Y 3

Y 4

Manual reset

When all the ES PB or LS are unlocked, manual resetting of the safety system may be monitored if required.

With monitoring of the power on button (recommended use)

4

3

5

6

S 3 3

S 3 4

Y 3

Y 4

Y3-Y4 open

Without monitoring of the power on button

5

6

4

3

S 3 3

S 3 4

Y 3

Y 4

___________________________________________________________________________

3/5

B2

3.2

Telefast ABE-7CPA13 sub-base

The Telefast sub-base described below is of the "wire to wire" type without electronic components and is specific to the PAY safety modules on PREMIUM.

It is used to simplify the installation and wiring of the safety system on a machine. It transforms a SUB-D connector into a terminal block connector.

The Telefast is not supplied with the module.

125 mm

70 mm

___________________________________________________________________________

3/6

Connections and wiring examples 3

3.2-1 Connectors

• The TSX CPP x02 cables for connection to the module form part of the safety system.

They must not be modified by the user.

• The maximum capacity of the screw terminals of the Telefast terminal block is :

- with cable end : 2 x 1mm² wires or 1 x 1.5mm² wire

- without cable end : 1 x 2.5mm² wire

B2

Marker

A1

A2/Y4

B1

S01

S02/S11

S12/S21

S22/S31

S32/S41

S42/S51

S52/S61

S62/S71

S72/S81

S82/S91

S92/S101

S102/S111

S112

S121

3.2-2 Marking of the TSX CPP x02 cable

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

34-40

33

31

29

27

25

23

Telefast screw terminal block

37

1-3

39

Marker

S122/S131

S132/S141

S142/S151

S152/S161

S162/S171

S172/S181

S182/S191

S192/S201

S202/S211

S212/S221

S222/S231

S232

S33/Y2

S34

Y1

Y3

GND

14

12

10-38

5-7

6

8

4

2-35-36

26

24

22

20

18

16

Telefast screw terminal block

32

30

28

___________________________________________________________________________

3/7

B2

3.3

Wiring example

• Wiring of 5 emergency stops with reset monitoring

0 VDC

+24 VDC

F3

L3

L2

F2

F1

S0

S1

S2

S3

S4

S24

ESC

K4 K3

S16

S15

S14

S13

S12

3 3 S 0 1

3 1 S11/S02

2 9 S21/S12

2 7 S31/S22

2 5 S41/S32

2 3 S51/S42

9 S 1 1 2

3 Y 4

4 Y 3

6 S 3 4

5 S 3 3

7 Y 2

8 Y 1

1 0 S 2 3 2

2 4 S171/S162

2 6 S161/152

2 8 S151/S142

3 0

S141/S132

3 2 S131/S122

3 4 S 1 2 1

4 0 S 1 2 1

3 9 B 1

1 A 2

3 7 A 1

2 3

1 3

K1 K2

2 4

1 4

TSX PAY 262

C P U

K4

K3

N3

N2

Y 1 - Y 2

S 3 3 - S 3 4

Y 3 - Y 4

S121 to S232

S01 to S112

A 1 - A 2

B 1

13-14, 23-24

F 1

F2, F3

Feedback loop

Enable operation

Selection of reset monitoring mode

Contact of (+) input channel

Contact of (-) input channel

External 24VDC power supply

Selection of double or single contact wiring

Safety outputs (common on the PAY 282 module)

1A gl fuse

4A gl fuses

___________________________________________________________________________

3/8

Connections and wiring examples 3

3.4

TSX CPP 301 cable

The cable described in section 5 is not supplied with the module; it is identified by a product reference of the type TSX CPP 301.

The wiring procedure is indicated in the module quick reference guide.

Each strand is marked by a color code, taken from standard EN47100.

• Marking of the TSX CPP 301 cable

B2

Marker

A1

A2/Y4

B1

S01

S02/S11

S12/S21

S22/S31

S32/S41

S42/S51

S52/S61

S62/S71

S72/S81

S82/S91

S92/S101

S102/S111

S112

S121

Color

DIN 47100

Yellow/Brown

White/Pink

White/Pink

Pink/Brown

Brown

Brown/Blue

Yellow

Brown/Red

Pink

Brown/Black

Red

Yellow/Gray

Purple

Yellow/Pink

Red/Blue

Yellow/Blue

White

Marker

S122/S131

S132/S141

S142/S151

S152/S161

S162/S171

S172/S181

S182/S191

S192/S201

S202/S211

S212/S221

S222/S231

S232

S33/Y2

S34

Y1

Y3

GND

Color

DIN 47100

White/Blue

Green

White/Red

Gray

White/Black

Blue

Gray/Green

Black

Pink/Green

Gray/Pink

Green/Blue

White/Green

White/Yellow

Gray/Brown

White

Brown/Green

Yellow/Green

The first color indicates the base color of the conductor insulation, and the second indicates the color of the printed band.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/9

B2

3.5

Safety outputs

For both types of module, the outputs are wired to a 6-pin screw terminal block.

The removable part is supplied with the module.

• TSX PAY 282 module

13/23

14

24

33/43

34

44

13/23 : common supply input

14 : safety output

24 : safety output

33/43 : common supply input

34

44

: safety output

: safety output

• TSX PAY 262 module

13

14

23

24

13

14

: independent supply input

: safety output

23

24

: independent supply input

: safety output

• Wire cross-section :

- with cable end : 2 x 1mm² wires or 1 x 1.5mm² wire

- without cable end : 1 x 2.5mm² wire

___________________________________________________________________________

3/10

Connections and wiring examples 3

3.6

Connecting modules in series

For applications with more than 12 single contact or double contact inputs, it is possible to use several TSX PAY modules.

However the safety system is wired, it is necessary to wire :

- the safety module outputs in series

- the same number of S33/S34 reset contacts in series as there are modules (contacts isolated electrically)

- the feedback loop K3/K4 on one of the modules and a bridge between terminals

Y1/Y2 on the other modules

- the safety system inputs independently on each module (no connection in series)

Use of 2 contactors

Supply 1 Supply 2

Use of 4 contactors

Supply 1 Supply 2

B2

TSX PAY 262

13 23

13 23

TSX PAY 262

TSX PAY 262

14

13

24

23

TSX PAY 262

14

13

24

23

14 24

14 24

TSX PAY 262

13 23

TSX PAY 282

13/23 33/43

14 24

14 24 34 44

K3 K4 K3 K4 K3 K4

Note :

It is however necessary to note the global voltage drop on the output circuit, due to the resistance of the 0.1

contacts of the fault relays, which depends on the current conveyed.

For a max. thermal current of 2.5A, this voltage drop will be 4V with 16 PAY modules connected in series, and 16V with 32 PAY modules connected in series.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/11

B2

___________________________________________________________________________

3/12

4 Maintenance and diagnostics B2

4.1

Display LEDs

Like the discrete input modules, the TSX PAY 262 and TSX PAY 282 modules have a 32-LED display block.

Three RUN, ERR and I/O LEDs indicate the module status. LEDs 0 to 27 indicate the safety system status (see section 4.3).

RUN ERR

I / O

5

6

3

4

7

0

1

2

11

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

19

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

27

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

LEDs 0 to 11 State of the ES PB and LS contacts,

(+) circuit

LEDs 12 to 23 State of the ES PB and LS contacts,

(-) circuit

LED 24

LED 25

State of reset input

State of feedback loop

LED 26

LED 27

Fault relay control state

Presence of a power supply on the safety system, safety system diagnostics

LEDs 28 to 31 Not used

___________________________________________________________________________

4/1

B2

4.2

Language interfaces

4.2-1 Input data

The modules are similar to discrete modules as regards the 28 diagnostic inputs of the emergency stop circuit.

• The states of the ES PB or LS contacts of the emergency stop circuit can be accessed via bits %Ix.0 to %Ix.23, with the value 0 for an open contact and 1 for a closed

contact.

• The state of the reset input can be accessed via bit %Ix.24, with the value 0 for an open contact and 1 for a closed contact; if feedback loop %Ix.25 is closed.

• The state of the feedback loop can be accessed via bit %Ix.25, with the value 0 for

an open loop and 1 for a closed loop.

• The control state of fault relays K1 and K2 can be accessed via bit %Ix.26, with the

value 0 for de-energized relays and the value 1 for controlled relays.

• The presence of a power supply to the safety system can be accessed via bit %Ix.27,

with the value 0 for insufficient voltage (<15VDC).

• Bits %Ix.28 to %Ix.31 are not used.

4.2-2 Diagnostic data

The table below provides the diagnostic data managed by the PAY and shows the tree structure of the diagnostic data which is user-definable.

ERR module ERR channel Module status

Implicit Implicit Explicit

Channel status

Explicit

%Ixy.MOD.ERR %Ixy.i.ERR Links with %MWxy.MOD.2 Address

-----

Meaning

%MWxy.MOD.2:x1 %MWxy.i.2:x0 Not significant at %MWxy.i.2:x2

1

(1)

1

(1)

1

---

1

---

%MWxy.MOD.2:x1 %MWxy.i.2:x3 Ext. supplyfault

(1) (1) For this module, the absence of the terminal block results in an external supply fault

%MWxy.MOD.2:x0 %MWxy.i.2:x4 Int. fault : Module out of order

-- %MWxy.i.2:x5 Not significant at %MWxy.i.2:x15

Note : (1) The feedback of this fault is associated with the parameter definition.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/2

Maintenance and diagnostics 4

B2

4.3

Display block diagnostics

4.3-1 Module status

RUN LED ERR LED I/O LED

Off

Off

Off

Off Off

Off On

On Off

Off On On

On Off Off

On Off

On On

On On

On

Off

On

Meaning

Rack powered-off or module fault

External power supply fault

Module fault

Module fault and external power supply

Module operating : no int./ext. fault

OR

Module not recognized if external power supply is absent

External fault = 24VDC ext. power supply fault (<19VDC)

Internal fault

General fault (short-circuit, etc)

4.3-2 Safety system status

LEDs

0 to 23

24

25

26

27 between

28 to 31

State

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

Meaning

ES PB or LS contact open

ES PB or LS contact closed

Reset input open or feedback loop open

Reset input closed AND feedback loop closed

Feedback loop open

Feedback loop closed

Safety system relays K1 and K2 not controlled

Safety system relays K1 and K2 controlled

Safety system power supply fault or fault creating a short-circuit the safety system channels

Safety system power supply present

Not used

An external power supply fault causes the I/O LED of the module to light up. The

LEDs of the display block always display the state of the channels, even if they change to an error state (all equal to 0) in PL7.

It is possible to define parameters for monitoring the external power supply. In this case, the LEDs of the display block reflect the real state of the Emergency Stops.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/3

B2

4.4

Maintenance table

FAULTS

Cannot start up

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Inappropriate opening No external power supply or

of the safety outputs fuse F1 burnt out

ES PB or LS open

B1 disconnected

C H E C K

Read %Ix.MOD.ERR = external fault

Display I/O LED on PAY module

Voltage between terminals A1-A2 >19.2VDC

If %Ix.27=0, then SC on safety system

Read %Ix.0 to %Ix.23

Check the consistency of the state of the contacts

Check B1 is connected to S232 (single cont.)

Check B1 is connected to S121 (double cont.)

Read %Ix.26

Check the state and characteristics of F2

Relays no longer controlled

Fuse F2 destroyed

No external power supply or fuse F1 destroyed

Emergency stop still open

Read %Ix.MOD.ERR = external fault

Display I/O LED on PAY module

Voltage between terminals A1-A2 >19.2VDC

Read %Ix.0 to %Ix.23

Check the consistency of the state of the contacts

Conflict on the inputs

(wires cut or faulty

ES PB), use of double contacts : self-test

No PB action with feedback loop closed

Read %Ix.0 to %Ix.23

Check the consistency of the state of the contacts

Feedback loop still open

No control possible

%Ix.24=%Ix.25=1 when PB pressed

Check PB contacts

Check the state of shunt Y3-Y4

Read %Ix.25

Check contacts on the auxiliary relays

Read %Ix.26 when PB is pressed

Fuse F2 destroyed Check the state and characteristics of F2

Output power supply not working Check the reset wiring

Automatic

start-up

Incorrect input

data

PB continuously enabled with loop closed

Voltage drop on the cables

%Ix.24=%Ix.25=1 without PB being pressed. Check PB contacts

Voltage between terminals S01-S112 and

S121-S232 > 18.2VDC all ES PBs closed

If the fault persists once the wiring has been checked, change the module.

To avoid errors when replacing a product, it is advisable to mark the slot on the module label on the front panel and on the label of the TSX CPP... cable. The specific red color of the front panel of PAY modules helps to avoid errors during PLC maintenance operations.

note : SC : Short-circuit

Cont.

: Contact

ES PB : Emergency Stop Pushbutton

___________________________________________________________________________

4/4

Maintenance and diagnostics 4

4.5

Test procedures

Before installation or during a periodic check (cyclic test), it may be useful to test the module and its functions. This procedure may be as follows.

B2

4.5-1 External power supply

The module integrates an external power supply voltage check. A voltage less than

19VDC causes a fault on the module (%[email protected] = 1). The input bits are no longer significant (%Ix.0 to 31 = 0).

The power supply fault is signaled as follows :

- The I/O indicator lamp lights up, as does that of the CPU

- Module fault bit %[email protected] changes to 1

- Module fault bit %MWx.MOD.2:X9 changes to 1

- Channel fault bits %Ix.i.ERR all change to 1

In this state, the safety system remains operational : a voltage drop of up to 10VDC will still set the module to the safety position by opening the safety outputs.

The module is protected against polarity inversions and has a current limit set at 750mA.

If the external power supply check is not activated (parameter setting), power supply faults are not indicated and the bits represent the process.

4.5-2 Emergency stop inputs

With the outputs closed, interrogate all the emergency stops one by one to check that the outputs change to the safety position : %Ix.26 should change from 1 to 0.

Check the triggering of the safety system and the consistency of the diagnostic data.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/5

B2

4.5-3 Feedback loop input

The feedback loop is used to indicate to the module the real image of the safety outputs.

It is open when the outputs are active. The device used is a relay with guided contacts for controlling the outputs.

Loop open Bit %Ix.25 = 0 Loop closed Bit %Ix.25 = 1

Check the state of the feedback loop depending on the output control bit.

4.5-4 Activation of the Reset input

The activation of the reset input between terminals S33 and S34 makes it possible to reset the system when no ES has been interrogated AND if the feedback loop is closed; the device used is a pushbutton (activation on a state or a falling edge).

It is only possible to read the state of the reset input if the feedback loop is also closed.

Contact open Bit %Ix.24 = 0 Contact closed Bit %Ix.24 = 1 and Bit %Ix.25 = 1

Depending on the reset option chosen, check correct functioning and the diagnostic indicators.

4.5-5 State of the output control bit

Depending on the module, TSX PAY 262 or TSX PAY 282, two or four outputs are available between terminals 13-14, 23-24, 33-34, 43-44; they are used to control the contactors or preactuators. This part is isolated from the control (reset) part.

When the reset conditions are met (feedback loop closed AND activation of the reset input), the outputs are controlled.

Outputs off Bit %Ix.26 = 0 Outputs active Bit %Ix.26 = 1

___________________________________________________________________________

4/6

5 Detailed characteristics B2

5.1

Characteristics of TSX PAY modules

• General characteristics

Safety functions emergency stop and LS monitoring checking of moving guards monitoring of pressure sensitive mats two-handed control

Category according to EN 954-1

Module external power supply voltage residual ripple voltage limits protection of external supply fuse F1

(according to IEC 947-5-1) max. consumption monitoring threshold max. current inrush safety circuit voltage 24VDC module protection

isolation

PLC power supply current consumption on internal 5V

Power power dissipated in the module

Display

Mounting

Dimensions H x L x D

Weight

Module MTBF

Connection safety system safety outputs

Max. length of safety system

for module external supply = 24V

Yes (from 1 to 12 single or double contacts)

Yes (desynchronism > 400ms)

No

No

4 terminals A1 and A2

24VDC

5%

-15% +20%

< 1A gl

200mA

< 19VDC

0.5A / 5ms

Electronic internal fuse > 250mA and < 1A

Overvoltage category II (2kV), degree of pollution 2

< 150mA

< 5W

28 LEDs for discrete inputs + Diag

3 module status LEDs

In Premium rack

150 x 36 x 120 mm

PAY 262 = 0.43 Kg PAY 282 = 0.49 Kg

3 x 10 -6 failures / hour

(relay board = 0.5 x 10 -6 , mother board = 2.4 x 10 -6 )

44-pin HD SUB-D

6-pin screw terminal block depending on the wire resistance (see section 6.3)

___________________________________________________________________________

5/1

B2

• Input characteristics

Inputs number of safety channels reset / power on button selection of single or double ES PBs feedback loop monitoring of reset input inrush current isolation Inputs / ground

• Output characteristics

12 single or double contact ES PBs

Yes (S33-S34)

Yes = external shunt (B1)

Yes (Y1-Y2)

Yes = external shunt (Y3-Y4)

0.5A / 1ms

500 Vrms 50/60Hz - 1 min

Safety outputs

voltage reference number and type of circuits

Volt-free

2F (AgCdo, 2µ gold plated) with independent power supply for the TSX PAY 262

2*2F (AgCdo, 2µ gold plated) with independent power supply for the TSX PAY 282

DIN EN 60947-5-1 breaking capacity AC15 / C300 : Inrush 1800VA,

Holding 180VA

DC13 : 24V / 2.5A L/R =100ms

19 ... 250 VAC / 17 ... 127 VDC voltage protection of outputs by fuse 4 A gl

(according to DIN VDE 0660 part 200 and IEC 947-5-1) max. thermal current Ithe minimum current and voltage response time on ES interrogation isolation Output / ground

Test voltage isolation of safety system / Ground

Mechanical life

Electrical life

2.5A

30mA and 24VDC

< 10 ms

Insulation voltage 300V according to

VDE0110 / part 1

2000Vrms 50/60 Hz - 1 min

300Vrms

10 6 operations

1 x 10 6 operations (depends on the power)

The module is capable of switching low loads (24 V / 30 mA). This is possible provided that the contact has never previously switched any high loads, as this may have impaired the gold plating on the contact.

___________________________________________________________________________

5/2

Detailed characteristics 5

B2

• Conditions of use

Operating temperature

Humidity without condensation

Storage temperature

0...+60°C for the PLC

-10...+60°C for the safety function

5 to 95%

-25 to 70°C

Isolation resistance > 10MW at 500VDC

Dielectric strength on SUB-D acc. to IEC1131 500Vrms, 50/60Hz, 1min

Operating altitude 0...2000m

Degrees of protection according to IP IEC 529 terminals / connection box installation area

Maximum capacity of screw terminals

IP20

IP54

2 x 1mm² wires with cable end

• Terminal marking (according to DIN EN 50005, DIN EN 50042)

Module external power supply

Contacts on the (+) circuit

Contacts on the (-) circuit

Selection of single or double contacts

Reset

Feedback loop

A1 - A2

S01-S02, S11-S12, S21-S22, S31-S32,

S51-S52, S61-S62, S71-S72,

S81-S82, S91-S92, S101-S102,

S112

S121-S122, S131-S132, S141-S142,

S152, S161-S162, S171-S172,

S181-S182, S191-S192, S201-S202,

S211-S212, S221-S222, S231-S232

B1

S33 - S34

Y1 - Y2

Monitoring of reset input Y3 - Y4

Safety outputs

TSX PAY 262 module, independent power supply: 13 - 14, 23 - 24

TSX PAY 282 module, common power supply: 13/23 - 14, 13/23 - 24, 33/43 - 34, 33/43 - 44

___________________________________________________________________________

5/3

B2

5.2

Characteristics of TSX CPP x02 and TSX CPP 301 cables

• TSX CPP x02 cable

SUB-D - 44-pin HD male

SUB-D / SUB-D version

SUB-D - 44-pin HD male

Cable

Connector

Lengths

Unshielded multiconductors (32 conductors used)

According to EN47100 (conductor color)

SUB-D 44-pin HD male, SUB-D 44-pin HD male

The connector cannot be removed

1m, 2m and 3m

• TSX CPP 301 cable

SUB-D / free strands version

SUB-D - 44-pin HD male free strands

Cable Unshielded multiconductors (32 conductors used)

Gauge 22, 7 strands per conductor

According to EN47100 (conductor color)

Connector side

Preparation of the

ends

SUB-D 44-pin HD male

The connector cannot be removed

Semi-stripped (the sheath has been cut but

the conductor is not stripped)

Length 3m

___________________________________________________________________________

5/4

Detailed characteristics 5

5.3

Standards

TSX PAY modules have been designed to meet the requirements of European and international standards concerning electronic industrial control system equipment and safety circuits.

B2

Specific PLC requirements

Electrical qualities

Electrical machine equipment

Emergency stop equipment

Machine safety - Parts of the control system concerned with safety

EN61131-2 (IEC 1131-2), CSA 22-2 no.142,

UL508

UL746L, UL94

EN60204-1 (IEC204-1)

EN418

EN954-1

PR EN954-2

EN953

EN1088

DIN VDE 0110

DIN VDE 0660

EN60947-5-1

VDE 57100

NF C63-850

IEC 664

___________________________________________________________________________

5/5

B2

___________________________________________________________________________

5/6

6 Wiring recommendations

6.1

General wiring rules and recommendations

B2

The safety system should be wired in accordance with the specifications given in section 15 of standard EN60204-1. This section describes the regulations concerning wiring and the mechanical protection of cables.

The entire safety system, the ES PB or LS, the TSX PAY modules, the protective fuses and the auxiliary relays must be housed in an enclosure providing IP54 protection minimum as specified in standard EN954-1.

The modules can be mounted / removed with the PLC energized (without the risk of damaging the module or disturbing the PLC. It is essential to disconnect the module cable in order to deactivate the safety outputs before removing the output terminal block).

6.2

Cable length and dimensions

The length of the safety system wires can cause a voltage drop in the power supply which depends on the circulating current. This voltage drop results from the sum of the currents circulating in the 0Vdc return path of the electrical circuit. A common practice is to double or triple the 0Vdc wires.

To ensure the correct functioning of the safety system (resetting of the relays) and the correct reading of the diagnostic data, it is important that the voltage measured between terminals A1 and A2 is greater than 19.2V.

• Cross-section of wires with the Telefast ABE-7CPA13 sub-base

Each terminal can receive bare wires or wires fitted with cable ends, or open or closed tag connectors.

The capacity of each terminal is :

- minimum : 1 x 0.28mm wire 2 without cable end

- maximum : 2 x 1mm wires 2 or 1 x 1.5mm wire 2 with cable end

The maximum cross-section of the wires on the terminal block is : 1 x 2.5mm² wire without cable end.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/1

B2

• Calculation of the maximum cable length

The resistance of each safety system (plus circuit and minus circuit) must not exceed

75 Ohms. The resistance can be calculated from the length and cross-section of the cable :

R =

ρ

l / S where

ρ

= 1.78 for copper l = the length in meters

S = the cross-section in mm²

It is possible for the wiring to allow a greater distance between the ES PB or LS and the module :

Conventional wiring :

S12

S121

S122/S131

S13

S132/S141

S14

PAY

S142/S151

S15

S152/S161

S232

Wiring with optimized length :

S12

S13

S14

S15

S121

S122/S131

S132/S141

S142/S151

PAY

S152/S161

S232

Length to be taken into account when calculating the resistance

___________________________________________________________________________

6/2

Wiring recommendations 6

6.3

Ground connection

The module does not have a ground connection terminal on the front panel. Depending on the TSX CPP cable used, the 0Vdc can be connected to ground (see EN60204-1) via the intermediate connection block or directly on the Telefast ABE-CPA13 sub-base.

B2

6.4

Protection of the safety system

Faults within the PAY safety modules can be propagated outside the module, and particularly to the external power supply used : module internal short-circuits can cause an avalanche of the supply voltage or a malfunction if the latter is not protected. For this reason, a 1A fast-blow fuse (gL) is placed in the control part of the relays, as the maximum power consumption is 200mA : this fuse, known as F1, is an active element

of the safety system.

The module also has a current-limiting device set at 750mA in order to detect shortcircuits between channels on the ES PB or LS : in this case, the external power supply is protected, with bits Ix.27=0 indicating a safety system fault.

To ensure the safety function, the following must be used :

- As inputs : ES PB or LS with double contacts

N/C contacts of the auxiliary relays with guided contacts in the feedback loop,

- As outputs : two or four auxiliary relays with guided contacts an F2 fuse for protecting the 4A gl outputs

- On the external power supply of the module : an F1 1A gl protective fuse

___________________________________________________________________________

6/3

B2

6.5

Protection of the safety outputs

The output voltages may be up to 230VAC or 127VDC.

The outputs are not protected inside the module; GMOV type protections (for a continuous load), or an RC cell (for an AC load) are placed directly at the terminals of the load used. These protections must be adapted to the load.

The use of auxiliary relays with guided contacts and the wiring of the feedback loop thus makes it possible to detect a short-circuit on the safety outputs.

A 4A fast-blow fuse (gL) is placed on the auxiliary supply circuit to protect the fault relay contacts of the module and the connected loads : this is identical to the PREVENTA modules.

The F2 fuse placed on the safety outputs provides protection against short-circuits or overloads. This protection prevents the fusing of the fault relay contacts internal to the

TSX PAY modules.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/4

Start-up/Diagnostics/Maintenance Contents

Part C

___________________________________________________________________________

C

Section

1 Display

1.1

Introduction

1.2

Display of PLC status

1.3

Display of module status

1.3-1 Discrete I/O modules

1.3-2 Analog and application-specific modules

1.3-3 Power supply modules

2 Start-up

2.1

Checking discrete I/O connections

2.2

PLC and module states on initial power-up

3 Troubleshooting and fault analysis

3.1

Troubleshooting using the processor status indicator lamps

3.1-1 Non-blocking faults

3.1-2 Blocking faults

3.1-3 Processor or system faults

3.2

Reminder of system bits and system words

3.2-1 System bits

3.2-2 System words

Page

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2

1/2

1/3

1/7

2/1

2/1

2/2

3/1

3/1

3/1

3/2

3/4

3/5

3/5

3/11

___________________________________________________________________________

C/1

C

Start-up/Diagnostics/Maintenance

Section

Contents

Part C

Page

___________________________________________________________________________

C/2

1 Display

1.1

Introduction

Every module has indicator lights which assist setup, operation, diagnostics and maintenance of the PLC :

• display the PLC status on the processor module

• display the status of each module (discrete I/O, application-specific module, power supply)

• display the channels for each discrete I/O module and some of the applicationspecific modules

• I/O channel diagnostics

C

1.2

Display of PLC status

The 5 indicator lamps RUN, TER, I/O, ERR, FIP situated on the processor provide information, depending on their state (off, flashing or on), on the PLC operating mode :

RUN :

ERR :

I/O :

TER :

FIP:

PLC Run/Stop

Processor or application fault

I/O fault (channel or module)

Traffic on the terminal port

Traffic on the FIPIO bus (TSX/PMX/PCX 57 i 52 processors)

On Flashing Status

Indicator

RUN

(green)

PLC running normally

ERR

(red)

I/O

(Red)

TER

(Yellow)

FIP

(Yellow)

PLC error : processor fault or system fault

I/O fault from a module, channel or configuration fault.

Off

RUN

TER

ERR

I / O

FIP

RUN ERR

TER I/O

PLC in Stop or PLC faulty, blocking software (1)

PLC not configured : application absent, invalid or incompatible with the type of processor

PLC : processor or system fault

•PLC not configured : application absent, invalid or incompatible with the type of processor

•PLC faulty, blocking software

•Memory card battery fault.

•Fault on X Bus

No fault

Fault on X Bus : (the X bus No fault fault is detected on simultaneous flashing of

I/O and ERR indicator lamps)

Exchange in progress on No exchanges in terminal port progress

FIPIO Bus active,

Exchange in progress

No exchanges in progress

1/1

C

1.3

Display of module status

1.3-1 Discrete I/O modules

• Module status indicator lamps : (RUN, ERR, I/O)

Three or four indicator lamps situated on each module provide information, depending on their state (off, flashing or on), about the module operating mode :

- RUN indicator : signals the module operating status,

- ERR indicator : signals an internal module fault,

- I/O indicator : signals an external fault,

- indicator + 32 : signals the display of channels 32 to 63 on modules with 64 channels.

• Channel status indicator lamps : (0 to i)

Depending on the type of module, 8, 16, 28 or 32 indicator lamps display and provide diagnostics on the status of each module channel.

Flashing Off Status O n

Indicator

RUN Normal operation

ERR

I/O

Internal fault : module failure

— Module faulty or powered off

Communication fault if RUN indicator lamp is on

Module not configured if

RUN indicator lamp off (1)

Terminal block fault

No module fault

No external fault

0...i

External fault : overload, short-circuit, sensor/preactuator voltage fault

Channel at state 1 Channel faulty due to overload or short-circuit

Channel at state 0

Note : during the self-tests, the RUN, ERR, and I/0 indicator lamps flash.

8-channel modules 16-channel modules 28, 32 or 64-channel modules

RUN ERR

I / O

RUN ERR

I / O

RUN

+ 32

ERR

I / O

5

6

3

4

7

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

0

1

2

11

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

(1) This state is available on module versions

V2.0.

(2) Pushbutton enabling the display of channels 32 to 63 on modules with 64 channels

5

6

3

4

7

0

1

2

11

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

19

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

27

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

(2)

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

Display 1

1.3-2 Analog and application-specific modules

Like discrete I/O modules, analog and application-specific modules (counter, axis control, etc) have indicator lamps which display the module status and channel status

(on certain modules).

• Module status indicator lamps (RUN, ERR, I/O)

Three indicator lamps situated on each module give information, depending on their status (indicator off, flashing or on), about the module operating mode :

- RUN indicator : signals the module operating status,

- ERR indicator : signals an internal module fault,

- I/O indicator : signals an external fault,

• Channel status indicator lamps (CH i

)

Certain application-specific modules have 1, 2 or 4 indicator lamps which display and provide diagnostics for the status of each module channel.

CH2

CH3

CH0

CH1

RUN ERR

I / O

C

TSX AEY / TSX ASY analog modules and TSX ISP Y100 weighing modules

Indicator

Status O n

RUN Normal operation

ERR

I/O

CHi

Flashing Off

Internal fault module failure

— Module faulty or powered off

Communication fault on No module fault

TSX ASY analog output module and TSX ISP Y100 weighing module

External fault

• range overshoot

• sensor link fault

(TSX AEY 414 module)

Terminal block fault No external fault

No channel status indicator lamps

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

C

TSX CTY 2A/4A/2C counter modules

Status O n

Indicator

RUN Normal operation

Flashing Off

— Module faulty or powered off

No module fault ERR

I/O

Internal fault module failure

External fault

• wiring fault

• encoder supply fault

• measurement overrun

Application fault (1).

Communication fault

— No external fault

CH i

TSX CTY 2A :

CH0 and CH1

TSX CTY 4A :

CH0, CH1, CH2,

CH3

Channel is operational Channel is not operating Channel is not Iin correctly due to : service,

• an internal fault,

(module absent or

No configuration or incorrect configuration.

failed),

• an external fault,

(application fault),

• communication fault.

TSX CAY 21/22/33/41/42 axis control modules

Status O n

Indicator

RUN Normal operation

Flashing Off

— Module faulty or powered off

No module fault ERR

I/O

Internal fault module failure

External fault

• wiring fault,

• encoder/24 V supply fault,

• absolute encoder fault,

• speed drive fault,

Application fault (1).

Communication fault

CH i

TSX CAY 21/22 :

CH0 and CH1

TSX CAY 21 :

CH0, CH1, CH2

TSX CAY 41/42 :

CH0, CH1, CH2,

CH3

Channel is operational

No external fault

Channel is not operating Channel is not correctly due to : operational,

• an internal fault, No configuration or incorrect configuration.

(module absent or failed),

• an external fault,

(application fault),

• communication fault.

1/4

Display 1

TSX CTY 11/21 stepper motor control module

Indicator

Status O n

RUN Normal operation

ERR

I/O

CH i

Internal fault module failure

External fault

• wiring fault

• 24 V supply fault

• transporter fault,

Application fault (1)

Channel is operational

Flashing

Communication fault

Off

Module faulty or powered off

No module fault

No external fault

TSX CFY 11 :

CH0

TSX CFY 21 :

CH0, CH1

Channel is not operating Channel is not correctly due to : operational,

• an internal fault,

(module absent or failed),

• an external fault,

No configuration or incorrect configuration.

(application fault),

• communication fault.

C

TSX SCY 21601 communication module

Flashing

Indicator

Status O n

RUN Normal operation

ERR

CH0

Internal fault module failure

Channel is operational

Off

— Module faulty or powered off

No module fault Communication fault with the connected device, configuration fault

Channel is not operating Channel is not correctly due to : operational

• an internal fault,

(module absent or failed),

• an external fault,

(application fault)

• communication fault.

(1) configuration, adjustment, OF control problems

___________________________________________________________________________

1/5

C

TSX SAY 100 AS-i bus interface module

Flashing

Indicator

Status On

RUN

(Green)

Normal operation

ERR

(Red)

COM

(Yellow)

I/0

(Red)

Serious internal fault, module failure

I/O fault

Off

Module self-tests (1)

Module self-tests (1)

Fault : system OK but

• application program faulty

• fault on AS-i bus

No internal fault

Module self-tests (1)

Communication on the AS-i bus

Module self-tests (1)

Module faulty , or module powered off

No communication on the AS-i bus

Module in normal operation

(1) 4 indicator lamps flashing simultaneously during self-tests when module is powered up.

TSX ISP Y100 weighing module

Indicator

RUN

ERR

Status On

I/O

CH

Flashing Off

Normal operation Module faulty or powered off

No fault Internal fault, module failure

Communication fault,

Application absent, invalid or faulty

External faults :

• Overload or underload fault during calibration,

• Range overshoot fault,

• Measurement fault,

• Module sealed

(configuration refused)

No fault

No channel status indicator lamp

___________________________________________________________________________

1/6

Display 1

1.3-3 Power supply modules

Each power supply module has a display block comprising :

• 3 indicator lamps (OK, BAT, 24V) on TSX PSY 2600/

5500/8500 power supply modules for an AC supply,

• 2 indicator lamps (OK, BAT) on TSX PSY 1610/3610/

5520 power supply modules for a DC supply.

Status O n

Indicator

O K Normal operation

Flashing

BAT Battery fault : battery absent, spent, incorrectly fitted, incompatible.

24V

(only on modules for c supply )

Normal operation

OK

BAT

24 V

Off

Module powered off or output voltage outside monitoring range

Normal operation

24V sensor voltage outside monitoring range.

C

___________________________________________________________________________

1/7

C

___________________________________________________________________________

1/8

2 Start-up

2.1

Checking discrete I/O connections

• Principle

This check consists of ensuring that :

- data originating from the sensor is taken into account by the corresponding inputs and the processor,

- commands from the processor are taken into account by the outputs and transmitted to the corresponding preactuators.

!

Activated outputs may cause machine movements. As a result, it is advisable to disconnect the power part before carrying out this check :

• remove the motor control power fuses,

• disconnect the hydraulic and pneumatic power generators

• then power up the PLC equipped with its discrete I/O modules

C

• Checking input connections without a terminal

This check is carried out by activating each sensor and checking that the corresponding input indicator lamp changes state. If it does not, check the wiring and that the sensor is operating normally.

• Checking I/O connections using a terminal

The use of a terminal enables I/O connections to be checked more thoroughly. To this end, an application (1) should first be loaded to the PLC from a programming terminal, even if it contains only the I/O configuration.

This check can be carried out with the PLC in RUN :

- either from an "ADJUST 117" adjustment terminal

- or from an FTX 417/507 terminal or PC equipped with PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software which gives access to the debug functions.

Note :

This check can also be carried out with the complete application loaded in the memory. In this case, inhibit the MAST, FAST and event tasks to prevent the program from being processed, by setting system bits %S30, %S31, %S38 to 0.

- Checking inputs :

1 - activate each sensor and check that the corresponding input indicator changes state,

2 - check on the terminal screen that the corresponding input bit (%I

.i

) also changes state.

- Checking outputs : from the terminal, set each corresponding output bit (%Q

.i

) to 1 then to 0 and check that the corresponding output indicator lamp switches on and off and that the associated preactuator is activated and deactivated.

(1) no module must be declared in FAST task if the application is empty.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

C

2.2

PLC and module states on initial power-up

PLC status : on power-up, the processor executes its self-tests then waits for an application transfer. The various processor states are indicated on the display block by the

RUN, ERR, I/O, etc indicator lamps. The following diagram shows the procedure to be followed on initial start-up, depending on the state of the indicator lamps.

Power up the

PLC

State of processor indicator lamps

RUN ERR I/O

PLC self-tests

Processor fault

No application in the PLC

"PLC not configured"

"PLC error"

RUN ERR I/O

Transfer a valid application to in the PLC

RUN ERR I/O

(see PL7 Junior documentation)

RUN ERR I/O

"PLC stopped"

Set the PLC to RUN

(see PL7 Junior documentation)

RUN ERR I/O

"PLC running"

RUN ERR I/O

"PLC software fault or HALT" status

Key Processor fault lamp off lamp flashing lamp on

"PLC error"

RUN ERR I/O

___________________________________________________________________________

2/2

Start-up 2

Description of the PLC states

PLC self-tests

The PLC processor executes its self-tests internally. The PLC does not control the process and cannot communicate via its terminal port (or networks). This state is signaled by all 3 indicator lamps RUN, ERR and I/O flashing.

"PLC error"

The processor is stopped after :

• a hardware failure or system fault. The process is no longer controlled, communication is impossible and only a cold restart is possible (press the processor RESET button, move the memory card handle, etc). This state is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is off and the ERR and I/O indicator lamps are on.

• a wiring fault on X Bus :

- the fault is detected by the processor during the self-tests if a fault occurs during startup. It is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is off and the ERR and I/O indicator lamps are flashing. Be prepared for a break in communication if the wiring fault persists.

- if a fault occurs during program execution (a cable break, for example), it will be detected as soon as it occurs if the application uses the X Bus I/O. In this case, the processor will trigger a switch to "processor error" state. Be prepared for a break in communication if the wiring fault persists. To identify if the fault is a processor fault or an X Bus wiring fault, press the RESET button on the processor. If the fault is an X Bus wiring fault, it will be detected during the self-tests and indicated by the indicator lamps

: RUN off, ERR and I/O flashing.

"PLC not configured"

The processor has started but does not contain any valid applications. It does not control the process but can communicate via its terminal port (or networks). This state is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is off and the ERR indicator lamp is flashing.

"PLC software fault or HALT"

The application has changed to "watchdog timer overrun" or performed an unresolved

JUMP, a HALT instruction or a blocking fault has appeared. This state is signaled when the RUN and ERR indicator lamps are flashing and, in the case of an I/O fault, the I/O indicator lamp is on.

"PLC stopped"

The PLC has a valid application which is stopped (the application is in an initial state when first powered up, tasks are stopped at the end of a cycle). The process commands are in fallback state. This state is signaled by the RUN indicator lamp flashing. I/O faults : I/O indicator lamp on, battery fault on PCMCIA memory card : ERR indicator lamp flashing.

"PLC running"

The application operates normally in order to control the process. An application nonblocking fault (I/O fault or software fault) may also be present. This state is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is on.

I/O faults : I/O indicator lamp on.

Battery fault on PCMCIA memory card :ERR indicator lamp flashing.

C

___________________________________________________________________________

2/3

C

Module states : During the module power-up phase, modules can be in one of the following five states :

Power up the

PLC

State of module indicator lamps

RUN ERR

Module self-tests

Version < V2.0 modules

Initial state

Version

V2.0 modules

Module used

Module disconnected

Module failure

Key lamp off lamp flashing lamp on

Indeterminate

___________________________________________________________________________

2/4

Start-up 2

Description of module states

Self-tests

On power-up, or reinitialization of the processor, the module runs its self-tests. This state is signaled by the RUN, ERR and I/O indicator lamps flashing.

Output state : safety value (state 0 for discrete I/O).

C

Initial state :

This is the normal state of the module after the self-test phase if it is not controlled by the application. Depending on the module software version, this state is signaled when :

• the RUN indicator lamp is on, the ERR indicator lamp is off and the I/O indicator lamp is on, flashing or off, depending on the presence or not of an I/O fault for version < V2.0

modules,

• the RUN indicator lamp is off, the ERR indicator lamp is flashing and the I/O indicator lamp is on, flashing or off, depending on the presence or not of an I/O fault for version

V2.0 modules,

Output state : safety value (state 0 for discrete I/O).

Module used

The module is used in the application, and its channels are controlled by control tasks

(MAST, FAST, event). This state is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is on, the ERR indicator lamp is off and the I/O indicator lamp is on, flashing or off depending on the presence or not of an I/O fault.

The state of the outputs depends on the state of the task which controls them :

• state 0 if the controlling task has not been started,

• state 0 or 1 (value given by the application if the controlling task is in RUN),

• state at fallback value (configurable) if the controlling task is stopped in STOP, on a breakpoint (BKPT), on a HALT instruction or if system bit %S9=1.

Module disconnected

No more communication between the module and the processor (processor error or powered off, rack disconnected, etc). This state is signaled when the RUN indicator lamp is on, the ERR indicator lamp is flashing and the I/O indicator lamp is on, flashing or off depending on the presence or not of an I/O fault.

This state is only controlled by the modules controlling the outputs. The other modules remain in the "module used" state in the event of a communication stop (discrete input modules for example).

Module failure

The module has an internal fault and has to be replaced. This state is signaled when the

RUN indicator lamp is off, when the ERR indicator lamp is on and the I/O indicator lamp is in any state.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/5

C

___________________________________________________________________________

2/6

3 Troubleshooting and fault analysis

3.1

Troubleshooting using the processor status indicator lamps

The status indicator lamps situated on the processor inform the user about the PLC operating mode and also about any possible faults. Faults detected by the PLC concern :

• circuits in the PLC and/or its modules : internal faults,

• the process controlled by the PLC or the wiring to the process : external faults,

• the operation of the application executed by the PLC : internal or external faults.

Faults are detected during start-up (self-tests) or during operation (this is the case for the majority of hardware faults), during exchanges with the modules or upon the execution of a program instruction.

Certain "serious" faults require a PLC restart, with others, the user uses his discretion to decide on appropriate action, depending on the level of application required.

3 types of faults can be identified : non-blocking, blocking or processor faults.

C

3.1-1 Non-blocking faults

This is an anomaly caused by an I/O fault on the X Bus, the FIPIO bus or by the execution of an instruction. It may be processed by the user program and does not change the PLC status.

• Non-blocking faults linked to the I/O

A non-blocking fault linked to the I/O is signaled by :

- the I/O status indicator lamp of the processor being on,

- the I/O status indicator lamps of the faulty modules being on, (on X Bus and FIPIO bus)

- the fault bits and words associated with the channel :

I/O on X Bus :

%Ixy.i.ERR bit = 1 indicates faulty channel (implicit exchanges),

%MWxy.i.2 words indicate the type of channel faults (explicit exchanges),

I/O on FIPIO bus :

%I\p.2.c\m.v.ERR bit = 1 indicates faulty channel (implicit exchanges),

%MW\p.2.c\m.v.2 words indicate the type of channel faults (explicit exchanges),

- the fault bits and words associated with the module :

Module on X Bus :

%Ixy.MOD.ERR bit = 1 indicates a module fault (implicit exchanges),

%MWxy.MOD.2 words indicate the type of module fault (explicit exchanges),

Module on FIPIO bus :

%I\p.2.c\0.MOD.ERR bit = 1 indicates a module fault (implicit exchanges),

%MW\p.2.c\0.MOD.2 words indicate the type of module fault (explicit exchanges),

- system bits

%S10 : I/O fault (on X Bus and on FIPIO bus),

%S16 : I/O fault (on X Bus and FIPIO bus) in the task in progress

%S40 to %S47 : I/O fault in racks with addresses 0 to 7 on X bus (see section 3.2).

___________________________________________________________________________

3/1

C

Note : the use of these bits and words is explained in the TLX DS 57 PL7 30E application-specific manuals.

Status indicator lamps System

RUN ERR I/O bits

Faults

%S10

%S16

%S40 to

%S47

I/O faults : channel supply fault, channel tripped, module not conforming to configuration, out of order, module supply fault

I/O fault in a task

Rack I/O fault

(%S40: rack 0,.... %S47: rack 7)

Key Indicator lamp on Indeterminate state

• Non-blocking faults linked to program execution

A non-blocking fault linked to the program execution is signaled by setting to 1 any of the system bits %S15, %S18 and %S20.

Testing and setting these system bits to 0 is the responsibility of the user.

Faults Status indicator lamps System

RUN ERR I/O bits

%S15 = 1

%S18 = 1

%S20 = 1

Character string manipulation error.

Capacity overflow, error on floating point or division by 0.

Index overflow

Note : The program diagnostics function, which can be accessed via PL7 Junior/PL7 Pro software enables certain non-blocking faults linked to the execution of the program to be rendered blocking. The type of fault is indicated in system word %SW 125.

3.1-2 Blocking faults

These faults, caused by the application program, prevent the program from continuing to operate, but do not cause a system fault. When such a fault appears, the application stops immediately and changes to the HALT state (all tasks are stopped on the current instruction).

There are 2 ways of restarting the application :

- via the INIT command using PL7 Junior or PL7 Pro software,

- via the processor RESET pushbutton.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/2

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

The application is then at its initial state : the data has its initial values, tasks are stopped at the end of the scan, the input image bits are updated and the outputs are set to fallback position ; the RUN command enables the application to be restarted.

A non-blocking fault is indicated by status indicator lamps (ERR and RUN) flashing and, depending on the type of fault, by the setting to 1 of one or both system bits %S11 and %S26. The type of fault is indicated in system word %SW 125.

C

Status indicator lamps System

RUN ERR I/O bits

%S11 = 1 Watchdog overrun

Faults

%S26 = 1 Overrun of grafcet activity table

Unresolved Grafcet step

Execution of HALT instruction

Execution of unresolved JUMP

Key Indicator lamp on Indicator lamp flashing Indeterminate state

Diagnostic tools under PL7 Junior/PL7 Pro

The program diagnostics tool for PL7 Junior/PL7 Pro software shows "in plain language" the cause and origin of the change to a PLC blocking fault : watchdog overrun, character string fault, etc.

The type of fault is indicated in system word %SW 125.

Fault type Meaning

Blocking Watchdog overrun

System bits

System word

%SW125

%S11 = 1 H'DEB0'

Grafcet activity table overrun

Unresolved Grafcet step

Execution of HALT instruction

Execution of unresolved JUMP

Non-blocking, Manipulation error on a character string rendered blocking Division by 0 during program Capacity overflow diagnostics Operation on floating point error

Index overflow

%S26 = 1 H'DEF7'

% S26 = 1 H'DEFE'

H'2258'

H'DEF8'

%S15 = 1 H'DEF1'

%S18 = 1 H'DEF0'

%S18 = 1 H'DEF2'

%S18 = 1 H'DE87'

%S20 = 1 H'DEF3'

___________________________________________________________________________

3/3

C

3.1-3 Processor or system faults

These serious processor (hardware or software), or X Bus wiring faults mean that correct operation of the system is no longer assured. They cause a PLC to stop in

ERROR which requires a cold restart. To prevent a PLC fault occurring again, the next cold start will be forced to STOP mode.

Status indicator lamps System word Faults

RUN ERR I/O %SW124

H'80'

H'81'

System watchdog fault or wiring fault on X Bus

Wiring fault on X bus

System code fault, interruption not expected,

System task stack overflow

PL7 Junior task stack overflow

Key Indicator lamp on Indeterminate state

Processor fault diagnostics :

When the PLC has stopped due to a fault, it can no longer communicate with a diagnostic device. Data relating to faults can only be accessed after a cold start (see system word %SW124). In general this data cannot used by the operator. Only H'80' and H'81' data can be used to diagnose a wiring fault on X Bus.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/4

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

3.2

Reminder of system bits and system words

System bits %Si and system words %SWi provide information about the PLC status and can be used to control its operation. Some of these objects are managed entirely by the system, others are the user's responsibility. For more information on system bits and words refer to the PL7 Junior documentation (TLX DR PL7 30 E - section 3 of part B).

C

3.2-1 System bits

Bits Function Description

%S0

%S1

%S4 to

%S7

%S9

%S10

Cold start

Warm restart

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 :

• on power return with loss of data,

• by the user program,

• by the terminal,

• on changing the PCMCIA memory card,

• by pressing the processor RESET button,

• by manipulating the memory slot cover or the handle of the PCMCIA memory card.

This bit is reset to 0 by the system after a normal program execution scan.

To process an application program after a cold PLC start, it is also possible to test bit %SW10:X0

(if %SW10:X0 = 0, there has been a cold restart).

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 :

• on power return with data save,

• by the user program,

• by the terminal.

This bit is reset to 0 by the system at the end of the first complete scan and before the outputs are updated.

Time bases

%S4 changes state every 5 ms (Time base = 10 ms),

%S5 changes state every 50 ms (TB = 100 ms),

%S6 changes state every 500 ms (TB = 1 s),

%S7 changes state every 30 s (TB = 1 min).

These bits are not synchronized with the PLC scan.

Change to output Normally at state 0, this bit can be set to 1 via the fallback state program or the terminal.

on all buses %S9 = 1 : change to fallback state (0 or 1) depending on choice

(X Bus, FIPIO, made in configuration of all discrete and analog outputs,

AS-i, etc) %S9 = 0 : normal output update.

I/O fault on

X Bus and

FIPIO bus

Normally at state 1, this bit is set to 0 by the system during an

I/O fault on one of the station racks.

This bit is reset to 1 by the system when the fault disappears.

%S11 Watchdog overrun

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system if the program execution time exceeds the maximum execution time (watchdog) declared during configuration.

Such a fault causes the PLC to change to HALT (software fault).

___________________________________________________________________________

3/5

C

System bits (continued)

Bits

%S13

%S15

%S16

%S17

%S18

%S19

%S20

Function

First scan

Character string fault

Description

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system during the first scan after setting the PLC to RUN.

In the case of a cold restart, %S13 can only change to 1 after the RESET button on the processor has been pressed or after manipulation of the PCMCIA memory card handle or slot cover.

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system when the size of the destination zone for the transfer of a character string is insufficient.

This bit must be reset to 0 by the user.

I/O task fault

Normally at state 1, this bit is set to 0 by the system during a fault on an X Bus I/O module or a FIPIO device configured

X Bus and FIPIO in the task.

This bit must be reset to 1 by the user. Each task manages its own bit %S16.

Exit bit on a shift operation or arithmetic report

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system :

• during a shift operation, contains the state of the last bit,

• when an overrun occurs with unsigned arithmetic.

This bit is reset to 0 by the user.

Arithmetic overflow or error

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system in the event of a capacity overflow during operation on a word :

• result greater than +32767 or less than -32768 (single word),

• result greater than +2147483647 or less than -2147483648

(double word),

• overflow or error during operation on a floating point. The

type of fault is given by system word %SW17.

• division by 0,

• square root of a negative number,

• forcing a DRUM to a non-existent step,

• stacking a full register or unstacking an empty register.

This bit must be reset to 0 by the user.

Task period overrun

(periodical scan)

Index overrun

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system in the event of an overrun of the time defined for the task during configuration or programmed in %SW0 /%SW1.

This bit is reset to 0 by the user. Each periodic task

(MAST, FAST) controls its own bit %S19.

Note : while the cause of the task time overrun persists, the task operates cyclically.

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system when the address of the indexed object becomes less than 0 or exceeds the number of objects declared during configuration.

This bit is reset to 0 by the user.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/6

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

System bits (continued)

Bits

%S21

%S22

%S23

%S24

%S26

%S30

%S31

Function Description

Grafcet initialization

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by :

• a cold restart (%S0 = 1)

• the user program exclusively in preprocessing,

• the terminal

At state 1, it causes the Grafcet to be initialized. The active steps are deactivated and the initial steps are activated.

It is reset to state 0 by the system at the end of preprocessing.

Grafcet reset Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user and can to zero only be set to state 1 via the program during preprocessing.

At state 1, all active steps are deactivated.

It is reset to state 0 by the system at the end of preprocessing.

Grafcet freeze Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user and can only be set to state 1 via the program during preprocessing.

Maintained at state 1 by the application program, it enables the Grafcet to remain in a given state (without changing).

It must be reset to 0 only by program during preprocessing so that the Grafcet can change from the freeze situation.

Resetting macro-steps to 0

Normally at state 0, setting %S24 to 1 resets the selected macro-steps in a table of 4 system words %SW22 to %SW25. It is reset to 0 by the system after acceptance at the end of preprocessing.

Table overflow Normally at state 0, this bit is set to state 1 when the number

(steps/ of possible steps or transitions has been exceeded. An transitions) overflow causes the PLC to change to STOP. Starting execution (RUN) via the terminal must be preceded by an initialization (setting %S21 to 1) by the same terminal. It is thus reset to 0 on initialization of the terminal. System words %SW20 and %SW21 contain the number of positions occupied in the Grafcet activity tables (%SW20 step positions, %SW21 transition positions). In the event of an overflow, the words %SW20 and %SW21 contain the number of positions corresponding to the scan before the overflow.

Activation/ Normally at state 1, this bit is managed by the user : deactivation of %S30 = 1, activation of master task, master task

(MAST)

%S30 = 0, deactivation of master task.

Activation/ Normally at state 1, this bit is managed by the user : deactivation of %S31 = 1, activation of the fast task, fast task %S31 = 0, deactivation of the fast task.

(FAST) This bit is inactive if the fast task is not programmed.

C

___________________________________________________________________________

3/7

C

System bits (continued)

Bits

%S38

%S39

%S14 to

%S47

%S50

%S51

%S59

%S60

%S67

Function Description

Activation/ deactivation of events

Loss of events

Normally at state 1, this bit is managed by the user :

%S38 = 1, activation of event-triggered processing,

%S38 = 0, deactivation of event-triggered processing.

This bit is inactive if no event is programmed as an event task.

This bit is set to 1 by the system to advise the application that one or more events have been lost following stack overflow.

This bit should be reset to 0 by the application.

I/O faults

(racks)

Normally at state 1, each of these bits is set to state 0 on an

I/O fault of the corresponding rack :

%S40 for 0, %S41 for rack 1, ........, %S47 for rack 7.

Setting one of these bits to 0 causes :

• the %S10 general bit to be set to 0,

• the I/O indicator lamp of the corresponding rack and processor to light up,

• status module bit %Ixy.ERR to be set to 1.

They are reset to 1 when the fault disappears.

These various bits are used by the program to draw up the fault processing structure.

Updating of date and time by %SW50 to %SW53

Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user :

%S50 = 0, access to date/time by reading words %SW50 to %SW53,

%S50 = 1, updating of date/time by writing words %SW50 to %SW53.

Loss of This bit managed by the system indicates at state 1 either time on the the absence of the real-time clock, or that the system words real-time clock relating to the real-time clock have no significance; in this case the real-time clock must be reset. This automatically resets the bit to 0.

Updating date / time by %SW59

Redundant architecture control

Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user :

%S59 = 0, the system does not manage word %SW59,

%S59 = 1, the system manages word %SW59,

System bit used when redundant architecture is used.

(see description and usage in "Premium Redundant

Architecture" manual).

PMCIA This bit, managed by the system, is used to check the memory card backup battery for the PMCIA memory card (RAM type) : battery status %S67 = 0, battery present and operative,

%S67 = 1, battery missing or inoperative.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/8

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

System bits (continued)

Bits

%S68

%S70

%S73

%S74

%S80

%S90

%S92

%S94

%S95

%S100

Function Description

Processor internal RAM

This bit, managed by the system, is used to check the backup battery for the data and the program in the processor internal backup RAM memory : battery status %S68 = 0, battery present and operative,

%S68 = 1, battery missing or inoperative.

Updating of data on the

AS-i bus

This bit is set to 1 by the system at the end of each AS-i bus scan. During start-up, it indicates that all data has been refreshed at least once and is significant.

This bit is reset to 0 by the user.

Change to Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the user to protected mode switch to protected mode on the AS-i bus. Initially, bit %S74 on the AS-i bus must be set to state 1. This bit is only used for wiring checks.

It is not used in the PLC.

Saving current

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the user to save the current configuration on the AS-i bus.

configuration This bit is only used for wiring checks. It is not used in the on the AS-i bus PLC.

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the user to reset the message counters %SW80 to %SW86.

Reset message counters

Updating the common words

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system on receipt of common words from another station.

This bit is reset to 0 by the user.

Switch to Normally at state 0, this bit can be set to 1 by the user to set communication the communication functions in performance measurement mode.

function The communication function Time-out parameter then displays measurement the exchange loop-back time in tenths of ms (if this time <10s, mode otherwise insignificant).

Save DFB adjustments

Restore DFB adjustments

Protocol on terminal port

Normally at state 0, this bit can be set to 1 by the user to save the adjustment values of user function blocks.

Normally at state 0, this bit can be set to 1 by the user to restore the adjustment values of user function blocks.

This bit, managed by the system, takes the value 0 or 1 depending on the type of device connected to the terminal port :

%S100 = 0, UNI-TELWAY master protocol,

%S100 = 1, UNI-TELWAY slave or ASCII protocol (character mode).

C

___________________________________________________________________________

3/9

C

System bits (continued)

Bits

%S101

%S102

%S118

%S119

Function

Diagnostic buffer configured

Diagnostic buffer full

General I/O fault on

FIPIO bus

General I/O fault on

X Bus

Description

This bit is set to 1 by the system when the diagnostic option is configured, and a diagnostic buffer designed to store errors sent by diagnostic DFBs is then reserved.

This bit is set to 1 by the system when the buffer receiving errors from diagnostic function blocks is full.

Normally at state 1, this bit is set to 0 by the system if a fault occurs on a connected device on the FIPIO bus.

When the fault disappears, this bit is set to 1 by the system.

Normally at state 1, this bit is set to 0 by the system if a fault occurs on a connected device on the X Bus.

When the fault disappears, this bit is set to 1 by the system.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/10

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

3.2-2 System words

Words Function Description

%SW0

%SW1

%SW8

%SW9

%SW10

%SW11

%SW12

%SW13

%SW17

Master task scan time (MAST)

Fast task scan time (FAST)

Used to modify the master task time, defined during configuration, via the program or the terminal.

Time is expressed in ms (1 to 255 ms).

During cyclic operation %SW0 = 0.

Used to modify the fast task time, defined during configuration, via the program or the terminal.

Time is expressed in ms (1 to 255 ms).

This system word is not significant if the fast task is not programmed.

Used to inhibit reading the inputs for each task :

%SW8:X0 = 1 inhibit in the master task (MAST)

%SW8:X1 = 1 inhibit in fast task (FAST)

Control of reading inputs for each task

Control of updating outputs for each task

Used to inhibit updating the outputs of each task :

%SW9:X0 = 1 inhibit in the master task (MAST)

%SW9:X1 = 1 inhibit in fast task (FAST)

Detection of a cold restart at the end of the first scan of a task

This word indicates a change to RUN after a cold start

Bit %SW10:X0 is associated with the MAST task,

Bit %SW10:X1 is associated with the FAST task (if it is programmed).

The value 0 of the current task bit means that it is executing its first scan after a cold start. Each bit is set to 1 after the associated task has been executed.

Contains the duration of the watchdog defined during configuration. It is expressed in ms (10 to 500 ms).

Watchdog duration

Terminal port UNI-TELWAY address of the terminal port defined during

UNI-TELWAY configuration and loaded in this word on a cold start.

address This word is updated by the system.

Main station address

Indicates for the main network :

• the station number (low order byte) : 0 to 127,

• the network number (high order byte) : 0 to 63.

Fault status of operations on floating points

Indicates the type of fault on a floating point operation:

%SW17:X0 = 1 invalid operation

%SW17:X1 = 1 non-standard operand

%SW17:X2 = 1 division by 0 / the result is ± ×

%SW17:X3 = 1 overflow / the result is ± ×

%SW17:X4 = 1 underflow / the result is 0

%SW17:X5 to X15: unused, always at 0

%SD18

(%SW18 +

%SW19)

Absolute time counter

This double word is used to calculate the duration.

It is incremented by the system every 1/10th of a second

(even when the PLC is in STOP).

%SW18 the least significant and %SW19 the most significant bits of word %SD18.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/11

C

C

System words (continued)

Words

%SW20

%SW21

%SW22 to

%SW25

%SW30

%SW31

%SW32

%SW33

%SW34

%SW35

%SW48

%SW49 to

%SW53

Function

Grafcet activity level

Validity table for Grafcet transitions

Description

This word contains the number of active steps to be activated and deactivated for the current scan.

This word contains the number of enabled transitions and transitions to be enabled and disabled for the current scan.

Macro-step reset to 0 table

A macro-step corresponds to each bit in this table with

%SW22:X0 for XM0 ....%SW25:X16 for XM63.

Macro-steps whose associated bit in the table is at 0 will be reset when bit %S24 is set to 1.

Shows, for the master task (MAST), the execution time of the last PLC scan (in ms).

Master task execution time

Max execution Shows, for the master task (MAST), the longest execution time for time since the last cold start (in ms).

master task

Min execution Shows, for the master task (MAST), the shortest execution time for time since the last cold start (in ms).

master task

Fast task execution time

Shows, for the fast task (FAST), the execution time of the last PLC scan (in ms).

Max execution Shows, for the fast task (FAST), the longest execution time for time since the last cold start (in ms).

fast task

Min execution Shows, for the fast task (FAST), the shortest execution time for time since the last cold start (in ms).

fast task

Number of events

Indicates the number of events processed since the last cold start.

Real-time Contains, in BCD, the current date / time value : clock function %SW49 : day of the week, 1 to 7 (00DD)

(1 = Monday, ..., 7 = Sunday)

%SW50 : Seconds, 0 to 59 (SS00),

%SW51 : Hours, 0 to 23 / Minutes, 0 to 59 (HHMM),

%SW52 : Month, 1 to 12 / day of month, 1 to 31 (MMDD),

%SW53 : Century, 0 to 99 / Year, 0 to 99 (CCYY).

These words are managed by the system when %S50 = 0.

They can be accessed by the user in write mode when %S50 = 1.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/12

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

System words (continued)

Words

%SW54 to

%SW58

Function

Real-time clock function

%SW58

%SW59

%SW60 to

%SW69

%SW80 to

%SW86

Code of last stop

Adjustment of current date/time

Redundant

PLC diagnostics

Message counters

Description

Contains, in BCD, the date / hour of the last power supply fault or PLC stop :

%SW54 : Seconds, 0 to 59 (00SS)

%SW55 : Hours, 0 to 23 / Minutes, 0 to 59 (HHMM),

%SW56 : Month, 1 to 12 / day of month, 1 to 31 (MMDD),

%SW57 : Century, 0 to 99 / Year, 0 to 99 (CCYY).

%SW58 : day of the week on MSB, (1 to 7 (DD00) 1 = Monday,

..., 7 = Sunday)

Contains the code of the cause of the last stop on the low order byte (00CC) :

%SW58 = 1, change from RUN to STOP by the terminal,

%SW58 = 2, stop on software fault (task overflow),

%SW58 = 4, power fault or power supply RESET

button pressed,

%SW58 = 5, stop on hardware fault,

%SW58 = 6, stop on HALT instruction.

Contains 2 series of 8 bits for adjusting the current date/time.

The adjustment is made on the rising edge of a bit.

The adjustment word is validated by %S59.

Incrementation Decrementation Parameter bit %SW59:X0 bit %SW59:X1 bit %SW59:X8 bit %SW59:X9 day of the week seconds bit %SW59:X3 bit %SW59:X4 bit %SW59:X5 bit %SW59:X6 bit %SW59:X7 bit %SW59:X11 bit %SW59:X12 bit %SW59:X13 bit %SW59:X14 bit %SW59:X15 hours day of month month year century

System words used when redundant architecture is used.

(see description and usage in "Premium Redundant

Architecture" manual).

%SW80 : number of messages transmitted by the system to the terminal port.

%SW81 : number of messages received by the system from the terminal port.

%SW82 : number of messages transmitted by the system to the PCMCIA communication card.

%SW83 : number of messages received by the system from the PCMCIA communication card.

%SW84 : number of telegrams transmitted by the system.

%SW85 : number of telegrams received by the system.

%SW86 : number of telegrams refused by the system.

C

___________________________________________________________________________

3/13

C

System words (continued)

Words Function Description

%SW87

%SW88

%SW89

%SW108

%SW109

%SW116

Management Number of requests processed by the synchronous server of per master task cycle (MAST).

communication Number of requests processed by the asynchronous server flow per master task cycle (MAST).

(1) Number of requests processed by the server functions (immediate) per master task cycle (MAST).

Number of forced bits

Indicates the number of forced bits in the application.

Normally set to 0, it is updated by the system when forcing and unforcing bits in the application memory.

Counts the number of analog channels forced to 0.

Forced analog channel counter

FIPIO

I/O fault in the task

Normally at 0, each bit of this word represents a

FIPIO exchange state in the task in which it is tested.

This word is reset to 0 by the user.

bit %SW116:X0 bit %SW116:X1

= 1 explicit exchange error (the variable is not exchanged on the bus),

= 1 time out on an explicit exchange (no response at the end of the time out), bit %SW116:X2 bit %SW116:X3 bit %SW116:X4 bit %SW116:X5 bit %SW116:X6

= 1 number of explicit exchanges carried out simultaneously,

= 1 incorrect MPS status (the contents of the variable are invalid),

= 1 the length of a received variable is greater than the declared length,

= 0 reserved at 0,

= 1 invalid PDU code (the variable must be bit %SW116:X7 ignored by the channel manager),

= 1 asynchronous promptness time out : the time taken by the agent to produce the variable has not been respected.

Signals absence of configured devices on the FIPIO bus,

= 1 channel fault

= 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X8 bit %SW116:X9 bit %SW116:X10 = 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X11 = 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X12 = 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X13 = 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X14 = 0 reserved at 0, bit %SW116:X15 = 1 global fault (or fault on bits 3, 4, 6, 7).

(1) words only available on TSX/PCX/PMX 57, version V3.3 or later.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/14

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

System words (continued)

Words

%SW118 to

%SW121

%SW124

Function

Not significant

%SW125

%SW126 and

%SW127

%SW128 to

%SW143

Description

Not significant for TSX/PMX/PCX Premium processors.

These words are at state 0

Type of processor fault

Contains the last type of processor fault encountered.

At values H'80' and H'81', it is used to diagnose a wiring fault on X Bus.

Read after PLC cold restart.

Type of blocking fault

Contains the last type of blocking fault encountered (see section 3.1).

Address of Contains the address of the instruction which generated the the blocking blocking fault.

fault instruction %SW126 contains the offset of this address

%SW127 contains the base of this address

Connection point fault on device on

Each bit in this group of words represents the state of a connected device on the FIPIO bus.

Normally at state 1, if one of these bit is at state 0, a connection the FIPIO bus point fault has occurred.

When the fault disappears, this bit is set to 0 by the system.

%SW128 represents addresses 0 to 15 bit %SW128:X0 = @ 0 bit %SW128:X1 = @ 1

...

bit %SW128:X15 = @ 15

%SW129 represents addresses 16 to 31

%SW130 represents addresses 32 to 47

%SW131 represents addresses 48 to 63

%SW132 represents addresses 64 to 79

%SW133 represents addresses 80 to 95

%SW134 represents addresses 96 to 111

%SW135 represents addresses 112 to 127

%SW136 represents addresses 128 to 143

%SW137 represents addresses 144 to 159

%SW138 represents addresses 160 to 175

%SW139 represents addresses 176 to 191

%SW140 represents addresses 192 to 207

%SW141 represents addresses 208 to 223

%SW142 represents addresses 224 to 239

%SW143 represents addresses 240 to 255

C

___________________________________________________________________________

3/15

C

System words (continued)

Words

%SW144

%SW145

Function Description

Operating mode Used to stop or start the bus arbitrator of bus arbitrator, and the producer/consumer functions on the bus. It is used producer/ consumer functions on FIPIO bus to modify the starting, automatic and manual modes of the bus if it is stopped.

bit %SW144:X0 = 1 producer/consumer function in

RUN bit %SW144:X0 = 0 producer/consumer function in

STOP (no variables are exchanged on the bus).

bit %SW144:X1 = 1 the bus arbitrator is in RUN, bit %SW144:X1 = 0 the bus arbitrator is in STOP (no variables or messages are scanned on the bus).

bit %SW144:X2 = 1 automatic start if the bus has been stopped automatically.

bit %SW144:X2 = 0 manual start if the bus has been stopped automatically.

bit %SW144:X3 = 1 reserved at 1 bit %SW144:X4 to bit %SW144:X15

= 0 reserved at 0

!

Modifying this system word may stop the

PLC station

Modification of FIPIO bus arbitrator parameters

The bits are set to state 1 by the user and reset to 0 by the system when initialization is performed.

bit %SW145:X0 = 1 modification of bus arbitrator priority : the high order byte of this system word contains the value of the bus arbitrator priority which will be applied on the bus.

bit %SW145:X1 = 1 modification of the slot time value (Tr): the high order byte of this word contains the slot time value Tr (in µs) which will be applied on the bus, bit %SW145:X2 = 1 modification of silence time (T0): the high order byte of this word contains the silence time value T0 (in µs) which will be applied on the bus, bit %SW145:X3 to bit %SW145:X7

= 0 reserved at 0.

bit %SW145:X8 to = bus arbitrator priority value bit %SW145:X15 (if bit %SW145:X0 = 1).

These parameters can be modified when in RUN, but the application must be stopped and then restarted.

!

Modifying this system word may stop the

3/16

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

System words (continued)

Words

%SW146

%SW147

%SW148

%SW149

%SW150

%SW151

%SW152

Function Description

Display of The low order byte shows the state of the producer/ the bus arbitrator consumer function on the FIPIO bus.

and producer/ The low order byte shows the state of the producer/ consumer consumer function.

function on the FIPIO

The high order byte shows the state of the bus arbitrator function.

bus Byte value

H'00' : the function does not exist.

H'70' : the function is loaded but is not operational.

H'F0' : the function is currently being executed.

Network cycle A value not equal to 0 (in ms), showing the network cycle time for the time for the MAST task (NCT-MAST).

MAST task

Network cycle A value not equal to 0 (in ms), showing the network cycle time for the

FAST task time for the FAST task (NCT-FAST).

Reserved

Number of frames This word shows the number of frames transmitted by the transmitted FIPIO channel manager.

Number of This word shows the number of frames received by the FIPIO frames received channel manager.

Number of message resend attempts

This word shows the number of message resend attempts by the FIPIO channel manager.

C

___________________________________________________________________________

3/17

C

System words (continued)

Words

%SW153 and

%SW154

Function Description

List of FIPIO channel

Each bit is set to state 1 by the system and reset to 0 by the user.

manager faults %SW153 bit %SW153:X0 = 1 station overrun fault bit %SW153:X1 = 1 message refusal fault bit %SW153:X2 = 1 interrupt variable refusal fault bit %SW153:X3 = 1 station underrun fault bit %SW153:X4 = 1 physical layer fault bit %SW153:X5 = 1 non echo fault bit %SW153:X6 = 1 chatter fault bit %SW153:X7 = 1 hypocurrent fault bit %SW153:X8 = 1 pierced frame fault bit %SW153:X9 = 1 frame reception CRC fault bit %SW153:X10 = 1 frame reception coding fault bit %SW153:X11 = 1 received frame length fault bit %SW153:X12 = 1 unknown frame type received bit %SW153:X13 = 1 truncated frame received bit %SW153:X14 bit %SW153:X15 not used, value not significant not used, value not significant

%SW155

%SW162

%SW154 bit %SW154:X0 = 1 aperiodic Time Out sequence bit %SW154:X1 = 1 message handling request refused bit %SW154:X2 = 1 urgent update command refused bit %SW154:X3 = 1 non-urgent update command refused bit %SW154:X4 = 1 silence fault bit %SW154:X5 = 1 network collision on transmission of identifier bit %SW154:X6 = 1 bus arbitrator overrun fault bit %SW154:X7 not used, value not significant bit %SW154:X8 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X9 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X10 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X11 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X12 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X13 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X14 = 0 reserved at 0 bit %SW154:X15 = 0 reserved at 0

Number of explicit exchanges

This word indicates the number of explicit exchanges during processing.

Number of errors in diagnostic buffer

Number of current errors in the diagnostic buffer.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/18

Standards Contents

Service conditions Part D

___________________________________________________________________________

Section Page D

1 Standards / service conditions 1/1

1.1

Standards 1/1

1.2

Service conditions and requirements linked to the environment 1/1

1.2-1 Normal service conditions

1.2-2 Transport and storage requirements

1/1

1/3

___________________________________________________________________________

D/1

D

Standards Contents

Service conditions Part D

___________________________________________________________________________

Section Page

___________________________________________________________________________

D/2

1 Standards / service conditions

1.1

Standards

TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLCs have been developed to conform to the main national and international standards regarding electronic industrial control system products :

• Specific PLC requirements : operational characteristics, immunity, ruggedness, safety, etc.

EN61131-2 (IEC1131-2), CSA 22.2, UL 508

• Merchant navy requirements of principal European bodies :

BV, DNV, GL, LROS, RINA, etc.

• Compliance with European Directives (low voltage, Electromagnetic Compatibility), CE

Marking.

• Electrical and self-extinguishing qualities of insulating materials :

UL 746C, UL 94, etc.

D

1.2

Service conditions and requirements linked to the environment

1.2-1 Normal service conditions

• Operating temperature/Humidity/Altitude

Ambient operating temperature

Relative humidity

Altitude

0°C to +60°C (IEC 1131-2 = +5°C to +55°C)

10% to 95% (without condensation)

0 to 2000 meters

• Supply voltages

Voltage nominal 24VDC 48VDC 100...240VAC 100-120/200-240VAC limit nominal -

19..30VDC 19..60VDC 90...264VAC

90..140/190..264VAC

(1)

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz Frequency

Micro-breaks limit duration

1 ms repetition

1s

Total harmonic distortion -

Residual ripple included

5 %

-

-

1 ms

1s

5 % -

47/63 Hz

1s

10%

-

47/63 Hz

1/2 period

1/2 period

1s

10% i

(1) Possible up to 34 VDC, limited to 1 hour per 24 hours.

With TSX PSY 1610 and TSX PSY 3610 power supplies, and if relay output modules are used, this range is reduced to 21.6V...26.4V

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

D

• Mechanical withstand

- Immunity to vibrations :

Complies with IEC 68-2-6, Fc test.

- Immunity to shocks:

Conforming to standard IEC 68-2-27, Ea test.

• Electrostatic discharge withstand

- Immunity to electrostatic discharges :

Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-2, level 3 (1)

• HF interference withstand

- Immunity to electromagnetic radiation :

Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-3, level 3 (1)

- Immunity to conducted interference induced by RF fields :

Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-6, level 3 (1)

- Immunity to bursts of rapid transients :

Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-4, level 3 (1)

- Immunity to shock waves :

Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-5, level 3 (1)

- Immunity to damped oscillatory waves :

Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-12, level 3 (1)

(1) minimum level in the test conditions laid down in the standards

• LF interference withstand

Conforming to standard IEC 1131-2.

• TSX Premium PLC protective treatment

TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLCs meet the "TC" treatment (1) requirements.

For installing in an industrial production workshop or in an atmosphere corresponding to "TH" treatment (2), TSX Premium PLCs must be installed in at least IP54 protection enclosures as defined by the IEC 664 and NF C 20 040 standards.

TSX/PMX/PCX Premium PLCs offer their own protection index IP20 (3). They can therefore be installed without enclosures in reserved access premises which do not exceed pollution level 2 (control room with neither machines nor dust-producing activity).

(1) "TC" treatment : all-atmosphere treatment.

(2) "TH" treatment : treatment for warm or humid atmospheres.

(3) When a position is not occupied by a module, a TSX RKA 02 protective cover must be placed over the position.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

Standards/ service conditions 1

1.2-2 Transport and storage requirements

Conforming to the IEC 1131-2 requirements

Storage temperature - 25°C to +70°C

Relative humidity 5% to 95% (without condensation)

D

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

D

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

Process and AS-i Contents power supplies Part E

___________________________________________________________________________

Section

1 Presentation

Page

1/1

1/1

E

1.1

General

1-2 24 VDC process power supplies

1.2-1 Catalog

1.2-2 Auxiliary functions

1-3 AS-i power supplies

1.3-1 Catalog

1.4

Physical description

1.4-1 TBX SUP 10 power supply unit

1/7

1/7

1.4-2 TSX SUP 1011/ 1021/ 1051/ A02 power supply modules 1/7

1.4-3 TSX SUP 1101 and TSX SUP A05 power supply unit 1/10

1.4-4 Support plate 1/11

1/2

1/2

1/4

1/6

1/6

2 Installation / Connections

2.1

TBX SUP 10 dimensions/mounting/connections

2.2

Dimensions/mounting of process and AS-i power supplies

2.2-1 TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 / A02 power supply

2.2-2 TSX SUP 1101 / A05 power supplies

2.2-3 Summary of mounting options

2.3

Connections for 24 VDC process power supplies

2.3-1 TSX SUP 1011/1021 power supplies

2.3-2 TSX SUP 1051 power supply

2.3-3 TSX SUP 1101 power supply

2/1

2/1

2/7

2/7

2/8

2/9

2/2

2/2

2/5

2/6

___________________________________________________________________________

E/1

Process and AS-i power supplies

Contents

Part E

E

Section

2.4

Connections for AS-i power supplies

2.4-1 TSX SUP A02 power supply

2.4-2 TSX SUP A05 power supply

2.4-3 General recommendations

Page

2/11

2/11

2/13

2/15

3 Characteristics 3/1

3.1

Electrical characteristics 3/1

3.1-1 Process power supplies : TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1011 3/1

3.1-2 Process power supplies : TSX SUP 1021/1051/1101

3.1-3 AS-i power supplies : TSX SUP A02 /A05

3/2

3/3

3.2

Physical and environmental characteristics 3/5

___________________________________________________________________________

E/2

1 Presentation

1.1

General

A wide range of power supply units and modules are available providing the user with the best possible solution for his requirements :

• TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1 ii

1 process power supply units and modules supply

24 VDC to the peripherals of an application controlled by PLCs (TSX Micro and

Premium). These peripherals include sensors, preactuators, encoders, operator terminals, loop controllers, indicator lamps, pushbuttons, pneumatic cylinders, etc.

The 24 V supply can be provided by a 100/240 V, 50/60 Hz AC supply.

TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1011 power supply modules can also be connected to

125 VDC supply.

• AS-i TSX SUP A02 and A05 process power supply units and modules supply components connected on an AS-i fieldbus with 30 VDC. This power supply is distributed via the same conductors as those used for data exchanges.

The mounting arrangements for these products have been specially designed to meet the specific distance and mounting requirements for TSX Micro and Premium PLCs and

TBX products.

All the products can be mounted :

• on a Telequick AM1-PA mounting plate,

• on an AM1-DP200 / DE200 central DIN rail, with the exception of TSX SUP 1101 and

TSX SUP A05 high power supply units.

E

Supply voltage 100..240VAC or 125VDC

Process power supply

Supply voltage 100...120/200...240 VAC

24VDC / 1A 24VDC / 1A 24VDC / 2A 24VDC / 5A

AS-i bus power supplies

Supply voltage 100...120 or 200...240 VAC

24VDC / 10A

AS-i 30 VDC / 2.4 A AS-i 30 VDC / 5 A & 24 VDC

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

1-2 24 VDC process power supplies

1.2-1 Catalog

Selection table

E

Input characteristics

Nominal voltage

Limit values

Limit frequency

Nominal input current

Output characteristics

Useful power a output voltage

Nominal current

Auxiliary functions

SELV (1)

Paralleling (2)

100...240 VAC or 125 VDC

90...264VAC or 88...156 VDC 85...264VAC or 105...150 VDC

47...63 Hz

0.4A

47...63 Hz or 360...440 Hz

0.4 A

26 W 24 W

24 VDC

1 A

No

No

1.1 A

Yes

Yes, with power optimization (3)

Redundancy (4)

References

No

TSX SUP 10

Yes

TSX SUP 1011

(1) Construction characteristics conforming to standards IEC 950, IEC 1131-2, ensuring the safety of the user at the 24 V output, in terms of isolation between primary and secondary, maximum overvoltage on the output wiring and protection via the grounding circuit.

(2) Option of paralleling 2 power supply outputs of the same type, to provide an output current greater than the maximum authorized by a single supply.

(3) For 2 modules providing a total current of 100 %, each module supplies 50 % of the total. This improves the lifetime of the products.

(4) Option of paralleling 2 power supply outputs of the same type, to provide an output current less than the maximum authorized by a single supply but ensuring availability of the output voltage even if one of the two modules becomes faulty.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

Presentation 1

Catalog (continued)

Selection table (continued)

Input characteristics

Nominal voltage

Limit values

Limit frequency

Nominal input current

Output characteristics

Useful power a output voltage

Nominal current

Auxiliary functions

SELV (1)

Paralleling (2)

Redundancy (4)

References

100...120 VAC or 200...240 VAC

85...132VAC or 170..264 VAC

47...63 Hz or 360...440 Hz

0.8 A 2.4 A

53 W

24VDC

2.2 A

120 W

5 A

5 A

240 W

10 A

Yes

Yes, with power optimization (3)

Yes No

TSX SUP 1021 TSX SUP 1051 TSX SUP 1101

(1) Construction characteristics conforming to standards IEC 950, IEC 1131-2, ensuring the safety of the user at the 24 V output, in terms of isolation between primary and secondary, maximum overvoltage on the output wiring and protection via the grounding circuit.

(2) Option of paralleling 2 power supply outputs of the same type, to provide an output current greater than the maximum authorized by a single supply.

(3) For 2 modules providing a total current of 100 %, each module supplies 50 % of the total. This improves the lifetime of the products.

(4) Option of paralleling 2 power supply outputs of the same type, to provide an output current less than the maximum authorized by a single supply but ensuring availability of the output voltage

1/3

E

E

1.2-2 Auxiliary functions

• Parallel operation with power optimization mode

The aim of paralleling is to use two modules with the same reference to provide an output current greater than the maximum authorized by a single power supply.

The total current is the sum of the currents supplied by all the power supplies.

Power optimization is an internal power supply system used to distribute currents equally between power supplies connected in parallel. The benefit obtained is a significant increase in the service life due to the distribution of power consumed.

- On TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 power supplies

Power optimization mode is obtained by setting the NOR/LSH switch located at the rear of the modules to the LSH position. The support must be dismantled in order to reach this switch. When the orange (LSH) indicator lamp is on, the mode is operational. (See section 2.3-1 for required connections).

The current supplied with two power supplies connected in parallel is limited to :

- 2 A with 2 TSX SUP 1011 power supply modules,

- 4 A with 2 TSX SUP 1021 power supply modules.

Using this mode reduces the precision of the output voltage: 24% ± 5% instead of

24 V ± 3% in normal mode.

The phase imbalance of the powers on load sharing can be a maximum of 25%.

- On TSX SUP 1051 / 1101 power supplies

Power optimization mode does not require a switch on these power supplies. The connections specified in the following sections must be made :

- 2.3-2 for the TSX SUP 1051 power supply module,

- 2.3-3 for the TSX SUP 1101 power supply unit,

The maximum current supplied with two power supplies connected in parallel is limited to :

- 10 A with 2 TSX SUP 1051 power supply modules,

- 20 A with 2 TSX SUP 1101 power supply units.

Using this mode does not affect the precision of the output voltage.

The phase imbalance of the powers on load sharing can be a maximum of 15%.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

Presentation 1

• Redundancy / safety on TSX SUP 1101 / 1021 power supplies

Principle :

To ensure availability of the currents required for the application, even if one of the power supplies becomes faulty.

In this case the two power supplies are connected in parallel, using the connections specified in section 2.3-1.

The power supplies are configured in power optimization mode.

Example : supply 1A with redundancy from the 2 TSX SUP 1011 power supplies.

Discrete inputs 1 and 2 of the PLC indicate the failure of one or other of the power supplies.

SUP

1011 24 V//

1 A

+ 24 V Discrete input 1 Fuse

0 V

E

SUP

1011 24 V//

+ 24 V

0 V

Discrete input 2

Load

Note :

TSX SUP 1051 and 1101 power supplies are not fitted with the diode in series, required for the redundancy function.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/5

E

1-3 AS-i power supplies

Special features :

As data and power are transmitted simultaneously on the same cable, data transmission must be filtered in relation to the power supply. For this reason the AS-i power supply integrates a decoupling filter which supports the maximum direct current provided by the power supply. The power supply gives a standardized impedance in relation to data transmission frequencies.

1.3-1 Catalog

Selection table

Input characteristics

Nominal voltage

Limit values

Limit frequency

Nominal input current

Output characteristics

Useful power a output voltages

Nominal current

Auxiliary functions

SELV safety (2)

Paralleling

Redundancy

References

100...120 VAC or 200...240 VAC

85...132 VAC or 170...264 VAC

47...63 Hz or 360...440 Hz

1.3 A 5 A

72 W

AS-i 30 VDC

2.4 A

230 W

AS-i 30 VDC

5 A (1)

24 VDC

7 A (1)

Yes

No

No

TSX SUP A02 TSX SUP A05

(1) Maximum current for each output, the sum of the powers is limited to 230 W

(2) Construction characteristics conforming to standards IEC 950, IEC 1131-2, ensuring the safety of the user at the 24 V output, in terms of isolation between primary and secondary, maximum overvoltage on the output wiring and protection via the grounding circuit.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/6

Presentation 1

1.4

Physical description

1.4-1 TBX SUP 10 power supply unit

1 Lamp indicating module power-up.

2 Screw terminal block for wiring the power supply voltages.

3 Identification label for the wiring terminals.

4 Module mounting lugs.

1.4-2 TSX SUP 1011/ 1021/ 1051/ A02 power supply modules

• TSX SUP 1011 module

1 Support plate for mounting the supply module directly on an AM1-DE200/

DP200 rail or an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate.

2 Display block comprising :

- A 24V indicator lamp (green) : lit if the internal and output voltages are established and correct.

1

- An LSH indicator lamp (orange) "power optimization mode" : lit if the supply is operating in parallel mode with power optimization.

3 Cover to protect the terminal block

4 Screw terminal block for connection to the :

- AC or DC supply,

- 24VDC output.

4

5 Slots for cable clamp.

5

6 "NOR / LSH" switch on the rear of the module to control the power optimization device.

• NOR position : normal operation without power optimization (default position),

• LSH position : operation with power optimization with power supplies in parallel.

6

2

3

___________________________________________________________________________

1/7

3

4

1

2

E

E

• TSX SUP 1021 / 1051 modules

1 Support plate for mounting the supply module directly on an AM1-DE200/

DP200 rail or an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate.

2 Display block comprising :

- A 24V indicator lamp (green) : lit if the internal and output voltages are correct.

- An LSH "power optimization mode" indicator lamp (orange), only on TSX

SUP 1021 : lit if the supply is operating in parallel mode with power optimization.

3 Cover to protect the terminal block

1

4 Screw terminal block for connection to the :

- AC or DC supply,

- 24VDC output.

5 Slots for cable clamp.

6 110/220 V voltage selector. On delivery, the selector is set to 220.

4

5

7 "NOR / LSH" switch on the rear of the module to control the power optimization device. This switch is only present on the TSX SUP 1021 module

• NOR position : normal operation without power optimization (default position),

• LSH position : operation with power optimization with power supplies in parallel.

6

7

2

3

___________________________________________________________________________

1/8

• TSX SUP A02 module

1 Support plate for mounting the supply module directly on an AM1-DE200/

DP200 rail or an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate.

2 Display block comprising :

- An AS-i indicator lamp (green) : lit if the internal and output voltages are correct.

3 Cover to protect the terminal block

4 Screw terminal block for connection to the :

- AC supply

- AS-i 30 VDC output.

5 Slot for cable clamp.

6 110/220 V voltage selector. On delivery, the selector is set to 220.

Presentation 1

1

2

3

E

4

5

6

___________________________________________________________________________

1/9

1.4-3 TSX SUP 1101 and TSX SUP A05 power supply unit

2

E 7

1

5

7

4

1 Display block comprising an ON indicator lamp (orange) : lit if the power supply is on.

2 Display block comprising :

- a 24V indicator lamp (green) : lit if the 24 VDC output voltage is present and correct,

- an AS-i indicator lamp (green : lit if the AS-i 30 VDC output voltage is present and correct. Indicator lamp present only on the TSX SUP A05 unit.

3 Cover to protect the terminal blocks

4 Screw terminal block for connection to the AC supply

5 Screw terminal block for connection of the 24 VDC and AS-i 30 VDC output voltage to TSX SUP A05

6 Slots for cable clamp

7 Four fixing holes for M6 screws.

3

6

___________________________________________________________________________

1/10

Presentation 1

1.4-4 Support plate

Each TSX SUP 10 i

1 and TSX SUP A02 power supply module comes with a support plate for fixing the power supply : either on an AM1-DE200 or AM1-DP200 rail, or an

AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate.

Each support plate can take : one TSX SUP 1021, TSX SUP 1051 or TSX SUP A02 module, or one or two TSX SUP 1011 modules.

1 Three Ø 5.5 holes for mounting the support plate on a panel or AM1-PA preslotted plate at 140 mm centers (fixing center for TSX 37 PLCs).

2 Four Ø 6.5 holes for mounting the support plate on a panel or AM1-PA preslotted plate at 88.9 mm centers (fixing center for TSX 57 PLCs).

3 Two M4 holes for fixing one or more

TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/A02 power supply modules.

4 Slots for anchoring pins located at the bottom and rear of the module.

1

3

2

2

4

E

1

Notes :

• Each of these power supply modules can also be mounted on a TSX RKY iii rack replacing another module, with the exception of position PS, which must be used by a TSX PSY iii

power supply module supplying power to the rack modules.

• The following operations require the module to be removed from the support plate :

- setting the "NOR/LSH" switch to LSH,

- mounting the plate on a panel or a pre-slotted AM1-PA plate,

- mounting the module on a TSX RKY iii

rack.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/11

E

___________________________________________________________________________

1/12

2 Installation / Connections

2.1

TBX SUP 10 dimensions/mounting/connections

• Dimensions / mounting

74 100

113

The TBX SUP 10 power supply unit should be mounted vertically to ensure optimal air flow within the unit.

It can be mounted on a panel, on an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate or AM1-DE200 /

DP200 rail.

• Connections

L

AC/DC

IN N

24VDC

OUT +

E

Fu (1)

+ or

Note

Primary : if the module is supplied with 100/240 V c , the phase and the neutral must be respected when wiring. Conversely, if the module is supplied with 125 V a  , it is not necessary to respect the polarities.

Secondary : the - 0 V terminal must be connected to the ground at the output of the power supply module.

!

To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.

(1) External protection fuse on phase : 1A time-delayed 250 V for a single power supply.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

E

2.2

Dimensions/mounting of process and AS-i power supplies

2.2-1 TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 / A02 power supply

TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/A02 power supply modules Mounting support

16 8.72

SUP 1011 SUP 1021/1051/ A02

56

4

120.2

Dimensions in millimeters

36.5

73

17.72

20

40

73.43

TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/A02 power supply modules can be mounted in the following ways :

Mounting on AM1-DE200 or AM1-DP200 rail or AM1-PA plate

Each power supply module comes mounted on a support for this type of mounting.

(1) 147.2 mm (AM1-DE200)

139.7 mm (AM1-DP200)

Mounting on an AM1-D iiii rail

1 Check that the module is mounted on the support

2 Mount the module + support on the rail

147.2 (1)

136.2 (2)

2/2

(2) 136.7 mm (AM1-PA)

Mounting on an AM1-PA plate

1 Dismantle the module from the support

2 Mount the support on the

AM1-PA plate

3 Mount the module on the

Installation / Connections 2

Mounting the module on the support

Each power supply module has an integral support for mounting it directly on a DIN rail.

The support can take 1 or 2 TSX SUP 1011 power supply modules or 1 TSX SUP 1021/

1051/A02 power supply module.

1 Fix the module pins in the slots on the lower part of the support.

2 Tilt the module until it touches the support.

3 Tighten the screw on the upper part of the module to secure it to the support.

1 TSX SUP 1011 module

2 TSX SUP 1011 modules

1 TSX SUP 1021/1051/ A02 module

E

___________________________________________________________________________

2/3

E

Mounting on TSX RKY ii rack

TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/A02 power supply modules can be mounted in any of the positions on a TSX RKY

ii

rack with the exception of position PS which is reserved for the rack power supply module. If this is the case, the support is not used and must be removed.

Support TSX SUP 10.1/A02

1

2

Support

4

TSX SUP 10.1/A02

5

3

TSX RKY

ii

TSX SUP

10.1/A02

TSX RKY

ii

TSX SUP

10.1/A02

Note:

The TSX PSY

iii

rack power supply module must be in position PS in order to supply power to the rack modules.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/4

Installation / Connections 2

2.2-2 TSX SUP 1101 / A05 power supplies

TSX SUP 1101 and TSX SUP A05 power supply units can be mounted on a panel, an

AM1 - PA plate or a DIN rail.

• Mounting on a panel : drilling plan (dimensions in millimeters)

4 fixing holes (1)

E

8.75

207.3

224.8

8.75

(1) The diameter of the fixing holes must be large enough to take M6 screws.

• Mounting on a Telequick AM1-PA pre-slotted plate (dimensions in millimeters)

Fix the power supply unit using four M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-EA6 clip nuts

AF1-EA6

135

16 8.75

207.3

224.8

8.75

• Mounting on a DIN rail, width 35 mm (dimensions in millimeters)

Fix the power supply unit using four M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-CF56 1/4 turn sliding nuts

AF1-CF56 AM1-ED

(1) 207.3 mm

___________________________________________________________________________

2/5

2.2-3 Summary of mounting options

E

Power supply references

Telequick

AM1-PA plate

AM1-DE200/DP200 central DIN rail

TBX SUP TSX SUP TSX SUP TSX SUP TSX SUP TSX SUP TSX SUP

10 1011 1021 1051 1101 A02 A05 i i i i i i i i i i i i

AM1-ED DIN rail

140 mm center

(TSX 37 PLC)

AM1-ED DIN rail

88.9 mm center

(TSX 57 PLC)

TSX RKY ii

TSX 57 rack i i i i i i i i i i i i i i

___________________________________________________________________________

2/6

Installation / Connections 2

2.3

Connections for 24 VDC process power supplies

2.3-1 TSX SUP 1011/1021 power supplies

Normal connection

Module 1

Paralleling

+ 24 V

0 V

+

24 V 1 A

+ 24 V

0 V

Fu Fu

L

N

L

N

+ 24 V

– 0 V

E

Module 2

Fu = External protection fuse on phase

(Fu) : 4A time-delayed 250 V.

(1) 100...240VAC on TSX SUP 1011

100...120 / 200..240VAC on TSX SUP 1021

(2) 125 VDC, only on TSX SUP 1011

+ 24 V

0 V

L

N

Fu

Connection rules

Primary : if the module is supplied with 100/240 V c , it is necessary to respect the phase and the neutral when wiring. Conversely, if the module is supplied with 125 V a , it is not necessary to respect the polarities.

!

To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.

The power supply terminal block is protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.

In order to ensure 24 V SELV isolation, use wires with :

• An operating voltage

600 VAC and a cross-section of 1.5 mm 2 for connecting to the

AC supply,

• An operating voltage

300 VAC and a cross-section of 2.5 mm 2 for 24 V outputs and the ground.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/7

E

2.3-2 TSX SUP 1051 power supply

Normal connection

Module 1

Lsh

Paralleling

Lsh

+ 24 V + 24 V

0 V

+ 24 V

– 0 V 0 V

Fu

L

N

L

N

Fu = External protection fuse on phase

(Fu) : 4A time-delayed 250 V.

Module 2

Lsh

+ 24 V

0 V

L

N

Fu

Fu

+ 24 V

– 0 V

Connection rules

Primary : respect the phase and the neutral when wiring.

!

To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.

The power supply terminal block is protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.

In order to ensure 24 V SELV isolation, use wires with :

• An operating voltage

600 VAC and a cross-section of 1.5 mm 2 for connecting to the

AC supply,

• An operating voltage

300 VAC and a cross-section of 2.5 mm 2 for 24 V outputs and the ground.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/8

Installation / Connections 2

2.3-3 TSX SUP 1101 power supply

Normal connection input terminal block output terminal block

Sel

Sel

L

N

Fu (2)

Sel

Sel

L

N

Fu (2)

Lsh

+ 24 V

+ 24 V

0 V

0 V

+ 24 V

– 0 V

Connection to a c 200..240 V supply

Paralleling input terminal blocks

Module 1

Sel

Sel

(1)

L

N

Fu (2)

Connection to a c 100..120 V supply

Module 1

Connection to a a 24V output output terminal blocks

Lsh

+ 24 V

+ 24 V

0 V

0 V

E

Module 2

Sel

Sel

(1)

L

N

Fu (2)

Module 2

Lsh

+ 24 V

+ 24 V

0 V

0 V

+ 24 V

– 0 V

(1) Connection to be performed if the power supply is provided by c 100...120 V

(2) External protection fuse on phase (Fu) : 6.3A time-delayed 250 V.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/9

E

Connection rules

Primary : respect the phase and the neutral when wiring.

!

To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.

The power supply terminal block is protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.

Secondary :

In order to ensure 24 V SELV isolation, use wires with :

• An operating voltage

300 VAC and a cross-section of 1.5 mm 2 or 2.5 mm 2 for connecting to the AC supply,

• An operating voltage

300 VAC and a cross-section of 2.5 mm 2 for 24 V outputs and the ground.

• Wire the two 24V terminals in parallel or share the load on the two 24V outputs if the total current supplied is greater than 5A.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/10

Installation / Connections 2

2.4

Connections for AS-i power supplies

2.4-1 TSX SUP A02 power supply

Shd

AS-i +

AS-i

OUT

(1)

+

30 VDC AS-i/2.4 A

L

N

IN

Fu

100...120/200...240 VAC

(1) Shielded AS-i cable screen for atmospheres subject to interference

Fu = External protection fuse on phase (Fu) : 4A time-delayed 250 V.

E

Connection diagram

The TSX SUP A02 power supply module is used to supply power to the AS-i bus and the slaves connected to it (30 VDC/2.4A output).

TSX 57

TSX SUP A02

TSX SAY 100

AS-i master

AS-i bus

30 VDC AS-i bus

100...120/

200...240 VAC

___________________________________________________________________________

2/11

E

Connection rules

Primary : respect the phase and the neutral when wiring.

!

To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.

The power supply terminal block is protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.

In order to ensure 24 V SELV isolation, use wires with :

• An operating voltage

600 VAC and a cross-section of 1.5 mm 2 for connecting to the

AC supply,

• An operating voltage

300 VAC and a cross-section of 2.5 mm 2 for 24 V outputs and the ground.

A shielded cable is only required for the AS-i bus if the installation is subject to high EMC

(Electromagnetic Compatibility) interference.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/12

Installation / Connections 2

2.4-2 TSX SUP A05 power supply input terminal block output terminal block

Sel

Sel

L

N

Fu (2)

Sel

Sel

L

N

(1)

Fu (2)

+ 24 V

+ 24 V

0 V

0 V

Shd

AS-i +

AS-i –

(3)

+

24 VDC/7 A

+

30 V AS-i/5 A

Connection to a c

200..240 V supply

Connection to a c

100..120 V supply

Connection to a a 24V output and a

30 V AS-i

(1) Connection to be performed if the power supply is provided by c

100...120 V

(2) External protection fuse on phase (Fu) : 6.3A time-delayed 250 V.

(3) Shielded AS-i cable screen for atmospheres subject to interference

Connection diagram

The TSX SUP A05 power supply unit is used to supply power to the AS-i bus and the slaves connected to it (30 V/5A output). It also has an auxiliary power supply (24 VDC/7A) for sensors /actuators which are high current consumers; a black AS-i ribbon cable is used for this purpose.

TSX 57

E

TSX SUP A05

30 VDC

24 VDC

100...120/

200...240 VAC

TSX SAY 100

AS-i master

AS-i bus

AS-i bus

___________________________________________________________________________

2/13

E

Connection rules

Primary : respect the phase and the neutral when wiring.

!

To ensure the safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.

The " c power supply" and " a 24V and AS-i 30 VDC output voltage" terminal blocks are protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.

In order to ensure 24 V SELV isolation, use wires with :

• An operating voltage

300 VAC and a cross-section of 1.5 mm 2 or 2.5 mm 2 for connecting to the AC supply,

• An operating voltage

300 VAC and a cross-section of 2.5 mm 2 for 24V outputs and the ground.

• Wire the two 24V terminals in parallel or share the load on the two 24V outputs if the total current supplied is greater than 5A.

A shielded cable is only required for the AS-i bus if the installation is subject to high EMC

(Electromagnetic Compatibility) interference.

As this power supply can supply a very large current, its positioning on the bus is very important. If the power supply if positioned at one end of the bus, it provides its nominal current (for example 5A) for the whole bus, and the voltage drop at the end of the bus is thus proportional to this 5A. If it is positioned halfway along the bus, the voltage drop at the end of the bus is only proportional to 2.5A, if consumption on each of the sections of the bus is equal.

2.5 A

AS-i power supply

2.5 A

If none of the slaves use a large amount of energy, it is preferable to position the power supply in the center of the installation. Conversely, if the installation has one or more slaves which use a large amount of energy, it is advisable to position the power supply near to these slaves.

Note : If actuators which use a large amount of energy are present (contactors, solenoid valve coils, etc), the TSX SUP A05 power supply can provide the auxiliary 24 VDC, isolated from the AS-i line.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/14

Installation / Connections 2

2.4-3 General recommendations

When the AS-i yellow cable is installed, it must be placed in a cable ducting which is separate from the power cable ducting. It is also advisable to lay it flat and not to twist it in order to optimize the symmetry between the two wires of the AS-i cable. The installation of the AS-i cable in a plan connected to the electrical potential of the machine (for example the frame), meets the requirements of the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) directive.

The end of the cable, or ends for a star connection, must be protected by :

• connecting them to a tap link tee,

• not allowing them to exit the last connection point.

Important

The energy on the AS-i bus must be properly distributed so that each product on the bus is supplied with sufficient voltage to ensure correct operation. To do this, the following rules must be respected :

- Rule 1

Select the power supply rating suitable for the total consumption of the AS-i segment.

The ratings available are 2.4 A (TSX SUP A02) and 5 A (TSX SUP A05). A rating of

2.4 A is usually sufficient for an average consumption of 65 mA per slave for a segment comprising a maximum of 31 slaves.

- Rule 2

To minimize voltage drops and reduce the cost of the cable, it is necessary to determine the optimum position for the power supply on the bus, as well as the minimum cross-section suitable for distributing the power.

The voltage drop should not exceed 3V between the master and the last slave on the bus. To this end, the table below gives the information required to select the crosssection of the AS-i cable.

AS-i cable cross-section

Linear resistance

Voltage drop for

1 A on 100 meters

0.75 mm 2

52 m

/ meter

5.2 V

1.5 mm 2

27 m

/ meter

2.7 V

2.5 mm 2

16 m

/ meter

1.6 V

The 1.5 mm 2 cable is suitable for the majority of applications, this is the AS-i bus standard model (cable offered in the SCHNEIDER catalog). Cables with a smaller cross-section may be used if the sensors use very little energy.

Note :

The maximum length without a repeater for all the segments of the AS-i bus is 100 meters. The length of cable connecting a slave to a passive splitter block must be taken into account.

E

___________________________________________________________________________

2/15

E

___________________________________________________________________________

2/16

3 Characteristics

3.1

Electrical characteristics

3.1-1 Process power supplies : TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1011

Process power supplies TBX SUP 10

24 V / 1A

TSX SUP 1011

24V / 1A

Primary

Nominal input voltage

Input limit voltage

V

V

Line frequency H z

Nominal input current (U = 100V) A

Max inrush current at 100 V A

(1)

It max on activation (1) at 240 V A at 100 V A s at 240 V A s c 100... 240 a

125 c

90...264

a 88...156

47... 63

0.4

3

30

0.03

0.07

c 100... 240 a

125 c

85...264

a 105...150

47...63/360...440

0.4

37

75

0.034

0.067

I 2 t max on activation (1)

Power factor

Harmonic 3

Full load efficiency

Secondary

Useful power (2) at 100 V A 2 s at 240 V A

Nominal output current (2)

2

%

W

A s

2

2

0.6

10% ( ϕ

= 0° and 180°)

> 75

24

1

0.63

2.6

0.6

10% ( ϕ

= 0° and 180°)

> 75

26 (30)

1.1

Output voltage / specified at 25°C

Residual ripple (peak to peak)

Max HF noise (peak to peak)

Permitted duration of AC supply micro-break (3)

Protection Short-circuits against and overloads

V mV mV ms

24 ± 5 % 24 ± 3 %

240

240

150

240

10 in c

1 in a

10 in c

1 in a continuous fallback to 0 and automatic reautomatic reactivation activation when error disappears

Paralleling

Overvoltages V peak limiting U > 36 no no

8 peak limiting U > 36 yes with power optimization yes Serial connection

Dissipated power W 9

(1) Values on initial activation, at 25°C. These elements should be taken into account when starting up for sizing protection devices.

(2) Useful power and output current at an ambient temperature of 60°C. Value between () = useful power in a ventilated enclosure or within a temperature range of 0...+40°C.

3/1

E

E

3.1-2 Process power supplies : TSX SUP 1021/1051/1101

Process power supplies TSX SUP 1021

24 V / 2A

TSX SUP 1051

24 V / 5A

TSX SUP 1101

24 V / 10A

Primary

Nominal input voltage

Input limit voltage

Line frequency

Nominal input current (U=100V)

Max inrush current

(1)

It max on activation (1) at 100 V at 240 V

V

V

Hz

A

A

A at 100 V As at 240 V As

I 2 t max on activation (1)

Power factor

Harmonic 3

Full load efficiency

Secondary

Useful power (2)

Nominal output current (2) A at 100 V A 2 s at 240 V A 2 s

%

W

2.2

0.8

< 30

< 30

0.06

0.03

4

4

0.6

> 75

53(60)

5 c

100...120/200...240

c

85...132/170...264

47...63 / 360...440

2.4

51

51

0.17

0.17

8.6

8.6

0.52

10% ( ϕ

= 0° and 180°)

120

10

> 80

5

75

51

0.17

0.17

8.5

8.5

0.5

240

Output voltage (0°C - 60°C) V 24 ± 3 % 24 ± 1 %

Residual ripple (peak to peak)

Max HF noise (peak to peak) mV mV

150

240

200

Permitted duration of AC supply m s micro-break (3)

>

Start time on resistive load s < 1

Protection Short-circuits against and overloads fallback to 0 and automatic reactivation when error disappears

Paralleling

Internal overvoltages V peak limiting U > 36

10 current limit peak limiting U > 32 yes, with power optimization

Serial connection yes

Dissipated power W 18 30 60

(1) Values on initial activation, at 25°C. These elements should be taken into account when starting up for sizing protection devices.

(2) Useful power and output current at an ambient temperature of 60°C. Value between () = useful power in a ventilated enclosure or within a temperature range of 0...+40°C.

3/2

Characteristics 3

3.1-3 AS-i power supplies : TSX SUP A02 /A05

AS-i power supplies TSX SUP A02

30V AS-i / 2.4A

Primary

Nominal input voltage

Input limit voltage

Line frequency

V c

100...120/200...240

V c

85...132/170...264

Hz 47...63/360...440

Nominal input current (U = 100V)

Max inrush current at 100 V

A

A

1.3

30

(1)

It max on activation (1) at 240 V A at 100 V As at 240 V As

30

0.06

0.03

TSX SUP A05

24V / 7A & 30V AS-i/5A c

100...120/200...240

c

85...132/170...264

47...63/360...440

5

50

50

0.17

0.17

I 2 t max on activation (1)

Power factor

Harmonic 3

Full load efficiency

Secondary

Useful peak power

Nominal peak current at 100 V A 2 s at 240 V A 2

%

W

AS-i 30 V output A

24V output A s

4

4

0.6

10% ( ϕ

= 0° and 180°)

> 75

72 (84)

2.4 (2.8) (2)

(2)

8.5

8.5

0.51

10% ( ϕ

= 0° and 180°)

> 80

230

5

7

(3)

(3) (4)

(3) (4)

Output voltage V

Global variation (-10°C to + 60°C) V

30 (AS-i)

29.5 to 31.6

24

±3%

30 (AS-i)

29.5 to 31.6

Ripple (from 10 to 500 kHz)

Ripple (from 0 to 10 kHz)

Start time on resistive load

Permitted duration of AC supply micro-break (5)

Protection Short-circuits against and overloads mV mV s ms

50

300

< 2 (with C = 15000 µF)

10

200

240

50

300

< 2 (with C = 15000 µF)

10

Overvoltages

Dissipated power

V

W fallback to 0 and automatic reactivation when error disappears peak limiting U > 36

24 current limit on each output peak limiting U > 36

60

(1) Values on initial activation, at 25°C. These elements should be taken into account when starting up for sizing protection devices.

(2) Useful power and output current at an ambient temperature of 60°C. Value between () = transitory useful power.

(3) Useful power and output current for a maximum ambient temperature of 55°C, if product index II = 01. (60°C if product index II > 01).

(4) See the distribution diagram for current on each output on the next page.

3/3

E

E

Diagram of currents available on AS-i 30 V and 24V outputs of the TSX SUP A05 power supply unit

I OUT 24 VDC (A)

The maximum power delivered by the power supply is 230 W. If the consumption is 5 A on the AS-i 30 V, the possible flow on the

24 V output is then only 3 A (see diagram opposite).

4

3

2

1

7

6

5

5,8

4,5

3A

I OUT

AS-i (A)

1 2 3 4 5

___________________________________________________________________________

3/4

Characteristics 3

3.2

Physical and environmental characteristics

Process and AS-i power supply modules / units

Connection to screw terminals

TBX SUP 10 TSX SUP 1011 / 1021

TSX SUP 1051 / 1101

TSX SUP A02/A05

1 terminal per output 1011/1021/1051/A02: 1 terminal/output

1101: 2 terminals/output

A05: 2 terminals/output (24 VDC)

1 x 2.5

1 terminal/output (AS-i 30 VDC)

2x1.5 with cable end or 1 x 2.5

Max. capacity / terminal mm 2

Temperatures :

Storage

Operation

° C

° C

Relative humidity

Cooling

User safety

%

%

-25 to +70

+5 to +55

_

-25 to +70

0 to +60 (TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051/1101)

-10 to + 60 (TSX SUP A02/A05) (1)

5-95

By natural convection

SELV (EN 60950 and IEC1131-2)

Dielectric strength :

Primary / secondary V rms

Primary / ground V rms

Secondary / Ground V rms

Insulation resistance:

Primary / secondary M

Primary / ground M

Leakage current

Electrostatic discharge immunity

Fast electrical transients

Electromagnetic field influence

Electromagnetic interference rejection

50/60Hz- 1min

1500

1500

500

100

100

I

3.5 mA (EN 60950)

6 KV per contact / 8 KV in the air

(conforms to IEC 1000-4-2)

2 KV (serial mode and common mode on input and output)

10 V/m (80 MHz to 1 GHz)

3500

2200

500

(conforms to FCC 15-A and EN 55022 class A)

Test conditions : U and I nominal, resistive load, cables: 1 meter horizontal, 0.8 meter vertical

Shock wave

Vibrations (2)

Degree of protection

MTBF

Service life at 40°C at 50°C

H

H

Input : 4 kV MC, 2 KV MS Outputs : 2 kV MF, 0.5 kV MS

(conforms to IEC 1000-4-5)

1 mm 3 Hz to 13.2 Hz 1 g 57 Hz to 150 Hz (2g TSX SUP A02/A05)

(conforms to IEC 68-2-6, FC test)

IP 20.5

IP 20.5, terminal block IP 21.5

100 000

30 000 (at nominal voltage and at 80% of the nominal power)

(1) -10°C to + 55°C for the TSX SUP A05 power supply unit with product index II = 01

-10°C to + 60°C for the TSX SUP A05 power supply unit with product index II > 01

(2) conforms to IEC 68-2-6, FC test with module or unit mounted on plate or panel

___________________________________________________________________________

3/5

E

E

___________________________________________________________________________

3/6

Index

Symbols

24 VDC pvocess power supplies

Paralleling mode

Power optimization

Redundancy / Safety

Support plate

TBX SUP 10

TSX SUP 1011

TSX SUP 1021 / 1051

TSX SUP 1101

A

Addressing discrete I/O

A 8/1

Addressing discrete I/O channels

B1 1/13

Addressing racks

A 2/8

Alarm relay management

Alarm relay on power supply

Altitude

Ambient temperature

Application memory

Application-specific channels

AS-i power supplies

A 9/11

A 4/5

D 1/1

D 1/1

A 8/12

A 3/31

TSX SUP A02

TSX SUP A05

AUX terminal port

E 1/9

E 1/10

A 3/16

E 1/2

E 1/4

E 1/4

E 1/5

E 1/11

E 1/7

E 1/7

E 1/8

E 1/10

B

Blocking faults

C 3/2

Built-in protection

Bus X extension

B1 2/10

cables

A 2/4, A 2/6, A 2/13

Bus X remote rackmaster module :

TSX REY 200

A 5/1

Configuring the module

Connections

Diagnostics

Installing the module

Maximum distances

A 5/8

A 5/12

A 5/14

A 5/5

A 5/9

C

Characteristics

TBX SUP 10

TSX SUP 1011

TSX SUP 1021/1051/1101

TSX SUP A02 /A05

Characteristics of discrete I/O modules

TSX DEY 08D2/16D2

E 3/1

E 3/1

E 3/2

E 3/3

B1 4/1

B1 4/1

TSX DEY 16A2

B1 4/2

TSX DEY 16A2/16A3/16A4/16A5

B1 4/3

TSX DEY 16D3

B1 4/1

TSX DEY 16FK

B1 4/4, B1 4/14,

TSX DEY 32D2K/TSX DEY 64D2K B1 4/5

TSX DEY 32D3K

TSX DMY 28FK

TSX DMY 28RFK

TSX DSY 08R4D

TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5

TSX DSY 08R5A

TSX DSY 08S5

B1 4/5

B1 4/14

B1 4/14

B1 4/10

B1 4/9

B1 4/11

B1 4/12

TSX DSY 16S4

TSX DSY 16S5

B1 4/12

B1 4/12

TSX DSY 32T2K/TSX DSY 64T2K B1 4/13

Characteristics of fan modules

Checking discrete I/O connections

Inputs

Outputs

Cold start

Compatibility of sensors v inputs and preactuator

A 10/7

C 2/1

C 2/1

C 2/1

A 9/2

B1 3/5

Compatibility preactuator/discrete outputs

Connections

TBX SUP 10

TSX SUP 1011/1021

TSX SUP 1051

TSX SUP 1101

TSX SUP A02

TSX SUP A05

Connection of TSX PSY iiii power

B1 3/5

E 2/1

E 2/7

E 2/8

E 2/9

E 2/11

E 2/13

supply modules

A 7/2, A 7/4, A 7/6, A 7/7

Control events

A 8/10

Cyclic execution

A 8/3

B

___________________________________________________________________________

P/1

P

D

Diagnostics C 3/3

Dimensions

TBX SUP 10 E 2/1

TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 / A02 E 2/2

TSX SUP 1101 / A05 E 2/5

Dimensions of fan modules A 10/3

Discrete I/O connections B1 5/1

Discrete I/O display and

diagnostics B1 3/10

Discrete I/O module connections B1 5/4

TSX DEY 08D2 B1 5/5

TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 /

16A5 B1 5/7, B1 5/8

TSX DEY 16D2 B1 5/5

TSX DEY 16D3 B1 5/6

TSX DEY 16FK B1 5/10

TSX DEY 32D2K B1 5/12, B1 5/15

TSX DEY 32D3K B1 5/15

TSX DEY 64D2K B1 5/13

TSX DMY 28FK B1 5/30

TSX DMY 28RFK B1 5/30

TSX DSY 08R5 B1 5/20

TSX DSY 08R5A / 08R4D B1 5/21

TSX DSY 08S5 / 16S5 / 16S4 B1 5/23

TSX DSY 08T2/08T22 B1 5/17

TSX DSY 08T31 B1 5/18

TSX DSY 16R5 B1 5/20

TSX DSY 16T2 B1 5/17

TSX DSY 16T3 B1 5/18

TSX DSY 32T2K / 64T2K B1 5/26

Discrete I/O modules B1 1/1

Display of module status C 1/2

Analog modules C 1/3

Application-specific modules C 1/3

Discrete I/O modules C 1/2

Power supply modules C 1/7

Display of PLC status C 1/1

ERR indicator lamp C 1/1

I/O indicator lamp C 1/1

RUN indicator lamp C 1/1

TER indicator lamp C 1/1

Display of TSX PSY

iiii

power supplies A 4/7

E

Event management B1 2/5, B1 2/6

Event-triggered tasks A 8/9

Extendable racks A 2/1, A 2/2

F

Fan module connections A 10/6

Fan modules A 10/1

FAST task A 8/8

Fitting/removing

PCMCIA memory extension card A 6/21

RAM memory backup battery A 6/18

Fixing racks A 6/3

Fuse protection B1 2/10

G

General wiring rules for discrete I/O B1 3/2

Ground connections A 7/1

Grounding modules A 7/1

Grounding racks A 7/1

I

I/O profile A 3/32

Initial power-up C 2/2

Module states C 2/4

PLC status C 2/2

Inserting and removing discrete I/O

modules B1 1/10

Inserting the PCMCIA memory card A 6/21

Inserting TSX PSY iiii

power supplies A 4/8

Installation

Power supply A 2/11

Processors A 2/12

Installation rules A 6/1

Installing a PCX 57 processor A 6/7

Installing discrete I/O modules B1 1/10

Installing the battery on a PCMCIA

memory card A 6/23

Installing the internal RAM memory

back up battery A 6/18

Installing TSX PSY iiii

power

supplies A 4/8

P

___________________________________________________________________________

P/2

Index

Interlocking circuit for power supply

Internal RAM

Internal RAM memory backup battery

L

A 7/11

A 3/18

A 4/6

Labeling discrete I/O modules

Latching

Line terminator

Loading a "backup"

B1 1/11

B1 2/4

A 2/5, A 2/7, A 2/15

A 8/15

Loading the operating system (OS)

A 9/11

M

Marking module positions

Marking racks

MAST master task

Micro-breaks

Module addresses

A 2/17

A 2/18

A 8/8

D 1/1

A 2/10

Module diagnostics

Module states

Initial state

Module disconnected

Module failure

Module self-tests

Module used

Monitoring preactuator voltage

Monitoring presence of the terminal block

B1 2/8

C 2/4

C 2/5

C 2/5

C 2/5

C 2/5

C 2/5

B1 2/9

B1 2/9

Monitoring sensor voltage

B1 2/9

Monitoring short-circuit and overload B1 2/9

Monitoring tasks

Mounting

A 8/9

TSX SUP 10

E 2/1

TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 / A02

E 2/2

TSX SUP 1101 / A05

E 2/5

Mounting fan modules

A 10/4

Mounting modules

Mounting racks

A 6/5, A 6/7

A 6/3

Mounting screw terminal blocks A 6/5, A 6/7

Multitask application structure

A 8/7

N

Non-blocking faults

Linked to program execution

Linked to the I/O

O

Output fallback

P

C 3/1

C 3/2

C 3/1

B1 2/2

PCMCIA memory extension cards

A 3/19

PCX 57 dimensions

A 6/9

PCX 57 processor

Dimensions

Mounting

Precautions to be taken during installation

A 6/9

A 6/7

A 6/9

Preliminary operations prior to installation

PCX 57 processors

Display

General characteristics

A 6/10

A 3/9

A 3/14

A 3/27

Mounting / Installation

Physical description

Periodic execution

PLC states

PLC error

PLC not configured

PLC running

A 3/12

A 3/11

A 8/5

C 2/2

C 2/3

C 2/3

C 2/3

PLC self-tests

PLC software fault or HALT

PLC stopped

PLC station

Positioning the racks

Power consumption

Power supply interlocking

Power supply RESET button

Process diagnostics

Process power supply mounting

C 2/3

C 2/3

C 2/3

A 2/4, A 2/6

A 6/1

A 4/13

A 7/11

A 4/7

B1 2/8

TBX SUP 10

E 2/1

TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 / A02

E 2/2

TSX SUP 1101 / A05

E 2/5

B

___________________________________________________________________________

P/3

P

Processing after

Action on the power supply RESET

button A 9/7

Action on the processor RESET

button A 9/7

Insertion/removal of a PCMCIA

memory card A 9/6

Processor faults C 3/4

Processor RESET button A 3/22

Processors A 3/1, C 3/1

Programmable input filtering B1 2/3

Protection of outputs B1 2/1

Protection of relay output contacts B1 2/11

R

Rack dimensions A 6/2

RAM memory backup battery A 6/18

Reactivating outputs B1 2/1

Realtime clock A 3/23

Recommendations for use on

discrete I/O B1 3/1

Relative humidity D 1/1

Retrieving from a "backup" A 8/15

RUN/STOP of the PLC A 9/1

S

Selecting a power supply module A 4/13

Service conditions D 1/1

Sharing the I/O B1 2/2

Single task application structure A 8/3

Standard racks A 2/1, A 2/2

Standards D 1/1

System bits C 3/5

System words C 3/10

T

TELEFAST 2 B1 6/1

TER terminal port A 3/16

Terminal port A 3/16

Troubleshooting C 3/1

TSX / PMX 57 processors A 3/2

Display A 3/8

General characteristics A 3/25

Installation / mounting A 3/6

Physical description A 3/5

TSX PAY safety modules B2 1/1

Characteristics B2 5/1

Connections B2 3/1

Diagnostics B2 4/3

Display B2 4/1

Fault processing B2 2/6

Language interfaces B2 4/2

Maintenance table B2 4/4

Operating modes B2 2/2, B2 2/4

Standards B2 5/5

User functions B2 2/1

Wiring recommendations B2 6/1

TSX Premium performance A 8/16

TSX PSY iiii

power supplies A 4/1

TSX PSY iiii power supply

characteristics A 4/9

TSX PSY power supply

catalogue A 4/3, A 4/4

TSX RKA 02 protective cover A 2/17

TSX RKY

iii

racks A 2/1

U

User memory structure A 8/12

Using negative logic B1 3/8

W

Warm restart A 9/4

P

___________________________________________________________________________

P/4

VOLUME 2

Counting : TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules

Installation,

Counting and

Motion Control

Axis Control : TSX CAY 21 / 22 / 33 / 41 /42 modules

Stepper Motor Control : TSX CFY 11 / 21 modules

A

B

C

D

VOLUME 3

Installation

Communication,

Bus and Network

Interfaces

VOLUME 4

Installation

Analog,

Weighing

VOLUME 1

Installation

Processors and

Discrete I/O

VOLUME 2

Index

P

___________________________________________________________________________

General safety advice for users

____________________________________________________________________________

1 General

This manual is intended for personnel technically qualified to install, operate and maintain the products which are described herein. It contains all the necessary information for correct use of the products. However, for advanced use of our products please contact your nearest sales office for additional information.

The contents of this manual are not contractual and cannot under any circumstance extend or restrict contract warranty clauses.

2 Qualification of personnel

Only qualified personnel are authorized to install, operate or maintain the products. Any work performed by unqualified personnel or non-observance of the safety instructions in this document or attached to the equipment may risk the safety of personnel and/or cause irreparable damage to equipment. The following personnel may be regarded as being "Qualified" :

• those involved with application design. Design office personnel familiar with control system safety concepts (for example, design engineers, etc),

• those involved with equipment installation. Individuals who are familiar with the installation, connection and startup of control system equipment (for example installers or wiring technicians working during the installation phase, technicians setting up the equipment, etc),

• those involved with operation. Personnel trained to operate and manage control system equipment (for example, operators, etc),

• those performing preventive or corrective maintenance. Personnel who are trained and experienced in the adjustment and repair of control system equipment (for example, installation engineers, after sales service engineers, etc).

3 Warnings

Warnings serve to prevent specific risks encountered by personnel and/or equipment. They are indicated in the documentation and on the products by different warning symbols, according to the severity of the risk :

Danger or Caution

Indicates that not following instructions or ignoring the warning may cause serious personal injury, death and/or serious damage to equipment.

Warning or Important or

!

Indicates that not following a specific instruction may lead to minor injury and/or damage to equipment.

Note or Comment

Highlights important information relating to the product, its operation or its accompanying documentation.

___________________________________________________________________________

1

General safety advice for users

___________________________________________________________________________

4 Conformity of use

The products described in this manual conform to the European Directives (*) to which they are subject (CE marking). However, they can only be used correctly in the context of the applications for which they are intended (described in the various documents) and when connected to approved third party products.

As a general rule, if all handling, transport and storage specifications are observed, and all instructions for installation, operation and maintenance are followed, the products will be used correctly, with no danger to personnel or equipment.

(*) EMC and LV Directives, concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage.

5 Installing and setting up equipment

It is important to observe the following rules when installing and starting up equipment. In addition, if the installation includes digital links, it is essential to follow the basic wiring rules given in the manual

"Electromagnetic Compatibility of industrial Networks and Fielbuses", reference TSX DG KBLE, or in manual TSX DR NET, part C.

• safety instructions must be followed meticulously. These instructions are in the documentation or on the equipment being installed and set up.

• the type of equipment defines the way in which it should be installed :

- a flush-mountable device (for example, an operator terminal or a cell controller) must be flushmounted,

- a device which is to be built in (for example, PLC) must be placed in a cabinet or enclosure,

- the casing of a laptop or portable device (for example, a programming terminal or a notebook) must remain closed,

• if the device is permanently connected,

- the upstream installation must conform to standard IEC 1131-2 overvoltage category 2,

- in addition, its electrical installation must include a device to isolate it from the power supply and a circuit-breaker to protect it against overcurrents and isolation faults. If this is not the case, the power socket must be grounded and be easily accessed. In all cases, the device must be connected to the protective mechanical ground PG using green/yellow wires

(NFC 15 100 - IEC 60 364-5-51) .

• low voltage circuits (even though they are low voltage) must be connected to the protective ground so that dangerous voltages can be detected.

• before a device is powered up, its nominal voltage must be checked to ensure that it has been adjusted to conform with the supply voltage.

• if the device is supplied with 24 or 48 VDC, the low voltage circuits must be protected. Only use power supplies which conform to the standards currently in force.

• check that the supply voltages remain within the tolerance ranges defined in the technical characteristics of the devices.

• all measures must be taken to ensure that any power return (immediate, warm or cold) does not lead to a dangerous state which may risk personnel or the installation.

• emergency stop devices must remain effective in all the device's operating modes, even those which are abnormal (for example, when a wire becomes disconnected). Resetting these devices must not cause uncontrolled or improper restarts.

• cables which carry signals must be located where they do not cause interference with the control system functions by capacitive, inductive or electromagnetic interference.

___________________________________________________________________________

2

General safety advice for users

____________________________________________________________________________

• control system equipment and their control devices must be installed in such a way as to ensure that they are protected against unintentional operation.

• appropriate safety measures must be taken for the inputs and outputs, to prevent improper states in the control system device, if no signal is received.

6 Equipment operation

The operational safety and availability of a device is its ability to avoid the appearance of faults and to minimize their effects if they occur.

A system is said to be fail-safe if the appearance of faults never causes a dangerous situation.

A fault inside the control system is known as :

• passive, if it results in an open output circuit (no command is sent to the actuators).

• active, if it results in a closed output circuit (a command is sent to the actuators).

From the safety point of view, a given fault is dangerous or not depending on the type of command given during normal operation. A passive fault is dangerous if the normal command is the operation of an alarm. An active fault is dangerous if it maintains or activates an undesirable command.

It is important to note the basic difference between the behavior of an electromechanical relay and an electronic component (for example a transistor) :

• there is a high probability, approximately 90%, that the failure of a relay will cause an open circuit

(control circuit powered off).

• there is a 50% probability that the failure of a transistor will cause either an open circuit or a closed circuit.

This is why it is important to correctly estimate the types and consequences of faults when automating a system using electronic products such as PLCs, including when relay output modules are used on PLCs.

The system designer must use devices external to the PLC to protect against active faults inside the PLC, which are not indicated and are judged to be dangerous to the application. This may require solutions from various different technologies such as mechanical, electromechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices (for example, directly wiring a limit switch and emergency stop switches to the coil of a movement control contactor).

To protect against dangerous faults which may occur on output circuits or preactuators, it is sometimes beneficial to resort to general principles and use the large processing capacity of

PLCs, for example by using inputs to check the correct execution of commands requested by the program.

7 Electrical and thermal characteristics

Details of the electrical and thermal characteristics of devices are given in the associated technical documents (installation manuals, quick reference guides).

___________________________________________________________________________

3

General safety advice for users

___________________________________________________________________________

8 Environmental conditions

In industry, the micro-environmental conditions of electronic devices can vary greatly. For this reason, programmable controllers and associated modules must conform to the following two types of installation :

• installation in an enclosure with IP54 protection for protecting devices from metallic dust amongst other things. Two guidelines are associated with this type of installation :

- direct access to electronic modules should be strictly reserved to maintenance staff (see section 2), with access keys,

- the selection of a metal enclosure must be considered, since it serves as extra shielding against the latent risk of electromagnetic interference.

• direct installation without protection for Premium PLCs and associated systems (power supply modules, etc) which themselves have IP20 protection.

This type of installation applies to areas with restricted access and low pollution levels (not exceeding 2), for example stations or control rooms which have neither machines nor any activity generating metallic dust or other metallic particles. The external walls hence serve as the PLC enclosure.

9 Preventive or corrective maintenance

Availability

The availability of a system is its ability, in terms of its combined reliability, maintainability and maintenance logistics, to be in a state to perform a required function, at a given moment and within a defined time period.

Availability is therefore specific to each application, since it is a combination of :

• the architecture of the automatic system,

• the reliability and maintainability : intrinsic characteristics of the equipment (PLCs, sensors, machine, etc),

• maintenance logistics : characteristic intrinsic to the user of the control system (software structure, fault indication, process, on-site replacement parts, training of personnel).

Troubleshooting procedure

• control system equipment should only be repaired by qualified personnel (after sales service engineer, or technician approved by Schneider Automation). Only certified replacement parts or components should be used.

• before performing any operation on equipment (for example opening an enclosure), always cut the power supply off (disconnect the power plug or open the power isolation switch).

• before performing any "mechanical" operation on equipment on site, cut the power supply off and mechanically lock any moving parts.

• before removing a module, a memory cartridge, a PCMCIA card, etc, check in the manual whether this should be done with the power off or if it is possible with the device powered up.

Follow the instructions given in the manual carefully.

• on positive logic outputs or negative logic inputs, take all necessary precautions to prevent a disconnected wire coming into contact with the mechanical ground (risk of undesirable control action).

Replacement and recycling of used batteries

• if these are replaced, use batteries of the same type and dispose of defective batteries in the same way as toxic waste.

Do not throw lithium or mercury batteries into a fire, open or recharge them, or attempt to solder them.

___________________________________________________________________________

4

TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules

Installation

Contents

Part A

Section

1 Presentation

1.1

Description

1.1-1 General

1.1-2 Physical description

2 Functions 2/1

2.1

Presentation of the various counting functions

2.1-1 Downcounting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4A modules)

2.1-2 Upcounting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4 A modules)

2.1-3 Up/down counting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4A modules)

2.1-4 Up/down counting and measurement function

(TSX CTY 2C module)

2.2

Up or down counting with a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module

2/1

2/1

2/1

2/2

2/3

2/4

2.3

Up/down counting with a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module 2/7

2.4

Up/down counting and measurement with a TSX CTY 2C module 2/14

2.5

Principle of connecting the EPSR input "power supply return" 2/19

Page

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2

3 Setting up counter modules 3/1

3.1

Maximum number of counter modules

3.2

Types of sensor which can be used on counter inputs

3/1

3/2

3.3

Electrical characteristics of TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules 3/3

3.3-1 General module characteristics

3.3-2 Characteristics of the counter inputs (TSX CTY 2A / 4A)

3.3-3 Characteristics of the counter inputs (TSX CTY 2C)

3/3

3/3

3/4

3.3-4 Characteristics of the auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, read) 3/7

3.3-5 Characteristics of the auxiliary outputs 3/9

___________________________________________________________________________

A/1

A

A

TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules

Installation

Contents

Part A

Section Page

3.4

15-pin SUB-D and HE10 connector pinout 3/10

3.4-1 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors for a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module 3/10

3.4-2 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors for a TSX CTY 2C module 3/11

3.4-3 20-pin HE10 type connector for a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module 3/12

3.4-4 20-pin HE10 type connector for a TSX CTY 2C module 3/13

3.5

Connection of proximity type counting sensors 3/14

3.5-1 Connection principle 3/14

3.5-2 Connection of counting sensors and their power supply 3/15

3.5-3 Wiring recommendations 3/16

3.6

Connection of encoder type counting sensors

3.6-1 Connection principle

3.6-2 Connection of an encoder to a TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C

module

3/17

3/17

3/18

3.7

Connection of the sensors to auxiliary inputs and outputs

3.7-1 Connection principle

3.7-2 Connection of sensors and their power supply

3.8

General installation rules

3.8-1 Installation

3.8-2 General wiring instructions

3.8-3 Encoder and auxiliary sensor supplies

3.8-4 Software installation

3/23

3/23

3/25

3/26

3/26

3/26

3/27

3/27

4 Appendix 4/1

4.1

TELEFAST 2 connections : ABE-7CPA01

4.1-1 Presentation

4.1-2 Wiring diagram

4.1-3 Dimensions and mounting

4/1

4/1

4/2

4/2

___________________________________________________________________________

A/2

TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules

Installation

Contents

Part A

Section

4.1-4 Availability of counting signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block

4.1-5 Correspondence between TELEFAST ABE-7CPA01 terminal blocks and 15-pin SUB-D connectors

4.2

TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base : ABE-7H16R20

4.2-1 Presentation

4.2-2 Availability of signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block

4.2-3 Correspondence between TELEFAST ABE-7H16R20 terminal blocks and HE10 connector

Page

4/3

4/4

4/5

4/5

4/6

4/7

4.3

TELEFAST 2 connection and adaptor sub-base : ABE-7CPA11 4/8

4.3-1 Presentation

4.3-2 Physical description

4.3-3 Characteristics of the TELEFAST sub-base

4.3-4 Connecting the TELEFAST sub-base

4.3-5 Wiring instructions and recommendations

4.3-6 Configuring the TELEFAST sub-base

4/8

4/8

4/9

4/11

4/19

4/22

4.4

TSX TAP S15•• wiring accessories

4.4-1 Presentation

4.4-2 Mounting the TSX TAP S15••

4.4-3 Connection of an encoder using the TSX TAP S1505 accessory

4.4-4 Connection of an encoder using the TSX TAP S1524 accessory

4.5

Cables

4.5-1 TSX CDP 301 and TSX CDP 501 preformed cables

4.5-2 TSX CDP 102, TSX CDP 202 and TSX CDP 302 ribbon cables

4.5-3 TSX CDP 053 / 103 / 203 / 303 / 503 connection cable

4/30

4/30

4/31

4/31

4/25

4/25

4/26

4/28

4/29

4.6

Module display 4/32

___________________________________________________________________________

A/3

A

A

TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules

Installation

Section

Contents

Part A

Page

___________________________________________________________________________

A/4

1 Presentation

1.1

Description

1.1-1 General

TSX CTY 2A, TSX CTY 4A and TSX CTY 2C modules are standard format counter modules. They are used to count pulses from a sensor, at a maximum frequency of 40 kHz (CTY 2A / 4A) or 1 MHz (CTY 2C).

Counter modules can be installed in any available slot in a Premium (TSX, PMX or PCX)

PLC configuration, provided it uses no more than :

• 8 "app.-specific" channels in a TSX P57 102/TPMX P57 102/TPCX 57 1012 configuration

• 24 "app.-specific" channels in a TSX P57 2•2/TPMX P57 202 configuration

• 32 "app.-specific" channels in a TSX P57 3•2/TPMX P57 352/TPCX 57 3512 configuration

• 48 "app.-specific" channels in a TSX P57 4•2/TPMX P57 452 configuration

TSX CTY 2A and TSX CTY 4A modules only differ in the number of channels they have (2 channels for the TSX CTY 2A module and 4 channels for the TSX CTY 4A module) and are used to perform upcounting, downcounting and up/down counting functions for each channel.

The TSX CTY 2C module (2 channels) is used to perform up/down counting and measurement functions in normal mode or modulo mode.

The sensor used on each channel can be :

• A 2- or 3-wire proximity sensor, type PNP or NPN. If an output with mechanical contacts is used, the channel immunity must be increased, in order to reduce bounce when the contact is closed.

• An incremental encoder with 5 VDC differential output signals (encoder with RS 422/

485 line driver)

• An incremental encoder with 10-30 VDC output signals (Totem Pole encoder)

• A serial output absolute encoder, RS 485 standard interface (TSX CTY 2C only)

• A parallel output absolute encoder, via the TELEFAST adaptor : ABE-7CPA11

(TSX CTY 2C only).

TSX CTY 2A / 4A modules

Incremental encoder

A

Proximity sensors

Serial output absolute encoder

TSX CTY 2C module

TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11

Parallel output absolute encoder

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

A

1.1-2 Physical description

1 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting :

• the counting sensor(s) corresponding to channels 0 and 1 for TSX CTY 2A / 2C modules, and channels

0, 1, 2, and 3 for the TSX CTY 4A module,

• the encoder power supply if this type of sensor is used,

• the encoder power supply return which confirms that this is correctly supplied.

2 20-pin HE10 connector for connecting (for each channel) :

• the auxiliary inputs :

- reset or set to preset value,

- counter enable,

- read,

• the auxiliary outputs,

• the external power supplies :

- power supply for the auxiliary inputs and outputs,

- power supply for other sensors.

3 Screw for fixing the module in its position.

4 Rigid casing providing :

• support for the electronic card,

• guidance of module into its slot.

5 Module diagnostics indicator lamps :

• module level diagnostics :

- green RUN indicator lamp : indicates the module operating mode (module operative),

- red ERR indicator lamp : indicates the internal status of the module (internal fault, module failure),

- red I/O indicator lamp : indicates an external module fault or an application fault.

• channel level diagnostics :

- green CHx indicator lamp : indicates channel diagnostics :

. indicator lamp on : channel operating,

. indicator lamp flashing : channel not operating,

. indicator lamp off : channel faulty, not configured or incorrectly configured.

TSX CTY 2A

TSX CTY 4A

TSX CTY 2C

2

2

2

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

3

4

5

1

3

4

5

1

3

4

5

1

2 Functions

2.1

Presentation of the various counting functions

2.1-1 Downcounting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4A modules)

The downcounting function is used to downcount pulses (on 24 bits + sign) from a preset value from 0 to +16777215 and indicates if the current value is less than or equal to 0.

The downcounting range is between -16777216 and +16777215.

valid downcounting range

A current value < 0

-16777216 0 preset

+16777215 with automatic preset

Note

The operation of the downcounting function, associated language objects and software installation are described in the application-specific manual.

2.1-2 Upcounting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4 A modules)

The upcounting function is used to upcount pulses (on 24 bits + sign) from 0 to a preset value called the setpoint value and indicates passage through the setpoint value. The upcounting range is from 0 to + 16777215.

The current value of the counter is continuously compared with two adjustable thresholds (threshold 0 and threshold 1).

valid upcounting range current value < setpoint value current value < value of threshold 1 current value < value of threshold 0

0 threshold 0 with automatic reset to 0 threshold 1 setpoint

+16777215

Note

The operation of the upcounting function, associated language objects and software installation are described in the application-specific manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

A

2.1-3 Up/down counting function (TSX CTY 2A / 4A modules)

The up/down counting function is used to upcount and downcount pulses (on 24 bits + sign) from a preset value between -16777216 and +16777215 on the same module.

This function also offers the option of defining several values the crossing of which by the current value will be signaled and may trigger event processing :

• a low setpoint and a high setpoint

• 2 adjustable thresholds (thresholds 0 and 1) valid up/down counting range current value < high setpoint current value < threshold 1 current value < threshold 0 current value < low setpoint

-16777216 low setpoint preset threshold 0 threshold 1 high setpoint

+16777215

Note

The operation of the up/down counting function, associated language objects and software installation are described in the application-specific manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/2

Functions 2

A

2.1-4 Up/down counting and measurement function (TSX CTY 2C module)

The up/down counting function is used to upcount and downcount pulses (on 24 bits + sign) on the same counter from a preset value from -16777216 to +16777215.

The measurement function is used to read a serial frame from a serial output absolute encoder.

The up/down counting and measurement function also offers the option of defining 2 thresholds (thresholds 0 and 1), the crossing of which by the current value will be signaled and may trigger event processing.

valid up/down counting range current value < threshold 1 current value < threshold 0

-16777216 preset threshold 0 threshold 1 +16777215

Modulo mode is used for up/down counting (on 25 bits) in the range 0 to +33554431.

valid up/down counting range current value < threshold 1 current value < threshold 0

0 preset threshold 0 threshold 1 1... 33554431

Note

The operation of the up/down counting and measurement function, associated language objects and software installation are described in the application-specific manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/3

A

2.2

Up or down counting with a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module

The TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules provide :

• 2 independent upcounting or downcounting channels (TSX CTY 2A module)

• 4 independent upcounting or downcounting channels (TSX CTY 4A module)

The maximum counting frequency on each channel is 40 kHz.

Upcounting or downcounting signals

The upcounting or downcounting signals relating to a channel, as well as the encoder power supply (if the sensor is an incremental encoder) are grouped together on a standard 15-pin SUB-D connector. Each upcounter or downcounter channel can receive 5 VDC or 24 VDC signals. Pulses are received on input IA.

Auxiliary inputs

The 24 VDC auxiliary inputs (reset to 0 for upcounting, set to the preset value for downcounting and enable for upcounting or downcounting) and the external power supplies are grouped together on an HE10 connector, common to channels 0 and 1 or

2 and 3 (TSX CTY 4A only).

Reset to 0 (upcounting) or preset (downcounting)

The reset to 0 (upcounting) or set to the preset value (downcounting) can be performed as follows :

- changing the state (rising or falling edge) of input IPres (downcounting) or IReset

(upcounting), depending on the selection made during configuration,

- crossing the setpoint value (upcounting) or value 0 (downcounting),

- by the program,

• Enable upcounting or downcounting

Upcounting or downcounting is enabled as follows :

- set input IEna to 1,

- by the program.

Note

For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/4

Functions 2

A

Line check input : EPSR

This input is connected to the power supply return output of an incremental encoder, in order to check that the encoder power supply is correct.

If there is a line break on the cable carrying the encoder power supply, a fault is generated which can be used by the application program.

See the following pages for the EPSR input wiring.

Counter outputs

Upcounting or downcounting functions have counter outputs which can be associated with 2 reflex physical outputs (Q0 and Q1) on the counter module :

• downcounting function : this offers one counter output with predefined activation and deactivation conditions :

- activation when the current value passes through 0,

- deactivation on downcounter preset.

• upcounting function : this offers two counter outputs, with activation and deactivation conditions which are predefined for counter output 0, and which can be set for counter output 1 :

Counter output 0

- activation on passage through the setpoint value,

- deactivation upon counter reset.

Counter output 1

- activation and deactivation can be set in the adjustment screen.

Physical outputs

Physical outputs Q0 and Q1 can be controlled as follows :

• in automatic mode : if the physical output is enabled, the state of the counter output is applied to the output (counter output 0 controls output Q0 and counter output 1 controls output Q1). If the physical output is not enabled, it is at 0,

• in manual mode : the state of the physical output is controlled manually.

For further information on setting up counter outputs and physical outputs, refer to the applicationspecific manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/5

A

Simplified schematic

The 15-pin SUB-D connector is used to wire a single counter channel (for example, channel 0), while the HE10 connector is common to 2 channels (for example, channels

0 and 1). The wiring of the other channels or pairs of channels is identical.

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor

1

Upcounting or downcounting pulse input

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA

9

10

1

2

3

IA

IB

2

3

4

9

10

11

11

12

4

IZ 5

12

13

Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)

Encoder power supply return signal

(must be wired)

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

0 VDC

EPSR

7

8

5

15

13

6

7

8

14

15

5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder supply

+

+5 VDC

0 VDC

+10...30 VDC

1 2

+ 3 4

Preset input channel 0

Enable input channel 0

IPres0

IEna0

5 6

I0

I1

7 8

I2 Auxiliary inputs

Preset input channel 1

Enable input channel 1

IPres1

IEna1

9 10

I0

I1

I2

11 12

Reflex physical outputs channel 0

Reflex physical outputs channel 1

Q0

Q1

Q0

+24 VDC

Q1

13

15

14

16

17 18

Sensor supply for

24 VDC auxiliary inputs

+

19 20

0 VDC

HE10 connector for connecting power supplies

(encoders and sensors), auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, etc) and reflex outputs.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/6

Functions 2

A

2.3

Up/down counting with a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module

TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules provide :

• 2 independent up/down counting channels (TSX CTY 2A module),

• 4 independent up/down counting channels (TSX CTY 4A module).

The maximum up/down counting frequency on each channel is 40 kHz.

Up/down counting signals

Up/down counting on a channel can be performed in several ways :

• use of a physical input for upcounting and a physical input for downcounting.

Upcounting pulses are received on input IA and downcounting pulses on input IB.

Note

All pulses on inputs IA and IB are taken into account, whatever the synchronism of the signals.

• use of a physical input for up/down counting and a physical input for direction

(upcounting or downcounting). Up/down counting pulses are received on input IA and the direction (upcounting or downcounting) is defined by the state of input IB

(upcounting at state 1 and downcounting at state 0).

Note

In upcounting, pulses on input IA are taken into account if input IB is at 1 for more than 3 µs.

In downcounting, pulses on input IA are not taken into account if input IB is at 0 for more than

3 µs.

• use of an up/down counting physical input and definition of direction by the application

(setting a bit to 0 or 1). The up/down counting pulses are received on input IA.

• Use of two physical inputs with signals phase-shifted by

π

/2 (incremental encoder signals). Counting signal A is received on input IA and counting signal B on input IB.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/7

A

Auxiliary inputs

The 24 VDC auxiliary inputs and the external power supplies are grouped together on an HE10 connector, common to 2 channels : channels 0 and 1 or channels 2 and 3

(TSX CTY 4A only). The connector comprises the following signals : set to preset value

IPres, enable up/down counting IEna, capture current value IRead.

• Preset

Setting to the preset value can be performed as follows :

- on a change of state (rising or falling edge) of input IPres and enable by program,

- on a rising edge of input IPres, if the direction is + (upcounting) or on a falling edge of input IPres, if the direction is - (downcounting), and enable by program.

Upcounting direction Downcounting direction

Physical input IPres

- on a rising edge of input IPres, if the direction is - (downcounting) or on a falling edge of input IPres, if the direction is + (upcounting), and enable by program.

Upcounting direction Downcounting direction

Physical input IPres

- on state 1 of input IPres and enable by program. The current value does not change while the input is at 1.

- on short cam reference point : the preset is taken into account :

. if the direction is + (upcounting) : input IPres at state 1, rising edge of zero marker input IZ, and enable by program,

. if the direction is - (downcounting) : input IPres at state 1, falling edge of zero marker input IZ, and enable by program.

Upcounting direction Downcounting direction

Physical input IPres

Zero marker input IZ

Preset Preset

Note

In theory, as the short cam is less than one revolution of the incremental encoder, the zero marker only appears once in the cam.

If, however, there are several revolutions of the incremental encoder in the cam, the last active edge of the zero marker signal triggers a preset.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/8

Functions 2

A

- on long cam reference point : the preset is taken into account on the first rising edge of the zero marker input IZ after input IPres has passed through state 0 in both the upward and downward directions, and enable by program.

Upcounting direction Downcounting direction

Physical input IPres

Zero marker input IZ

Preset Preset

- directly by program.

• Enable up/down counting

Up/down counting is enabled as follows :

- on setting to 1 of input IEna and enable by program,

- by the program.

• Capture

The current value is captured in the following way :

- on change of state (rising or falling edge) of input IRead and enable by program,

- by the program.

Note

For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/9

A

Line check input : EPSR

This input is connected to the power supply return output of an incremental encoder, in order to check that the encoder power supply is correct.

If there is a line break on the cable carrying the encoder power supply, a fault is generated which can be used by the application program.

See the following pages for the EPSR input wiring.

Counter outputs

The up/down counting function has 2 counter outputs which can be associated with 2 reflex physical outputs (Q0 and Q1) on the counter module.

These two counter outputs have activation and deactivation conditions defined by the user in a coding matrix which can be accessed via the adjustment function.

Physical outputs

Physical outputs Q0 and Q1 can be controlled as follows :

• in automatic mode : if the physical output is enabled, the state of the counter output is applied to the output (counter output 0 controls output Q0 and counter output 1 controls output Q1). If the physical output is not enabled, it is at 0.

• in manual mode : the state of the physical output is controlled manually.

For further information on setting up counter outputs and physical outputs, refer to the application-specific manual.

Notes :

The following schematics show the principle for wiring a 15-pin SUB-D connector (1 channel only).

The wiring of the other channels is identical.

On schematics 2 to 4, the HE10 connector is not shown, as its wiring is identical to that of schematic 1.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/10

Functions 2

A

Simplified schematic 1

Use of an up/down counter physical input and definition of direction (upcounting or downcounting) by the application.

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor

1

Up/down counting pulse input

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA

9

1

2

10

3

Zero marker input

Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)

Encoder power supply return signal

(must be wired)

IZ +5 VDC

IZ +24 VDC

IZ

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

0 VDC

EPSR

11

12

7

8

4

5

15

13

IA

IB

IZ

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder supply according to encoder type

+

+

Preset input channel 0

Enable input channel 0

Read input channel 0

Preset input channel 1

Enable input channel 1

Read input channel 1

Reflex physical outputs channel 0

Reflex physical outputs channel 1

Sensor supply for 24 VDC auxiliary inputs +

+5 VDC

0 VDC

+10...30 VDC

1

3

IPres0

IEna0

IRead0

5

7

IPres1

IEna1

IRead1

2

4

9

11

10

12

6

8

I0

I2

I0

I2

I1

I1

Auxiliary inputs

Q0

Q1

Q0

+24 VDC

Q1

13

15

17

14

16

18

19 20

0 VDC

HE10 connector for connecting power supplies

(encoders and sensors), auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, etc) and reflex outputs.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/11

A

Simplified schematic 2

Use of a physical up/down counting input and a physical input for direction (upcounting or downcounting).

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor

1

Up/down counting pulse input

Counting direction input

(upcount or downcount) downcount upcount

Zero marker input

Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)

Encoder power supply return signal

(must be wired)

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA –

IB +5 VDC

IB +24 VDC

IB –

IZ +5 VDC

IZ +24 VDC

IZ –

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

0 VDC

EPSR

9

10

11

12

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

15

13

IA

IB

IZ

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

5 VDC

0 VDC

10...30 VDC

1

3

2

HE10 connector

Simplified schematic 3

Use of a physical input for upcounting and a physical input for downcounting.

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor

1

Upcounting pulse input

Downcounting pulse input

Zero marker input

Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)

Encoder power supply return signal

(must be wired)

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA –

IB +5 VDC

IB +24 VDC

IB –

IZ +5 VDC

IZ +24 VDC

IZ –

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

0 VDC

EPSR

9

10

11

12

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

15

13

IA

IB

IZ

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

5 VDC

0 VDC

10...30 VDC

1

3

2

2/12

Functions 2

A

Simplified schematic 4

Use of two physical inputs for wiring an incremental encoder with signals phase-shifted by

π

/2. The multiplication by 4 option can be used to increase encoder resolution :

• multiplication by 1 : up/down counting is performed on the rising edges of input IB,

• multiplication by 4 : up/down counting is performed on all the rising and falling edges of inputs IA and IB.

Signal A input

Signal B input

/2

Zero marker input

Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)

Encoder power supply return signal

(must be wired)

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA –

IB +5 VDC

IB +24 VDC

IB –

IZ +5 VDC

IZ +24 VDC

IZ –

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

0 VDC

EPSR

9

10

11

12

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

15

13

IA

IB

IZ

1

4

5

6

7

2

3

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

3

2

HE10 connector

___________________________________________________________________________

2/13

A

2.4

Up/down counting and measurement with a TSX CTY 2C module

The TSX CTY 2C counter module can be used for 2 independent up/down counting and measurement channels (absolute encoder interface).

• up/down counting (mechanical contacts, proximity sensor, pulse generators, incremental encoders)

Up/down counting on a channel can be performed in several ways :

- use of a physical input for upcounting and a physical input for downcounting.

Upcounting pulses are received on input IA and downcounting pulses on input IB.

- use of a physical input for up/down counting and a physical input for direction

(upcounting or downcounting). Up/down counting pulses are received on input IA and the direction (upcounting or downcounting) is defined by the state of input IB

(upcounting at state 1 and downcounting at state 0).

- use of an up/down counting physical input and definition of direction by the application (setting a bit to 0 or 1). The up/down counting pulses are received on input IA.

The maximum up/down counting frequency on each channel is 1 MHz.

- use of two physical inputs with signals phase-shifted by

π

/2 (incremental encoder signals). Counting signal A is received on input IA and counting signal B on input IB.

The maximum frequency of phase-shifted signals is 500 kHz (in multiplication by 1) or 250 kHz (in multiplication by 4).

• measurement (absolute encoders)

- use of a physical input to receive serial data (signals from a serial output absolute encoder) and use of a physical output to send the transmission clock to the encoder.

TELEFAST adaptor TSX ABE-7CPA11 allows a parallel output absolute encoder to be used.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/14

Functions 2

A

Auxiliary inputs

The 24 VDC auxiliary inputs and the external power supplies are grouped together on an HE10 connector, common to 2 channels. The connector comprises the following signals : set to preset value IPres, enable up/down counting IEna, capture current value

IRead.

• Preset

Setting to the preset value can be performed as follows :

- on a change of state (rising or falling edge) of input IPres and enable by program,

- on a rising edge of input IPres, if the direction is + (upcounting) or on a falling edge of input IPres, if the direction is - (downcounting), and enable by program.

Upcounting direction Downcounting direction

Physical input IPres

- on rising edge of input IPres, if the direction is - (downcounting) or on a falling edge of input IPres, if the direction is + (upcounting), and enable by program.

Upcounting direction Downcounting direction

Physical input IPres

- on state 1 of input IPres and enable by program. The current value does not change while the input is at 1.

- on short cam reference point : the preset is taken into account :

. if the direction is + (upcounting) : input IPres at state 1, rising edge of zero marker input IZ, and enable by program,

. if the direction is - (downcounting) : input IPres at state 1, falling edge of zero marker input IZ, and enable by program.

Upcounting direction

Downcounting direction

Physical input IPres

Zero marker input IZ

Preset Preset

Note

In theory, as the short cam is less than one revolution of the incremental encoder, the zero marker only appears once in the cam.

If, however, there are several revolutions of the incremental encoder in the cam, the last active edge of the zero marker signal triggers a preset.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/15

A

- on long cam reference point : preset is taken into account on the first rising edge of the zero marker input IZ after input IPres has passed through state 0 in both the upward and downward directions, and enable by program.

Upcounting direction Downcounting direction

Physical input IPres

Zero marker input IZ

Preset Preset

- directly by program.

• Enable up/down counting

Up/down counting is enabled as follows :

- on setting to 1 of input IEna and enable by program,

- by the program.

• Capture

The current value is captured in the following way :

- on change of state (rising edge, falling edge or rising and falling edges) of input

IRead and enable by program,

- by the program.

Note

For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/16

Functions 2

A

Line check input : EPSR

This input is connected to the power supply return output of an incremental or absolute encoder, in order to check that the encoder power supply is correct.

If there is a short-circuit or line break on the cable carrying the power supply voltage to the encoder, a fault is generated which can be used by the application program.

See the following pages for the EPSR input wiring.

Counter outputs

The up/down counting function has 2 counter outputs which can be associated with 2 reflex physical outputs (Q0 and Q1) on the counter module.

These two counter outputs have activation and deactivation conditions defined by the user in a coding matrix (30 possible combinations), which can be accessed via the adjustment function.

Physical outputs

Each channel of the TSX CTY 2C module has 4 physical outputs, Q0 to Q3.

Physical outputs Q0 and Q1 are identical to those of a TSX CTY 2A or TSX CTY 4A module. They can be controlled :

• in automatic mode : if the physical output is enabled, the state of the counter output is applied to the output (counter output 0 controls output Q0 and counter output 1 controls output Q1). If the physical output is not enabled, it is at 0.

• in manual mode : the state of the physical output is controlled manually.

Output Q2 can only be controlled in manual mode.

Output Q3 is in fact, a configurable input/output. It can be used in programmable

frequency mode to give an external synchronization marker on several channels in several counter modules.

When using parallel outputs absolute encoder(s), with a TELEFAST adaptor, ABE-

7CPA11, outputs Q2 and Q3 can be used as discrete outputs to address these encoder(s).

For further information on setting up counter outputs and physical outputs, refer to the application-specific manual.

Note

The schematics showing the principle for wiring a 15-pin SUB-D connector (1 channel only) are identical to those for up/down counting with a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module (schematics 1 to 4). These schematics are complemented by schematic 5 on the next page, which takes account of the wiring of a serial output absolute encoder or a parallel output absolute encoder, via TELEFAST adaptor

ABE-7CPA11.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/17

A

Simplified schematic 5

Use of a physical input to receive serial data and use of a physical output to send the transmission clock to the SSI absolute encoder.

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor

Serial data input

Serial transmission clock output

Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)

Encoder power supply return signal

(must be wired)

SSI Data +

SSI Data -

1

2

10

3

11

CLK SSI +

CLK SSI -

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

0 VDC

EPSR

6

7

8

4

14

15

13

3

4

5

1

2

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Absolute encoder power + supply, 5 VDC or 10...30 VDC depending on encoder type

+

10...30 VDC encoder ref. voltage

Preset input channel 0

Enable input / output Q2 channel 0

Read input channel 0

Output Q3 channel 0

Preset input channel 1

Enable input / output Q2 channel 1

Read input channel 1

Output Q3 channel 1

Reflex physical outputs channel 0

Reflex physical outputs channel 1

+5 VDC

0 VDC

+10...30 VDC

1 2

3 4

Q2

Q2

IPres0

IEna0

IRead0

Q3

IPres1

IEna1

IRead1

Q3

Q0

Q1

Q0

+24 VDC

Q1

5

7

9

11

13

15

6

8

10

12

14

16

17 18

Sensor supply for 24 VDC

+

19 20

0 VDC

I0

I2

I0

I2

I1

I1

Auxiliary I/O

HE10 connector for connecting power supplies

(encoders and sensors), auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, etc) and reflex outputs.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/18

Functions 2

A

2.5

Principle of connecting the EPSR input "power supply return"

This input must be wired.

The connection of this input depends on the type of sensor used :

• incremental encoder with power supply return output

- the EPSR input is connected to the encoder power supply return output

Z

+

EPSR

A

B

+5 VDC

0 VDC

EPSR

7

8

TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C

15

13

5

6

7

8

Encoder

13

14

15

Standard

15-pin SUB-D

serial output absolute encoder with power supply return output

- the EPSR input is connected to the encoder power supply return output

SSI Data

CLKSSI

+

EPSR

Encoder

+5 VDC

0 VDC

EPSR

7

8

15

13

TSX CTY 2C 5

6

13

14

7

15

8

Standard

15-pin SUB-D

incremental encoder without power supply return output

- the EPSR input is connected to the positive of the encoder power supply, encoder side.

Z

+

A

B

TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C

+24 VDC

7

6

13

0 VDC

EPSR

8

15

7

14

13

15

8

Encoder

Standard 15-pin SUB-D

___________________________________________________________________________

2/19

A

serial output absolute encoder without power supply return output

- the EPSR input is connected to the positive of the encoder power supply, encoder side.

SSI Data

CLKSSI

+

+24 VDC

TSX CTY 2C

13

7

6

0 VDC

EPSR

8

15

7

14

13

15

8

Encoder

Standard

15-pin

SUB-D

inductive proximity sensors

- the EPSR input is connected to the positive of the counting sensor power supply,

- the - 0 VDC output is connected to the negative of the counting sensor power supply.

+24 VDC 0 VDC

Counting sensor power supply

TSX CTY 2 A / 4 A / 2C

0 VDC

EPSR

7

8

15

13

6

7

8

SUB-D standard

15-pin

Note

If the sensor does not have a power supply return output, the EPSR input of a TSX

CTY 2C module does not need to be wired. In this case, it is advisable to mask the

"encoder or proximity sensor power supply" fault.

Note

For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.

13

14

15

___________________________________________________________________________

2/20

3 Setting up counter modules

3.1

Maximum number of counter modules

TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C counter modules can be installed in any available slot in a Premium

(TSX, PMX or PCX) PLC configuration, provided they use no more than :

Processors

TSX P57 102 / TPMX P57 102 / TPCX 57 1012

TSX P57 202 / TPMX P57 202

TSX P57 252

TSX P57 302

TSX P 57 352 / TPMX P57 352 / TPCX 57 3512

TSX P57 402

TSX P57 452 / TPMX P57 452

No. of "app.-specific" channels managed

8

24

24

32

32

48

48

All the channels of an application-specific module (counter module, axis control module, etc) are called "application-specific" channels. TSX CTY 2A / 2C modules comprise 2

"application-specific" channels and the TSX CTY 4A module comprises 4 "applicationspecific" channels. Only configured channels are counted.

For example, in a configuration with a TSX

P57 202 processor, it is possible to install

12 TSX CTY 2A / 2C modules or 6

TSX CTY 4A modules, where all the channels are configured.

These modules can be installed in all the positions of the main rack and in all the positions of the 7 extension racks.

A

___________________________________________________________________________

3/1

A

3.2

Types of sensor which can be used on counter inputs

Counter inputs on TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules can receive pulses generated by :

• 2- or 3-wire proximity sensors, type PNP or NPN,

• incremental encoders with 5 VDC differential output signals, line driver

RS 422 / 485, supplied at 10-30 V,

• incremental encoders with 5 V differential output signals, RS 422 / 485 line driver, supplied at 5 V,

• incremental encoders with 10-30 V differential output signals, Totem pole, supplied at 10-30 V,

• SSI serial output absolute encoders, RS 485 standard interface (TSX CTY 2C only),

• parallel output absolute encoders and TELEFAST adaptor ABE-7CPA11 (TSX CTY 2C only).

Incremental or absolute encoder

Proximity sensors

___________________________________________________________________________

3/2

Setting up counter modules 3

A

3.3

Electrical characteristics of TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules

3.3-1 General module characteristics

Modules

Maximum frequency at counter inputs

Current consumed by the module

5 V internal Typical

Maximum

24 V sensor / Typical preactuator Maximum

Power dissipated in the module

Power supply monitoring for sensors / preactuators

Operating temperature

Typical

Maximum

Dielectric strength inputs/ground or inputs and internal logic

Insulation resistance

Relative humidity

Storage temperature

Operating altitude

(*) with fan operating

TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A TSX CTY 2C

40 kHz 40 kHz 1 MHz

280 mA

330 mA

30 mA

60 mA

4.5 W

6 W

Yes

330 mA

470 mA

36 mA

72 mA

8 W

11.5 W

Yes

850 mA (*)

1 A (*)

15 mA

18 mA

7 W

10 W

Yes

0 to 60 °C 0 to 60 °C 0 to 60 °C

1000 V rms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

5% to 95% without condensation

- 25 ° to + 70 °C

0 to 2000 m

3.3-2 Characteristics of the counter inputs (TSX CTY 2A / 4A)

Characteristics for use in RS 422 C

Example schematic for each counter input IA, IB, IZ.

IA +5 VDC 220

A

1 nF

PS2701-1-L opto-coupler line check

Opto-coupler

190

A

IA –

Inputs IA, IB and IZ used in RS 422 are totally compatible with incremental encoder line drivers with RS 422 outputs and also with encoders with push-pull complementary outputs with a 5 V power supply. Line monitoring is performed on each output.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/3

A

TSX CTY 2A / 4A : characteristics for use at 5 VDC / 24 VDC

Inputs

Logic

Nominal values

Voltage

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

Voltage

At state 1 Voltage

5 VDC counter

(IA/IB/IZ)

Positive

5 V

18 mA

24 VDC counter

(IA/IB/IZ)

Positive or Negative

24 V

18 mA

19…30 V (possible up to

34 V, limited to 1hr per 24hrs)

34 V (1hr per 24hrs)

> 11 V

Limit values

Current

At state 0 Voltage

< 5.5 V

> 2.4 V

> 3.7 mA (1)

< 1.2 V

> 6 mA (2)

< 5 V

Current

Input impedance for U nominal

Input impedance for U = 2.4 V

(RS 422 compatibility)

Response time

< 1 mA (3)

400

> 270

< 2 mA (4)

1.4 k

Input type

IEC 1131 conformity

Resistive

2-wire prox. sensor compatibility (5) –

3-wire prox. sensor compatibility (5) –

Maximum permissible frequency 40 kHz

(1) for U = 2.4 V, (2) for U = 11 V, (3) for U = 1.2 V,

(5) see compatibility of sensors with type 1 and type 2 inputs

Resistive

Type 2

Yes

Yes

(4) for U = 5 V

3.3-3 Characteristics of the counter inputs (TSX CTY 2C)

Example schematic for input IA

IA+

Line check

Input A

IA-

___________________________________________________________________________

3/4

Setting up counter modules 3

A

TSX CTY 2C : characteristics for use at 5 VDC / 24 VDC

Inputs

Logic

Nominal values

Limit values

Voltage

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

Voltage

At state 1 Voltage

Current

At state 0 Voltage

> 3.6 mA (1)

< 1.2 V

Current

Input impedance for U nominal

Response time

Maximum permissible frequency for :

• counting pulses

• incremental encoders

< 1 mA

270

• SSI and parallel output absolute encoders

(with TELEFAST adaptor ABE-7CPA11)

Input type

IEC 1131 conformity

Resistive

> 6 mA (2)

< 5 V

< 2 mA

1.5 k

1 MHz

500 kHz in multiplication by 1

250 kHz in multiplication by 4

SSICLK transmission clock :

150 kHz...1 MHz

Resistive

Type 2

2-wire prox. sensor compatibility (3)

3-wire prox. sensor compatibility (3)

5 VDC counter 24 VDC counter

(IA/IB/IZ) or measurement (IA/IB/IZ)

(SSI Data)

Positive

5 V

18 mA

< 5.5 V

> 2.4 V

Positive or Negative

24 V

16 mA

19…30 V (possible up to

34 V, limited to 1hr per 24hrs)

34 V (1hr per 24hrs)

> 11 V

(1) for U = 2.4 V, (2) for U = 11 V

(3) see compatibility of sensors with type 1 and type 2 inputs

Yes

Yes

Compatibility of inputs IA, IB, IZ :

RS 422 / RS 485 / 7mA current loop line driver outputs. Differential line check on each input.

IA+

220

IA-

Line check

Totem pole complementary outputs, 5 V supply. Differential line check on each input.

IA+

220 Ω

IA-

Line check

___________________________________________________________________________

3/5

A

Characteristics of power supply monitor circuit for counting sensors (encoder or proximity sensor)

Counting sensor supply return

PS2701-1-L opto-coupler

0 V counting sensor

Modules TSX CTY 2A / 4A TSX CTY 2C

Voltage with no encoder or proximity sensor supply fault :

• 5 V power supply

• 10...30 V power supply

> 2.5 V

> 2.5 V

> 3.75 V

> 3.75 V if the

10...30 V encoder reference voltage input is not wired (pin 4 of the HE10 connector).

/

> 80% of the supply voltage of the encoder or proximity sensor, if the 10...30 V encoder reference voltage input is wired

(pin 4 of the HE10 connector).

Current with detection of a fault on the proximity sensor or encoder supply

Limit values Voltage

Current

< 0.5 mA

30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour per 24 hours)

< 3 mA < 3 mA

Note

If the sensor does not have a power supply return output, the EPSR input of a TSX

CTY 2C module does not need to be wired. In this case, it is advisable to mask the

"encoder or proximity sensor power supply" fault.

Note :

For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/6

Setting up counter modules 3

A

3.3-4 Characteristics of the auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, read)

Modules

Logic

Nominal values

TSX CTY 2A / 4A

Positive

TSX CTY 2C

Positive

Voltage

Current

24 VDC

7 mA

24 VDC

8 mA

Sensor power supply 19…30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hr per 24 hrs)

(ripple included)

At state 1 Voltage > 11 V > 11 V Limit values

At state 0

Current

Voltage

Current

2-wire proximity sensor compatibility (2)

3-wire proximity sensor compatibility (2)

> 6 mA (1)

< 5 V

< 2 mA

Sensor / preactuator voltage OK monitoring thresholds Fault

Response time of sensor / preactuator voltage monitoring

Input impedance

Response time

Input type

IEC 1131 conformity

> 18 V

< 14 V

On disappearance < 2.5 ms (4) of 24 V

On appearance < 10 ms (4) of 24 V

State 0 to 1

State 1 to 0

3.4 k

< 250 µs (3)

< 250 µs (3)

Current sink

Type 2

> 6 mA (1)

< 5 V

< 2 mA

> 18 V

< 14 V

< 2.5 ms (4)

< 10 ms (4)

3.4 k

< 25 µs (3)

< 50 µs (3)

Resistive

Type 2

Yes (all 24 VDC 2-wire proximity sensors)

Yes (all 24 VDC 3-wire proximity sensors)

(1) for U = 11 V

(2) see compatibility of sensors with type 1 and type 2 inputs

(3) auxiliary inputs are fast inputs (response time < 50 µs or < 250 µs) in accordance with the maximum permissible frequency (1 MHz or 40 KHz) of the counter inputs.

(4) when the sensor supply voltage disappears, the fast auxiliary inputs can be taken into account.

Note

If auxiliary I/O are not used on a TSX CTY 2C module, the auxiliary power supply does not need to be wired. In this case, it is advisable to mask the "auxiliary I/O power supply" fault.

Note :

For further information on these functions, refer to the application-specific manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/7

A

The auxiliary inputs are supplied with 24 V from a power supply on the connector.

Equivalent schematic for TSX CTY 2A / 4A :

24 V

IPres

Ie

Ie

IEna

Ie

IRead

24 V

0 V

___________________________________________________________________________

3/8

Setting up counter modules 3

A

3.3-5 Characteristics of the auxiliary outputs

Equivalent schematic :

Preactuator/ sensor supply monitor circuit

Short-circuit fault monitor circuit

Command

+

24 V

Q0 to Q3

Modules

Nominal voltage

Voltage limits

Nominal current

Voltage drop

Leakage current

Max current at 30 V and at 34 V

Switching time

Dielectric strength with the ground

Compatibility with DC inputs

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Protections against overloads and short-circuits

Short-circuit monitoring of outputs of each channel

Reactivation can be configured

manual (by application program)

automatic

Protection against overvoltage on channels

TSX CTY 2A / 4A

24 VDC

TSX CTY 2C

24 VDC

19…30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour per 24 hours)

500 mA 500 mA

Protection against reverse polarity

Power of one filament lamp

< 0.5 V

< 0.1 mA

625 mA

< 250 µs

Yes

< 0.5 V

< 0.1 mA

625 mA

< 250 µs

1500 V rms. 50 / 60 Hz for 1 min

All positive logic inputs whose input resistance is < 15 K

Yes

By current limiter and and thermal tripping (0.7 < Id < 2 A)

One signalling bit per channel

One configuration bit per channel via zener diode between outputs and + 24 V by reverse-mounted diode on supply

8 W (max.) 8 W (max.)

___________________________________________________________________________

3/9

A

3.4

15-pin SUB-D and HE10 connector pinout

3.4-1 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors for a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module

These connectors are used for connecting counting sensors and the encoder power supply :

• TSX CTY 2A modules : two 15-pin SUB-D connectors (channels 0 and 1),

• TSX CTY 4A module : four 15-pin SUB-D connectors (channels 0,1, 2 and 3).

Note the pinouts of the various connectors are strictly identical.

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the counting sensor to channel 0, 1, 2 or 3

1 input IA signal input IB signal input IZ signal

Encoder power supply

Encoder power supply return signal

(must be wired)

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA –

IB +5 VDC

IB +24 VDC

IB –

IZ +5 VDC

IZ +24 VDC

IZ –

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

0 VDC

EPSR

9

10

11

12

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

15

13

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

5 VDC signals

Input IA +

Input IA -

Input IB +

Input IB -

Input IZ +

Input IZ -

Encoder supply :

+ 5 VDC

- 0 VDC

Encoder power supply return

Pins

10

11

4

5

1

2

15

8

13

10...30 VDC signals

Input IA +

Input IA -

Input IB +

Input IB -

Input IZ +

Input IZ -

Encoder supply :

+ 10...30V

- 0 VDC

Encoder power supply return

Pins

3

11

12

5

9

2

7

8

13

___________________________________________________________________________

3/10

Setting up counter modules 3

A

3.4-2 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors for a TSX CTY 2C module

These connectors are used for connecting counting sensors and the encoder power supply :

• TSX CTY 2C modules : two 15-pin SUB-D connectors (channels 0 and 1).

Note : the pinouts of the various connectors are strictly identical.

input IA signal

SSI Data input IB signal input IZ signal

SSICLK clock output

Encoder power supply

Encoder power supply return signal

(must be wired)

5 VDC signals

Input IA +

Input IA -

Input IB +

Input IB -

Input IZ +

Input IZ -

Encoder supply :

+ 5 VDC

- 0 VDC

Encoder power supply return

Pins

10

11

4

5

1

2

15

8

13

IA +24 VDC

IA - / SSI Data -

IB +5 VDC

IB +24 VDC

IB –

IZ +5 VDC

IZ +24 VDC

IZ –

SSICLK +

SSICLK –

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

0 VDC

EPSR

9

10

11

12

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

14

15

13

10...30 VDC signals

Input IA +

Input IA -

Input IB +

Input IB -

Input IZ +

Input IZ -

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Encoder supply :

+ 10...30V

- 0 VDC

Encoder power supply return

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Serial signals (absolute encoder with serial or parallel outputs, via TELEFAST adaptor ABE-7CPA11)

Pins

Input SSI Data +

Input SSI Data -

Input SSICLK+

Input SSICLK -

6

14

1

2

Encoder supply :

+ 5

- 0 VDC

Encoder power supply return

8

13

___________________________________________________________________________

3/11

Pins

3

11

12

5

9

2

7

8

13

A

3.4-3 20-pin HE10 type connector for a TSX CTY 2A / 4A module

This connector is used for connecting auxiliary inputs, outputs, encoder power supplies and other sensors.

The TSX CTY 2A module has a single HE10 connector for channels 0 and 1.

The TSX CTY 4A module has 2 HE10 connectors, for channels 0,1 and 2,3 respectively.

5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder supply inputs

Preset input channel 0 (channel 2)

Enable counter input channel 0 (channel 2)

Read input channel 0 (channel 2)

Preset input channel 1 (channel 3)

Enable counter input channel 1 (channel 3)

Read input channel 1 (channel 3)

Reflex physical outputs channel 0

(channel 2)

Reflex physical outputs channel 1

(channel 3)

Sensor supply for

24 VDC auxiliary I/O

+5 VDC

0 VDC

+10...30 VDC

IPres0 (2)

IEna0 (2)

IRead0 (2)

IPres1 (3)

IEna1 (3)

IRead1 (3)

1

7

9

11

3

5

2

4

6

I0

8

10

12

I2

I0

I2

Q0

Q1

Q0

+24 VDC

Q1

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

0 VDC

I1

I1

Supply feedback to connector(s)

15-pin SUB-D

Auxiliary inputs

24 VDC signals Pins Power supplies Pins

Auxiliary inputs channel 0 (channel 2) :

Preset IPres 0/2

Enable IEna 0/2

Read IRead 0/2

5

6

7

Auxiliary inputs channel 1 (channel 3) :

Preset IPres 1/3

Enable IEna 1/3

Read IRead 1/3

9

10

11

Reflex output channel 0 (channel 2) :

Output Q0

Output Q1

13

14

Encoder supply :

+ 5 VDC

- 0 VDC

- +10...30 VDC

Sensor supply :

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

17 or 19

18 or 20

1

2

3

Reflex output channel 1 (channel 3) :

Output Q0

Output Q1

15

16

___________________________________________________________________________

3/12

Setting up counter modules 3

A

3.4-4 20-pin HE10 type connector for a TSX CTY 2C module

This connector is used for connecting auxiliary inputs, outputs, encoder power supplies and other sensors.

The TSX CTY 2C module has a single HE10 connector for channels 0 and 1.

5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder supply inputs

10...30 VDC encoder reference voltage

Preset input channel 0

Enable input / Output Q2 channel 0

Read input channel 0

Output Q3 channel 0

Preset input channel 1

Enable input / Output Q2 channel 1

Read input channel 1

Output Q3 channel 1

Reflex outputs channel 0

Reflex outputs channel 1

Sensor / preactuator supply for

24 VDC auxiliary I/O

+5 VDC

0 VDC

+10...30 VDC

1

3

Q2

Q2

IPres0

IVal0

ICapt0

Q3

IPres1

IVal1

ICapt1

Q3

Q0

Q1

Q0

+24 VDC

Q1

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

2

8

10

16

18

4

6

12

14

I0

I2

I0

I2

19 20

0 VDC

Supply feedback to connector(s)

15-pin SUB-D

I1

I3

I1

I3

Auxiliary inputs

24 VDC signals

Auxiliary inputs channel 0 :

Preset IPres0

Enable IEna0 / Output Q2

Read IRead0

Output Q3

Pins

7

8

5

6

Power supplies Pins

Encoder supply :

+ 5 VDC

- 0 VDC

+10...30 VDC 3

Encoder reference voltage 10...30 VDC 4

1

2

Auxiliary inputs channel 1 :

Preset IPres1

Enable IEna1 / Output Q2

Read IRead1

Output Q3

Reflex output channel 0 :

Output Q0

Output Q1

9

10

11

12

Sensor supply :

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

17 or 19

18 or 20

13

14

Reflex output channel 1 :

Output Q0

Output Q1

15

16

___________________________________________________________________________

3/13

A

3.5

Connection of proximity type counting sensors

3.5-1 Connection principle

TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 2C

channel 1

Counting sensor 24 VDC supply connection

1

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7CPA01

2

Counting sensor connections

1 TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m long) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m long) or TSX CCP S15100

(1 m long) cable, with high density 15-pin SUB-D connector and standard 15-pin

SUB-D connector. This cable is used to connect the counter channel to the

TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base (ABE-7CPA01). It carries the various counter channel signals.

2 TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base, reference ABE-7CPA01 :

This is used to connect the counting sensors and their power supply for the relevant channel.

Note

The connection of channels 2 and 3 of a TSX CTY 4A module is identical to that of channels 0 and 1.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/14

Setting up counter modules 3

A

3.5-2 Connection of counting sensors and their power supply

TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) channel 0

+ + – –

+ + – –

Counting sensor 24

VDC supply connection

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7CPA01

TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 2C

Counting sensor connection (proximity sensor)

GND 4 1 8 10 14 16 18

(1)

25 27 26 28

+

A

– +

B

– +

Z

GND 4 1 8 10 14 16 18 25 27 26 28

Connection of

3-wire proximity sensor with PNP output

+

A

– +

B

– +

Z

Connection of

3-wire proximity sensor with NPN output

GND 4 1 8 10 14 16 18 25 27 26 28

Connection of

2-wire proximity sensor

Note (1)

A B Z

If proximity type counting sensors are used, the EPSR input (encoder power supply return) must respect polarity. To do this, connect :

• EPSR (terminal 18) to the 24VDC positive of the sensor power supply (terminal 26 or 28),

3/15

A

3.5-3 Wiring recommendations

Inputs IPres, IEna and IRead are fast inputs which should be connected to the sensor by twisted pair if it is a volt-free contact, or by shielded cables if it is a 2 or 3-wire proximity sensor.

This module is fitted as standard with devices to protect against short-circuits or polarity inversions. Power supplies must, however, be protected by fuses in series. These fuses must be "fast blow" type with 1A maximum rating.

Important : wiring solid state outputs Q0 to Q3

The actuator connected to outputs Q0 to Q3 has its common point at the 0V of the power supply. If, due to a poor contact or accidental disconnection, there is a break in the 0V supply of the output amplifier, while the common point of the actuators remains connected to the 0V supply; there may be an output current from the amplifier of a few mA which is sufficient to keep certain low-power actuators energized.

+ + – –

+ + – – channel 0

IPres0 IVal0/Q2 ICapt0 Q3 Q0 Q1 IPres1 IVal1/Q2 channel1

ICapt1 Q3 Q0 Q1

204 104

+

205 105

+

206 106

+

107 307 112 312 113 313 208 108

+

209 109

+

210 110

+

111 311 114 314 115 315

Rl Rl Rl Rl Rl Rl

105 305 109 309

Rl Rl

Connecting using TELEFAST :

This is the most reliable type of connection provided the actuator common is connected to the bar of the 2•• common points (jumper in position 1-2). In this case there can be no break in the module common without breaking the actuator common.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/16

Setting up counter modules 3

A

3.6

Connection of encoder type counting sensors

3.6-1 Connection principle

A TSX CTY 4A module is wired as follows. For a TSX CTY 2A or TSX CTY 2C module, only the elements relating to channels 0 and 1 should be connected.

Encoders channel 0

TSX CTY 2C TSX CTY 4A channel 2

TSX CTY 2A channel 0 channel 0

Encoders

1 1 1 channel 1

1 channel 3 channel 1 channel 1

Description of the various connection elements

1 Equipment for connecting the encoder to the standard 15-pin SUB-D connector, located on the TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C module. In view of the different types of encoder, the connection equipment is the user's responsibility and consists of :

• a connector for the encoder connection (depends on the encoder used; generally a 12-pin female DIN connector),

• a standard 15-pin male SUB-D connector for connection to the 15-pin female

SUB-D connector on the TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C module. This connector is available with the reference TSX CAP S15,

• a cable :

- twisted pairs (26 gauge) with shielding for an incremental encoder with RS 422 standard line driver outputs or absolute encoder,

- multicore (24 gauge) with shielding for an incremental encoder with Totem Pole outputs.

The cable shielding is of the "braid + strip" type. Contact between the "braid + strip", and the ground for each connector must be secured by clamping around the whole circumference of the cable.

The connection of this cable to the two connectors varies depending on the type of power supply used by the encoder (5 VDC or 10...30 VDC) and the type of outputs

(RS 422, Totem Pole). Different types of connection are used as examples on the following pages.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/17

A

3.6-2 Connection of an encoder to a TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C module

TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY2C

Channel 0

Cable 0

Encoder

Connection example for incremental encoder with RS 422 / RS 485 line driver outputs

Encoder characteristics

• supply voltage : 5 VDC,

• output voltage : 5 VDC differential,

• output stage : RS 422/485 standard line driver.

Simplified schematic

+5 VDC

15

CTY module

EPSR

13

IA +24 VDC

9

+

A IA +5 VDC

Incremental encoder

1

A IA –

0 VDC

2

8

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector

Schematic for channel connection

Encoder

DIN connector

Cable 1

(encoder/TSX CTY •• connection)

TSX CTY ••

A

A

B

B

Z

Z

EPSR*

9

10

11

12

+

13

14

Standard 15-pin SUB-D

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

3

4

5

6

7

9

10

11

12

13

14

7

2

15

15

(1) 8

8

* EPSR = encoder power supply return

3/18

Setting up counter modules 3

A

Connection example for incremental encoder with Totem Pole outputs

Encoder characteristics

• supply voltage : 10...30 VDC,

• output voltage : 10...30 VDC,

• output stage : Totem Pole.

Simplified schematic

+10...30 VDC

7

EPSR

13

CTY module

Incremental encoder

+

A

15

IA +24 VDC

9

IA +5 VDC

1

IA –

2

0 VDC

8

Standard 15-pin

SUB-D connector

Schematic for channel connection

Encoder

EPSR*

+

A

B

Z

TSX CTY ••

Standard 15-pin SUB-D

DIN connector

Cable 1

(encoder/TSX CTY •• connection)

9

1

1

9

2

2

10

10

3

3

11

11

4

4

12

12

5

5

13

13

6

6

14

14

(1)

7

7

15

15

8

8

* EPSR = encoder power supply return

If the encoder does not have a power supply return, the EPSR input should be linked on the encoder side to the positive of the power supply.

(1) This link should be made directly if the encoder is isolated from ground.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/19

A

Connection example for incremental encoder with NPN open collector outputs

Encoder characteristics

• supply voltage : 24 VDC

• output voltage : 24 VDC,

• output stage : NPN open collector.

Simplified schematic

+

+10...30 VDC

7

CTY module

EPSR

13

Incremental encoder

Schematic for channel connection

15

IA +24 VDC

9

IA +5 VDC

1

IA –

0 VDC

2

8

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector

Encoder

Z

EPSR*

+

A

B

TSX CTY ••

DIN connector

Cable 1

(encoder/TSX CTY •• connection)

Standard 15-pin SUB-D

1

9

9

1

2

2

10

10

3

3

11

11

4

4

12

12

5

5

13

13

6

6

14

14

(1)

7

7

15

15

8

8

* EPSR = encoder power supply return

If the encoder does not have a power supply return, the EPSR input should be linked on the encoder side to the positive of the power supply.

(1) This link should be made directly if the encoder is isolated from ground.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/20

Setting up counter modules 3

A

Connection example for incremental encoder with PNP open collector outputs

Encoder characteristics

• supply voltage : 24 VDC

• output voltage : 24 VDC,

• output stage : PNP open collector.

Simplified schematic

+24 VDC

7

EPSR

13

CTY module

+

Incremental encoder

15

IA +24 VDC

9

IA +5 VDC

1

IA –

0 VDC

2

8

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector

Schematic for channel connection

Encoder

A

B

Z

EPSR*

+

TSX CTY ••

DIN connector

Cable 1

(encoder/TSX CTY •• connection)

Standard 15-pin SUB-D

1

9

9

1

2

2

10

10

3

3

11

11

4

4

12

12

5

5

13

13

6

6

14

14

(1)

7

7

15

15

8

8

* EPSR = encoder power supply return

If the encoder does not have a power supply return, the EPSR input should be linked on the encoder side to the positive of the power supply.

(1) This link should be made directly if the encoder is isolated from ground.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/21

A

Connection example for serial output or parallel output absolute encoder, via

TELEFAST adaptor ABE-7CPA11 (TSX CTY 2C module only)

Encoder characteristics

• supply voltage : 5 VDC or 10...30 VDC

• output stages : differential line driver.

Simplified schematic

+10...30 VDC

7

CTY module

EPSR

15

13

Alim +

Absolute encoder

Alim -

SSIData +

SSIData -

SSICLK +

SSICLK -

0 VDC

1

2

6

14

8

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector

Schematic for channel connection

DIN connector

Encoder

TSX CTY 2C

Cable 1

(encoder/TSX CTY 2C connection)

SSIData

Standard 15-pin SUB-D

9

1

1

2

9

EPSR*

SSICLK

+

10

11

12

13

14

4

5

6

2

3

5

6

7

3

4

10

11

12

13

14

7

15

15

(1) 8

8

* EPSR = encoder power supply return

If the encoder does not have a power supply return, the EPSR input should be linked on the encoder side to the positive of the power supply.

(1) This link should be made directly if the encoder is isolated from ground.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/22

Setting up counter modules 3

A

3.7

Connection of the sensors to auxiliary inputs and outputs

3.7-1 Connection principle

A TSX CTY 4A module is wired as follows. For a TSX CTY 2A or TSX CTY 2C module, a single TELEFAST sub-base is connected (channel 0 and 1).

TSX CTY 2C TSX CTY 4A TSX CTY 2A

TSX CDP ••2 ribbon cable (1) or TSX CDP ••3 cable (2)

2

24 VDC sensor supply

2

24 VDC sensor supply

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

1 1

Connection : Connection

• encoder power supply (5 VDC or 10...30 VDC) • encoder power supply (5 VDC or 10...30 VDC)

• preset sensor channels 2 and 3 • preset sensor channels 0 and 1

• counter enable sensor channels 2 and 3

• read sensor channels 2 and 3

• counter enable sensor channels 0 and 1

• read sensor channels 0 and 1

• reflex outputs channels 2 and 3 • reflex outputs channels 0 and 1

Notes

• It is not essential but it is advisable to use a discrete TELEFAST connection sub-base in order to facilitate connection of the power supplies, sensors and preactuators to the auxiliary inputs and outputs.

(1) TSX CDP 102 : 1 m long,

TSX CDP 202 : 2 m long,

TSX CDP 302 : 3 m long.

(2) TSX CDP 053 : 0.5 m long,

TSX CDP 103 : 1 m long,

TSX CDP 203 : 2 m long,

TSX CDP 303 : 3 m long,

TSX CDP 503 : 5 m long.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/23

A

Description of the various connection elements

1 TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base : ABE-7H16R20. It is used for rapid connection of the :

• 24 VDC supply for the sensors connected to the auxiliary I/O,

• encoder power supply (for encoder type counting sensors),

• sensors to the auxiliary I/O (preset, enable, read),

• preactuators.

Note :accessory ABE-7BV20 (sold in lots of 5) is used for connecting the commons.

2 TSX CDP ••2 sheathed rolled ribbon cable or TSX CDP ••3 connection cable.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/24

Setting up counter modules 3

A

3.7-2 Connection of sensors and their power supply

These are connected using a TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base, reference ABE-

7H16R20 :

TSX CTY 2C TSX CTY 2A/4A

+ +

24 VDC sensor power supply connection

+ +

Channels

0 and 1

ABE-7H16R20.

TSX CDP ••2 ribbon cable

TSX CDP ••3 or cable

Power supply connection

Encoder supplied at

10...30 VDC

100 101 102 103

10...30 VDC

10...30 VDC encoder reference voltage

ABE-7BV20

(negative common)

Connection of sensors to auxiliary I/O channel 0

IPres0 IEna0/Q2 IRead0 Q3 Q0 Q1 channel 1

IPres1 IEna1/Q2 IRead1 Q3 Q0 Q1

204 104

+

205 105

+

206 106

+

208

+

108 209

+

109 210

+

110

105 305

Mechanical contact

109 309

Preactuator

204 104 205 105 206 106

+ + +

208 108 209 109 210

+ + +

110

Encoder supplied at

5 VDC

100 101 102

105 305

204 104

+

304

205 105

+

305

206 106

+

306

109 309

2-wire PNP proximity sensor

208 108

+

308

209 109

+

309

210 110

+

310

5 VDC

105 305 109 309

3-wire PNP proximity sensor

Note

The connection of channels 2 and 3 of a TSX CTY 4A module is identical to that of channels 0 and 1.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/25

A

3.8

General installation rules

3.8-1 Installation

It is not advisable to connect or disconnect the standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors of TSX

CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules with the encoder and sensor supplies present, as this could damage the encoder. Certain encoders cannot withstand a sudden power-up or simultaneous disconnection of the signals and power supplies.

3.8-2 General wiring instructions

Cross section of wires

Wires of a sufficient cross sectional area must be used in order to avoid voltage drops

(mainly at 5 V) and temperature rises.

Example of voltage drops for encoders with a 5 V power supply and a 100 meter length of cable.

Wire cross section

0.08 mm 2 (28 gauge)

0.12 mm2 (26 gauge)

0.22 mm2 (24 gauge)

0.34 mm 2 (22 gauge)

0.5 mm 2

1 mm 2

-

-

50 mA

1.1 V

0.25 V

0.17 V

0.09 V

Encoder consumption

100 mA

2.2 V

1.4 V

0.8 V

0.5 V

0.34 V

0.17 V

-

-

150 mA

3.3 V

0.75 V

0.51 V

0.24 V

-

-

200 mA

4.4 V

1 V

0.68 V

0.34 V

Connection cables

All cables carrying power supplies to the counting sensors (encoders, proximity sensors, etc) and signals must :

• be kept apart from power cables,

• be shielded with the shielding connected to the mechanical ground on both the PLC and the encoder,

• never carry signals other than counting signals and power supplies relating to the counting sensors.

The module/encoder connecting cable should be as short as possible in order to avoid creating loops causing coupling capacitances which can interfere with operation.

Note :

Position the outward and return lines for a signal in the same cable as the power supplies if necessary. In order to do this, it is preferable to use twisted pair cables.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/26

Setting up counter modules 3

A

3.8-3 Encoder and auxiliary sensor supplies

Encoder supply

This must be :

• reserved exclusively for supplying the encoder, to avoid interference pulses which could disrupt encoders with sensitive electronics,

• as near to the TELEFAST 2 sub-base as possible in order to reduce voltage drops and coupling with other cables,

• protected against short-circuits and overloads by fast blow fuses,

• have sufficient endurance to micro-cuts.

Auxiliary sensor supply

See the general installation rules for discrete modules.

Important

The - 0VDC polarity of the encoder and auxiliary sensor power supplies must be connected to ground ( s ) as close as possible to the power supplies.

Cables carrying supply voltages should have their shielding connected to ground ( s ).

3.8-4 Software installation

Software installation and the language objects associated with the various counting functions are described in the counting manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/27

A

___________________________________________________________________________

3/28

4 Appendix

4.1

TELEFAST 2 connections : ABE-7CPA01

4.1-1 Presentation

The TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base (ABE-7CPA01) transforms a standard 15-pin female SUB-D connector to a screw terminal block connector with :

• 32 terminals on two rows for connecting the various sensors and their power supply,

• 4 terminals for onward connection (2 GND terminals + 2 N1 terminals for special connections),

• 4 terminals for connecting the sensor power supply.

This enables rapid connection of the proximity type sensors to a counter channel on TSX

CTY 2A, TSX CTY 4A and TSX CTY 2C modules.

A

TSX CTY 2A

TSX CTY 4A

TSX CTY 2C

TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m)

ABE-7CPA01

Sensors for counting

A 9-pin SUB-D connector is used to transfer information to an Altivar drive when using this sub-base with analog I/O.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/1

A

4.1-2 Wiring diagram

15 X1

X2

4.1-3 Dimensions and mounting

• Dimensions

67

58 142.4

15

• Mounting

The ABE-7CPA01 connection sub-base is mounted on 35 mm DIN rails.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/2

Appendix 4

A

4.1-4 Availability of counting signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block

Counter channel used with proximity type sensors

Notes

• Each TELEFAST 2 ABE-7CPA01 connection sub-base is supplied with 6 labels which enable each sub-base to be identified individually according to its intended use.

• It is possible to add an optional bar, to provide, for example, a GND common.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/3

A

4.1-5 Correspondence between TELEFAST ABE-7CPA01 terminal blocks and

15-pin SUB-D connectors

30

31

32

27

28

29

24

25

26

20

21

22

23

14

15

16

10

11

12

13

17

18

19

TELEFAST Standard 15-pin screw term. block SUB-D connector

C

(Terminal no.) (Pin no.)

1 2

2

3

1

2

9 4

5

6 10

7

8

9

3

11

4

12

5

13

6

15

14

7

8

TSX CTY 2A / 4A

IA -

IA + 5 V RS 422C

IA -

IA + 24 VDC

Type of signals

TSX CTY 2C

IA -

IA + 5 V RS 422C

IA -

IA + 24 VDC

IB + 5 V RS 422C

IB + 24 VDC

IB -

IZ + 5 V RS 422C

IZ + 24 VDC

IZ -

IB + 5 V RS 422C

IB + 24 VDC

IB -

IZ + 5 V RS 422C

IZ + 24 VDC

IZ -

Encoder power supply return (EPSR)

Reserved

+5VDC encoder supply input

Reserved

+ 10...30 VDC encoder supply input

- 0 VDC encoder supply input

+ 24 V DC sensor supply output

- 0 V DC sensor supply output

+ 24 V DC sensor supply output

___________________________________________________________________________

4/4

Appendix 4

A

4.2

TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base : ABE-7H16R20

4.2-1 Presentation

The TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base (ABE-7H16R20) transforms a 20-pin HE10 connector to a screw terminal block connector for the rapid connection of the sensors and power supplies relating to the auxiliary inputs of TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C counter modules.

TSX CTY 4A

TSX CDP xxx (1)

TSX CTY 2A

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

TSX CDP xxx (1)

TSX CTY 2C

Auxiliary input sensors

TSX CDP xxx (1)

(1) TSX CDP ••2 ribbon cable or TSX CDP ••3 cable.

Note :

TELEFAST 2 connection sub-bases for discrete I/O are described in the discrete I/O installation manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/5

A

4.2-2 Availability of signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block

The terminal block below represents the terminal block of the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base.

(1)

(2)

(1) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base, the position of the jumper defines the polarity of all the

2•• terminals :

• Jumper in position 1 and 2 : terminals 200 to 215 have positive polarity,

• Jumper in position 3 and 4 : terminals 200 to 215 have negative polarity,

(2) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base it is possible to add an optional ABE-7BV20 bar to create a second sensor common (+ or - selected by the user).

Note :

Connection of sensors and power supply on ABE-7H16R20 sub-base is described in the discrete

I/O installation manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/6

Appendix 4

A

4.2-3 Correspondence between TELEFAST ABE-7H16R20 terminal blocks and HE10 connector

TELEFAST screw term. blk

(Terminal no.)

100

101

102

103

20-pin HE10 connector

(Terminal no.)

1

2

3

4

TSX CTY 2A /A

+ 5 VDC

- 0 VDC

+ 10…30 VDC

Type of signals

TSX CTY 2C

+ 5 VDC

- 0 VDC

+ 10…30 VDC

Type of signal

Encoder power supply

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

18

19

20

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

IPres 0/2

IEna 0/2

IRead 0/2

IPres 1/3

IEna 1/3

10...30 VDC encoder reference voltage

IPres 0

IEna 0 / output

Q2 channel 0

IRead 0

Output Q3 chan. 0

IPres1

IEna1 / output

Auxiliary inputs channs 0 / 2

Auxiliary I/O channels

IRead 1/3

Q2 channel 1

IRead 1

Output Q3 chann. 1

1 / 3

Output Q0 chann. 0/2 Output Q0 chann. 0 Reflex outputs

Output Q1 chann. 0/2 Output Q1 chann. 0 channels 0 / 2

Output Q0 chann. 1/3 Output Q0 chann. 1 Reflex outputs

Output Q1 chann. 1/3 Output Q1 chann. 1 channels 1 / 3

Auxiliary I/O supply

Terminals 200 to 215 at + 24 VDC

Terminals 200 to 215 at - 0 VDC

200...215

Connecting sensor commons to :

+ 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 are linked

- 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 are linked

300...315

Terminals may be used as a sensor common on optional ABE-7BV20 bar

___________________________________________________________________________

4/7

A

4.3

TELEFAST 2 connection and adaptor sub-base : ABE-7CPA11

4.3-1 Presentation

The TELEFAST 2 connection and adaptor sub-base ABE-7CPA11 is used to connect parallel output absolute encoders to the TSX CTY 2C counter module. It converts the position value given by the parallel output absolute encoder to serial data. The absolute encoder must be coded in pure binary or Gray with a maximum of 24 data bits.

It is possible to connect 2 parallel output absolute encoders to the same TELEFAST adaptor. Moreover, connecting several ABE-7CPA11 sub-bases (maximum 4) in series can be used to multiplex up to 4 parallel output absolute encoders on the same counter channel (position acquisition).

TSX CTY 2C

TELEFAST

ABE-7CPA11

Parallel output absolute encoder

4.3-2 Physical description

1 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the

TELEFAST sub-base to the TSX CTY 2C module.

2 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting several TELEFAST sub-bases (maximum 4) in series.

3 Screw terminal block for connecting parallel output absolute encoder(s) (maximum 2).

It is possible to distribute power supplies using additional snap on terminal blocks : ABE-7BV10 (10 terminals) or ABE-7BV20 (20 terminals).

1

4 TELEFAST diagnostics indicator lamp. This green indicator lamp is on when the TELEFAST is supplied with power.

4 5

5 Protective fuse (1A fast-blow type) for the 10...30 V supply.

6 Micro-switches for configuring the encoder(s) (number / type, etc).

3

2

6

___________________________________________________________________________

4/8

Appendix 4

A

4.3-3 Characteristics of the TELEFAST sub-base

General characteristics

Parameters

Permissible voltage at 10-30 VDC

Permissible voltage at 5 VDC

Maximum frequency of change of state of least significant bit

Frequency for reading the serial frame

Current consumption (excluding encoders)

Power dissipation

Values

11...30 V

5...6 V

75 kHz

150 kHz ... 1 MHz typically : 90 mA max. : 130 mA typically : 450 mW max. : 1.5 W

Encoder power supply return monitoring :

• on + supply

• on - supply

Insulation resistance

Dielectric strength

Operating temperature

Relative humidity

Storage temperature

Operating altitude

-15 % Vsupply

+15 % Vsupply

> 10 M

at 500 VDC

1000 Vrms. 50 / 60 Hz for 1 min

0...60 °C

5%...95% without condensation

-25 °C...+70 °C

0...2000 m

Characteristics of encoder read inputs (in0 to in23)

Parameters

Logic

Values positive or negative (1)

Compatibility with encoder outputs 11-30 V Totem-pole outputs

5V TTL outputs

11-30 V NPN open collector transistor outputs

Maximum permissible voltage on inputs

Max. length of cable between encoder and TELEFAST

+30 V

200 m (2)

VIL input voltage

VIH input voltage

0 V < VIL < 2.5 V

3.9 V < VIH < 30 V

(1) Positive logic :

Negative logic : voltage < 2.5 V -> state 0, voltage > 3.9 V -> state 1, voltage < 2.5 V -> state 1, voltage > 3.9 V -> state 0.

(2) 50 m max. with encoders with pure binary coding and NPN open collector outputs and derating depending on the length.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/9

A

Characteristics of discrete address inputs (AD0, AD1)

Parameters

Logic

Voltage limit

• max. permissible voltage limit

Nominal values

• voltage

• current

Voltage at ON state

Current at ON state at 11 V

Voltage at OFF state

Current at OFF state

Input impedance for U nominal

Response time

Type of inputs

IEC 1131 conformity

Values

Positive

30 V

34 V (1 hr per 24 hrs)

24 V

7 mA

> 11 V

> 3 mA

< 5 V

< 2 mA

3.6 k

25

µ s...50

µ s resistive type 1

Characteristics of encoder 3-state control outputs (3ST0, 3ST1)

Parameters

Output voltage

Nominal current

Max. voltage drop

Max. current

Protection against overvoltages and short-circuits

Values encoder supply encoder supply / 3 k

< 0.5 V

10 mA no

___________________________________________________________________________

4/10

Appendix 4

A

4.3-4 Connecting the TELEFAST sub-base

Pinout of 15-pin SUB-D connectors

+ – – +

TELEFAST

ABE-7CPA11

DATA+

DATA-

MAE

AD0ME

AD1ME

CLKS+

10...30 VDC

0VDC

Left connector

6

7

3

4

5

1

2

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

8

AD0E

AD1E nc nc

EPSR

CLKS-

5 VDC

DATA+

DATA-

MAS

AD0MES

AD1MES

CLKS+ nc

0VDC

Right connector

1

2

3

9

4

5

7

8

6

12

13

14

15

10

11

AD0ES

AD1ES nc nc

EPSR

CLKSnc

Supply

0 VDC

10...30 VDC

0 VDC

Addressing encoders

• inter-TELEFAST bus (Input) :

AD0E

AD1E

AD0ME

AD1ME

MAE

Encoder power supply return

EPSR

Serial link

• data outputs :

DATA+

DATA-

• clock inputs :

CLKS+

CLKS-

Supply

8

7

15 0 VDC

9

10

4

5

3

Addressing encoders

• inter-TELEFAST bus (Output) :

AD0ES

AD1ES

AD0MES

AD1MES

MAS

Encoder power supply return

13 EPSR

1

2

6

14

Serial link

• data outputs :

DATA+

DATA-

• clock inputs :

CLKS+

CLKS-

8

6

14

1

2

9

10

4

5

3

13

___________________________________________________________________________

4/11

A

Connecting encoders supplied at 10...30 V

24 VDC supply

+ – – +

TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11 local

GND

0 V

Q1

Q0

TSX CTY 2C

(see note)

Connection to cable shielding

Parallel output absolute encoder

Signals Meaning Terminal no.

GND

+10...30V

encoder ground

+ terminal of encoder supply

0V - terminal of encoder supply in0 to in 23 encoder outputs

DEF

3ST0

3ST1

AD0, AD1 encoder fault output encoder 0 output inhibit command (for multiplexing) encoder 1 output inhibit command (for multiplexing) encoder multiplexing command

1...24

25

26

27

28, 30

COM

+EPSR common of signals AD0 and AD1

+EPSR encoder power supply return - (connect to 0 V if no monitor circuit)

32 encoder power supply return + (connect to +10...30 V if no monitor circuit) 29

31

Note : refer to the wiring instructions and recommendations for encoder inputs (section 4.3-5).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/12

Connecting encoders supplied at 5 V

5 VDC supply

+ – – +

TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11

Appendix 4

A local

GND

0 V

Q1

Q0

TSX CTY 2C

(see note)

Connection to cable shielding

Parallel output absolute encoder

Signals Meaning Terminal no.

GND

+5V

0V encoder ground

+ terminal of encoder supply

- terminal of encoder supply in0 to in 23 encoder outputs

DEF encoder fault output

3ST0

3ST1 encoder 0 output inhibit command (for multiplexing) encoder 1 output inhibit command (for multiplexing)

AD0, AD1

COM encoder multiplexing command common of signals AD0 and AD1

+EPSR encoder power supply return + (connect to +5 V if no monitor circuit)

+EPSR encoder power supply return - (connect to 0 V if no monitor circuit)

1...24

25

26

27

28, 30

32

29

31

Note : refer to the wiring instructions and recommendations for encoder outputs (section 4.3-5).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/13

A

Example of multiplexing of encoders supplied at 5 V

+ – – +

TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11

(2)

Parallel output absolute encoders

0 V

Q1

Q0

TSX CTY 2C

(1) to encoder 1 to encoder 0 to encoder 0 or 1

IMPORTANT

For multiplexing, the same type of parallel output encoders must be used :

- same number of data bits,

- same supply (encoders are supplied at either 10...30 VDC, or 5 VDC).

Note : if the encoder supply monitor circuit is not used, the +EPSR terminal (+ encoder power supply return) must be connected to the +10...30 V or +5 V and the -EPSR terminal

(- encoder power supply return) must be connected to the 0 V.

(1) It is not essential to use reflex outputs Q0 and Q1 of the TSX CTY 2C module to address the encoders; this operation can be performed by 2 outputs of a discrete module. In this case, the output common must be connected to the COM input of the TELEFAST ABE-

7CPA11.

(2) The configuration micro-switch must be positioned according to the number of encoders connected to the sub-base (OFF for 1 encoder or ON for 2 encoders).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/14

Appendix 4

A

Connection example : each TSX CTY 2C module channel is connected to a single TELEFAST sub-base

TSX CTY 2C

TELEFAST 0

ABE-7CPA11

Configuration :

1 encoder per sub-base

Channel 0

Channel 1

TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cable

Parallel output absolute encoder

TSX CDP••2 ribbon cable or TSX CDP••3 cable

TELEFAST 1

ABE-7CPA11

Configuration :

2 encoders per sub-base

TELEFAST

ABE-7H16R20

Encoder 1

Encoder 0

Parallel output absolute encoders

Encoder addressing (AD0, COM) (1)

Note

(1) It is not necessary to wire the encoder addressing for the TELEFAST 0 sub-base (channel 0), as it has a default address of 00. Encoder addressing for the TELEFAST 1 sub-base (channel

1) is as follows :

0

1

AD1 AD0 Action

0 0 read encoder 0

1

1

0

1 read encoder 1 no read operation no read operation

___________________________________________________________________________

4/15

A

Connection example : 2 TELEFAST sub-bases are connected on a single channel

TSX CTY 2C

TELEFAST 0

ABE-7CPA11

Channel 1

Configuration :

2 encoders per sub-base

Channel 1

TSX CDP••2 ribbon cable or TSX CDP••3 cable

TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cable

Encoder 0

TELEFAST 1

ABE-7CPA11

Encoder 1

Parallel output absolute encoder

Configuration :

2 encoders per sub-base

TELEFAST

ABE-7H16R20

Encoder 1

Encoder 0

Parallel output absolute encoder

Encoder addressing channel 1 (AD0, AD1, COM) (1)

Note

(1) Encoder addressing is as follows :

0

1

AD1 AD0 Action

0 0 read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 0

1

1

0

1 read encoder 1 of TELEFAST 0 read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 1 read encoder 1 of TELEFAST 1

___________________________________________________________________________

4/16

Appendix 4

A

Connection example : 3 TELEFAST sub-bases are connected on a single channel

TELEFAST 0

ABE-7CPA11 Configuration :

1 encoder per sub-base

TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cable

TSX CTY 2C

Parallel output absolute encoder

TELEFAST 1

ABE-7CPA11

Channel 0

Channel 1

TSX CDP••2 ribbon cable or

TSX CDP••3 cable

Parallel output absolute encoder

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7CPA11

Configuration :

1 encoder per sub-base

Configuration :

2 encoders per sub-base

TELEFAST

ABE-7H16R20

Encoder 1

Encoder 0

Parallel output absolute encoder

Encoder addressing (AD0, AD1, COM) (1)

Note

(1) Encoder addressing is as follows :

0

1

AD1 AD0 Action

0 0 read encoder of TELEFAST 0

1

1

0

1 read encoder of TELEFAST 1 read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 2 read encoder 1 of TELEFAST 2

If, for example, 2 encoders are wired on TELEFAST 0 and one encoder is wired on TELEFAST

2, the addressing becomes : 00-read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 0, 01-read encoder 1 of

TELEFAST 0, 10-read encoder of TELEFAST 1 and 11-read encoder of TELEFAST 2.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/17

A

Connection example : 4 TELEFAST sub-bases are connected on a single channel

TELEFAST 0

ABE-7CPA11

Configuration :

1 encoder per sub-base

TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cable

TSX CTY 2C

Parallel output absolute encoder

TELEFAST 1

ABE-7CPA11

Channel 0

Configuration :

1 encoder per sub-base

TSX CDP••2 ribbon cable or TSX CDP••3 cable

Channel 1

Parallel output absolute encoder

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7CPA11

TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m) or TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) or TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cable

TELEFAST

ABE-7H16R20 Parallel output absolute encoder

TELEFAST 3

ABE-7CPA11

Configuration :

1 encoder per sub-base

Configuration :

1 encoder per sub-base

Parallel output absolute encoder

Encoder addressing (AD0, AD1, COM) (1)

Note

(1) Encoder addressing is as follows :

0

1

AD1 AD0 Action

0 0 read encoder of TELEFAST 0

1

0 read encoder of TELEFAST 1 read encoder of TELEFAST 2

1 1 read encoder of TELEFAST 3

___________________________________________________________________________

4/18

Appendix 4

A

4.3-5 Wiring instructions and recommendations

IMPORTANT

All connections or disconnections on the TELEFAST must be performed

WITH THE POWER OFF (encoders, connection to the counter module, connections between TELEFAST sub-bases).

Connecting TELEFAST 0 to the counter module and daisy-chaining TELEFAST sub-bases

TSX CCP S15 (2.5 m), TSX CCP S15100 (1 m) and TSX CCP S15050 (0.5 m) cables are offered for connecting TELEFAST sub-bases to each other or for connecting

TELEFAST 0 to the TSX CTY 2C module. The user can, however, use longer connections by using the wiring kit, reference TSX CAP S15••, and respecting the following rule if encoders are supplied at 5 V : if the connection between the counter module and the TELEFAST 0 is no longer than 100 m, use a 28-gauge wire (0.08

mm²). If it is > 100 m, use a 22-gauge wire minimum (0.34 mm 2 ). However, to limit the voltage drop in the 0 V, due to the encoder supply current, it is advisable to wire the

0 V in the following way :

24 VDC supply

+

24 V

-

+ – – +

TELEFAST ABE-7CPA11

+24 V encoder 0 V encoder

___________________________________________________________________________

4/19

A

Length of cables between counter module and TELEFAST

The total length of the connection between the counter module and the TELEFAST sub-bases (sum of lengths between the counter channel and the first TELEFAST subbase and between the various TELEFAST sub-bases) must not exceed 200 m, with a maximum cable length between 2 TELEFAST sub-bases of 50 m.

If the total distance between the first and last TELEFAST sub-base exceeds 20 m, a line terminator must be installed on the right-hand connector of the last TELEFAST sub-base, by inserting an end of line plug (resistance of 220

between pins 1 and

2 of the connector).

The following table indicates the clock frequencies for the serial transmission, depending on the total length of the connection :

Cable length Clock frequency for the serial transmission

< 10 m

< 20 m

1 MHz

750 kHz

< 50 m

< 99 m

< 150 m

< 200 m

500 kHz

375 kHz

200 kHz (By default)

150 kHz

Protection of encoder supply

The operating voltage of the encoder(s) connected to the TELEFAST determines whether it must be supplied at 10...30 VDC or 5 VDC. For a 10...30 VDC supply, the protective fuse is integrated in the TELEFAST sub-base (fast-blow type 1 A fuse).

However, if the TELEFAST sub-base is supplied at 5 VDC, the user should provide, in series with the + terminal of the power supply, a fast-blow fuse suitable for the consumption of the TELEFAST sub-base and the encoders connected to it.

Encoder supply voltage monitoring

This function is only valid if a single encoder is connected to the TELEFAST sub-base.

If the encoder supply voltage decreases by more than 15%, the EPSR fault is fed back to the module.

If the encoder does not have an encoder power supply return, the following must be wired :

- the +EPSR terminal of the TELEFAST sub-base to the + terminal of the encoder power supply,

- the -EPSR terminal of the TELEFAST sub-base to the - terminal of the encoder power supply.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/20

Appendix 4

A

Wiring of encoder outputs

If the encoder has positive logic outputs and if there are less than 24, the following rules must be respected :

- wire the encoder outputs on the TELEFAST inputs, from the least significant to the most significant,

- wire the TELEFAST inputs which are not used to the 0 V terminal.

0 V

14-bit encoder

If the encoder has negative logic outputs and if there are less than 24, the following rules must be respected :

- wire the encoder outputs on the TELEFAST inputs, from the least significant to the most significant,

- do not wire the TELEFAST inputs which are not used.

14-bit encoder

___________________________________________________________________________

4/21

A

4.3-6 Configuring the TELEFAST sub-base

The sub-base is configured by positioning the 4 micro-switches, located under the right-hand connector of the sub-base. They are used to inhibit the encoder outputs and to define the number and type of encoders connected to the TELEFAST sub-base.

+ – – +

Type of encoders connected to the TELEFAST sub-base

Number of encoders connected to the TELEFAST sub-base

Inhibition of encoder outputs

ON

OFF

Inhibition of encoder outputs

This micro-switch is used to select the active state of the 2 inhibit commands (3ST0 and

3ST1) for the encoder outputs.

ON

The encoder outputs are high impedance with a 3ST0 or 3ST1 command active at 0.

OFF

ON The encoder outputs are high impedance with a 3ST0 or 3ST1 command active at 1.

OFF

Number of encoders connected to the TELEFAST

This micro-switch is used to define the number of encoders connected to the TELEFAST sub-base (1 or 2 parallel output absolute encoders).

ON

One encoder is connected to the sub-base.

OFF

ON

Two encoders are connected to the sub-base.

OFF

If, for a counter channel, there is an odd number of encoders connected and there are

2 or 3 TELEFAST sub-bases connected in series, the TELEFAST sub-bases must be

configured so that the total number of encoders is 4.

For 2 TELEFAST sub-bases

Hardware configuration TELEFAST Address

(number of encoders per micro-switch

TELEFAST sub-base) 0 1 AD0 AD1

Action

2 encoders on TELEFAST 0 ON and

1 encoder on TELEFAST 1

ON 0

0

1

1

0 Read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 0

1 Read encoder 1 of TELEFAST 0

0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1

1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1

1 encoder on TELEFAST 0 ON and

2 encoders on TELEFAST 1

ON 0

0

1

0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0

1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0

0 Read encoder 0 of TELEFAST 1

1 1 Read encoder 1 of TELEFAST 1

___________________________________________________________________________

4/22

Appendix 4

A

Case of 3 TELEFAST sub-bases

Hardware configuration TELEFAST Address

(number of encoders per micro-switch

TELEFAST sub-base) 0 1 2 AD0 AD1

1 encoder on TELEFAST 0 ON OFF OFF 0

1 encoder on TELEFAST 1 0 and 1

1 encoder on TELEFAST 2 1

Action

0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0

1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0

0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1

1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 2

1 encoder on TELEFAST 0 OFF ON OFF 0

1 encoder on TELEFAST 1 and

1 encoder on TELEFAST 2

0

1

1

0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0

1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1

0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1

1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 2

1 encoder on TELEFAST 0 OFF OFF ON 0

1 encoder on TELEFAST 1 0 and 1

1 encoder on TELEFAST 2 1

0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 0

1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 1

0 Read encoder of TELEFAST 2

1 Read encoder of TELEFAST 2

Type of encoders connected to TELEFAST

These micro-switches are used to define the type of encoders connected to the

TELEFAST sub-base. The following tables indicate the performance of the encoder /

TELEFAST connection, depending on the code selected using the micro-switches :

Encoders with positive logic outputs,

Totem-pole, TTL and NPN open collector,

Gray code

Max. length encoder /

TELEFAST

Max. frequency of change of least significant bit

ON

50 m 75 kHz

OFF

Encoders with negative logic outputs,

Totem-pole, TTL and NPN open collector,

Gray code

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Max. length encoder /

TELEFAST

50 m

100 m

200 m

Max. frequency of change of least significant bit

75 kHz

40 kHz

5 kHz

___________________________________________________________________________

4/23

A

Encoders with positive or negative logic outputs,

NPN open collector, binary coded

ON

OFF

Max. length encoder /

TELEFAST

10 m

Max. frequency of change of least significant bit

40 kHz

ON

OFF

30 m 20 kHz

ON

OFF

50 m 5 kHz

Note

For encoders with positive logic, TTL and Totem-pole outputs, it is possible to improve these performance levels, without exceeding the recommendations of encoder manufacturers.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/24

Appendix 4

A

4.4

TSX TAP S15•• wiring accessories

4.4-1 Presentation

TSX TAP S15•• wiring accessories are used to connect an incremental encoder to the counter module, using a special cable (supplied by the encoder manufacturer).

• the TSX TAP S1505 accessory is used to connect an incremental encoder supplied at 5 VDC : encoder with RS 422 line driver outputs,

• the TSX TAP S1524 accessory is used to connect an incremental encoder supplied at 24 VDC : encoder with Totem Pole or open collector PNP outputs.

The TSX TAP S15•• is fitted with 2 connectors :

• a 12-pin female DIN connector, numbered in an anti-clockwise direction. This connector is used to connect the encoder, via a cable supplied by the encoder manufacturer,

• a standard 15-pin DIN connector for connecting to the counter module, via a TSX CCP

S15 cable.

The TSX TAP S15•• can be mounted on a DIN rail, using the bracket supplied with the product, or fitted through an enclosure wall (in the second case, a seal supplied with the product ensures the cabinet is dust and damp-proof).

Incremental encoder fitted with a 12-pin

DIN connector TSX TAP S15 ••

Special cable supplied by the encoder manufacturer

M

1 9 8

2 10 12 7

3

11

4 5

6

F

8 9 1

7 12 10 2

6

11

3

5 4

M

8 9 1

7 12 10 2

6

11

3

5 4

F

1 9 8

2 10 12 7

3

11

4 5

6

___________________________________________________________________________

4/25

A

4.4-2 Mounting the TSX TAP S15••

Mounting on Telequick plate

The bracket supplied is used to fix the TSX TAP S15•• to an AM1-PA••• type pre-slotted plate or to any other support.

Mounting into an enclosure wall

The TSX TAP S15•• can be mounted into an enclosure wall using its fixing nut. The seal supplied with this accessory ensures the enclosure is dust and damp-proof.

max thickness = 5mm seal drill hole = Ø 37mm

___________________________________________________________________________

4/26

Dimensions

70.4

5.5

27.4

43

Appendix 4

A

___________________________________________________________________________

4/27

A

4.4-3 Connection of an encoder using the TSX TAP S1505 accessory

Connecting the encoder via a TSX TAP S1505 accessory requires a special cable

(supplied by the encoder manufacturer).

The TSX TAP S1505 pinout is as follows :

TSX TAP S1505

A+ 5 V

1 5

TSX CCP S15

9

10

1

2

2

10

A- 5 V

B+ 5 V

6

8

Special cable supplied by the encoder manufacturer

3

B- 5 V

11 11 1

12

13

4

5

4

5

Z+ 5 V

Z- 5 V

3

4

3

1 9

11

8

2 10 12 7

6

4 5

6

14

13

EPSR

2

7

15

15

+5 V

12

8

0V

8 10

___________________________________________________________________________

4/28

Appendix 4

A

4.4-4 Connection of an encoder using the TSX TAP S1524 accessory

Connecting the encoder via a TSX TAP S1524 accessory requires a special cable

(supplied by the encoder manufacturer).

The TSX TAP S1524 pinout is as follows :

TSX CCP S15

9

10

11

12

13

1

2

3

4

5

3

TSX TAP S1524

B+ 24V

A+ 24V

9

12

7

13

8

5

Z+ 24V

3

Encoder power supply return

24V

12

2

3

1 9 8

2 10 12 7

11

6

4 5

Special cable supplied by the encoder manufacturer

6

14

5

7

15

8

8

0V

11 10

This type of connection is compatible with encoders supplied at 24V (Heidenheim,

Hengstler, Codéchamp, Ivo, Ideacod, etc).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/29

A

4.5

Cables

4.5-1 TSX CDP 301 and TSX CDP 501 preformed cables

Preformed cables (or ribbon cables) are used to connect sensors, preactuators or terminals directly to counter modules. They consist of 20 wires, 22 gauge (0.34 mm 2 ) and are fitted with an HE10 connector at one end. The flying leads at the other end are color-coded according to DIN 47100 standard.

The correspondence between the wire color and the pin number of the HE10 connector is as follows :

Cable :

TSX CDP 301

TSX CDP 501 length :

3 m

5 m

HE10

1 2

3

5

7

9 10

11 12

13 14

4

6

8

15 16

17 18

19 20 white brown green yellow gray pink blue red black purple gray-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown

TSX CTY 2A/4A TSX CTY 2C

+5 VDC

0 VDC

+10...30 VDC nc

IPres0

IEna0

IRead0 nc

IPres1

IEna1

IRead1 nc

Q0

Q1

Q0

Q1

+24 VDC

0 VDC

+24 VDC

0 VDC

+5 VDC

0 VDC

+10...30 VDC nc

IPres0

IEna0 / Q2

Iread0

Q3

IPres1

IEna1 / Q2

IRead1

Q3

Q0

Q1

Q0

Q1

+24 VDC

0 VDC

+24 VDC

0 VDC chann.0

(or 2) chann.1

(or 3) chann.0

(or 2) chann.1

(or 3)

___________________________________________________________________________

4/30

Appendix 4

A

4.5-2 TSX CDP 102, TSX CDP 202 and TSX CDP 302 ribbon cables

These sheathed, rolled ribbon cables are used to connect the HE10 connector of a counter module to a TELEFAST 2 connection interface (1). They consist of a rolled and sheathed ribbon cable with 28-gauge wires (0.08 mm 2 ), fitted at each end with a HE10 connector.

Given the small wire cross-section, it is recommended to use these preformed connection cables only for low current inputs or outputs (<100 mA per input or output).

3 lengths of preformed connection cable are offered :

TSX CDP 102 : length 1 meter,

TSX CDP 202 : length 2 meters,

TSX CDP 302 : length 3 meters.

4.5-3 TSX CDP 053 / 103 / 203 / 303 / 503 connection cable

These connection cables are used to connect the HE10 connector of a counter module to a TELEFAST 2 connection interface (1). They consist of a cable with 22-gauge wires

(0.34 mm 2 ), fitted at each end with a moulded HE10 connector.

These cables can be used for higher currents (< 500 mA) than the ribbon cables.

5 lengths of connection cable are offered :

TSX CDP 053 : length 0.5 meter,

TSX CDP 103 : length 1 meter,

TSX CDP 203 : length 2 meters,

TSX CDP 303 : length 3 meters,

TSX CDP 503 : length 5 meters.

(1) see sections 3.7 and 4.2

___________________________________________________________________________

4/31

A

4.6

Module display

TSX CTY 2A / 4A / 2C modules have indicator lamps on the front panel which display the status of the module and the counter channels :

• Module status lamps (RUN, ERR, I/O)

These 3 indicator lamps give information on the module operating mode :

- RUN indicates the module is operating,

- ERR signals an internal module fault,

- I/O signals an external module fault or application fault,

• Channel status lamps (CH.)

2 or 4 indicator lamps to display and diagnose the status of each module channel.

CH2

CH3

CH0 RUN

CH1 I / O

ERR

I/O

Status On

Indic. lamps

RUN Module running.

ERR

I/O

CH

.

TSX CTY 2A / 2C :

CH0 and CH1

TSX CTY 4A :

CH0, CH1, CH2,

CH3

Internal module fault :

. module failure.

External fault :

. wiring fault,

. encoder supply fault,

. measurement overrun.

Application fault.

The channel is operating

/

/

Flashing

Communication fault or waiting for configuration.

Off

Module faulty or off.

No fault.

No fault.

The channel is not operating The channel is faulty correctly due to The channel is not configured

. an internal fault or is incorrectly configured.

. an external fault,

. a communication fault

. an application fault.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/32

TSX CAY axis control modules

Installation

Contents

Part B

Section

1 Presentation

1.1

Description

1.1-1 General

1.1-2 Physical description

2 Functions

2.1

Functions

3 Setup 3/1

3.1

Setup

3.1-1 Basic configuration required

3.1-2 Installation procedure

3.1-3 General wiring instructions

3.2

Choice of encoders

3.2-1 Output interface

3.2-2 Encoder power supply

3.2-3 Shielding

3.3

Connecting the speed reference signals

3.3-1 Signal referencing

3.3-2 Connecting using a TSX CAP S9

3.3-3 Connecting using a TSX CDP 611 cable

3.3-4 Connecting to terminals with the TELEFAST pre-wired system

3.3-5 TAP MAS connection box

3.3-6 Connecting speed drives using the TAP MAS connection box

3/6

3/8

3/9

3/4

3/4

3/4

3/5

3/1

3/1

3/1

3/2

3/2

3/2

3/3

3/3

3.4

Connecting counter signals

3.4-1 Signal referencing

3.4-2 Connecting an incremental encoder

3/10

3/10

3/11

___________________________________________________________________________

B/1

Page

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2

2/1

2/1

B

B TSX CAY axis control modules

Installation

Contents

Part B

Section

3.4-3 Connecting an SSI absolute encoder

3.4-4 Connecting encoder supplies

Page

3/12

3/13

3.5

Wiring accessories

3.5-1 Encoder connection accessories

3.5-2 Mounting the TSX TAP S15 05

3/14

3/14

3/16

3.6

Connecting sensors, preactuators and supplies without a speed drive 3/20

3.6-1 Signal referencing

3.6-2 TELEFAST connection and wiring accessories

3/20

3/22

3.6-3 Signal availability on the TELEFAST screw terminal block 3/23

3.6-4 Connecting via TSX CDP 301 or 501 cable 3/26

3.6-5 Wiring recommendations 3/27

3.7

Connecting speed drive monitoring signals

3.7-1 Signal referencing

3.7-2 Connecting using the TELEFAST pre-wired system

3.7-3 Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector

3.8

Electrical characteristics of the module

3.8-1 General characteristics

3.8-2 Characteristics of the analog outputs

3.8-3 Characteristics of the counter inputs

3.8-4 Characteristics of auxiliary inputs

3.8-5 Characteristics of the reflex outputs Q0

3.8-6 Monitoring the sensor / preactuator voltage

3.8-7 Characteristics of the speed drive monitoring inputs

3.8-8 Characteristics of the relay outputs

3.9

Module display

3/29

3/29

3/30

3/31

3/32

3/32

3/33

3/33

3/36

3/37

3/38

3/39

3/40

3/41

4 Appendix 4/1

4.1

Appendix 4/1

___________________________________________________________________________

B/2

1.1

Description

1.1-1 General

TSX CAY 2

TSX CAY 4

1 Presentation B

TSX CAY 33 speed drive motor encoder

The axis control and servo-loop positioning range for TSX Premium PLC is designed for machines which require high-performance motion control together with simultaneous sequential control via a PLC.

TSX CAY 21 (2 axes) and TSX CAY 41 (4 axes) modules are multiaxis control modules which are used to control movements on an independent, linear and limited axis.

TSX CAY 22 (2 axes)and TSX CAY 42 (4 axes) modules are multiaxis control modules which are used to control movements on an independent, circular and infinite axis.

TSX CAY 33 (3 axes) modules are multiaxis control modules which are used to control movements on on 2 or 3 synchronized axes (linear interpolation).

Terminology :

• The term TSX CAY covers the axis control range

• The reference TSX CAY2• refers to all TSX CAY 21 and 22 modules

• The reference TSX CAY4• refers to TSX CAY 41 and 42 modules

These standard (TSX CAY2•) or double (TSX CAY 4• and TSX CAY 33) format modules can be inserted in all the available slots of a PLC configuration (TSX, PMX or PCX).

To ensure position measurement, an encoder, which may be one of several types, is wired on each of the channels :

• incremental encoder, type RS 422/485

• incremental encoder, type 5V totem pole

• SSI serial absolute encoder

1/1

B

1.1-2 Physical description

1 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the axis 0 encoder.

2 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the axis 1 encoder.

3 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the axis 2 encoder.

4 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the axis 3 encoder.

5 9-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the speed references :

6 HE10 connector(s) for connecting :

• auxiliary inputs : reference point cam emergency stop recalibration

• auxiliary outputs,

• external power supplies (encoders and sensors).

7 HE10 connector for connecting speed controller control I/O.

8 Screw for fixing the module in its position.

9 Rigid casing to locate the module into its slot.

10 Module diagnostics indicator lamps :

• module diagnostics :

- green RUN indicator lamp : indicates module operating mode

- red ERR indicator lamp : indicates internal fault

- red I/O indicator lamp : indicates external fault or application fault.

• channel diagnostics :

- green CHx indicator lamp : indicates channel diagnostics

TSX CAY 2 •

TSX CAY 4 •

TSX CAY 33

1

5

2

6

7

8

9

7

6

6

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

3

1

5

4

8

9

10

7

10

3

1

5

4

2

8

9

10

2 Functions

B

2.1

Functions

Block diagram of an axis control system

Processor TSX CAY module

Application

Encoder input

Configuration

+ adjustment

%K, %M

Configuration

Parameters

Adjustment

Setpoint

Servo loop

SMOVE function

%Q/%QW

%I/%IW

Processing

Speed drive output

Processing of auxiliary I/O

RP cam input

Event input

Recalibration input

Emergency stop input

Speed drive fault input

Speed drive enable relay output

Auxiliary output

Axis control modules provide the following functions for each axis :

• Inputs

- input for reading position measurements : incremental encoder, type RS 485 or 5V totem pole absolute encoder, type SSI serial interface, 16 to 25 data bits

- machine reference point input

- event input

- speed drive fault input

- recalibration input

- emergency stop input

• Outputs

- isolated analog output ± 10V, resolution 13 bits + sign, to control the speed drives

- speed drive enable relay output

- auxiliary solid state output

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

B

Processing commands :

Each movement, controlled by the PLC sequential program, is described by an SMOVE movement command function in PL7 language. The TSX CAY 21/41 module uses this

SMOVE command to calculate a position / speed trajectory.

PL7 screens make it easy to configure, adjust and debug the axes.

Configuring the axes

The configuration screen is used to enter the parameters required to adapt the module operation to the machine characteristics. These parameters are : type of encoder, position limits, maximum speed, etc. They cannot be modified by the program. There is no default configuration.

Adjusting the axes

The parameters offered in the adjustment screen are associated with operation of the axes. The parameters are adjusted online or offline.

The operating parameters are :

- corrected resolution

- motion control : deviation, recalibration, overspeed, etc.

- stop control : time, speed, target window

- position loop : position gain, feedforward cœfficient, offset

- command : soft limits, acceleration, acceleration profile

- manual mode parameter : speed, reference point value, etc.

These parameters can be modified by the program.

Debugging

The debug screen can only be accessed online. It is used to control and observe axis behavior.

The data and commands differ depending on the operating mode selected :

- automatic mode :

Manual mode

- direct drive mode

- measurement mode (Off)

The upper area of the screen gives information about the module operating status and its diagnostics. The lower area of the screen gives access to the commands and information about the operation of movements, I/O, faults, etc.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/2

3 Setup

3.1

Setup

3.1-1 Basic configuration required

Servomotor axis control modules can be installed in any available slot in a Premium (TSX,

PMX or PCX) PLC configuration, provided they use no more than :

B

Processors

TSX P57 102 / TPMX P57 102 / TPCX 57 1012

TSX P57 202 / TPMX P57 202

TSX P57 252

TSX P57 302

TSX P57 352 / TPMX P57 352 / TPCX 57 3512

TSX P57 402

TSX P57 452 / TPMX P57 452

No. of "app-specific" chans managed

8

24

24

32

32

48

48

(*) All the channels of an application-specific module are called "application-specific" channels

(counter module, axis control module, etc). TSX CAY 2 modules comprise 2 "application-specific" channels, TSX CAY 4 modules comprise 4 "application-specific" channels and TSX CAY 33 modules comprise 3 "application-specific" channels.

Note: TSX CAY 22/42 and 33 modules are not compatible with the former TSX P57 10 and

TSX P57 20 processors.

The power supply for a rack must be chosen according to the number of modules installed.

3.1-2 Installation procedure

It is possible to install or remove a module without switching off the supply voltage to the rack. The module design enables this operation to be executed while powered up to ensure that another device remains available for use.

Connection or disconnection of connectors with sensor supplies is, however, not recommended, as certain encoders cannot tolerate such handling. The auxiliary I/O connectors can be disconnected while powered up without damaging the module.

Nevertheless, for the safety of personnel it is recommended that auxiliary supplies are switched off before any disconnection.

The module and connector fixing screws must be tightened correctly in order to obtain good electrical contacts, thus ensuring good protection against electrostatic and electromagnetic interference.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/1

B

3.1-3 General wiring instructions

The sensor and actuator supplies must be protected against overloads or overvoltages by fast-blow fuses.

Use wires with an adequate cross-section to avoid line voltage drops or overheating.

Keep sensor and actuator cables away from any source of radiation caused by high-power electrical circuit switching.

All cables connecting absolute or incremental encoders must be shielded. Shielding must be of high quality and connected to the machine ground at both the module and encoder ends. There must be continuity along the entire length of the connections. Only encoder signals should be carried on the cable.

For performance reasons, module auxiliary inputs have short response times and it is thus important that these inputs have an adequate independent supply to ensure that the module continues to operate correctly in the event of brief power outage. It is recommended that regulated supplies are used as they ensure the consistency of actuator and sensor response times. The 0V supply must be connected to the machine ground as near as possible to the supply output.

3.2

Choice of encoders

3.2-1 Output interface

The output interfaces of incremental encoders or pulse generators are :

• RS 422/485 standard output, two push-pull complementary outputs per signal

• 5V Totem Pole output, two push-pull complementary outputs.

The SSI-type serial absolute encoders have a standard RS485 interface for clock and data signals.

We recommend using an encoder with an opto type "CLOCK" signal input stage.

It is possible to connect encoders of different types to the same module. For example, an incremental encoder on channel 0 and an SSI absolute encoder on channel 1.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/2

Setup 3

3.2-2 Encoder power supply

The module is designed to supply either 5V or 24V to the encoders. It is possible to supply a mix of supply voltages to the module channels.

Incremental encoders generally have a 5V supply.

SSI-type absolute encoders often have a 24V supply (10/30V).

5V encoder supply : maximum voltage drop

It is necessary in this case to take into account the line voltage drop, which depends on the cable length and the encoder consumption for a given wire gauge.

Example for a 100m cable :

Wire cross-section

Encoder consumption

28-gauge = 0.08mm

2

22-gauge = 0.34 mm 2

0.5 mm 2

1 mm 2

Voltage drop for a 100m cable

50mA 100mA

1.1V

0.25V

2.2V

0.5V

0.17V

0.09V

0.34V

0.17V

150mA

3.3V

0.75V

0.51V

0.24V

200mA

4.4V

1V

0.68V

0.34V

24V encoder supply

This type of encoder is recommended as there is no need for a precise supply (10V/30V).

With a 24V power supply these encoders can use a very long cable, and the voltage drop along the cable is very small. This is the case with SSI-type serial link encoders.

If an SSI-type 24V serial absolute encoder is used it is not necessary to connect it to the 5V supply.

The 24V supply must be reserved for the encoders. The supplies must be able to operate independently for a sufficient length of time to power the encoder during microbreaks

(•10ms).

B

3.2-3 Shielding

To ensure correct operation when the environment is subject to interference, it is necessary to choose an encoder with a metal casing referenced to machine ground of the connected equipment. The encoder must provide ground connection to the connection cable shielding.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/3

B

3.3

Connecting the speed reference signals

3.3-1 Signal referencing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CAY 4 CAY 2 CAY 33

Vref0+

Vref0-

Vref1+

Vref1-

Vref2+

Vref2-

Axis 0

Axis1

Axis 2

Vref3+

Vref3-

Axis 3

GND-ANA

(common)

Axis 0

Axis1 nc

Axis 0

Axis1

Axis 2 nc

GND-ANA

(common) nc

GND-ANA

(common)

Male connector seen from wiring side

Connection of speed references :

There are four types of connection

• wiring with TSX CAP S9 connector and cover

• using a TSX CDP 611 cable

• wiring with output on terminals with TELEFAST ABE-7CPA01

• wiring with output to TAP MAS (distribution box)

3.3-2 Connecting using a TSX CAP S9

The user makes the connection by soldering directly onto the 9-pin Sub-D connector as shown in 3.3-1. Ensure that the cable shielding is correctly tightened onto the connector cover.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/4

Setup 3

3.3-3 Connecting using a TSX CDP 611 cable

This preformed cable consists of a 9-pin Sub-D connector for connection to the

TSX CAY 21/41 module end with flying leads at the other end. 6m long, it consists of

24-gauge wires which correspond to the pins on the Sub-D connector. It is used to connect devices directly to the module. The various signals are identified using a color code.

The shielding must be connected to the machine ground of the connected device.

B

TSX CDP 611 black blue white orange red pin

1

6

2

7

3 yellow green violet

8

4

9 brown

5 signal

Vref0+

Vref0axis 0

Vref1+

Vref1-

Vref2+

Vref2-

Vref3+

Vref3-

GND-ANA

Shielding axis 1 axis 2 axis 3

The TSX CDP 611 cable is 6m long.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/5

B

3.3-4 Connecting to terminals with the TELEFAST pre-wired system

The TELEFAST 2 system is a range of products used for rapid connection of modules in the TSX Micro and TSX Premium ranges. This system replaces screw terminals and provides a single-wire remote connection.

It is necessary to connect speed references to terminals when the speed drives are not close to each other. The TELEFAST pre-wired system simplifies setup by giving access to signals via screw terminals. The module is connected to the TELEFAST (reference

ABE-7CPA01) via a cable fitted with a 9-pin Sub-D connector at the module end and a

15-pin Sub-D connector at the TELEFAST end. This cable may either be : TSX CXP213 or TSX CXP 613.

TSX CXP 213

TSX CXP 613

+ + – –

ABE-7CPA01

TSX CXP 213 cable : l = 2m

TSX CXP 613 cable : l = 6m

GND 6 8 5 10 12 11 14 16 15 18 20 19 21 23

Connection to

GND-ANA

(terminals 5,

11, 15 and 19)

Speed drive with

2-wire inputs ref c o m m o n

GND

+ –

Vref0

+ –

Vref1

+ –

Vref2

+ –

Vref3

TSX CAY 41 extension

Speed drive with differential inputs common (0V) ref– ref+

GND

___________________________________________________________________________

3/6

Setup 3

Correspondence between Sub-D connector pins and TELEFAST terminals

18

19

20

21

22

11

12

14

15

16

23

24

26

28

30

32

5

6

8

10

TELEFAST screw terminal

(Terminal no.)

2

4

10

3

11

4

12

5

13

6 nc

14 nc nc nc nc nc

15-pin Sub-D connector

(Pin no.)

1

2

1

6

2

8

4

7

3

9-pin Sub-D connector for the

TSX CAY module

9

5

Type of signal

Vref0+

Vref0-

Vref1+

Vref1-

Vref2+

Vref2-

Vref3+

Vref3connect to terminal 23

GND-ANA

Note : nc = not connected

Terminal 23 of the lower TELEFAST terminal block (GND-ANA) must be connected to terminal 21 in order to distribute the GND-ANA to terminals 5, 11, 15 and 19.

B

___________________________________________________________________________

3/7

B

3.3-5 TAP MAS connection box

The connection box is used to assign the speed references from each speed drive to particular port, enabling simple connection of several speed drives while ensuring good ground continuity.

Dimensions and fixing :

The TSX TAP MAS box is installed on an AM1 PA-type pre-slotted plate or on a DIN rail with an LA9 D09976 fixing plate using two M3x8 or M3x10 screws.

AM1-PA...

AM1-DE/ED =

2 x Ø 5,5

50 =

___________________________________________________________________________

3/8

Setup 3

3.3-6 Connecting speed drives using the TAP MAS connection box

NUM MDLA modular speed drives can be connected to the TSX CAY module using a TSX TAP MAS connection box. Setup is simplified by the use of predefined cables and the connection box which directs the voltage references of the different axes in a simple manner.

Modular speed drive

NUM MDLA

TSX CAY

B

TSX CXP 223

J3

TSX TAP MAS

TSX CXP 213/613

Cables :

TSX CXP 223 : length = 2.5m

TSX CXP 213 : length = 2.5m

TSX CXP 613 : length = 6m male

TSX CXP 223

9-pin Sub-D

1 Vref +

6 Vref -

5 GND-ANA male

25-pin Sub-D

5 Vref +

18 Vref -

6 GND-ANA

9-pin Sub-D

1 Vref +

6 Vref -

5 GND-ANA male

TSX CDP 611 black ref + blue ref brown GND-ANA shielding

___________________________________________________________________________

3/9

B

3.4

Connecting counter signals

To ensure position measurement, TSX CAY modules are fitted with connectors which enable an incremental encoder or SSI absolute encoder to be directly connected to each channel. Each channel may be fitted with an encoder of a different type.

3.4-1 Signal referencing

TSX CAY modules can be connected either to incremental encoders or to absolute encoders with SSI-type serial link. In configuration mode the following functions are available.

• Two types of interface can be used for incremental encoders :

- RS 422/RS485 outputs with two complementary outputs per signal,

- 5V Totem Pole outputs,

• SSI absolute encoder with RS 485 standard interface.

A 15-pin Sub-D connector is assigned to each channel. It is also used to supply power to the encoder. These supplies are generated via the HE10 connector discrete + supply. The encoder + supply return signal from the encoder enables accidental disconnection of the encoder to be detected.

SSI data+/A+

SSI data-/A-

Z+

Z-

CLKSSI+

Encoder + supply (10...30V)

Encoder - supply (0V)

7

8

11

12

13

14

15

9

10

5

6

3

4

1

2

B+

B+

B-

Encoder + supply return

CLKSSI-

5V encoder supply

1 2

5 V

0 V

10...30 V encoder

3 4 0 V supplies

___________________________________________________________________________

3/10

Connections :

Incremental encoder input A+ input Ainput Z+ input Z-

SSI absolute encoder SSI data+

SSI data-

5V encoder supply

+ supply (5V) 15

1

2

4

5

1

2

Encoder supply (10-30V)

+ supply (10-30V)7 input B+ input B-

10

11 encoder 13 supply return

CLKSSI+ 6

CLKSSI14

- supply (0V) 8

- supply (0V) 8

Setup 3

B

3.4-2 Connecting an incremental encoder

The interface is RS 422 / RS 485 or totem pole type

TSX CAY encoder supply return

10-30 V

5 V

0 V

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

4

2

1

3

5

6

8

12

10

ENCODER (*)

A+

A-

B+

B-

Z+

Z-

+ supply return

+ supply

- supply

(*) standard pin-out of an encoder with a 12-pin DIN connector.

Each signal (A+,A- for example) must be connected by a twisted pair. To reduce line voltage drops, it is recommended that each supply point is connected through a pair. The cable shielding must be connected to the machine ground at each end.

!

The DIN connector encoder + supply input must be connected to the 10-30V supply wire or to the 5V wire depending on the type of encoder used.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/11

B

3.4-3 Connecting an SSI absolute encoder encoder supply return

10...30 V

5 V

0 V

3

4

5

1

2

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

ENCODER

Data+

Data-

+ supply return (*)

CLKSSI+

CLKSSI-

+ supply

- supply

!

The encoder supply must be connected to pin number 15 or 7 of the Sub-D connector depending on the encoder supply voltage.

(*) + supply return : encoder output which sends the supply voltage to the module enabling the module to detect the presence of the encoder.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/12

Setup 3

B

3.4-4 Connecting encoder supplies

+ + – –

Connection of 24 VDC auxiliary input sensor supply

+ + – –

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

TSX CDP053 / 503 cable

102 101 100 101

Cable : length :

TSX CDP 053 : 0.5m

TSX CDP 103 : 1m

TSX CDP 203 : 2m

TSX CDP 303 : 3m

TSX CDP 503 : 5m

24 V supply

+24 V

0 V

5 V supply

+5 V

0 V

Important : the maximum length of the wires between the supply outputs and the

TELEFAST connecting pins must be less than 0.5m.

Only one supply is necessary if the same type of encoder is used on both channels.

Fuses :

This module has as standard several systems to protect against wiring errors and accidental short-circuits on the cable, such as :

• inversion of supply polarity,

• inversion of 5V <- -> 10/30V supplies,

• 10/30V short-circuit on the CLOCK signal of the serial link.

As the module cannot withstand for any length of time, the fuses must blow very quickly.

The fuses must therefore be "fast blow" type with 1A maximum rating. Supplies must have a limit current at such a level that the fuse can blow at the correct point.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/13

B

3.5

Wiring accessories

3.5-1 Encoder connection accessories

A number of accessories are available to simplify setup and installation. These accessories are used for prewiring the installation.

TSX CAP S15 cover kits with a 15-pin Sub-D connector enable the user to make a direct link to the installation. To simplify installation, the TSX TAP S15 05 provides an interface between the Sub-D connector and the 12-pin DIN connector. This accessory can be fitted on a DIN rail using clips, or in the wall of an enclosure with a seal and locknut. A 2.5m

TSX CCP S15 cable is used for connection to the module.

Examples :

TSX CAP S15

Incremental or absolute encoder

Incremental or absolute encoder

TSX CAP S15

5V RS 422 incremental encoder

5V RS 422 incremental encoder

TSX TAP S15 05

TSX CCP S15

These accessories provide good signal and shielding continuity in adverse conditions.

The encoder connection cables are generally offered by the encoder suppliers.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/14

Setup 3

Precision with regard to FRB type 12-pin connectors

The pins on these connectors are numbered in two different ways. Most encoders have an integrated 12-pin base which is numbered in an anti-clockwise direction. The

TSX TAP S15 has a 12-pin female connector numbered in an anti-clockwise direction.

All user leads must be fitted with connectors numbered in a clockwise direction, in order that the pin numbers correspond exactly during wiring.

B

Encoder with anti-

clockwise socket connectors

User lead base housing

M

3

1 9

11

8

2 10 12 7

6

4 5

F

8 9 1

7 12 10 2

6

11

3

5 4 clockwise anti-clockwise

M

8 9 1

7 12 10 2

6

11

3

5 4

F

3

1 9

11

8

2 10 12 7

6

4 5

Pinout of the DIN and 15-pin Sub-D connectors on the TSX TAP S15 05

DIN SUB-D

1

Pin Signal Pin

B11

2 Supply return 13

3

4

5

6

7

Z+

Z-

A+

Anc

4

5

1

2

8

9

10

11

B+ nc

0V nc

10

8

Shielding must be continuous along the entire length of the connections, which must be connected to the machine ground at both ends.

12 5V 15

___________________________________________________________________________

3/15

B

3.5-2 Mounting the TSX TAP S15 05

Mounting on Telequick plate

The bracket supplied is used to fix the TSX TAP S15 05 to an AM1-PA ... type pre-slotted plate or to any other support.

Mounting through the wall of an enclosure

The TSX TAP S15 05 can be fitted through the wall of an enclosure using its fixing nut.

The seal ensures dust and damp protection between the inside and the outside.

max thickness = 5mm seal cut-out = Ø 37mm

___________________________________________________________________________

3/16

Dimensions

70.4

5.5

27.4

43

Setup 3

B

___________________________________________________________________________

3/17

B

Connecting an // absolute encoder via an ABE-7CPA11 Telefast adaptor sub-base

• the multiplexing function should not be used : each channel uses a sub-base, to which a single parallel output absolute encoder is connected,

• the encoder frame should be configured as follows :

- code : binary or Gray (depending on the type of encoder),

- header bits : 0,

- data bits : 24 (regardless of the number of encoder data bits),

- status bits : 3,

- significance of error bit : 1 (optional),

- parity : even.

TSX CAY TELEFAST

ABE-7CPA11

Parallel output absolute encoder

ON

OFF

Type of encoder connected

Configuration of encoder via the sub-base

Inhibition of encoder outputs

___________________________________________________________________________

3/18

Setup 3

Connecting to a NUM MDLA speed drive

The NUM 400 V speed drive integrates all of the elements necessary for its operation.

To indicate position it has an output whose signals simulate the operation of an incremental encoder. The TSX CXP 233 / 633 cable accessory (2.5m or 6m) is used for direct connection.

TSX CAY NUM MDLA

B

TSX CXP 223/633

Cable : length :

TSX CXP 213 : 2.5m

TSX CXP 633 : 6m

Note : in this case no encoder supply is necessary.

signal

A+

A-

B+

B-

Z+

Zencoder OK encoder 0V

J2

15

5

14

4

13

3

12

8

J2

___________________________________________________________________________

3/19

B

3.6

Connecting sensors, preactuators and supplies without a speed drive

The TSX CAY 21 / 41 module is fitted with dedicated I/O as standard to ensure full operation of the motion control system, as well as providing the encoder supply.

3.6-1 Signal referencing

The connector is a high density HE 10 type

C B

5 V

10...30 V

I0

1

3

5

I2

I0

7

9

I2 11

2 0 V

4 nc

6 I1

8 I3

10 I1

12 I3

Q0 13

Q0 15

24 V 17

24 V 19

14 nc

16 nc

18 0 V

20 0 V

Encoder supply input

Auxiliary inputs

Auxiliary inputs

Reflex output

Reflex output

Sensor supply input

CAY 21/41

B

CAY 41

C chan. 0.1

chan. 2.3

chan. 0 chan. 1 chan. 0 chan. 1 chan. 0.1

chan. 2 chan. 3 chan. 2 chan. 3 chan. 2.3

TSX CAY 2• module : channels 0 and 1

TSX CAY 4• module : channels o, 1, 2 and 3

TSX CAY 33 module : channels 0, 1 and 2

The auxiliary I/O are assigned to the following functions :

• I0 = reference point cam input,

• I1 = emergency stop input (stop if no current at input),

• I2 = event input,

• I3 = recalibration input,

• Q0 = reflex output (solid state output).

• 0 V = auxiliary inputs and reflex outputs common.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/20

Connection principle for I/O associated with channel 0

I0 5 6

I1

I2 7 8

I3

RP

Evt

LLS

Rec

RLS Em_Stop

Setup 3

B

-

24 V

+

24 V 17 18

0 V

24 V 19 20 0 V

___________________________________________________________________________

3/21

B

3.6-2 TELEFAST connection and wiring accessories

To connect this high-density connector, it is recommended to use the discrete TELEFAST

ABE 7H16R20 prewiring accessory together with the TSX CDP 053 / 503 cable, or the

TSX CDP 301 20-wire 3m cable or the TSX CDP 501 5m cable, with an HE10 connector at one end and flying leads at the other.

Wiring using discrete TELEFAST

TSX CDP 053/503

TELEFAST

ABE-7H16R20

Cable : length :

TSX CDP 053 : 0.5m

TSX CDP 103 : 1m

TSX CDP 203 : 2m

TSX CDP 303 : 3m

TSX CDP 503 : 5m

___________________________________________________________________________

3/22

Setup 3

3.6-3 Signal availability on the TELEFAST screw terminal block

The terminal block below represents that of the ABE-7H16R20. sub-base. The signals are referenced using the TSX CDP 053 / 503 cable.

B

Emergency stop input

(1)

(2)

(1) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base, the position of the jumper defines the polarity of terminals 200 to 215 :

• Jumper in position 1 and 2 : terminals 200 to 215 have positive polarity,

• Jumper in position 3 and 4 : terminals 200 to 215 have negative polarity.

(2) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base it is possible to add an optional ABE-7BV20 bar to create a second sensor common (+ or - selected by the user).

___________________________________________________________________________

3/23

B

Example of connecting sensors on auxiliary inputs and their supply

This connection is made using a TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20 connection sub-base

Connection of auxiliary input sensor 24 VDC supply

+ +

24 VDC 0 VDC

+ +

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

TSX CDP 053 / 503 cable

I0 I1

ABE-7BV20

(- common)

Connection of sensors to auxiliary inputs channel 0 channel 1

I2 I3 Q0 I0 I1 I2 I3

Mechanical contact

Q0

204 104

+

205 105

+

206 106

+

207 107 112 312

+

208 108

+

209 109

+

210 110

+

211 111

+

114 314

Rl Rl

2-wire

PNP prox. sen

204 104 205 105 206 106

+ + +

207 107 112 312

+

208 108 209 109 210 110

+ + +

211 111

+

114 314

Rl Rl

3-wire

PNP prox. sen

204 104

+

304

205 105

+

305

206 106

+

306

207 107

+

307

112 312 208 108

+

308

209 109

+

309

210 110

+

310

211 111

+

311

114 314

Rl Rl

NO

N/O : normally open

NC NO NO NO NC NO NO

3/24

Setup 3

Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector on module

113

114

115

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

109

110

111

112

TELEFAST 20-pin HE10 screw term. blk. connector

(Terminal no.) (Pin no.)

100 1

101

102

103

2

3

4

104

105

106

107

108

7

8

5

6

9

14

15

16

17

18

10

11

12

13

19

20

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

1

2

3

4

200...215

Signal type

+ 5 VDC

- 0 VDC

+ 10…30 VDC nc

Encoder supply reference point cam input I0 (chan. 0) Channel 0 emergency stop input I1 (channel 0) auxiliary event input I2 (channel 0) recalibration input I3 (channel 0) inputs reference point cam input I0 (chan.1) Channel 1 emergency stop input I1 (channel 1) auxiliary event input I2 (channel 1) inputs recalibration input I3 (channel 1)

Reflex output Q 0 (channel 0) nc

Reflex output Q0 (channel 1) nc (1)

Auxiliary input sensor supply

Terminals 200 to 215 at + 24 VDC

Terminals 200 to 215 at - 0 VDC

300...315

Connection of sensor commons to :

+ 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 linked

- 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 linked

Terminals on the optional ABE-7BV20 bar may be used as sensor common, to be wired to the common voltage.

Note (1) nc = not connected

The same wiring is used in the CAY 4• modules for channels 2 and 3 as well as for

3/25

B

B

3.6-4 Connecting via TSX CDP 301 or 501 cable

The use of these cables gives a direct connection to the actuators, preactuators or terminals. The cable consists of twenty 22-gauge (0.34 mm 2 ) wires, and has an HE10 connector at one end and color-coded flying leads at the other.

Cable :

TSX CDP 301 :

TSX CDP 501 : length :

3m

5m preformed cable

1

3

5

7

9 10

11 12

6

8

2

4

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20 brown yellow pink red purple red-blue brown-green white-green gray-brown pink-brown white green gray blue black gray-pink yellow-brown white-yellow white-gray white-pink

+5 VDC

0 VDC

+10...30 VDC nc

I0

I1

I2

I3

I0 chan.0

I1

I2

I3

Q0 nc

Q0 chan.1

nc

+24 VDC

0 VDC

+24 VDC

0 VDC

Correspondance between the wire color and the pin number of the HE10 connector.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/26

Setup 3

3.6-5 Wiring recommendations

Inputs I0, I1, I2 and I3 are fast inputs and must be connected to the sensor by twisted wire if it is a volt-free contact, or by shielded cables if it is a 2 or 3-wire proximity sensor.

This module is fitted as standard with devices to protect against short-circuits or voltage inversions. The module cannot, however, withstand a fault for any length of time and the fuses connected in series with the supplies must give effective protection. The fuses must, therefore, be of the fast blow type with a maximum rating of 1A. The supplies must provide sufficient power to blow the fuses.

Important note : wiring solid state outputs Q0

The actuator connected to output Q0 has its common point at the 0V of the power supply.

If for any reason (poor contact or accidental disconnection) there is a break in the 0V supply to the output amplifier while the 0V of the actuators remains connected to the 0V supply, there may be an output current from the amplifier of a few mA which is sufficient to keep certain low-power actuators energized.

B

+ + – –

+ + – –

I0 I1 channel 0

I2 Q0 I0 I1 chan.1

I2 Q0

204 104

+

205 105

+

206 106

+

112 312 208 108

+

209 109

+

210 110

+

114 314

Rl Rl

Connecting using TELEFAST :

This is the most reliable type of connection provided the actuator common is connected to the bar of common points 200 to 215 (jumper in position 1-2). In this case there can be no break in the module common without breaking the actuator common.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/27

B

Connecting via cable

This type of connection requires very careful attention. Great care must be exercised during wiring, for example, using cable ends at the screw terminals. If required it will be necessary to double up the connections to ensure permanent contacts. When the actuator supply is some distance from the modules and near to the actuator common, the connection between the common and 0V terminal of the module(s) may be accidentally broken.

TSX CAY 21/41

24 V

Q0

0V

17

13

24 V

Q0

0V

15

18

Critical wire

A B

RL RL

Actuator supply

If there is a break in the supply cable segment between A and B, there is a risk of the

RL actuators remaining energized. If possible, double up the 0V power supply connections for the modules.

Using the TSX CDP 301/501 cable :

HE10

TSX CDP 301 / 501 cable white-pink

17 white-gray

19 white-green

13

24 V white-yellow

15

RL 0 V

RL

0VDC gray-brown

18 pink-brown

20

0VDC connection terminal

___________________________________________________________________________

3/28

Setup 3

3.7

Connecting speed drive monitoring signals

3.7-1 Signal referencing

TSX CAY modules integrate standard management of the signals necessary for correct operation of the speed drives. This connector is always used whatever the number of channels on the TSX CAY modules.

B

COM0 nc

VALVAR1

1

3

COM2

5

7

2

4

6

8

VALVAR0

COM1 nc

VALVAR2 nc

VALVAR3

9

11

OK_VAR0

13 14

OK_VAR2

15 16

10 COM3

12 nc

OK_VAR1

OK_VAR3

Speed drive monitoring inputs nc nc

17 18

19 20

0 V

0 V

24 V common

Auxiliary I/O supply

COMx - VALVARx : volt-free contact to enable the speed drive

OK_VARx : speed drive monitoring input

24V - 0V sensor supply

Each channel has a volt-free N/O contact.

Connection principle for speed drive I/O associated with channel 0

HE10 connector

1

COM0

+24 V

2 VALVAR0

Speed drive

ENABLE

13 OK_VAR0

+24 V

OK

To connect the HE10 connector, use the following wiring accessories : discrete

TELEFAST discrete ABE-7H16R20 with TSX CDP 303 or TSX CDP 503 cable.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/29

B

3.7-2 Connecting using the TELEFAST pre-wired system

+ + – –

+ + – –

24VDC supply

(*)

1 P4 0

P4

100 200 201 101 112 301

P4

24 V

REFEN

DROK

GND24

24 V

REFEN

DROK

GND24

For direct connection use a TSX CDP 301 or 501 cable.

See section 3.6-3.

(*) Strap between 1 and 2 : terminals 200 to 215 are at +24 VDC.

103 203 204 104 113 303

___________________________________________________________________________

3/30

Setup 3

3.7-3 Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector

TELEFAST screw term. blk.

(Terminal no.)

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

112

113

114

115

+ 24 VDC

107

108

109

110

111

- 0 VDC

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

1

2

3

4

200...215

300...315

13

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

8

9

20-pin HE10 connector

(Pin no.)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

18

19

20

Signal type

COM0

VALR0 nc

COM1

VALR1 nc

COM2

VALR2 nc

COM3

VALR3 nc

OK_VAR0

OK_VAR1

OK_VAR2

OK_VAR3

Auxiliary input sensor supply

contact closed =

speed drive enabled

ENCoder OK = encoder supply voltage present

Terminals 200 to 215 at + 24 VDC

Terminals 200 to 215 at - 0 VDC

Connection of sensor commons to :

+ 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 are linked

- 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 are linked

Terminals on the optional ABE-7BV20 bar may be used as sensor common

B

Note (1) nc = not connected

___________________________________________________________________________

3/31

B

3.8

Electrical characteristics of the module

3.8-1 General characteristics

Maximum counting frequency :

SSI absolute encoder : CLK transmission frequency incremental encoder :

200KHz

500 kHz x 1

250 kHz x 4

Current drawn on internal 5V

(fan running)

Current drawn on sensor/ preactuator 24V, outputs OFF typical

CAY 2 • 1.1A

CAY 4 • /33 1.5A

CAY 2 • typical

15mA

CAY 4 • /33 30mA max

1.4A

1.8A

max

18mA

36mA

Current drawn by module on

10/30V encoder at 24V (1)

Power dissipated in module

Insulation resistance

Dielectric strength with ground or PLC logic 0V

Operating temperature

Storage temperature

CAY 2 • typical

11 mA

CAY 4 • /33 22mA typical (2)

CAY 2 • 7.2W

CAY 4 • /33 10 W

> 10 MOhms at 500 VDC

1000 V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1 min max

20 mA

40mA max (3)

11.5W

17 W

0 to 60°C

-25°C to 70°C

Relative humidity (without condensation)

Operating altitude

5% to 95%

< 2000 m

Note (1) : Use of an absolute encoder and a single supply at 24V

Note (2) : normal operating conditions : one auxiliary input active per channel (at 24 V)

Note (3) : the "worst possibility" and extreme conditions : all auxiliary inputs active (at 30 V).

The module has a small internal fan to ensure correct operation across the entire temperature range. The fan is activated as necessary by a temperature sensor inside the module (triggered at 45 °C external temperature).

It is possible to use TSX FAN•• external ventilation units if the temperature conditions around the module exceed the parameters above.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/32

Setup 3

3.8-2 Characteristics of the analog outputs

Parameters

Range

Actual range

Resolution

Value of LSB

Max. current from one output

Fallback value

Monotonicity

Differential linearity

Accuracy

Dielectric strength between channels and machine ground

Value

±

10.24

±

10.24

13 bits + sign

1.25

1.5

max

±

1

100

±

2

0.5

1000VAC

Unit

V

V mV mA

LSB

%

LSB

% F.S.

Each output is protected against short-circuits and overloads. If a fault occurs a signal is sent to the CPU via a status word. A short-circuit on these outputs will not damage the module.

The absence of the connector on the analog output is not checked.

B

3.8-3 Characteristics of the counter inputs

Equivalent circuit diagram : example of input A

220

A+

10nF

190

Line check

Ainput A

___________________________________________________________________________

3/33

B

Characteristics

Electrical characteristics

Nominal voltage

Voltage limits

Nominal current

Input impedance (at 5 V)

Voltage at "On" state

Current at "On" state

Voltage at "Off" state

Current at "Off" state

Encoder / sensor voltage return check

Symbol

Un

U1

In

Re

Uon

Ion

Uoff

Ioff

Compatibility of inputs A, B and Z :

RS 422 / RS 485 / 7 mA current loop line driver outputs. Differential line check on each input.

A+ 220

A-

Line check

Value

±5

±5.5

±18

270

>=+2.4

> +3.7

<1,2

<1

Presence check

Unit

V

V mA

Ohms

V mA

V mA

Totem pole complementary outputs, 5V supply.

Differential line check on each input.

A+ 220

A-

Line check

___________________________________________________________________________

3/34

Setup 3

B

Encoder + power supply return input characteristics :

Ie encoder + power supply return

0 V

Electrical characteristics

Voltage at "On" state (OK)

Voltage limits

Input current (2.5 < Uok < 30)

Symbol

Uok

Umax

Imax

Value

> 2.5

30

3

The presence of the encoder will be detected as long as the input is active.

Unit

V

V mA

___________________________________________________________________________

3/35

B

3.8-4 Characteristics of auxiliary inputs

The auxiliary inputs are supplied at 24V from a supply provided via the connector.

Equivalent circuit diagram :

24 V sensors / preactuators 24V

I3

I2

I1

Ie

Ie

I0

Voltage check

+

24 V

-

0 V sensors / preactuators 0V

Electrical characteristics

Nominal voltage

Voltage limits (1)

(ripple included)

Nominal current

Input impedance (at Unom)

Voltage at "On" state

Current at Uon (11V)

Voltage at "Off" state

Current at "Off" state

Immunity Off --> On (for I0, I2 and I3)

EVT input (on G07)

(for I1)

Immunity Off --> On (for I0, I2 and I3)

(for I1)

Dielectric strength with ground

IEC compatibility with sensors

3-wire / 2-wire proximity sensor compatibility

Input type

Logic type

Symbol

Un

U1

Utemp (*)

In

Re

Uon

Ion

Uoff

Value

24

19 to 30

34

8

3

>=11

>6

<5

Ioff ton

<2

0.1 to 0.2

1 to 4 ton 0.1 to 0.2

1 to 4 incremental encoder : 1

µ s absolute encoder : < 400

µ s

1500V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1min type 2 all proximity sensors operating at 24VDC

Current sink

Positive (sink) mA ms ms ms ms

Unit

V

V

V mA

KOhms

V mA

V

3/36

Setup 3

3.8-5 Characteristics of the reflex outputs Q0

Each position control channel has an output controlled by the processor which is used for the integrated control of one function of the axis being controlled. For example, control of braking between two movements, safety, etc. This is a solid state output with the load common at the sensor / preactuator 0V voltage. It is protected against overloads and shortcircuits, and fault information is provided to the processor if a fault occurs.

B sensor/preact.

sensor monitor circuit short-circuit fault monitor circuit

Command

+

Electrical characteristics

Nominal voltage

Voltage limits

Max for 1 hour / 24 hrs (Utemp)*

Nominal current

Max voltage drop when "On"

Leakage current

Max current at 30V and at 34V

Switching time

Dielectric strength with ground

Compatible with DC inputs

IEC 1131 compatibility

Short-circuit monitoring on each channel

24 V

Q0

Value

24

19 to 30

34

500

< 1

< 0.3

625

<500

1500V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1min

All positive logic inputs where input resistance is less than 15KOhms yes

One signalling bit per channel

Unit

V

V

V mA

V mA mA

µ s

___________________________________________________________________________

3/37

B

Electrical characteristics

Reactivation :

• by application program

• automatic

Protection against overloads and short-circuits

Protection against channel overvoltages

Protection against reverse polarity

Power of filament lamp

Value

One bit per channel written by program

By current limiter and thermal tripping (0.7 < Id < 2 A)

Zener diode between outputs and +24V

By reverse-mounted diode on the supply

10 W (max)

Note

Utemp is the maximum voltage which can be applied to the module for 1 hour in any 24-hour period.

3.8-6 Monitoring the sensor / preactuator voltage

The module monitors the supply to the actuators / preactuators so that it can signal to the processor any malfunction which may cause incorrect operation.

Electrical characteristics

Voltage at OK state

Voltage at fault state

Immunity OK ---> Fault

Immunity Fault---> OK

Accept fault

Accept no fault

Symbol

Uok

Udef

Im.off

Im.on

Toff

Ton

Value

>18

<14

>1

>1

<10

<10

Unit

V

V ms ms ms ms

___________________________________________________________________________

3/38

Setup 3

3.8-7 Characteristics of the speed drive monitoring inputs

The speed drive monitoring auxiliary inputs have the same supply as the auxiliary

I/O. The module does not monitor this supply, but any voltage drop below 5V on a

CTRL_VAR input may signal a speed drive fault to the processor.

B

I3

OK_VAR3

I2

OK_VAR2

I1

OK_VAR1

I0 OK_VAR0

+

24 V

-

0V speed drive

Electrical characteristics

Nominal voltage

Voltage limits (1)

(ripple included)

Nominal current

Input impedance (at Un)

Voltage at OK state

Current at Uon (11V)

Voltage at "Fault" state

Current at "Fault" state

Immunity OK --> Fault

Immunity Fault-->OK

Dielectric strength with ground

IEC 1131 compatibility with sensors

Logic type

Symbol

Un

U1

Utemp (*)

In

Re

Uon

Ion

Uoff

Ioff toff ton

Value

24

19 to 30

34

8

3

>=11

>3,5

<5

<1.5

1 to 4

1 to 4

1500V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1min type 1

Positive (sink)

(*) Utemp : maximum permitted voltage for 1 hour in any 24-hour period.

Unit

V

V

V mA

KOhms

V mA

V mA ms ms

___________________________________________________________________________

3/39

B

3.8-8 Characteristics of the relay outputs

Each channel has one relay output.

Electrical characteristics

DC operating voltage

Permissible DC switching current

30V on resistive load

Permissible minimum load

Switching time

Dielectric strength :

• between contacts and between channels

• between contacts and ground

COMx

VALVARx

Value

5 to 30

200

1V / 1mA

<5

300VAC for 1min

1000VAC for 1 min

Unit

V mA ms

___________________________________________________________________________

3/40

Setup 3

3.9

Module display

TSX CAY 21/41 modules have indicator lamps displaying the status of the module and the channels.

• Module status lamps (RUN, ERR, I/O)

The state of the three lamps on the front panel (off, flashing or on) indicates the module operating mode :

- RUN lamp : signals module operating state

- ERR lamp : signals an internal module fault

- I/O lamp : signals an external fault

• Channel status lamps (CH i

)

TSX CAY 21/41 modules have 2 or 4 indicator lamps to display and diagnose the state of each channel.

These lamps are green.

CH2

CH3 CH3 CH1

RUN ERR

I / O I/O

B

State On Flashing Off

Lamps

RUN Normal operation — Module faulty or off

No fault ERR

I/O

Internal fault module failure

External fault

• wiring fault

• encoder power supply and 10 / 30V power supply fault

• absolute encoder fault (*)

Communication fault

Application absent, invalid or execution fault

— No fault

CHi

TSX CAY 4 • /33 :

CH0 and CH1

TSX CAY 41 :

CH0, CH1, CH2,

CH3

Channel is operational Channel is operating Channel not operating.

incorrectly because of : No configuration or

• external fault,

• communication fault,

• a process fault.

incorrect configuration.

Application fault

• configuration refused

• SMOVE function refused

___________________________________________________________________________

3/41

B

___________________________________________________________________________

3/42

4 Appendix

4.1

Appendix

All SSI absolute encoders, 16 < Number of data bits < 25, Gray or binary code are compatible with TSX CAY modules. For example :

IVO brandname

• GM 400 0 10 11 01

24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 25 data bits, 0 status bit, no parity.

• GM 401 1 30 R20 20 00

24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 25 data bits, 1 status bit, even parity.

Hengstler brandname

• RA58-M/1212

24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 24 data bits, 1 status bit, no parity.

Stegmann brandname

• AG 661 01

24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 24 data bits, 0 status bit, no parity.

IDEACOD brandname

• SHM506S 428R / 4096 / 8192 / 26

11-30 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 25 data bits, 0 status bit, no parity.

B

___________________________________________________________________________

4/1

B

___________________________________________________________________________

4/2

Installation

Stepper motor control

Contents

Part C

C

Section

1 Presentation

1.1

Introduction

1.1-1 Stepper motor axis control range

1.1-2 Presentation

1.1-3 Setup software

1.2

Physical description

2 Functions

2.1

Functions

2.1-1 Configuring the axes

2.1-2 Adjusting the axes

2.1-3 Debugging

3 Setup

3.1

Setup

3.1-1 Basic configuration required

3.1-2 Installation procedure

3.1-3 General wiring instructions

3.2

Choice of translator

3.2-1 I/O interfaces

3.2-2 Translator interface power supply

3.2-3 Shielding

3.3

Connecting translator signals

3.3-1 Signal referencing

3.3-2 Connecting a translator using an RS 422/485 interface

3.3-3 Connecting a translator using an NPN open collector interface

Page

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2

1/3

3/1

3/1

3/1

3/1

3/2<